2012 tribeca - dealer eprocesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../subaru/2012-tribeca.pdf · 2015. 8....

2012Tribeca

Quick Reference Guide

Information Provided by:

Complete U.S. specifications and illustrations may

not have been available at time of publication.

Specifications are based on the latest product

information available at time of publication. Some

images shown are for illustration purposes only.

Some equipment shown may be optional at

extra cost. Specific options may be available

only in combination with other options. Specific

combinations of equipment or features may vary

from time to time and by geographic area. Certain

accessories and equipment may not be available at

the time of publication.

This Quick Reference Guide applies to all Tribeca

models. Therefore, some explanations may be for

equipment not installed on your vehicle. Subaru

of America, Inc., reserves the right to change or

discontinue at any time, without notice, prices,

colors, materials, equipment, accessories,

specifications, models and packages without

incurring any obligation to make the same or

similar changes on vehicles previously sold. Colors

shown may vary due to reproduction process.

For detailed operating and safety information,

please consult the Owner’s Manual.

Subaru, Outback, Legacy, Forester, Impreza,

WRX, WRX/STI, BOXER, SI-DRIVE, Lineartronic,

XM and Sirius are registered trademarks.

All rights reserved. Contents may not be reprinted or

electronically reproduced in whole or in part without

prior written approval of Subaru of America, Inc.

© 2011 Subaru of America, Inc.


Table of Contents

Getting Started

Instrument Panel

Gauges

Personalize

Controls

While Operating

Safety/In Case of Emergency

Additional Information

2 - 3

4 - 5

6 - 7

8 - 9

10 - 17

18 - 19

20 - 21

22 - 23


2

Remote Keyless Entry

Lock/Arm

and rear gate and activate

the security alarm.

rear gate are not fully closed,

an electronic chirp will

sound five times and the

hazard lights will flash five

times to alert you that the

doors or the rear gate are

not properly closed.

function, press three times

(within five seconds). If you

are within 30 feet of the

vehicle, the horn will sound

one time and the hazard

lights will flash three times.

Unlock/Disarm

the driver’s door.

seconds) to unlock all doors.

button is pressed, the dome

and map lights will illuminate

if the dome light switch is in

the middle position.

Unlocking the

Rear Gate

Press to unlock the rear gate.

An electronic chirp will sound

twice and the hazard lights will

flash twice.

Panic Alarm

will sound and the hazard

lights will flash.

remote to deactivate.

Immobilizer

When the security alarm is

activated, the immobilizer

interrupts the starter motor

to prevent an intruder from

starting your vehicle without

a registered key.


3

Gettin

g

Sta

rted

Instru

ment

Panel

Gauges

Pers

onaliz

eC

ontro

lsW

hile

O

pera

ting

Safe

ty / In

Case

of E

merg

ency

Ad

ditio

nal

Info

rmatio

n

3

Gettin

g

Sta

rted

Seating

Power Driver’s Seat:

Memory (if equipped)

You can memorize two seat positions. To memorize seat positions:

3.

4. Within five seconds after pressing the

A buzzer will sound one time to inform

you that the memorizing is finished.

To move the seat to a memorized position

The seat will move to the stored position.

Power Driver Seat:

8-way Adjust

1. Forward/Backward, Angle and Height Move the switch toward the front or rear

to move the seat forward or backward.

Pull the switch up or push down on the

front of the switch to adjust the angle

of the seat cushion. Pulling the switch

straight up or pushing the switch straight

down will adjust the height of the entire

seat cushion.

2. Seatback

Move the switch in the corresponding

direction to adjust the angle of

the seatback.

Midway Stopping Feature

for 2nd Row Seats The 2nd row seats are equipped with

a midway stopping feature on the

sliding mechanism. Release the midway

stopping feature by pushing the lever

located on the outside of the 2nd row

seat forward and slide the seat.

Ins

Itru

ment

Panel

Gau

Gges

Per

Psonaliliz

eC

on

Ctrot

lslW

hi

While

l

Op

era

ting

Saf

Sfe

tyt / /In

I

Cas

Ce

of E

merg

ency

Ad

dA

dd

itiiio

nal l

Info

rmatio

n

33

Gettin

gG

ettin

gS

tarte

dS

tarte

d

s.

e

m

ion

n.

Gettin

g

Sta

rted

1

2

34


4

Instrument Panel

pg. 10 pg. 17pg. 6-7pg. 11 pg. 8pg. 10 pg. 16


5

Gettin

g

Sta

rted

Instru

ment

Panel

Gauges

Pers

onaliz

eC

ontro

lsW

hile

O

pera

ting

Safe

ty / In

Case

of E

merg

ency

Ad

ditio

nal

Info

rmatio

n

5

Get

Gttinti

gS

tarte

dIn

stru

ment

Panel

Gau

Gges

Per

Psonaliliz

eC

on

Ctrot

lslW

hi

While

l

Op

era

ting

Saf

Sfe

tyt / /In

I

Cas

Ce

of E

merg

ency

Ad

dA

dd

itiiio

nal l

Info

rmatio

n

55

pg. 12-13 pg. 14-15pg. 16 pg. 11

Instru

ment

Panel


6

Gauges Immediate Attention

Trip meter A/B selection and trip

meter reset knob

Tachometer

Temperature Gauge

Caution Informational

Seatbelt warning

Front passenger

seatbelt warning

SRS airbag system

Security indicator light

Door open

Charge warning

Oil pressure warning

Brake system

Rear Differential oil

temperature warning

High beam indicator light

AT OIL TEMP warning

ABS warning

Low fuel

All-Wheel Drive warning


7

Gettin

g

Sta

rted

Instru

ment

Panel

Gauges

Pers

onaliz

eC

ontro

lsW

hile

O

pera

ting

Safe

ty / In

Case

of E

merg

ency

Ad

ditio

nal

Info

rmatio

n

7

Get

Gttinti

gS

tarte

dIn

sI

trum

ent

Panel

Gauges

Per

Psonaliliz

eC

on

Ctrot

lslW

hi

While

l

Op

era

ting

Saf

Sfe

tyt / /In

I

Cas

Ce

of E

merg

ency

Ad

dA

dd

itiiio

nal l

Info

rmatio

n

Gauges

Trip meter and odometer

Speedometer

Fuel Gauge

Vehicle Dynamics

Control/Vehicle Dynamics

Control operation

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF

CHECK ENGINE /

Malfunction indicator

Tire pressure warning light

Front passenger frontal

airbag ON

Front passenger frontal

airbag OFF

Low windshield

washer fluid

Turn signals

Front fog light indicator

light (if equipped)

Headlight indicator light

Cruise Control

indicator light

Cruise control set

indicator light

SPORT mode


8

Personalize

Steering Column

Push the lever down firmly to adjust the height

and lengthwise position of the column. Firmly

push the lever back up to lock the column in

place. Do not adjust while driving.

Power Exterior Mirrors

the right-hand mirror. Move the knob in the

direction you want to move the mirror, then

return the knob to the neutral/center position.

The mirrors can also be adjusted manually.

HomeLink® (if equipped)

Three buttons on the driver’s side sun visor

control indoor or outdoor devices (such as a

garage door) from inside your vehicle.


9

Gettin

g

Sta

rted

Instru

ment

Panel

Gauges

Pers

onaliz

eC

ontro

lsW

hile

O

pera

ting

Safe

ty / In

Case

of E

merg

ency

Ad

ditio

nal

Info

rmatio

n

9

Get

Gttinti

gS

tarte

dIn

sI

trum

ent

Panel

Gau

Gges

Pers

onaliz

eC

on

Ctrot

lslW

hi

While

l

Op

era

ting

Saf

Sfe

tyt / /In

I

Cas

Ce

of E

merg

ency

Ad

dA

dd

itiiio

nal l

Info

rmatio

n

Perso

nalize

Power Moonroof

(if equipped)

With the moonroof in the fully closed

position, press the switch 2 to tilt the

rear of the moonroof up. Press and hold

the switch 1 to lower the moonroof.

Press the switch 4 to fully open the

moonroof. Press the switch 3 to close

the moonroof. To stop the moonroof

in a midway position while opening or

closing, momentarily press the switch

to the 4 side or 3 side.

Rear Seat Entertainment

System (if equipped)

You can enjoy watching movies or

listening to music when a movie DVD or

music CD is inserted into the rear seat

entertainment system. You can operate

the rear seat entertainment system

by the remote control. You can play a

video or game when a video camera

or a video machine is connected to the

auxiliary input jacks, located on the left

rear quarter panel across from the 3rd

row seats. You can listen to audio by

using the wireless headphones that are

included with the system.

1

2

3

4


10

Controls

When the dial is turned

downward, illumination

becomes dim. When the

dial is turned upward,

illumination becomes bright.

When the dial is fully turned

upward while the light switch

is on, instrument panel

illumination becomes bright.

Parking Light Switch

The switch is located on the top of the

steering column. Press the switch to turn

the lights on or off. This control operates

the parking lights, rear side marker lights,

tail lights and license plate lights when the

ignition is off.

Light Controls

Turns on instrument panel lights,

tail lights, parking lights and license

plate lights.

Turns on headlights,

instrument panel

illumination, parking

lights, taillights and

license plate lights.

Turns on

fog lights

(if equipped).

Push up for right

turn signal.

Push down for

left turn signal.

ON

OFF


11

Gettin

g

Sta

rted

Instru

ment

Panel

Gauges

Pers

onaliz

eC

ontro

lsW

hile

O

pera

ting

Safe

ty / In

Case

of E

merg

ency

Ad

ditio

nal

Info

rmatio

n

11

Get

Gttinti

gS

tarte

dIn

sI

trum

ent

Panel

Gau

Gges

Per

Psonaliliz

eC

ontro

lsW

hi

While

l

Op

era

ting

Saf

Sfe

tyt / /In

I

Cas

Ce

of E

merg

ency

Ad

dA

dd

itiiio

nal l

Info

rmatio

n

Contro

ls

Windshield Wipers

To turn the wipers on, press the

wiper control lever down one level

for intermittent, two levels for low, or

three levels for high speed. Return the

wipers. For a single wipe/mist, pull the

lever toward you. To spray washer fluid

spray, press the washer button at the

end of the wiper control lever.

To operate the rear wiper, turn the

knob on the end of the control lever

forward to intermittent, continuous,

or wash position. Turn the end of the

lever backward for wash operation

when the rear wiper is not in use.

When the automatic transmission is

placed in reverse, the rear wiper will

operate continuously even when the

Daytime Running Lights

Daytime running lights are standard

on your vehicle. A reduced brightness

high beam will be automatically turned

on by the daytime running light system

when the engine has started and the

parking brake is fully released and the

position. You must always switch on

your headlights when it’s dark outside

by turning the light switch to the

Windshield Wiper De-Icer

Remove the

snow from your

windshield

before starting

this system.

To begin de-icing, push the button (the

light will illuminate while in operation).

The de-icing system automatically

shuts off after about 15 minutes. If

more time is required, push the button

to reactivate the de-icer.

1

2

3

INT.

LOW

HIGH

OFF


12

Controls

AUTOMATIC

CLIMATE CONTROL

1. Rear A/C Cooling A fan speed control dial is located on the

back of the center console. Turn the dial

to select one of four (0-4) fan speeds.

When the front passenger air conditioner

is operating, cool air comes from vents

on the ceiling. When the front passenger

air conditioner is off, room temperature air

comes from the vents.

2. Temperature Control Separate temperature settings can be

made for the driver’s side and passenger’s

side by adjusting the dials appropriately.

Turn the dial clockwise and release to

increase the temperature by one degree.

Turn the dial counterclockwise and release

to reduce the temperature by one degree.

3. Heated Seats

The left button is for the driver’s seat

and the right button is for the front

passenger’s seat. To warm the seats,

press the appropriate button. Adjust the

temperature level by pressing the button.

Indicator lights beside the button show the

temperature level. To turn off, press the

button a few times until all indicator lights

go off or keep the button pressed for two

more seconds.

4. Defroster Button Push the button to defrost or dehumidify

the windshield and front door windows.

5. Automatic On and Off This system automatically controls

outlet air temperature, fan speed, air

flow distribution, air inlet control, and air

conditioner compressor operation. Press

2

3

4

5

1


13

Gettin

g

Sta

rted

Instru

ment

Panel

Gauges

Pers

onaliz

eC

ontro

lsW

hile

O

pera

ting

Safe

ty / In

Case

of E

merg

ency

Ad

ditio

nal

Info

rmatio

n

13

Get

Gttinti

gS

tarte

dIn

sI

trum

ent

Panel

Gau

Gges

Per

Psonaliliz

eC

ontro

lsW

hi

While

l

Op

era

ting

Saf

Sfe

tyt / /In

I

Cas

Ce

of E

merg

ency

Ad

dA

dd

itiiio

nal l

Info

rmatio

n

Contro

ls

6. Recirculated/Outside Air Press the air inlet selection button to

prevent outside air from being drawn

into the passenger compartment.

Press the button again to allow

outside air into the compartment.

TO PREVENT WINDSHIELD

FOGGING, DO NOT REMAIN IN THE

RECIRCULATED MODE FOR ANY

EXTENDED PERIOD OF TIME.

7. Fan Speed Turn the fan speed control dial to

select one of six fan speeds. Turn the

dial clockwise to increase fan speed;

turn it counterclockwise to decrease.

Fan speed level is shown on the

button to automatically change the

fan speed to correspond with various

temperature conditions.

8. Air Flow

the desired air flow mode: ventilation,

bi-level, heat or heat-defrost will

be displayed on the fan speed

control dial.

9. Rear Window Defogger To defog the rear window and exterior

mirrors, press the rear window

defogger button. The defogger will

automatically shut off in about 15

minutes. To manually shut it off, press

the button again.

10. Air Conditioning

air conditioning. Press it again to turn

the air conditioning off.

3

5 6 8

9

10

7


14

Controls

7

Audio Controls

Radio Functions

1. Power/Volume Control

off; turn the knob to control volume.

2. Bass, Treble, Balance, Fader

will cycle you through Volume, Bass,

Midrange, Treble, Fade, or Balance. Use

desired tone or mode.

3. FM/AM

Push to choose FM1, FM2 or

AM reception.

4. Tune/Track

Press the up arrow to increase the tuning

frequency; press the down arrow to

decrease it.

5. Seek

or lowest frequency.

6. Presets

You can save up to six favorite stations for

each band – FM1, FM2, and AM. Select

a frequency and press one of the preset

buttons until a confirmation beep is heard.

7. Satellite Radio (if equipped) You can hear satellite radio programs

satellite radio service after your trial

period, it is necessary to enter into a

separate contract with the satellite

radio provider.

CD Player Functions

8. Load (six-disc player)

where you want to insert a disc. When the

The disc will automatically be drawn in

and will begin play at the first track.

118

14

12 5

4

2

1513

9

1

310

6


15

Gettin

g

Sta

rted

Instru

ment

Panel

Gauges

Pers

onaliz

eC

ontro

lsW

hile

O

pera

ting

Safe

ty / In

Case

of E

merg

ency

Ad

ditio

nal

Info

rmatio

n

15

Get

Gttinti

gS

tarte

dIn

sI

trum

ent

Panel

Gau

Gges

Per

Psonaliliz

eC

ontro

lsW

hi

While

l

Op

era

ting

Saf

Sfe

tyt / /In

I

Cas

Ce

of E

merg

ency

Ad

dA

dd

itiiio

nal l

Info

rmatio

n

Contro

ls

9. Load Disc (single disc player) Insert a disc into the slot. The CD

will automatically be drawn in and

will begin play at the first track.

10. Play CD (six-disc player)

(1-6) and playback will begin.

11. Eject Press the button to eject

the disc.

12. Forward/Reverse

of the next track; press the down

arrow to skip to the beginning of

the current track. Press the

down arrow again to go to the

previous selection.

Fast Forward/Fast Reverse

Press and hold the up arrow to

fast forward. Release the button

to stop. To fast reverse, press and

hold the down arrow; release the

button to stop.

13. Repeat In the single disc player: Press

selection. Press again to cancel.

In the six-disc player: Press

selection. Press again to repeat all

tracks in the current selected CD.

Press again to cancel.

14. Random

During playback, press and hold

in random order.

15. Scan

previewing the first 10 seconds

of each track on the disc. Normal

playback will resume after all

tracks have been scanned. Press

scanning and listen to the track

being previewed.

To Use Your MP3/WMA Player with formatted MP3 files (without navigation system)*

Display

seconds or longer during playback

to change the display to show the file

title, play time, and folder title.

Page Scroll

Press again for less than 0.5

seconds to scroll through the title, 15

characters at a time. The display is

designed to show titles for up to three

pages (64 characters).

Folder Selection

select the next folder. Press the down

arrow to go back to the first music file.

Quickly press the down arrow again to

go back to the previous folder.

*For vehicles equipped with the

navigation system, please consult the

Tribeca Navigation Owner’s Manual.


16

Controls

to increase or

reduce volume.

Auxiliary Input Jack

(Inside center console) The auxiliary input

jack is located inside the console box. You

can connect a portable music device to the

jack and hear music stored in the portable

device through the vehicle speakers. When

a portable music device is connected to the

auxiliary input jack inside the console box,

you cannot hear sound from the Rear Seat

Entertainment through the audio.

Rear Seat Entertainment

AUX (if equipped) The rear seat entertainment aux is located

on the driver’s side rear interior panel. When

other portable devices are connected to

the auxiliary input jacks and the vehicle is

equipped with a Rear Seat Entertainment

system, it is possible to play the sound from

each device through the speakers. Each

changes the device selected for audio

output to the next one in the sequence.

Steering Wheel Audio Controls (if equipped)

desired audio mode – FM,

AM, SAT, CD, AUX, MEDIA.

the switch up or down to find the desired

frequency. In CD mode, push the switch up

or down to skip forward or back a track.

the sound.


Decrease speed

to the desired speed, and release. To

decrease the speed using the brake

pedal, press the pedal to release

cruise control temporarily. When the

speed decreases to the desired rate,

push the control lever down to the

17

Gettin

g

Sta

rted

Instru

ment

Panel

Gauges

Pers

onaliz

eC

ontro

lsW

hile

O

pera

ting

Safe

ty / In

Case

of E

merg

ency

Ad

ditio

nal

Info

rmatio

n

17

Get

Gttinti

gS

tarte

dIn

sI

trum

ent

Panel

Gau

Gges

Per

Psonaliliz

eC

ontro

lsW

hi

While

l

Op

era

ting

Saf

Sfe

tyt / /In

I

Cas

Ce

of E

merg

ency

Ad

dA

dd

itiiio

nal l

Info

rmatio

n

Contro

lsCruise Control

Resume

Push the control lever

Shut Off To deactivate cruise control, push the

the vehicle is stopped, turn the

Set

located on the end of the control

light on the instrument panel will

turn on. Press the accelerator

pedal until your vehicle reaches

the desired speed. Push the

accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will

maintain the desired speed.

Temporary Cancel There are two ways to temporarily cancel

cruise control: depress the brake pedal or

Increase speed

Push the control lever up to the

your vehicle reaches the desired

speed, and release. To increase

speed using the accelerator pedal,

press the pedal until you reach the

desired speed. Push the control

position to set the speed.


1818

While Operating

Ultimate Control The automatic transmission gives you

ultimate control with five forward speeds,

one reverse speed, and a manual mode.

Switch to the optional AT Shift mode when

you need that extra boost for uphill driving.

Normal Mode

position, the transmission is in normal

shift mode. The shift position indicator

transmission automatically shifts into a

suitable gear from 1st to 5th.

Sport Mode

Moving the selector lever left into the manual

into Sport mode. The shift position indicator

in the meter cluster. In the Sport mode,

the transmission automatically shifts from

1st to 5th, but shifts up at higher engine

revolutions than in normal mode.

Manual Mode

makes the transmission change into Manual

mode. When the selector lever is moved

higher gear. When the selector lever is

next lower gear. The shift position indicator

in the instrument cluster shows the selected

gear position. In Manual mode, you can

select your desired gear position to obtain

necessary acceleration and engine braking.

vehicle stops enables the vehicle to start in

2nd gear.

1. Upshifting: Shift to the next higher gear (in the 1st – 5th

gear range) by pushing the selector lever

2. Downshifting: Shift to the next lower gear (in the 5th – 1st

gear range) by pushing the selector lever

3. Deselect Manual Mode: Exit Manual mode by returning the selector

manual gate. Normal mode is now selected.

When Manual Shifting Operation Is Possible: Arrow-shaped lights in the instrument panel

show whether an upshift is possible and

whether a downshift is possible.

BOTH ARROWS ARE ON: Upshifting and

downshifting are both possible.

UP ARROW ONLY IS ON: Only upshifting

is possible.

DOWN ARROW ONLY IS ON: Only

downshifting is possible.

Automatic Shift Mode

1

3

2


19

Gettin

g

Sta

rted

Instru

ment

Panel

Gauges

Pers

onaliz

eC

ontro

lsW

hile

O

pera

ting

Safe

ty / In

Case

of E

merg

ency

Ad

ditio

nal

Info

rmatio

n

Vehicles with Navigation system have

a rear view camera. When the selector

position, the rear view is shown on the

display. Camera footage is live, real time

as you see it on the rear view mirror.

Also, width of the vehicle and distance

from the vehicle are indicated as lines in

the image on the display.

1. Width of the vehicle: Oblique

vertical lines

2. Approx. 6.5-10 feet from the rear

bumper: Green horizontal line

3. Approx. 3 feet from the rear bumper:

Yellow horizontal line

4. Approx. 1.5 feet from the rear

bumper: Red horizontal line

To be safe, always check around and

behind the vehicle with your eyes first

before backing up. Never rely upon the

rear view monitor.

19

Get

Gttinti

gS

tarte

dIn

sI

trum

ent

Panel

Gau

Gges

Per

Psonaliliz

eC

on

Ctrot

lslW

hile

O

pera

ting

Saf

Sfe

tyt / /In

I

Cas

Ce

of E

merg

ency

Ad

dA

dd

itiiio

nal l

Info

rmatio

n

While

Opera

ting

Rear View Monitor Navigation (if equipped)

1 1

3

4

2

Fuel Door

Lid Release

Found on the floor next to

the driver’s seat. To open

the fuel door lid, pull the

lever up and release.


2020

Safety / In Case of Emergency

Child Restraint System

For maximum safety, first carefully read and follow the instructions from the device

manufacturer to properly install the restraint system inside your vehicle. Use the appropriate

seatbelts or anchorages provided in your vehicle. Please refer to your Owner’s Manual for the

proper installation instructions. Children age 12 and under must be properly restrained in the

rear seat at all times.

Child Safety Locks

The locks are located on the rear inside edge of the rear doors. While the lever is in the

locked position, the rear doors of the vehicle cannot be opened from the inside.

FPO


21

Gettin

g

Sta

rted

Instru

ment

Panel

Gauges

Pers

onaliz

eC

ontro

lsW

hile

O

pera

ting

Safe

ty / In

Case

of E

merg

ency

Ad

ditio

nal

Info

rmatio

n

21

Get

Gttinti

gS

tarte

dIn

sI

trum

ent

Panel

Gau

Gges

Per

Psonaliliz

eC

on

Ctrot

lslW

hi

While

l

Op

era

ting

Safe

ty / In

Cassse

e

eee

e

of E

merg

ency

cy

cyy

Ad

dA

dd

itiiio

nal l

Info

rmatio

n

Safe

ty / In

Case

of

Em

erg

en

cy

Location of Spare Tire and Jack

Your vehicle is equipped with a temporary spare tire, located under the rear of the

vehicle. The jack and necessary tools to release the spare from the vehicle are located in

the storage tray, under the cargo floorboard. To remove the spare tire, remove the cargo

floorboard and remove the access hole plugs located on the body, then insert the tool

through the access hole and turn it counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench. Store

the flat tire in the spare tire carrier.

Towing Your All-Wheel Drive Vehicle

Because all-wheel drive distributes engine power to all four wheels, improper

towing will severely damage your AWD system. A flatbed truck is the only way

to properly transport your AWD vehicle. If towing is necessary, it is best done by

your Subaru dealer or a commercial towing service.

Subaru Roadside Assistance

Subaru Roadside Assistance is free and standard on every 2011 Subaru vehicle.

Coverage is automatic; there are no forms to complete. Subaru Roadside

Assistance is available anytime during the 3-year/36,000-mile Subaru Limited

Warranty, whichever comes first.* A Subaru Roadside Assistance decal has

been affixed to the driver’s door window.

Subaru Roadside Assistance: 1-800-261-2155

Exclusions

Specifically excluded from Subaru Roadside Assistance coverage are service

requests or claims resulting from: accidents, vandalism, acts of God, violation of

any laws, or vehicle modifications not recommended by the manufacturer.

*See your dealer for details


22

Additional Information

MY.SUBARU.COM

Your Subaru vehicle comes with a unique online resource that helps make your ownership

experience more convenient and enjoyable. My.Subaru.com is a website that you can

personalize and offers useful features and content that makes it easy for you to manage your

vehicle care and enjoy all the benefits of Subaru ownership. Log on to My.Subaru.com to

access features such as: automated service history, e-mail maintenance reminders, online

Owner’s Manual, warranty information, maintenance schedules and much more...

Access your site today @ My.Subaru.com


23

Gettin

g

Sta

rted

Instru

ment

Panel

Gauges

Pers

onaliz

eC

ontro

lsW

hile

O

pera

ting

Safe

ty / In

Case

of E

merg

ency

Ad

ditio

nal

Info

rmatio

n

23

Get

Gttinti

gS

tarte

dIn

sI

trum

ent

Panel

Gau

Gges

Per

Psonaliliz

eC

on

Ctrot

lslW

hi

While

l

Op

era

ting

Saf

Sfe

tyt / /In

I

Cas

Ceeeee

e

of E

merg

ency

Ad

ditio

nal

Info

rmatio

n

Additio

nal

Info

rmatio

n

Fuel Use regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI or higher.

Fuel Capacity

panel, approximately 2.6 U.S. gallons of fuel remain.

engine light on the instrument panel may stay on due

to a missing or loose fuel filler cap (the cap should be

tightened until a click is heard).

Engine Oil Use only the following oils:

ILSAC certification mark (Starburst mark).

Engine Oil Capacity


Notes

24


Subaru Delivery Checklist

��

��

��

��

��

��

�

�

�

��

��

�

�

�

��

�NEW OWNER SIGNATURE

SALES CONSULTANT SIGNATURE

SALES MANAGER SIGNATURE

Fold back and remove this checklist from the QRG. Place this completed checklist in the deal jacket for future reference. Additional copies of this checklist can be made by photocopying.

Owner Information

VEHICLE ID #

DELIVERY DATE

OWNER NAME

OWNER NAME

Owner Resources & Warranty

Present the Subaru Owner’s Manual & Quick Reference Guide (detailed review in “Operation & Controls” section)

Review Subaru Roadside Assistance, Owner Cards & Provide Toll-Free Number 1-800-261-2155

Explain 3/36 BASIC Warranty / 5/60 Powertrain Warranty / Explain Wear Items & Adjustments / PZEV (if applicable) / Review Rust Perforation Warranty / Tire Warranty

Review Service & Maintenance Schedules & Terms Explain Normal vs. Extreme Schedules (if applicable)

Review New Owner’s MY.SUBARU.COM Website

Review The Subaru Mastercard Program from CHASE & Explain The Card Benefits

Explain Dealership’s New Owner Follow Up Procedure

Customer Signature

Review Dealership Service Department Location, Payment Options & Hours of Operation

Introduce The Subaru Service Advisor & Provide Their Business Card

Explain Dealership Service Appointment Scheduling & Early Morning Service Drop Off Procedures

Review Dealership Parts Department Location & Hours

Vehicle Condition

Exterior Condition Approval (New Owner indicates exterior of vehicle is clean & undamaged)

Interior Condition Approval (New Owner indicates interior of vehicle is clean & undamaged)

Operational Condition Approval (New Owner has driven vehicle & approves it is ready for delivery)


Explain Operation of Automatic Transmission & Review Sport and Manual Modes

Show All Weather Package - Heated Front Seats, Windshield Wiper De-Icer & Heated Side Mirrors (if equipped)

Show Seatbelt & Head Restraint Functions

Show Tilt Steering Column & Telescopic Feature (if equipped)

Explain the Subaru Advanced Frontal Airbag System (SRS), Front Seat Side Pelvis/Torso Airbags (SRS) & Side-Curtain Airbags (SRS)

��

��

�

��

��

Review Master & Valet Keys

Show Keyless Entry, Alarm System & Remote Start (if equipped)

Show Hood & Gas Door Releases

Show Yellow Caps & Explain Checking & Filling of Vehicle Fluids

Show Fuel Filler Door & Gas Cap Operation

Show Location of Both Fuse Boxes

��

��

�

��

��

�

Show Trunk Release & Valet Feature (sedans only)

Show Spare Tire, Tools & Jack Location

Explain Temporary Spare Tire Usage & Limitations

Explain AWD Towing Requirements & Limitations

Show LATCH System & Tethers

Show Child Safety Lock Operation

��

��

�

��

��

�

��

��

�

�

��

�

�

Operation & Controls

Please use & reference the SUBARU OWNER’S MANUAL & QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE

OPERATION & CONTROLS

REAR & SIDE

INTERIOR

DRIVER CONTROLS & OPERATION

��

��

�

�

�

Show Power Windows, Door Locks & Side-View Mirror Operation

Explain Cruise Control & Power Moonroof Operation (if equipped)

Show Headlights, Daytime Running Lights, Parking Lights, Hazard Lights & Fog Lights (if equipped)

Show Interior Lighting, Map Light & Clock

Show Front & Rear Wiper & Washer Controls

Show Climate Control System Including Front & Rear Defrosters

Show & Explain Operation of VDC Control Switch

Review Instrument Panel Gauges & Warning Lights

Explain Tire Pressure Monitoring System Light

Show Audio System, Station Presets, Tone, Balance & Fade Controls

Show GPS Navigation System (if equipped)

Explain Operation of Other Vehicle Options, Equipment, or Genuine Subaru Accessories Not Referenced Above Where Applicable

�


Subaru of America, Inc., Subaru Plaza, P.O. Box 6000, Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000

MSA5B1206A

Issued July 2011

Printed in USA 10/11


2012

Consumer Electronics/

Bluetooth® & Audio Technology

Quick Reference Guide


Table of Contents

Bluetooth Basics

Bluetooth without Navigation System

Impreza 2.0i / WRX / WRX/STI / Forester 2.5X

Legacy and Outback

BlueConnect®

Tribeca

Bluetooth with Navigation System

Impreza 2.0i / WRX / WRX/STI / Forester 2.5X

Legacy and Outback

Bluetooth with TomTom® Navigation

Select Forester 2.5X Premium

2 - 3

8 - 11

12 - 13

14 - 17

18 - 21

22 - 23

4 - 7


2

Bluetooth Basics

o The cell phone is turned off.

o The cell phone is not in the phone call area.

o The battery of the cell phone has run down.

o The cell phone is behind the seat or in the glove box.

o A metal material covers or touches the cell phone.

illuminated while the ignition switch is in the “ON” position. If this occurs, consult your cell

phone manual to adjust the cell phone settings.

may vary.

compatible with your vehicle.

be disconnected or continued on the cell phone depending on the type of cell phone that is

used. Note that operation of the cell phone may be necessary if the call is continued on the

cell phone.


3

Blu

eto

oth

Basic

sB

lueto

oth

with

out

Navig

atio

n S

yste

mB

lueC

onnect®

Blu

eto

oth

with

N

avig

atio

n S

yste

mB

lueto

oth

with

Tom

Tom

® N

avig

atio

n

the other party speak at the same time, it may be difficult for the other party

to hear your voice and vice versa. This is normal.

the party you are calling may notice an undesirable echo sound.

o When air from the ventilator blows directly towards the microphone.

o When the sound coming from the ventilator is loud.

o When the cell phone is positioned too closely to the microphone.

connected to the system or the circumstances of the Bluetooth network.

in the voice coming from the hands-free phone.

3

Blu

eto

oth

Basiccc

ssssB

luB

letot

othth

wiith

oth

ut t

Navig

atio

n S

yste

mB

luB

leC

oC

nnect®®

Blu

Bl

eto

othh

wiith

h

Navig

atio

n S

yste

mB

luB

leto

othh

wiithh

Tom

Tom

® N

avig

atio

n

Blu

eto

oth

B

asic

s


4

Bluetooth for AM/FM Stereo and Single Disc CD Player (Impreza 2.0i/WRX/WRX STI, Forester 2.5X)

Pairing Your Cell Phone

Press the phone off hook button and listen to phone prompts.

Press the talk button and name your phone.

Phone off

hook button

Forester 2.5X/WRX/WRX STI Impreza 2.0i

Phone off

hook button

Phone on

hook button

Phone on

hook button

Talk button Talk button


5

Blu

eto

oth

Basic

sB

lueto

oth

with

out

Navig

atio

n S

yste

mB

lueC

onnect®

Blu

eto

oth

with

N

avig

atio

n S

yste

mB

lueto

oth

with

Tom

Tom

® N

avig

atio

n

Press the talk button and say “confirm.”

Put your phone into Bluetooth pairing mode and pair your phone to the system using

the pass-key provided. When phone is successfully paired you will hear “The phone is

paired and ready for use.”

Pass-key for pairing will be given audibly as well as be displayed on the radio display.

5

Blu

Bl

etot

othth

Ba

Bsici

sB

lueto

oth

with

out

Navig

atio

n S

yste

mmmB

luB

leC

oC

nnect®®

Blu

Bl

eto

othh

wiith

h

Navig

atio

n S

yste

mB

luB

leto

othh

wiithh

Tom

Tom

® N

avig

atio

n

ng

e is

ay.

Blu

etooth

with

out

Nav. S

ystem


6

Press the talk button again and say the number.

Making a Call


7

Blu

eto

oth

Basic

sB

lueto

oth

with

out

Navig

atio

n S

yste

mB

lueC

onnect®

Blu

eto

oth

with

N

avig

atio

n S

yste

mB

lueto

oth

with

Tom

Tom

® N

avig

atio

n

To end the call, press the phone on hook button.

Receiving a Call

When a call comes in you will be notified. If the audio system is on, the audio

system will mute and a voice prompt will inform you. Press the phone off hook

button to accept the call.

Press the phone off hook button to dial or press the talk button to add more

numbers. The phone will start dialing.

hook button.

steering wheel.

7

Blu

Bl

etot

othth

Ba

Bsici

sB

lueto

oth

with

out

Navig

atio

n S

yste

mmmB

luB

leC

oC

nnect®®

Blu

Bl

eto

othh

wiith

h

Navig

atio

n S

yste

mB

luB

leto

othh

wiithh

Tom

Tom

® N

avig

atio

n

Blu

etooth

with

out

Nav. S

ystem


8

Bluetooth for AM/FM Stereo with Display Type Radio (Legacy and Outback)


Press the phone off hook button.

Rotate the tune knob, to select “Pair Phone”.

Phone off

hook button

Phone on

hook button

Talk button


9

Blu

eto

oth

Basic

sB

lueto

oth

with

out

Navig

atio

n S

yste

mB

lueC

onnect®

Blu

eto

oth

with

N

avig

atio

n S

yste

mB

lueto

oth

with

Tom

Tom

® N

avig

atio

n

Follow the audible prompt, then select “Record Name” and then say the name to

be registered.

Select “Confirm pair phone?”.

Select “Phone Only” to register a cell phone.

9

Blu

Bl

etot

othth

Ba

Bsici

sB

lueto

oth

with

out

Navig

atio

n S

yste

mmmB

luB

leC

oC

nnect®®

Blu

Bl

eto

othh

wiith

h

Navig

atio

n S

yste

mB

luB

leto

othh

wiithh

Tom

Tom

® N

avig

atio

n

Blu

etooth

with

out

Nav. S

ystem


10

Making a Call

After “Car Multi-Media” is displayed, a pass key to pair phone will be displayed.

“Phone paired successfully” will be displayed when pairing has been completed.


11

Blu

eto

oth

Basic

sB

lueto

oth

with

out

Navig

atio

n S

yste

mB

lueC

onnect®

Blu

eto

oth

with

N

avig

atio

n S

yste

mB

lueto

oth

with

Tom

Tom

® N

avig

atio

n

Press the talk button again and say the number.

To end the call, press the phone on hook button.

Receiving a Call

When a call comes in you will be notified. If the audio system is on, the audio

system will mute and a voice prompt will inform you. Press the phone off hook

button to accept the call.

The system will audibly repeat the number. If correct, press the phone off hook

button to dial, or press the talk button to change, cancel or delete the number. The

phone will start dialing.

the phone on hook button.

press and hold the phone on hook button.

steering wheel. If you want to end the call, press the phone on hook button.

11

Blu

Bl

etot

othth

Ba

Bsici

sB

lueto

oth

with

out

Navig

atio

n S

yste

mmmB

luB

leC

oC

nnect®®

Blu

Bl

eto

othh

wiith

h

Navig

atio

n S

yste

mB

luB

leto

othh

wiithh

Tom

Tom

® N

avig

atio

n

Blu

etooth

with

out

Nav. S

ystem


12

BlueConnect® (Tribeca 3.6R Limited and Touring models)

Controls Location

BlueConnect controls for the Tribeca are located in the overhead console.

Controls Function

Phone button – activate and deactivate system.

Volume up and down buttons.

Voice recognition button – Barge in button, to barge

in so you don’t have to listen to all the prompts.


13

Blu

eto

oth

Basic

sB

lueto

oth

with

out

Navig

atio

n S

yste

mB

lueC

onnect®

Blu

eto

oth

with

N

avig

atio

n S

yste

mB

lueto

oth

with

Tom

Tom

® N

avig

atio

nPairing Your Cell Phone

using the pairing code you provided earlier.

Making a Call

Receiving a Call

prompt will inform you.

13

Blu

Bl

etot

othth

Ba

Bsici

sB

luB

letot

othth

wiith

oth

ut t

Navig

atio

n S

yste

mB

lueC

onnect®

Blu

Bl

eto

othh

wiith

h

Navig

atio

n S

yste

mB

luB

leto

othh

wiithh

Tom

Tom

® N

avig

atio

n

Blu

eC

onnect

®


14

Bluetooth for AM/FM Stereo with HD RadioTM, Single Disc CD Player and Navigation (Impreza 2.0i/WRX/WRX STI, Forester 2.5X)


Then touch “Bluetooth.”


15

Blu

eto

oth

Basic

sB

lueto

oth

with

out

Navig

atio

n S

yste

mB

lueC

onnect®

Blu

eto

oth

with

N

avig

atio

n S

yste

mB

lueto

oth

with

Tom

Tom

® N

avig

atio

n

A pass-key pairing number will appear on the screen. Put your phone into Bluetooth

pairing mode and pair your phone to the system using the pass-key provided.

When the phone is successfully paired the screen will show the phone’s

name on the list.

15

Blu

Bl

etot

othth

Ba

Bsici

sB

luB

letot

othth

wiith

oth

ut t

Navig

atio

n S

yste

mB

luB

leC

oC

nnectt®®

Blu

eto

oth

with

Navig

atio

n S

yste

mmmmB

luB

letot

othth

wiithth

Tom

Tom

® N

avig

atio

n

h

Blu

etooth w

ith

Navigation

S

ystem

Touch “Add New.”


16

Touch the numbers for the phone number you wish to call. When complete, touch

the green phone soft key to make the call.

Making a Call

be displayed.

.


17

Blu

eto

oth

Basic

sB

lueto

oth

with

out

Navig

atio

n S

yste

mB

lueC

onnect®

Blu

eto

oth

with

N

avig

atio

n S

yste

mB

lueto

oth

with

Tom

Tom

® N

avig

atio

nDuring a Call

Receiving a Call

Transfer – Touch to switch

the phone conversation back

to your cell phone.

the volume of the call.

Red phone symbol –

Touch this to end a call.

numeric key input.

When a call comes in the incoming call screen appears automatically.

Touch the green phone soft key to answer the call.

decline the incoming call.

17

Blu

Bl

etot

othth

Ba

Bsici

sB

luB

letot

othth

wiith

oth

ut t

Navig

atio

n S

yste

mB

luB

leC

oC

nnect®®

Blu

eto

oth

with

Navig

atio

n S

yste

mmmmB

luB

leto

othh

wiithh

Tom

Tom

® N

avig

atio

n

Blu

etooth w

ith

Navigation

S

ystem


18

Bluetooth with Navigation System (Legacy and Outback)

Phone off

hook button

Phone on

hook button

Talk button

MENU button


19

Blu

eto

oth

Basic

sB

lueto

oth

with

out

Navig

atio

n S

yste

mB

lueC

onnect®

Blu

eto

oth

with

N

avig

atio

n S

yste

mB

lueto

oth

with

Tom

Tom

® N

avig

atio

nPairing Your Cell Phone

Then touch “Bluetooth Settings.”

Now touch “Register.”

A pass-key number will appear on the screen.

19

Blu

Bl

etot

othth

Ba

Bsici

sB

luB

letot

othth

wiith

oth

ut t

Navig

atio

n S

yste

mB

luB

leC

oC

nnect®®

Blu

eto

oth

with

Navig

atio

n S

yste

mmmmB

luB

leto

othh

wiithh

Tom

Tom

® N

avig

atio

n

Blu

etooth w

ith

Navigation

S

ystem


20

After the beep, say the numbers of the phone number you wish to call. The system will

repeat the numbers you have said at this point. You can continue saying numbers, you

Making a Call

will be displayed.

Put your phone into Bluetooth pairing mode and pair your phone to the system using

the pass-key provided. When the phone is successfully paired the screen will show

the phone’s name on the list.


21

Blu

eto

oth

Basic

sB

lueto

oth

with

out

Navig

atio

n S

yste

mB

lueC

onnect®

Blu

eto

oth

with

N

avig

atio

n S

yste

mB

lueto

oth

with

Tom

Tom

® N

avig

atio

nDuring a Call

Receiving a Call

Mute – Touch this to mute the call.

Speaker – Touch to switch

the phone conversation back

to your cell phone.

1 – 5 – Touch 1 through 5 to

change the volume of the call.

Red phone symbol –

Touch this to end a call.

When a call comes in you will be notified. The audio system will mute and

a voice prompt will inform you. Touch the “Call” soft key to answer the call.

call on hold.

decline the incoming call.

21

Blu

Bl

etot

othth

Ba

Bsici

sB

luB

letot

othth

wiith

oth

ut t

Navig

atio

n S

yste

mB

luB

leC

oC

nnectt®®

Blu

eto

oth

with

Navig

atio

n S

yste

mmmmB

luB

letot

othth

wiithth

Tom

Tom

® N

avig

atio

n

he call.

ck

Blu

etooth w

ith

Navigation

S

ystem


22

TomTom® Navigation with Bluetooth (Optional on Forester 2.5X Premium models)


ap anywhere within the displayed navigation map to bring up the Main Menu.


23

Blu

eto

oth

Basic

sB

lueto

oth

with

out

Navig

atio

n S

yste

mB

lueC

onnect®

Blu

eto

oth

with

N

avig

atio

n S

yste

mB

lueto

oth

with

Tom

Tom

® N

avig

atio

n

23

Blu

Bl

etot

othth

Ba

Bsici

sB

luB

letot

othth

wiith

oth

ut t

Navig

atio

n S

yste

mB

luB

leC

oC

nnectt®®

Blu

Bl

etot

othth

wiith

th

Navig

atio

n S

yste

mB

lueto

oth

with

Tom

TTTo

m® N

avig

atio

non

onnnnnnnn

Bluetooth

w

ith Navigation

Tom

Tom®

Making a Call

within the displayed

navigation map to

bring up the Main Menu.

in the Main Menu.

one phone is paired,

make sure that your

using your phone.

Receiving a Call

If someone calls when you are driving, a screen will automatically pop up, and you

will have the option to Accept or Refuse the call. If you accept the call, the radio

should mute, and the call will be

mute, tap the Mute button on the


Notes


MSA5B1109A

Printed in USA 01/12

All information contained within this Consumer Electronics/Bluetooth & Audio Technology

Quick Reference Guide was accurate at the time of publication. We reserve the right to

change features, operation and/or functionality of any vehicle specification at any time

without incurring any obligation to make the same or similar changes to products previously

sold. Your Subaru dealer is the best source for the most current information. For detailed

operating and safety information, please consult your Owner’s Manual.


ForewordThis booklet is a supplement to the Owner’s Manual for SUBARUB9 TRIBECA and contains a detailed description and instructionsfor proper operation of the Rear Seat Entertainment System provid-ed in your vehicle.To ensure optimum and correct use of your Rear Seat Entertain-ment System, please read this supplement and get acquainted withthe system before using it.Please keep this supplement together with your Owner’s Manualand leave it in the vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner willneed the information it contains.

FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN

is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.

© copyright 2006 FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.


1

Safety Warnings ............................................................3Before Use .....................................................................4System Components ....................................................5Basic Operations ...........................................................6

What You Can Enjoy with Your Rear Seat Entertainment System ...........................................................................6

Display .................................................................................7How to open and close the display ........................................7Keeping the display clean ......................................................9

Remote Control ..................................................................10Control buttons and joystick .................................................12How to use the remote control .............................................14Replacing the battery ...........................................................16

Wireless Headphones ........................................................18Replacing the batteries ........................................................20

DVD Player ........................................................................22Precautions to Observe When Handling Discs ........23

Types of Discs Playable with the Rear Seat Entertainment System .........................................................................23

DVD video discs ..................................................................25Copyright .............................................................................26

Playing Discs ...............................................................27Playing DVD Video Discs ..................................................27

Starting playback .................................................................27Stopping playback ...............................................................27Pausing ................................................................................27Fast-forwarding ....................................................................28Fast-reversing ......................................................................28Skipping chapters forward ...................................................29

Skipping chapters backward ................................................29Title search ..........................................................................30Skipping to a predetermined screen ....................................31Displaying each disc’s menu on the screen .........................31Changing the audio language ..............................................32Changing the subtitle language ...........................................33Image angle selection on multi-angle recorded scenes .......34Selecting a dynamic range control setting ...........................35

Playing Video CDs .............................................................36Starting playback .................................................................36Stopping playback ...............................................................36Pausing ................................................................................36Fast-forwarding ....................................................................37Fast-reversing ......................................................................37Skipping tracks forward .......................................................38Skipping tracks backward ....................................................39Skipping to a predetermined screen (Ver 2.0 video CD only) .......................................................39Sound channel (MAIN/SUB) selection .................................40

Playing Music CDs .............................................................40Starting playback .................................................................40Stopping playback ...............................................................40Fast-forwarding ....................................................................41Fast-reversing ......................................................................41Skipping tracks forward .......................................................42Skipping tracks backward ....................................................42Repeat playback ..................................................................43Random playback ................................................................43Scan ....................................................................................44

Contents


2

Initial Settings ..............................................................45Setting DVD/Audio/Subtitle Language ............................... 46Setting the Angle Mark Display ......................................... 47Setting the Viewer Restriction Level .................................. 48

Password registration .......................................................... 49Connecting External Devices to Your Rear Seat

Entertainment System ...........................................50Adjusting Display Conditions and Selecting Display

Mode ........................................................................51Display Condition Adjustment ............................................ 51

Adjusting method ................................................................. 51Display Mode Selection ..................................................... 52

Selecting method ................................................................. 53Error Messages ...........................................................54Language/Code List ....................................................55

Contents


3

You will find a number of WARNINGs, CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this supplement.These safety warnings alert you to potential hazards that could result in injury to you or others.Please read these safety warnings as well as all other portions of this supplement carefully in order to gain a better understanding ofhow to use your Rear Seat Entertainment System safely.

NOTEA NOTE gives information or suggestions how to make better use of your Rear Seat Entertainment System.

A WARNING indicates a situation in which serious injury or death could result if the warning is ignored.

A CAUTION indicates a situation in which injury or damage to your vehicle including the Rear Seat Entertainment System,or both, could result if the cautions is ignored.

Safety Warnings


4

NOTEUsing the Rear Seat Entertainment System with the engine stopped could lower the battery’s electricity level. If the initialcharge level were too low, the next engine starting would be impossible. It is recommended that the system be used onlywhen the engine is running.The display screen turns off if you start the engine while using the Rear Seat Entertainment System with the ignition switchin the “ACC” or “ON” position and the engine not in operation. To turn on the display again, press the “DVD • CD” buttonon the remote control. The image will re-appear on the screen.Liquid-crystal displays may be difficult to read when wearing polarized glasses.

Never try watching videos or using other entertainment programs with your Rear Seat Entertainment System by keepingthe vehicle engine running in a garage or other enclosed area. Exhaust gases accumulated in such an area or enteringthe vehicle are dangerous, or even lethal.The driver must not attempt to operate or watch the Rear Seat Entertainment System while the vehicle is in motion. Doingso will distract attention from driving and the road, and could lead to an accident.The driver must not use headphones. Wearing headphones shuts out or drowns out outside sounds and reduces thedriver’s awareness of dangerous situations, which increases the risk of having an accident.If you wish to park your vehicle and enjoy an entertainment program on this system, select a safe place that does nothinder traffic and has no parking ban.

The display, a component of the Rear Seat Entertainment System, contains mercury. For that reason, it is necessary toremove display before vehicle disposal. Once removed, please reuse, recycle or dispose of the display as hazardouswaste.

Before Use


5

34 2

1

S00100

The Rear Seat Entertainment Systemconsists of the following components:

1) Display (Refer to Page 7.)2) DVD player (Refer to Page 22.)3) External device jacks (Refer to Page

50.)4) Accessory power outlet (Refer to

Page 50.)

In addition to the components listedabove, there is a remote control and twosets of wireless headphones as attach-ments to the system.

System Components


6

What You Can Enjoy with Your Rear Seat Entertainment SystemThe Rear Seat Entertainment System is designed to provide your vehicle’s rear-seat passengers with video and music entertainmentprograms recorded on DVD video discs, video CDs and music CDs.

The Rear Seat Entertainment System will operate when the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

Playback sounds can be listened to by using the wireless headphones accompanying the system.

All operations with the Rear Seat Entertainment System can be managed using the remote control accompanying the system (exceptwhen ejecting a disc).

Replacements of the dedicated headphones and remote control are available from your SUBARU dealer should you lose them.

You can also enjoy TV games from a home-use TV game machine or video programs from a video tape player with the Rear SeatEntertainment System if such an external device is connected to one of the external device jacks of the system. For further details,refer to the instruction manual provided by the manufacturer of each external device.

NOTEWhen the vehicle is parked with the parking brake applied and the selector lever in the “P” position, you can enjoy videoprograms on the navigation display on the dashboard if you press the “AUDIO” button on the navigation control panel.This does not apply when the vehicle is in motion.If you press the “AUX/RSE” button on the audio panel, playback sounds from this system will be outputted through thevehicle’s speakers.

Basic Operations


7

DisplayHow to open and close the display

Push the release button to open the display.The display will swing down partway along its full swing angle.

1) Release button

1

S00101

Basic Operations


8

Adjust the display to the desired angle.

To close the display to its storage position, swing and push it up until it locks.

Close the display when it is not in use to help reduce the chance of injuryin the event of an accident or sudden stop.

S00102

S00103

Basic Operations


9

Keeping the display cleanDo not touch the display screen with bare hands. The display screen is easily soiled with hand grease.Use a soft, dry cloth to clean the display screen surface. Do not use organic solvents.The screen surface is sensitive to scratches or other physical damage. Avoid pushing on it strongly or rubbing it with a hard cloth orany other scratchy material.

NOTEThe screen is made of a liquid crystal display (LCD) panel. When the system is turned on in an extremely low outside tem-perature, the LCD takes a relatively long time to become bright. On the other hand, when the outside temperature is high,the LCD may become darker than usual. Both conditions are normal.Images on an LCD screen may contain some tiny black spots and/or bright spots. They reflect a characteristic normal tothe LCD and do not indicate any abnormal condition.

Basic Operations


10

Remote Control

1) Remote control

1) Remote control

1

S00114

1

S00116

The Rear Seat Entertainment System can be operated only using the remote control(except when ejecting a disc). Touching a switch on the display screen directly withyour finger does not have any effect.

Store the remote control in the center or rear console box when the RearSeat Entertainment System is not being used to reduce the chance of in-jury in case of an accident or sudden stop.Be sure to keep the rear console box as well as the upper compartmentof the center console box closed to reduce the chance of injury in caseof an accident or sudden stop.Do not disassemble or modify the remote control. Doing so could causean accident, fire or electric shock.Do not expose the remote control to direct sunlight, strong heat and/or ahighly humid environment. The remote control case could become de-formed and the battery in it could leak or even explode if exposed tothese conditions.Avoid dropping the remote control and hitting it against hard objects.Do not sit or step on the remote control. Placing anything heavy on itshould also be avoided.Avoid pressing the remote control buttons for longer than necessary, asthe battery is consumed while any button is kept pressed. Also avoidplacing an object on the remote control, as it may press buttons and re-duce the battery life.

Basic Operations


11

To use the remote control, direct its signal-emitting eye toward the signal receptionwindow of the display.

1) Signal emitting eye2) Signal reception window

2

1

S00104

Basic Operations


12

Control buttons and joystick 1) DVD • CD buttonWhen this button is pressed, the Rear Seat EntertainmentSystem turns on. The display will show DVD mode or CDmode.

2) VIDEO buttonWhen this button is pressed, the system will accept and op-erate on the video signal from an external video device con-nected to the system.

3) OFF buttonWhen this button is pressed, the Rear Seat EntertainmentSystem turns off.

4) CURSOR buttonWhen this button is pressed, control switches will appear onthe display when the player is in operation.

5) JoystickThe joystick is used to highlight a control switch or a menuitem on the screen and also to make an entry. Click an ap-propriate one of its four arrow-marked ends ( , , and

) to use it.6) ENTER button

When this button is pressed, the system will execute a selec-tion or entry that was made with the joystick.

7) TOP MENU buttonWhen this button is pressed, the title selection screen for theDVD video disc currently in the player will appear on the dis-play.

8) SETUP buttonWhen this button is pressed, the initial setup screen will ap-pear on the display, where you can make your initial settings.

3

1 2

4

65

7

8

9

10

11

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

12

S00105

Basic Operations


13

9) AUDIO buttonWhen this button is pressed, the desired audio language orMAIN/SUB sound channel can be selected when the playeris in operation.

10) SEARCH buttonWhen this button is pressed, the title search screen will ap-pear on the display when the player is in operation. You canthen start playback beginning with the title you have selectedon the screen.

11) DISPLAY MODE buttonWhen pressed, this button allows you to select the screensize.

12) DISPLAY buttonWhen this button is pressed, the display condition adjust-ment screen will appear, where you can adjust the bright-ness, contrast, color and tone for images.

13) ANGLE buttonWhen this button is pressed, the angle selection screen willappear, where you can select a desired angle when the play-er is reproducing a multi-angle recorded DVD video disc.

14) SUBTITLE buttonWhen this button is pressed, the subtitle language selectionscreen will appear, where you can select a desired subtitlelanguage when the player is playing a DVD video disc.

15) RETURN buttonWhen this button is pressed, the disc will skip to a predeter-mined screen.

16) MENU buttonWhen this button is pressed, the menu screen will appear forthe DVD video disc currently in the player.

17) TRACK ( ) button Each brief push (less than 1 second) of this button during op-eration of the player advances the video scene chapter bychapter. If you push the button continuously, the scene ad-vances continuously and quickly (but slowly when playbackis in pause mode) until you release the button.

18) TRACK ( ) buttonEach brief push (less than 1 second) of this button during op-eration of the player reverses the video scene chapter bychapter. If you push the button continuously, the scene re-verses continuously and quickly (but slowly when playback isin pause mode) until you release the button.

19) STOP ( ) buttonThis button stops playback when it is pressed during opera-tion of the player.

20) PAUSE • PLAY ( ) buttonPressing this button pauses playback when the player is inoperation. Pressing it again restarts playback.

Basic Operations


14

How to use the remote controlYou can control the operation of the DVD player using the buttons on the remotecontrol.You can also control the player using the joystick on the remote control to highlighta switch on the display screen and then pressing the “ENTER” button. You cannot,however, control the player by touching a switch on the screen with your finger.When a switch is selected with the joystick, the color of the switch changes from blueto white. When you then press the “ENTER” button, your selection is executed.

To make control switches appear on the screen when playing a DVD video disc orvideo CD:You can use the “CURSOR” button on the remote control to make the control switch-es appear on the screen. The control switches shown on the next page will be dis-played when the button is pressed.

To make control switches appear on the screen when playing a music CD:When a music disc is loaded in the player, playback will start automatically and thecontrol switches shown on the next page will appear on the screen without the needfor operating the remote control.

S00117

S00118

Basic Operations


15

DVD Video Menu 1

DVD Video Menu 2

When playing a DVD video disc, differentcontrol switches are displayed on thescreens for Menu 1 and Menu 2 (Menu 1screen appears first when the “CURSOR”button is pressed). Switch between thetwo screens when necessary by highlight-ing the “PAGE” switch on the screen withthe joystick and then pressing the “EN-TER” button.To make the switches disappear from the

screen, push the remote control’s “CUR-SOR” button again or highlight the “HIDE”switch on the screen with the joystick andthen press the “ENTER” button. If youhighlight and execute the “HIDE” switch,the TITLE number, CHAPTER numberand playback time at the bottom of thescreen also disappear.

Video CD Menu

To make the switches disappear from thescreen, push the remote control’s “CUR-SOR” button again or highlight the “HIDE”switch on the screen with the joystick andthen press the “ENTER” button. If youhighlight and execute the “HIDE” switch,the TRACK number and playback time atthe bottom of the screen also disappear.

NOTEThe “RETURN” switch is displayed on

the VIDEO CD menu only when youplay a video CD version 2.0.

Music CD Menu

NOTE

If the “ ” mark appears on the screenwhen you select a control switch, it willnot be possible to select or execute theswitch.

Basic Operations


16

Replacing the battery

When the battery begins to get weak, the signal transmission range of the remote control becomes shorter. If this is the case, replacethe battery as soon as possible.

While holding the battery holder pushed in the direction of the arrow with your fin-gernail inserted in the slot, slide out the holder in the direction of the arrow using across-head mini screwdriver.

Take great care not to allow children to swallow batteries or any other removed part, as these could cause serious injuryor death if swallowed.

Do not let dust, oil or water get on or in the remote control when replacing the battery.

S00106

Basic Operations


17

Remove the battery from the holder.

Install a new battery (Type CR2025 or equivalent) in the holder. Make sure the bat-tery’s positive (+) side and the “+” mark on the holder are on the same side.Slide the battery holder into the remote control until it clicks.

S00107

S00108

Basic Operations


18

Wireless HeadphonesUse the wireless headphones to listen to audio outputted from your Rear Seat Entertainment System.

Store the headphones in a door pocket when they are not being used inorder to reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or suddenstop.Do not disassemble or modify the headphones. Doing so could cause anaccident, fire or electric shock.Do not expose the headphones to direct sunlight, strong heat and/or ahighly humid environment. The headphones could become deformedand the batteries in them could leak or even explode under these condi-tions.Avoid dropping the headphones and hitting them against hard objects.Do not sit on the headphones or place anything heavy on them.Human voices may have been recorded intentionally at low levels insome DVDs for special acoustic effects. If you carelessly adjust the vol-ume in order to hear these voices more clearly, your ears may be ex-posed to unexpectedly loud sounds at a later point. This may also hap-pen when you switch to a different audio source. Very loud sounds coulddamage your hearing and pose a driving hazard. Keep this in mind whenyou adjust the volume.

1

S00115

Basic Operations

1) Wireless headphone


19

Press the “OFF • ON” button on the left earpiece to turn on the headphones: thepower lamp on the right earpiece will come on.

Adjust the sound level as desired with the volume dial on the right earpiece.

S00127

S00128

�

1) Power lamp

Basic Operations


20

Adjust the earpieces to comfortable positions by extending or retracting the head-band.

NOTEFor longer battery life, turn off the headphones whenever they are not beingused. Press the “OFF • ON” button to turn off the headphones and make surethe power lamp has gone out.

Replacing the batteries

When the batteries begin to get weak, the power lamp will not come on even if you press the “OFF • ON” button. If this is the case,replace the batteries as soon as possible.

Take great care not to allow children to swallow batteries or any other removed part, as these could cause serious injuryor death if swallowed.

Do not let dust, oil or water get on or in the headphones when replacing the batteries.

S00129

Basic Operations


21

Remove the battery cover on the left earpiece by loosening the screw with a flat-head screwdriver.

Remove the old batteries and install new ones (two AAA batteries). Pay careful at-tention to the (+) and (–) marks on the battery case.Reinstall the cover in position by tightening the screw with a flat-head screwdriver.

S00130

S00131

Basic Operations


22

DVD Player

The DVD player can be operated when the ignition switch is in the“ACC” or “ON” position. Load a disc by inserting it into the discslot of the player, with the label side facing up. The disc will becarried inward automatically when you insert it partially. The discindicator light will turn on when the disc reaches the full inwardposition. To eject the disc, press the “Eject ( )” button. The discwill come out and the indicator light will go out.

1) Eject button2) Disc slot3) Disc indicator light

1 2 3

S00119

Basic Operations


23

Types of Discs Playable with the Rear Seat Entertainment SystemYour Rear Seat Entertainment System can play back music CDs, DVD video discs and video CDs that have any of the marks indicatedbelow.

NOTEThe system is not compatible with DVD audio discs and MP3-file or WAV-file based music CDs.The system does not support 8-cm/3-inch CDs; if inserted, they will automatically be ejected.

The following products may not play back on the Rear Seat Entertainment System.

SACDCCCDDual discCD-RCD-RWCD-ROMDVD-RDVD+RDVD-RWDVD+RWDVD-ROMDVD-RAM

Music CDs

DVD video discs

Video CDs

Precautions to Observe When Handling Discs


24

When handling discs, follow these precautions:

In cold and/or rainy weather, condensation can form inside the DVD player, pre-venting normal operation. If this happens, eject the disc and wait for the player to dryout.

Skipping may occur when the DVD player is subjected to severe vibration (for ex-ample, when the vehicle is driven on a rough surface).

To remove a disc from its case, press the center of the case and hold both edgesof the disc. If the disc surface is touched directly, contamination could cause poorimage or sound quality. Do not touch the disc surface.

Use a clean disc whenever possible. If there are any deposits, wipe the disc sur-face from the center outward with a dry, soft cloth. Be sure not to use a hard cloth,thinner, benzene, alcohol, etc.

Do not use any disc that is scratched, deformed, transparent/semi-transparent,glue-labeled, or cracked. Also, do not use any disc that has a non-standard shape(for example, a heart shape) or 8-cm/3-inch CDs. Malfunctions or other problemsmight result.

Discs are vulnerable to heat. Never keep discs in places exposed to direct sun-light, near heaters or in vehicles parked in the sun or on hot days.

500034



25

DVD video discsThe DVD player of your Rear Seat Entertainment System can play back DVD video discs that conform to NTSC color TV formats. AnyDVD video discs produced conforming to other formats such as PAL or SECAM cannot be used with the player.

The following are example logos that may be indicated on DVD video discs and what they mean:

NOTESome DVD video discs have a region code, each indicating where it can be used. If a disc is not labeled “ALL” or “1”, youcannot use it in your system’s DVD player. If you attempt to play it in the player, a “REGION CODE ERROR” message willappear on the screen. Some DVD video discs without any region code may not be usable with your system’s DVD player.

The disc conforms to NTSC format of color TV.

The disc has two audio tracks.

The disc’s subtitles are available in two languages.

The disc’s multi-angle recorded scenes are viewable from three different angles.

Two screen aspect ratios (ratio of width to height) are selectable: wide screen of 16:9 and standard screen of 4:3.

Region code indicating the area in which this video disc can be played. “ALL” stands for all countries; “1” stands for the United States and Canada.

NTSC2

2

3

16:9 LB 34:

1



26

Copyright

The Dolby system is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

Dolby, DOLBY, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

The Rear Seat Entertainment System incorporates copyright protection technologythat is covered by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual prop-erty rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of thiscopyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation,and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise au-thorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering and modification is pro-hibited.

“dts” is a trademark of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.



27

Playing DVD Video DiscsStarting playback

With the vehicle’s ignition switch in the “ACC” or “ON” position, insert the disc into the disc slot of the DVD player, with the label sidefacing up. The player automatically starts playback of the disc.If a disc is already in the player, press the “DVD • CD” button on your remote control to start playback.

Stopping playback

Method using screen and remote control:Highlight the “ ” switch on the screen with your remote control joystick, then pressthe “ENTER” button.

Method using remote control alone:Press the remote control “STOP ( )” button.

Pausing

Method using screen and remote control:Highlight the “ ” switch on the screen with the remote control joystick, then pressthe “ENTER” button.

Method using remote control alone:Press the remote control “PAUSE • PLAY ( )” button.

To restart playback, perform either of the above operations again.

Playing Discs


28

Fast-forwarding

Method using screen and remote control:Highlight the “ ” switch on the screen with the remote control joystick, thenpress the “ENTER” button continuously until reaching the desired scene.

Method using remote control alone:Press the remote control “TRACK ( )” button continuously until reaching the de-sired scene.

When you perform either of the above operations while the player is in pause mode,the disc will advance slowly.

Fast-reversing



When you perform either of the above operations while the player is in pause mode,the disc will reverse slowly.

Playing Discs


29

Skipping chapters forwardThe data recorded on DVD video discs is divided into fragments called “titles”, and each title is further divided into smaller fragmentscalled “chapters”. These titles and chapters are given specific numbers, which are indicated in the guide accompanying each disc. Youcan skip chapter(s) using the following procedure:

Method using screen and remote control:Highlight the “ ” switch on the screen with the remote control joystick, thenbriefly press the “ENTER” button. The disc skips the current chapter and advancesto the beginning of the next chapter. Repeat this operation as many times as neces-sary to reach the desired chapter.

Method using remote control alone:Briefly press the remote control “TRACK ( )” button. Refer to the above for thesubsequent process and operation.

Skipping chapters backward

Method using screen and remote control:Highlight the “ ” switch on the screen with the remote control joystick, thenbriefly press the “ENTER” button. The disc reverses to the beginning of the currentchapter. If you briefly press the button again, the disc reverses to the beginning ofthe preceding chapter. Repeat this operation as many times as necessary to reachthe desired chapter.


Playing Discs


30

Title searchIf you enter a desired title number using the remote control joystick, the disc is played back beginning with the specified title. The num-ber of titles differs from disc to disc. Refer to the guide attached to each disc for its title numbers.

Method using screen and remote control:Highlight the “SEARCH” switch on the screen with the remote control joystick, thenpress the “ENTER” button. The display switches to the title number entry screen.

Enter the title number using the remote control joystick, then press the “ENTER” but-ton. The player will play back the disc beginning with the specified title. To revert tothe original video screen, highlight the “ ” switch with the joystick, and then pressthe “ENTER” button.

Method using remote control alone:Press the remote control “SEARCH” button. Refer to the above for the subsequentprocess and operation.

Playing Discs


31

Skipping to a predetermined screenYou can start playing a disc beginning with a registered predetermined screen. Some discs may not be compatible with this function.For the predetermined screen of each disc, refer to the guide accompanying it.

Method using screen and remote control:Highlight the “RETURN” switch on the screen with the remote control joystick, thenpress the “ENTER” button. Playback will start at the predetermined screen.

Method using remote control alone:Press the “RETURN” button on the remote control. Playback will start at the prede-termined screen.

Displaying each disc’s menu on the screenYou can display the menu stored in the disc.Menus and their contents differ from disc to disc. After displaying a menu using the method below, follow the indications that each discwill show on its screen. Some discs may not allow you to select the top menu. For further details, please refer to the guide accompa-nying each disc.

Method using screen and remote control:With the remote control joystick, highlight the “T. MENU” switch on the screen whendisplaying the top menu, or the “MENU” switch when displaying other menus. Thenpress the remote control “ENTER” button. The top menu or other menus will appearon the screen.

Method using the remote control alone:Press the “TOP MENU” button to display the top menu, or the “MENU” button to dis-play other menus.

Playing Discs


32

Changing the audio languageYou can select a desired audio language from those available with the disc currently loaded in the player.

Method using screen and remote control:Highlight the “AUDIO” switch on the screen with the remote control joystick, thenpress the “ENTER” button. The display will switch to the audio language selectionscreen.

Click the “ ” end of the remote control joystick to highlight the desired language onthe screen and then press the “ENTER” button. To revert to the original videoscreen, highlight the “ ” switch with the joystick, and then press the “ENTER” but-ton.

Method using remote control alone:Press the remote control “AUDIO” button. Refer to the above for the subsequent op-eration.

Playing Discs


33

Changing the subtitle languageYou can select a desired subtitle language from those available with the disc currently in the player.

Method using screen and remote control:Highlight the “S. TITLE” switch on the screen with the remote control joystick, thenpress the “ENTER” button. The display will switch to the subtitle language selectionscreen.

Click the “ ” end of the remote control joystick to highlight the desired language onthe screen, then press the “ENTER” button. To revert to the original video screen,highlight the “ ” switch with the joystick, and then press the “ENTER” button.

Method using remote control alone:Press the “SUBTITLE” button on the remote control. Refer to the above for the sub-sequent operation.

NOTEIf you select “OFF” in the above operation, no subtitle is displayed on thescreen.

Playing Discs


34

Image angle selection on multi-angle recorded scenesIf you play back a DVD video disc containing scenes recorded using the multi-angle technology, you can enjoy viewing them from dif-ferent angles. For example, you can view the image of the same mountain from both the right and left sides.Some discs may not be compatible with this function.

Method using screen and remote control:Highlight the “ANGLE” switch on the screen with the remote control joystick, thenpress the “ENTER” button. The display will switch to the angle selection screen.

Click the “ ” end of the remote control joystick to highlight the desired angle on thescreen, then press the “ENTER” button. To revert to the original video screen, high-light the “ ” switch with the joystick, and then press the “ENTER” button.

Method using remote control alone:Press the “ANGLE” button on the remote control. Refer to the above for the subse-quent operation.

NOTEThe default setting is “01” for all multi-angle recorded scenes.You may have to wait a short while for the change in angle to take place.You can make multi-angle scenes identifiable with the angle mark shown onthe display screen. For details of the method, refer to Page 47.

Playing Discs


35

Selecting a dynamic range control settingYou can reduce (or compress) the difference between the maximum and minimum sound levels for your listening comfort during play-back of a disc. There are three settings available, each having a different level of compression. If you select the “MAX” setting, thedynamic range control lowers the maximum sound level while raising the minimum sound level. This makes the audio sounds gentlerto your ears.

Highlight the “DRC” switch on the screen with the remote control joystick, then pressthe “ENTER” button. The display will switch to the dynamic range control selectionscreen.

Click the “ ” end of the remote control joystick. Each time it is clicked, the settingchanges in the following sequence:

NOTEThe default setting of the dynamic range control is “02 STANDARD”.

With the desired setting selected, press the “ENTER” button.To revert to the original video screen, highlight the “ ” switch with the joystick, andthen press the “ENTER” button.

01 OFF 03 MAX

02 STANDARD

Playing Discs


36

Playing Video CDsStarting playback

With the ignition switch in the “ACC” or “ON” position, insert the CD into the disc slot of the DVD player, with the label side facing up.The player automatically starts playing the disc.If a disc is already in the player, press the remote control “DVD • CD” button on your remote control to start playback.

Stopping playback


Method using remote control alone:Press the remote control “STOP ( )” button.

Pausing


Method using remote control alone:Press the remote control “PAUSE • PLAY ( )” button.

To restart playback, perform either of the above operations again.

Playing Discs


37

Fast-forwarding



When you perform either of the above operations while the player is in pause mode,the disc advances slowly.

Fast-reversing



Playing Discs


38

Skipping tracks forwardThe data recorded on video CDs is divided into fragments called “tracks”. These tracks are given specific numbers, which are indicatedin the guide accompanying each disc. You can advance the disc skipping a track or tracks as follows:

Method using screen and remote control:Highlight the “ ” switch on the screen with the remote control joystick, thenbriefly press the “ENTER” button. The disc skips the current track and advances tothe beginning of the next track. Repeat this operation as many times as necessaryto reach the desired track.


NOTE (Ver 2.0 video CD only)Track skipping is not possible with some Ver 2.0 video CDs. For informationon track skipping of each Ver 2.0 video CD, refer to the guide accompanying it.

Playing Discs


39

Skipping tracks backward

Method using screen and remote control:Highlight the “ ” switch on the screen with the remote control joystick, thenbriefly press the “ENTER” button. The disc reverses to the beginning of the currenttrack. If you briefly press the button again, the disc reverses to the beginning of thepreceding track. Repeat this operation as many times as necessary to reach the de-sired track.


NOTE (Ver 2.0 video CD only)Track skipping is not possible with some Ver 2.0 video CDs. For informationon track skipping of each Ver 2.0 video CD, refer to the guide accompanying it.

Skipping to a predetermined screen (Ver 2.0 video CD only)You can start playing a disc beginning with a registered predetermined screen. Some discs may not be compatible with this function.For the predetermined screen of each disc, refer to the guide accompanying it.

Method using screen and remote control:Highlight the “RETURN” switch on the screen with the remote control joystick, thenpress the “ENTER” button. Playback will start at the predetermined screen.

Method using remote control only:Press the “RETURN” button on the remote control. Playback will start at the prede-termined screen.

Playing Discs


40

Sound channel (MAIN/SUB) selection

Highlight the “AUDIO” switch on the screen with the remote control joystick, thenpress the “ENTER” button once or as many times as necessary to select the desiredsound channel. Each time you press the “ENTER” button, the sound channel willchange in the following sequence:

NOTEThe default sound channel setting is “MAIN/SUB”.

Playing Music CDsStarting playback

With the ignition switch in the “ACC” or “ON” position, insert the CD into the disc slot of the DVD player, with the label surface facingup. The player automatically starts playing the disc.If a disc is already in the player, press the remote control “DVD • CD” button on your remote control to start playback.

Stopping playbackTo stop playback of a music CD, perform the following:

Press the remote control “OFF” button.Press the “Eject ( )” button on the DVD player.

SUB MAIN

MAIN/SUB

Playing Discs


41

Fast-forwarding

Method using screen and remote control:Highlight the “ ” switch on the screen with the remote control joystick, thenpress the “ENTER” button continuously.

Method using remote control alone:Press the remote control “TRACK ( )” button continuously.

Fast-reversing

Method using screen and remote control:Highlight the “ ” switch on the screen with the remote control joystick, thenpress the “ENTER” button continuously.

Method using remote control alone:Press the remote control “TRACK ( )” button continuously.

RPT

Playing Discs


42

Skipping tracks forwardYou can advance the disc skipping one or more tracks as follows:

Method using screen and remote control:Highlight the “ ” switch on the screen with the remote control joystick, thenbriefly press the “ENTER” button. The disc skips the current track and advances tothe beginning of the next track. Repeat this operation as many times as necessaryto reach the desired track.


Skipping tracks backward

Method using screen and remote control:Highlight the “ ” switch on the screen with the remote control joystick, thenpress the “ENTER” button. The disc reverses to the beginning of the current track.If you briefly press the button again, the disc reverses to the beginning of the pre-ceding track. Repeat this operation as many times as necessary to reach the desiredtrack.


RPT

Playing Discs


43

Repeat playbackIf you want to listen to the currently playing track again, perform the following:

Highlight the “RTP” switch on the screen with the remote control joystick, then pressthe “ENTER” button.The repeat-play mode will be cancelled if you press the “ENTER” button again.

Random playbackYou can play all of the tracks on the disc currently in the player in a random order by doing the following:

Highlight the “RDM” switch on the screen with the remote control joystick, then pressthe “ENTER” button.The random playback will be cancelled if you press the “ENTER” button again.

Playing Discs


44

ScanThe scan mode lets you listen to the first 10 seconds of each track on the disc in succession. Do the following to scan-play the disc:

Highlight the “SCAN” switch on the screen with the remote control joystick, thenpress the “ENTER” button.The scan mode will be cancelled if you press the “ENTER” button again.

Playing Discs


45

We recommend that you make these initial settings before enjoying DVD video discs with your Rear Seat Entertainment System inorder to eliminate the inconvenience of making selections and settings each time you play a disc.

DVD language (ENGLISH)Audio language (ENGLISH)Subtitle language (ENGLISH)Angle mark (ON)Viewer restriction level (8)Password

NOTEThe settings shown in ( ) above are default settings made before shipment from the factory. When you highlight the “DE-FAULT” switch on the “SETUP MENU” screen with the remote control joystick and then press the “ENTER” button, all set-tings return to the default settings.Some discs already contain audio language and other settings. These settings take priority over your settings.If the vehicle’s power supply is interrupted due to, for example, disconnection of the battery or a blown fuse, all your set-tings will be cancelled and the system will revert to the factory settings. If this happens, make your settings again.

Perform these settings from the SETUP MENU screen on the display. To access the SETUP MENU screen, do the following:

Method using screen and remote control:Highlight the “SET UP” switch on the screen with the remote control joystick, thenpress the “ENTER” button. The display will switch to the SETUP MENU screen.

Method using remote control alone:Press the remote control “SETUP” button.

Initial Settings


46

Setting DVD/Audio/Subtitle LanguageThe following languages are available for setting:

ENGLISHFRENCHSPANISHGERMANITALIANDUTCHJAPANESEOTHERS

On the SETUP MENU screen, highlight a language mode (DVD, Audio, or Subtitlemode) for which you wish to set a language using the remote control joystick andthen press the “ENTER” button. Once the language mode has been selected, youcan now set the desired language by highlighting it with the joystick and then press-ing the “ENTER” button. The switch color of the set language changes from white togray.Do the same for the remaining language modes.To revert to the SETUP MENU screen, highlight the “ ” switch with the joystick,and then press the “ENTER” button.

* This figure shows the screen for setting the audio language.

Initial Settings


47

If you wish to set a language not included in the list of languages that appears onthe SETUP MENU screen, highlight “OTHERS” in the second step above and enterthe code of the desired language (refer to the language code list on Page 55) usingthe joystick. After entering the code, press the “ENTER” button.To revert to the SETUP MENU screen, highlight the “ ” switch with the joystick,and then press the “ENTER” button.

* This figure shows the screen for setting the audio language.

Setting the Angle Mark Display

This setting allows you to decide whether or not the angle mark is to be displayedon the screen. If you select “ON” in the procedure below, the angle mark is displayedat the top left portion of the screen whenever a multi-angle recorded scene is en-countered during playback. Refer to Page 34 for information on the multi-angle re-corded scenes.

Angle mark

Initial Settings


48

On the SETUP MENU screen, highlight “ANGLE MARK” with the remote control joy-stick, followed by pressing the “ENTER” button. Then, the angle mark displayswitches between “ON” and “OFF” each time the “ENTER” button is pressed. Selecteither “ON” or “OFF” as desired.

NOTEImage angle selection is not possible for DVD video discs that do not con-tain multi-angle recorded scenes.You can enjoy multi-angle recorded scenes by changing their angle evenwhen “OFF” is set for the angle mark display.

Setting the Viewer Restriction LevelIf you make this setting, certain scenes contained in the DVD video disc in the player are prevented from appearing on the screen. Thehighest restriction level is 1 and the lowest is 8.

NOTEThis setting is not effective for discs without a pre-programmed viewer restriction feature.

With an appropriate DVD video disc loaded in the player, access the SETUP MENUscreen. Highlight “PARENTAL LOCK” with the remote control joystick, then pressthe “ENTER” button. The display will change to the “PERSONAL CODE” screen.

Initial Settings


49

Enter your four-digit password using the joystick, then press the “ENTER” button.The display will change to the “RESTRICTION LEVEL” screen.Select a restriction level number (1 – 8) with the joystick, then press the “ENTER”button. The switch color of the set number changes from white to gray.To return to the SETUP MENU screen, highlight the “ ” switch with the joystick,and then press the “ENTER” button.NOTE

No default has been set for the password. The “PERSONAL CODE” screenwill show “ ”. Register your password as instructed in “Password regis-tration” below.Entry of a wrong password results in an “ INCORRECT CODE” message.If this message appears, you cannot continue the viewer restriction settingoperation unless you re-enter the correct password. (Refer to Page 54.)If you forget your password, return the system to the state before register-ing the password. The method for doing this is described in NOTE of “Pass-word registration” below. Next, register a new password.

Password registrationUse this method to register your password, which is necessary when setting the viewer restriction level.

With a DVD video disc loaded in the player, access the SETUP MENU screen. High-light the “PARENTAL LOCK” with the remote control joystick, then press the “EN-TER” button. The display will change to the “PERSONAL CODE” screen.Enter a numerical four-digit password using the joystick, then press the “ENTER”button.NOTEIf necessary, you can return the system to the state before registration of thepassword by doing the following:On the “PERSONAL CODE” screen, highlight the first digit position with thejoystick, and then click the “ ” mark end of the joystick 10 times. The screenwill show “ ”, indicating that no password has been set.

Initial Settings


50

You can enjoy TV games from a home-use TV game machine or video programs from a video tape player with the Rear Seat Enter-tainment System if such an external device is connected to one of the external device jacks of the system. For further details, refer tothe instruction manual provided by the manufacturer of each external device.

Before you can use an external source device connected to the system, push theremote control’s “VIDEO” button.The external device jacks are located on the left side wall behind the second-rowseat. Open the cover to use the jacks.There are three jacks individually marked with different colors to identify their usesas follows:

Yellow: external video devicesRed: external audio devicesWhite: external audio devices

Of the three accessory power outlets provided in your vehicle, the one located nextto the external device jacks can be used to supply power to an external device.When using the power outlet, be sure to read the “Accessory power outlets” sectionin chapter 6 of the Owner’s Manual.

Keep the cover closed when the external device jacks are not in use.Be sure to connect only appropriate plugs that fit the jacks. Doing other-wise could cause electrical failures or short circuits in the system.Do not allow spilled drinks or other foreign matter to get into the externaldevice jacks. That could cause failure of the system.Rear-seat passengers must be careful not to hit connected plugs withtheir body or anything else; failure of the system could result.

12

S00120

Connecting External Devices to Your Rear Seat Entertainment System

1) External device jacks2) Accessory power outlet


51

In addition to the function that allows you to adjust the display color and other esthetic conditions, the Rear Seat Entertainment Systemhas a function that enables you to select the display mode (normal and wide screens) according to your preference. Use the followingmethods for the adjustment and selection.

Display Condition AdjustmentYou can adjust the display conditions with respect to the following items:

BrightnessContrastTone (gradation)Color (balance)

NOTETone and color adjustments are not possible when a music CD is loaded in the player.This setting is defaulted to medium within the adjustable range for each of the above adjustment items.

Adjusting method

Press the remote control “DISPLAY” button. The display condition adjustmentscreen will appear.Highlight the desired adjustment item with the joystick, and then click either the “ ”or “ ” end of the joystick referring to the table below. (Clicking the “ ” end resultsin “–” direction adjustments and clicking the “ ” end results in “+” direction adjust-ments.)Set each adjustment by selecting the “ENTER” switch on the screen or pressing theremote control “ENTER” button.

* This figure shows the screen when a DVD vid-eo disc or video CD is loaded in the player.

Adjusting Display Conditions and Selecting Display Mode


52

NOTESelect the “DEFAULT” switch to revert to a default setting.

Display Mode SelectionThe following three display modes are available for your selection:

NormalWide 1Wide 2

NOTEYou cannot change the display mode when a music CD is loaded in the player.The default display mode setting is “Wide 1”.

Item “+” direction (“ ”) “–” direction (“ ”)

BRIGHTNESS Brighter Darker

CONTRAST Stronger contrast Weaker contrast

TONE Steeper tone gradation Gentler tone gradation

COLOR Stronger green colors Stronger red colors



53

Selecting method

* This figure shows a screen image when the “WIDE 1” mode is selected.

Each time you press the remote control “DISPLAY MODE” button, the mode chang-es in the following sequence:

Release the “DISPLAY MODE” button; 6 seconds later, a full screen will be dis-played in the selected mode.

NORMAL WIDE2

WIDE1



54

The Rear Seat Entertainment System dis-plays one of the following messageswhenever it detects the relevant error con-dition. If an error message is displayed,take the appropriate action that is indicat-ed on this page.

Cause: A wrong password (personalcode) has been entered.Remedy: Enter the correct password (re-fer to Page 49).

Cause: The disc has been inserted with the la-

bel side down.The disc is dirty.The disc is incompatible with the sys-tem.

Remedy: Check the inserted disc for anyof the above causes. Correctly insert,clean or change the disc as necessary.

Cause: The inserted disc is of an inappro-priate region code.Remedy: Use only a disc marked “ALL” or“1”.

Cause: Operational obstruction or other

mechanical fault has occurred during discinsertion or ejection.Remedy: Have the system inspected byyour SUBARU dealer.

Cause: Remote control “DVD • CD” but-ton has been pressed when there is nodisc in the player.Remedy: Load a disc into the player.

Error Messages


55

Language Code

Afar 0101

Abkhazian 0102

Afrikaans 0106

Amharic 0113

Arabic 0118

Assamese 0119

Aymara 0125

Azerbaijani 0126

Bashkir 0201

Byelorussian 0205

Bulgarian 0207

Bihari 0208

Bislama 0209

Bengali; Bangla 0214

Tibetan 0215

Breton 0218

Catalan 0301

Corsican 0315

Czech 0319

Welsh 0325

Danish 0401

German 0405

Bhutani 0426

Greek 0512

English 0514

Esperanto 0515

Spanish 0519

Estonian 0520

Basque 0521

Persian 0601

Finnish 0609

Fiji 0610

Faroese 0615

French 0618

Frisian 0625

Irish 0701

Language Code

Scots Gaelic 0704

Galician 0712

Guarani 0714

Gujarati 0721

Hausa 0801

Hindi 0809

Croatian 0818

Hungarian 0821

Armenian 0825

Interlingua 0901

Indonesian (formerly in) 0914

Interlingua 0905

Inupiak 0911

Icelandic 0919

Italian 0920

Inuktitut 0921

iw Hebrew (formerly iw) 0923

Japanese 1001

Language Code

Language/Code List


56

Yiddish (formerly ji) 1009

Javanese 1023

Georgian 1101

Kazakh 1111

Greenlandic 1112

Cambodian 1113

Kannada 1114

Korean 1115

Kashmiri 1119

Kurdish 1121

Kirghiz 1125

Latin 1201

Lingala 1214

Laothian 1215

Lithuanian 1220

Latvian, Lettish 1222

Malagasy 1307

Maori 1309

Language Code

Macedonian 1311

Malayalam 1312

Mongolian 1314

Moldavian 1315

Marathi 1318

Malay 1319

Maltese 1320

Burmese 1325

Nauru 1401

Nepali 1405

Dutch 1412

Norwegian 1415

Occitan 1503

(Afan) Oromo 1513

Oriya 1518

Punjabi 1601

Polish 1612

Pashto, Pushto 1619

Language Code

Portuguese 1620

Quechua 1721

Rhaeto-Romance 1813

Kirundi 1814

Romanian 1815

Russian 1821

Kinyarwanda 1823

Sanskrit 1901

Sindhi 1904

Sangho 1907

Serbo-Croatian 1908

Sinhalese 1909

Slovak 1911

Slovenian 1912

Samoan 1913

Shona 1914

Somali 1915

Albanian 1917

Language Code

Language/Code List


57

Serbian 1918

Siswati 1919

Sesotho 1920

Sundanese 1921

Swedish 1922

Swahili 1923

Tamil 2001

Telugu 2005

Tajik 2007

Thai 2008

Tigrinya 2009

Turkmen 2011

Tagalog 2012

Setswana 2014

Tonga 2015

Turkish 2018

Tsonga 2019

Tatar 2020

Language Code

Twi 2023

Uighur 2107

Ukrainian 2111

Urdu 2118

Uzbek 2126

Vietnamese 2209

Volapuk 2215

Wol’of’ 2315

Xhosa 2408

Yoruba 2515

Zhuang 2601

Chinese 2608

Zulu 2621

Language Code

Language/Code List


This supplement contains the descriptions andinstructions for the Monitor System. Please read this supplement carefully beforeusing your monitor system.Please keep this supplement with your Owner’sManual and leave it in the vehicle at the time ofresale. The next owner will need the informationit contains.

FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPANis a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.

Copyright © 2006, FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.

Tribeca_Monitor-06.qxd 06.2.22 3:20 PM


Contents

1

Safety Warnings.......................................................................2

Before Use ................................................................................3

Control Button Names ............................................................5

Displaying Vehicle Information Screen .................................6

Displaying Vehicle Information and Programming VehicleSystem Functions.................................................................8

Displaying fuel consumption information and programming forthe automatic alarm display ......................................................8

� Displaying fuel consumption information ....................................8� Programming automatic alarm display for low remaining fuel

level ............................................................................................9Displaying, retaining, and erasing driving record data ..............11

� Displaying driving record data ..................................................11� Retaining driving record data ....................................................12� Erasing driving record data ........................................................14� Displaying retained driving record data list ..............................16� Retaining driving record data while viewing a retained driving

record data list ..........................................................................17� Erasing driving record data while viewing a retained driving

record data list ..........................................................................19Displaying three meters ................................................................21Maintenance schedule ..................................................................22

� Programming maintenance schedule ........................................22Programming vehicle system functions ......................................26

� Programming display and answerback beep ............................26� Touch panel sensing position adjustment ................................28� Keyless entry system programming ..........................................30

� Programming other vehicle system functions ..........................31� Alarm system and shock sensor................................................33

The calculator functions ................................................................34The calendar functions ..................................................................36

� Displaying calendar ..................................................................36� Adding a memo ........................................................................37� Deleting a memo ......................................................................39

Displaying Statellite Radio Source ......................................40

Adjusting Brightness/Contrast ............................................42

Adjusting brightness/contrast ......................................................42

Tribeca_Monitor-06.qxd 06.2.22 3:20 PM Page 1


Safety Warnings

2

You will find a number of WARNINGs, CAUTIONs and

NOTEs in this supplement.

These safety warnings alert you to potential hazards that

could result in injury to you or others.

Please read these safety warnings as well as all other

portions of this supplement carefully in order to gain a

better understanding of how to use your Monitor system

safely.

NOTEA NOTE gives information or suggestions how to make

better use of your Monitor system.

A WARNING indicates a situation in which serious

injury or death could result if the warning is ignored.

WARNING

A CAUTION indicates a situation in which injury or

damage to your vehicle including Monitor system, or

both, could result if the caution is ignored.

CAUTION



3

� Precautions when using the system

Before Use

Never disassemble or modify the monitor

Any attempt to disassemble or modify the monitor

could lead to a fire, an electric shock, or some other

type of accident.

Do not continue using the monitor if it malfunctions

If the system shows any sign of malfunctioning (for

example, the monitor gives no picture), stop using it

immediately and contact the nearest SUBARU dealer.

Continuing to use the system could lead to a fire, an

electric shock, or some other type of accident.

If the monitor gets contaminated, emits smoke or an

odd smell, stop using it

If a foreign object gets inside the system, liquid is

spilled onto the system, or the system emits smoke or

an unusual smell, stop using it immediately and

contact the nearest SUBARU dealer. Continuing to use

the system could lead to a fire, an electric shock, or

some other type of accident.

CAUTION

The displays contain mercury. Therefore, the displays

must be removed before vehicle disposal. Once the

displays have been removed, please reuse, recycle or

dispose of them as hazardous waste.

CAUTION

Read this manual first

Read this supplement carefully before using your

monitor system. We are not liable for accidents or

other problems resulting from failure to follow the

instructions in this supplement.

Avoid operating the monitor while driving

You should stop the vehicle in a safe place beforeoperating the monitor. For safety’s sake, some of themonitor’s functions cannot be used unless the vehicleis stationary.

Look at the monitor only when necessary

When you need to look at the monitor, do so for theshortest time possible. Looking away from the roadfor too long could lead to an accident.

Keep the volume low enough for you to hear outside

sounds

Keep the system’s volume level low enough for you tobe able to hear outside sounds while driving. To dootherwise may mean that you are unable to reactappropriately to traffic conditions thus resulting in anaccident.

WARNING



4

Before Use

� About the monitor

•Subjecting the control buttons or liquid crystal display toexcessive shock could result in monitor deformation orother damage.

•Keep any heat source (including lighted cigarettes) awayfrom the monitor. If a heat source is brought into contactwith the monitor’s cabinet and panel, they could bedeformed or otherwise degraded.

• In extreme cold, the monitor may operate sluggishly andthe display may dim. Such conditions do not indicate aproblem. They will disappear when the cabin temperaturerises to a normal temperature.

•Tiny black and white dots may occasionally appear in theliquid crystal display. These dots are a normal characteristicof the display. They do not indicate a problem.

•When the monitor’s display requires cleaning, gently wipe itwith a silicone cloth or other soft cloth. If necessary, spraythe cloth with neutral cleaning fluid. Be sure to wipe awayany cleaning fluid left on the display surface. Do not spraythe cleaning fluid directly onto the display surface. Sprayingcleaning fluid directly onto the display surface could causean adverse effect on internal components. It is also not agood idea to wipe the display surface with a stiff cloth orattempt to clean it using thinners, alcohol, or any othervolatile solvent. Doing so could leave scratches and/or erasethe control button labels.

•Do not allow the monitor to get wet. If it gets wet(allowing, for example, to a spilled drink or wet umbrella),its internal electronic circuitry may malfunction.

• In hot weather, cool the passenger compartment downbefore using the monitor. The liquid crystal display operatescorrectly at temperatures between 32°F and 140°F (0°C and60°C). When the temperature exceeds 140°F (60°C), themonitor’s circuit protection function is activated, causing thedisplay to dim.



5

Control Button Names

x

This button is used to display the menu screen of your navigationsystem.See the Owner’s Manual Supplement for the navigation system.

c

This button is used to switch the screen to a navigation systemscreen from any other screen.See the Owner’s Manual Supplement for the navigation system.

v

This button is used to zoom in the map displayed on the screen.

b

This button is used to display the Audio or RSE (Rear SeatEntertainment) screen.

n

This button is used to display the vehicle information screen.

m

This button is used to adjust the brightness and contrast of the imageas well as to display a calendar (see Page 36 through 39, 42).If the system has automatically turned down the brightness in orderto prevent excessive brightness following the illumination ofheadlights or parking lights, pressing this button for more than onesecond will return the display to the standard brightness level.

For further details on the MENU, MAP and DEST buttons, refer to theOwner’s Manual Supplement for the navigation system.

z

This button is used to display the destination screen of yournavigation system.See the Owner’s Manual Supplement for the navigation system.



6

Displaying Vehicle Information Screen

The vehicle information screen provides a variety of information on your vehicle and driving. It also gives

ways to program certain functions available in your vehicle.

1 First, press the button, then select any of the keys on the screen.

The screen displays the current fuel consumption rate, average fuel consumptionrate, and the range you can drive on the remaining fuel. See Pages 8 through 10.

The screen displays the driving record data. The monitor system can retain the recorddata. See Pages 11 through 20.

The screen displays the reading of the following three meters: average fuelconsumption rate, current fuel consumption rate and throttle opening percentage.See Page 21.

You can program your maintenance schedule and other maintenance-related itemsfrom this screen. See Pages 22 through 25.

You can use a calculator. You can also convert units, for example, between miles andkilometers.

You can program certain monitor and other system functions. See Pages 26 through33.



7

NOTE• You can turn the outside air temperature display on or off in the map screen by selecting the key. See Page 26.• You may not be able to use the vehicle information screen if data cannot be properly retrieved from the relevant vehicle systems.

Displaying Vehicle Information Screen



8

Displaying Vehicle Information and Programming Vehicle System Functions

Displaying fuel consumption information and programming for the automatic alarm display

� Displaying fuel consumption information

Use the following procedure to display the current fuel consumption rate, average fuel consumption rate,and range you can drive on the remaining fuel.

1 Select .The fuel consumption information screen will be displayed.

This completes the procedure.

NOTE• Current and average fuel consumption rates will change all time due to driving and other conditions. The displayed data, including

remaining fuel range data, may be different from the actual values. It is advisable that you refuel well in advance of reaching a displayeddistance.

• Displayed current and average fuel consumption rates are based on estimates during running, not on accurate measurements.• The average fuel consumption rate is associated with the driving after the last resetting of each trip meter. If the A or B trip meter is

reset, the average fuel consumption rate will also be reset. After resetting the trip meter, the average fuel consumption rate will not bedisplayed until the vehicle has been driven approximately 1 mile from the reset point.

Press the button.



9

� Programming automatic alarm display for low remaining fuel level

You can program the display to make it automatically alert you of the correspondingly low fuel levelremaining.

1 Select .

2 Select for the desired alarm display item (“FUEL“). The selected

should change to .


Press the button and then select .

Tribeca_Monitor-06.qxd 06.2.24 9:33 AM Page 9


10


3 Select .


NOTE• If is displayed for “FUEL“ (remaining fuel level), the automatic alarm display function has been activated for that item. To

deactivate the function, select . The indication should change from to .• The current fuel consumption rate alarm will be displayed only when the navigation screen is being used.

• The screen displaying an alarm looks like this:



11

Displaying, retaining, and erasing driving record data

� Displaying driving record data

Use the following procedure to display the current driving record data (distance, time, and average fuelconsumption rate).

1 Select .The driving record screen will be displayed.


NOTE• If a vehicle’s trip meter is reset, the corresponding drive distance and time display (“TRIP A“ or “TRIP B“) will also be reset.• The drive time display is associated with the amount of time the ignition switch has stayed on since the trip meter was reset.• When the vehicle battery is removed for repair or other purposes, the time is reset, but the distance is not reset. To reset the distance,

press the trip meter knob. Please refer to the vehicle owner’s manual for further details. • The maximum time display possible is 240 hours (10 days).


Press the button.



12


� Retaining driving record data

Use the following procedure to retain the current driving record data.

1 Select below the trip meter designation (TRIP A or TRIP B) of

the driving record data you wish to keep.

2 Select or to specify the number of the history frame (data

storage location) where the driving record data are to be retained.

3 Select .




13

4 will appear, requesting you to confirm your selection. Select it.

5 Select .


NOTE• A maximum of three different driving record data sets can be retained for each of the trip meters (TRIP A and TRIP B).• Driving record data can be retained while viewing the retained driving record data list (see Page 17).• If the data storage location (history frame) specified in Step 2 is already occupied by data, this data will be replaced with new data once

you have confirmed Step 4.• When driving record data have been successfully retained in a history frame, the history frame’s heading will change from a number to

the date of data retention.




14


� Erasing driving record data

Use the following procedure to erase retained driving record data.

1 Select below the trip meter designation (TRIP A or TRIP B)

about which you wish to erase the driving record data.

2 Select or to specify the number of the history frame (data

storage location) where the driving record data to be erased are

retained.

3 Select .




15


5 Select .


NOTEThere is no way to restore erased driving record data. Please use this procedure with caution so as not to accidentally erase any importantdata.




16


� Displaying retained driving record data list

Use the following procedure to display a retained driving record data list.

1 Select for the trip meter (TRIP A or TRIP B) about which you

wish to display the list.


NOTESelecting on a driving record data list screen will cause the monitor system to go back to the driving record screen.




17

� Retaining driving record data while viewing a retained driving record data list

Use the following procedure if you want to retain driving record data while viewing a relevant data list.


wish to retain the driving record data.

2 Select .





18


3 Select the history frame (data storage location) in which the data are to

be retained.

4 will appear, requesting you to confirm your selection. Select it if

the selection is correct.

5 Select .


NOTE• A maximum of three different driving record data sets can be retained for each of the trip meters (TRIP A and TRIP B).• When the data storage location (history frame) specified in Step 3 is already occupied by data, this data will be replaced with new data

once you have confirmed Step 4.• When the driving record data has been successfully retained in a history frame, the history frame’s heading will change from a number

to the date of the data retention.• Data retention is cancelled if you select in the “Select data “ box.



19

� Erasing driving record data while viewing a retained driving record data list

Use the following procedure if you want to erase retained driving record data while viewing a driving recorddata list.


wish to erase the driving record data.

2 Select .





20


3 Select the history frame (data storage location) where the data to be

erased are retained.


5 Select .


NOTE• There is no way to restore erased driving record data. Please use this procedure with caution so as not to accidentally erase any

important data.• Data erasure is cancelled if you select in the “Select data “ box.



21

Displaying three meters

Use the following procedure to display the three meters showing the average fuel consumption rate,current fuel consumption rate and throttle opening percentage.

1 Select . The three meters will be displayed on the screen.


NOTE• The average fuel consumption rate, current fuel consumption rate and throttle opening percentage indications are based on data

retrieved from the relevant vehicle systems. For this reason, the status represented by meter readings may lag behind the currentstatus.

• If data cannot be properly retrieved from the relevant vehicle systems, there will be no readings displayed on the meters.


Press the button.



22


Maintenance schedule

� Programming maintenance schedule

You can program your maintenance schedule into the monitor system for any of the following items, interms of period and distance intervals.- Maintenance- Fluids check- Tire pressure- Engine oil

Use the following procedure:

1 Select .The maintenance information screen will be displayed.

2 Select the item (maintenance, fluids check, tire pressure, or engine oil)

for which you wish to program the schedule.

Press the button.



23

3 Select to enter the maintenance schedule date.

4 Select .

5 will appear on the screen. Select it if the date is correct.

6 Select .

7 Select to enter the maintenance schedule distance.

8 Select .

9 will appear on the screen. Select it if the distance is correct.




10 Select .


When a vehicle maintenance schedule is programmed

When a maintenance date alone is programmed, the monitor will remind you of the date by a message on thescreen one month before, one week before, and on the day maintenance is due. When maintenance distance aloneis programmed, a reminder message will be displayed 500 mile before, 100 mile before, and upon expiration of thedistance. When both maintenance date and distance are programmed, the first message will be displayed uponreaching either the first date or distance, whichever comes earlier. This also applies to the second and third remindertimes.

• If you want to dismiss the reminder message, select in the reminder message box.The reminder message will not be displayed until reaching either the next date or distance, whichever comes first.

• If you want to display the reminder message later, select in the reminder message box.The reminder message will not be displayed until the engine is restarted.

24




25

NOTE• You may program in either the date first (Steps 3 through 5) or distance (Steps 6 through 9). You may also program in a date or a

distance only.• Do not fail to select whenever a date or distance has been entered, otherwise the entry will not be enabled.• The date or distance entry can be cancelled by selecting in Step 3 or 7.• The programmed date and/or distance will be displayed in the maintenance information screen.• The icon(s) in the reminder messages for expired date and/or distance will be displayed in red.• The date or distance entry can not be changed by selecting .• An example of the reminder message is shown below.

When maintenance distance is programmed• 500 miles or 100 miles before

Service reminder.• Upon expiration of maintenance distance

Warning! Permitted service distance exceeded.

When a maintenace date is programmed• One month or one week before

Service reminder.• On the programmed day

Final service reminder.• After the programmed day

Warning! Permitted service time exceeded.




26

Programming vehicle system functions

� Programming display and answerback beep

You can program the monitor system for certain display items (see below) and answerback beep using thefollowing procedure:

1 Select . The display and beep programming screen will appear.Select or set any of the following items.

BEEPSelecting or deselecting this turns the beeps on or off in response to specificoperations performed.

OUT TEMPSelecting or deselecting this turns the outside air temperature displayed in the upperright corner of the map screen on or off.

AUDIO DISPOn display screens other than AUDIO-only, it is possible to display the AUDIO as asubtitle on the screen. The time display can be set to OFF (no display), 5 sec., 10sec., or CONT. ON (continuous display). Please select the display time according toyour preference. The initialized setting is 10 sec.

DISP TIMEChoose the display time for low fuel and other automatic alarms from 10, 20, and 30seconds.





27



NOTE• Default settings for the above items vary depending on the vehicle model, version and grade.• All selections and settings become effective as soon as they are made.• The monitor system returns to the vehicle information screen when you select .• Beep selection is enabled only when a genuine SUBARU audio system is connected.• Display time can be set for the following three automatic alarm items:

- Vehicle information- Fuel remaining- Messages on restrictions during driving (“prohibited while driving“ etc.)



28

� Touch panel sensing position adjustment

You can adjust the touch panel’s sensing positions by using the following procedure:

1 Select .

2 Touch the center of the lower-left crossmark .

3 Touch the center of the upper-right crossmark .





29


4 Select if you want to save the changes.

Select if you do not want to save the changes.The monitor system will return to the vehicle information screen.


NOTE• If is selected after Step 2 or 3, following screen is displayed.

If is selected, the touch panel’s sensing positions will revert to the default positions.If is selected, the touch panel’s sensing positions will revert to the original positions.

• If you select after Step 2 or 3, you can return to the previous screen.• The adjustment performed becomes effective as soon as you make it.• At the time of delivery of the vehicle to the first user, the touch sensing positions are adjusted correctly. Use the above procedure if you

feel that they have deviated from the correct positions.



30

� Keyless entry system programming

You can program certain items related to the keyless entry system using the following procedure:

1 Select .Select or set the following items.

LOCK SIGNALThe keyless entry system has an answerback signaling function, which notifies thedriver by electronic chirp and the turn signal lights when locking or unlockingoperation performed. Please select or deselect the activation or deactivation of theelectronic chirp and turn signal lights. The electronic chirp can be selected using the“BEEP“ icon, and the turn signal lights using the “LIGHT“ icon.

RESETSelect this button to revert all settings performed on this screen to the defaultsettings.


NOTE• Each setting becomes effective as soon as you make it.• The monitor system returns to the vehicle information screen when you select .• The answerback signaling setting is only enabled when your vehicle has that function.• For detailed information on how to operate the keyless entry system, refer to your vehicle owner's manual.





31

� Programming other vehicle system functions

You can program the vehicle system functions described below by using the following procedure:


KEY ALERTSelect or deselect this key to enable or disable the key lock-in prevention function.Please see the vehicle owner’s manual for details of the key lock-in preventionfunction.

ROOMLAMP (interior light)You can choose the delay time before extinction of the interior light when the doorsare unlocked using the keyless entry system transmitter, or when the doors areclosed.

DEFOGGERYou can program the rear window defogger for two operation modes: continuous and15-minute. When the continuous operation mode is programmed, the rear windowdefogger will operate for 15 minutes, stop for two minutes, and again operate for 15minutes and so on. Even in under continuous operation mode, the defogger shuts offif certain conditions are met. (Refer to the vehicle owner’s manual for theseconditions.) In the 15-minute mode, the defogger will automatically shut off afterabout 15 minutes. You can shut it off before that time if you push the rear windowdefogger switch.





32


DEICERYou can program the windshield wiper deicer for two operation modes: continuousand 15-minute. When the continuous operation mode is programmed, pressing thewindshield wiper deicer switch means that the deicer will continue to function. It will,however, stop operating automatically if certain conditions are met. (Refer to thevehicle owner’s manual for these conditions.) In the 15-minute mode, the windshieldwiper deicer will automatically shut off after about 15 minutes. You can shut it offbefore that time if you push the switch.

RESETSelect this key to revert all the three settings you performed on this screen to thedefault settings.


NOTE• All selections and settings become effective as soon as they are made.• The monitor system returns to the vehicle information screen when you select .• Setting the windshield wiper deicer is only enabled when your vehicle has the windshield wiper deicer function.• Interior light extinction delay time can be programmed as follows:

After unlocking doors with

keyless entry transmitter After closing doors

0 SEC 0 second 0 second

SHORT 35 seconds 12 seconds

NORMAL 35 seconds 22 seconds

LONG 35 seconds 32 seconds



33

� Alarm system and shock sensor

You can activate or deactivate the alarm system and the dealer optional shock sensor. Also, you can selectthe monitoring start delay time and the sensitivity level for detection of impact to the vehicle.


ALARMSet the alarm system ON or OFF.

DELAYSet the monitoring start delay time (after closure of doors).

SHOCK SENSORUse the icon to select operation or non-operation. Select the sensitivity using the“SENSITIVITY” icon. Sensitivity can be selected from MIN to MAX, in a total of 11gradations.

NOTE• The settings for shock sensor can only be performed on a vehicle equipped with the dealer optional shock sensor.• It takes around 5 seconds for the sensitivity level to be adjusted. During this time, the security indicator light will flash to indicate the

adjustment is being performed. • If the sensitivity adjustment has not been performed correctly, the buzzer (beeping sound) will sound four times. If the buzzer continues

to sound frequently, please have the system inspected by a SUBARU dealer.





34


The calculator functions

A calculator with an 8-digit display is available. The calculator also performs unit conversionsbetween miles and kilometers, pounds and kilograms, etc.

To perform a unit conversion, enter a number, then select the key for the unit you wish to convert from, thenthe key for the unit you wish to convert to.

Example: Convert 100 miles into kilometers: 100 ➔ [mile] ➔ [km] = 160.9.. km

Below is a description of each key and what it does.


Key Description Action0–9 Numbers The numbers 0 to 9. Decimal point Begin entering numbers below the decimal point= Equals sign Display the results of the calculation+ Addition operator Perform addition– Subtraction operator Perform subtraction



35

Key Description Action÷ Division operator Perform division×× Multiplication operator Perform multiplicationMR Memory recall Retrieve a number from memory, and overwriting the current displayM+ Memory add Add the currently displayed number to the memoryC Clear Clear the currently displayed number. If you have entered a number after pressing an operator,

pressing this button returns the calculator to the state of having pressed the operatorAC All clear Return to the initial state (clear the current display, operator state, memory number, etc.)°°F Fahrenheit Convert the entered number from Celsius to Fahrenheit*°C Celsius Convert the entered number from Fahrenheit to Celsius*gal Gallons Convert the entered number from liters to gallons*L Liters Convert the entered number from gallons to liters*lb Pounds Convert the entered number from kilograms to pounds*kg Kilograms Convert the entered number from pounds to kilograms*mile Miles Convert the entered number from kilometers to miles*km Kilometers Convert the entered number from miles to kilometers*ft Feet Convert the entered number from meters to feet*m Meters Convert the entered number from feet to meters*in Inches Convert the entered number from centimeters to inches*cm Centimeters Convert the entered number from inches to centimeters*acre Acres Convert the entered number from square meters to acres*m2 Square meters Convert the entered number from acres to square meters*psi Pounds per square inch Convert the entered number from kilopascals to pounds per square inch*kPa Kilopascals Convert the entered number from pounds per square inch to kilopascals*


* Results of unit conversions may include rounding errors.



36


The calendar functions

A calendar feature is available.

� Displaying calendar

1 Select .The calendar will appear.

A mark will appear on today's date.

NOTEUse the arrow buttons ( ) to display the previous and following months.

Press the button.



37

� Adding a memo

You can add up to 20 memos to the calendar.

1 Select .

2 Select the slot you wish to add a memo to (q to @0), then select .

NOTE

Use the up and down arrows ( ) to show items y to @0.

3 Set the date for the memo.: Enter a date in DD/MM/YYYY format.

Example: 01/05/2005 “1 May 2005“ will appear in the memo. [YEAR]: Enter a date in DD/MM format.

Example: 01/05/- - - - “1 May every year“ will appear in the memo. [MONTH]: Enter a day in DD format.

Example: 01/- -/- - - - “01 of every month“ will appear in the memo. [WEEK]: Enter a day of the week.

Example: (MON) “Monday of every week“ will appear in the memo.





38

4 Select .

5 Enter the text of the memo, and select .

will appear on screen. Select it if the date is correct.Select .

6 Select .The memo icon will appear on the calendar.




39


� Deleting a memo

1 Select .

2 Select a memo to delete from the list, then select .

3 Select .

4 Select .




You can display the satellite radio source when the audio unit is in the satellite radio source mode.NOTE• Satellite radio can only be operated with the audio unit.• For detailed instructions on the operation of the audio unit, see the owner's manual furnished with the vehicle.

1 The screen displays a convenient mode as the initial setting.

2 Select .

3 The screen displays a source mode.

Displaying Satellite Radio Source

40



Displaying Satellite Radio Source

4 Select .

5 The screen displays another source mode.

6 Select to return the screen of step 3.

7 Select .

8 The screen displays the satellite radio channel preset list screen.

9 Select to return the screen of step 1.

41



42

Adjusting Brightness/Contrast

Adjusting brightness/contrast

Use the following procedure to adjust the brightness/contrast of the image on each screen:

1 Press the button.

2 Adjust the image contrast/brightness as follows:

Select and then or to adjust the brightness.Select and then or to adjust the contrast.

3 Select .

The previous screen will be displayed.


NOTE• All adjustments take effect as soon as you make them and can be visually confirmed.• The system saves the adjustments for individual screens (vehicle information screen and navigation screen) as well as for a situation

with and without illumination from headlights or parking lights.



Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures otherthan those specified herein may result in hazardous radiationexposure. In compliance with Federal Regulations, following arereproductions of labels on, or inside the product relating to laserproduct safety.

Location : Monitor top surface

FCC WARNINGThis equipment may generate or use radio frequency energy.Changes or modifications to this equipment may cause harmfulinterference unless the modifications are expressly approved in theinstruction manual. The user could lose the authority to operate thisequipment if an unauthorized change or modification is made.

NOTEThis equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limitsfor a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection againstharmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment maycause harmful interference to radio communications, if it is notinstalled and used in accordance with the instructions. However, thereis no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particularinstallation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radioor television reception, which can be determined by turning theequipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct theinterference by one or more of the following measures:• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that

to which the receiver is connected.• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

NOTE This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

CAUTION

Tribeca_Monitor-06.qxd 06.2.24 9:33 AM Page 43


Black plate (1,1)

北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 4/ 6

Foreword

Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’sManual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU inexcellent condition and to properly maintain the emission controlsystem for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to readthis manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle andits operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual,such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contactthe SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU orthe nearest SUBARU dealer.

The information, specifications and illustrations found in thismanual are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVYINDUSTRIES LTD. reserves the right to change specifications anddesigns at any time without prior notice and without incurring anyobligation to make the same or similar changes on vehiclespreviously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models andcovers all equipment, including factory installed options. Someexplanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in yourvehicle.

Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. Thenext owner will need the information found herein.

FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN

is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.

*C Copyright 2011 FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.


Black plate (2,1)



Black plate (3,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22


Black plate (3,1)


Warranties

& Warranties for U.S.A.All SUBARU vehicles distributed bySubaru of America, Inc. and sold at retailby an authorized SUBARU dealer in theUnited States come with the followingwarranties.. SUBARU Limited Warranty. Emission Control Systems Warranty. Emissions Performance Warranty

All warranty information, including detailsof coverage and exclusions, is in the“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.Please read these warranties carefully.

& Warranties for CanadaAll SUBARU vehicles distributed bySubaru Canada, Inc. and sold at retail byan authorized SUBARU dealer in Canadacome with the following warranties.. SUBARU Limited Warranty. Anti-Corrosion Warranty. Emission Control Warranty

All warranty information, including detailsof coverage and exclusions, is in the“Warranty and Service Booklet”. Pleaseread these warranties carefully.

CAUTION

. If your vehicle is equipped with anavigation system and/or RearSeat Entertainment System, thedisplays contain mercury. There-fore, the displays of the naviga-tion system and/or Rear SeatEntertainment System must beremoved before vehicle disposal.Once the displays have beenremoved, please reuse, recycleor dispose of them as hazardouswaste.

. If your vehicle is equipped withHigh Intensity Discharge (HID)headlights, the HID headlightscontain mercury. Therefore, it isnecessary to remove HID head-lights before vehicle disposal.Once removed, please reuse, re-cycle or dispose of the HID head-lights as hazardous waste.

How to use this Owner’sManual

& Using your Owner’s ManualBefore you operate your vehicle, carefullyread this manual. To protect yourself andextend the service life of your vehicle,follow the instructions in this manual.Failure to observe these instructions mayresult in serious injury and damage to yourvehicle.

This manual is composed of fourteenchapters. Each chapter begins with a brieftable of contents, so you can usually tell ata glance if that chapter contains theinformation you want.

Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRSairbagsThis chapter informs you how to use theseat and seatbelt and contains precau-tions for the SRS airbags.Chapter 2: Keys and doorsThis chapter informs you how to operatethe keys, locks and windows.Chapter 3: Instruments and controlsThis chapter informs you about the opera-tion of instrument panel indicators andhow to use the instruments and otherswitches.

1

– CONTINUED –

0


Black plate (4,1)


2

Chapter 4: Climate controlThis chapter informs you how to operatethe climate control.Chapter 5: AudioThis chapter informs you how to operateyour audio system.Chapter 6: Interior equipmentThis chapter informs you how to operateinterior equipment.Chapter 7: Starting and operatingThis chapter informs you how to start andoperate your SUBARU.Chapter 8: Driving tipsThis chapter informs you how to drive yourSUBARU in various conditions and ex-plains some safety tips on driving.Chapter 9: In case of emergencyThis chapter informs you what to do if youhave a problem while driving, such as aflat tire or engine overheating.Chapter 10: Appearance careThis chapter informs you how to keep yourSUBARU looking good.Chapter 11: Maintenance and serviceThis chapter informs you when you needto take your SUBARU to the dealer forscheduled maintenance and informs youhow to keep your SUBARU runningproperly.

Chapter 12: SpecificationsThis chapter informs you about the dimen-sions and capacities of your SUBARU.Chapter 13: Consumer information andReporting safety defectsThis chapter informs you about Tireinformation, Uniform tire quality gradingstandards and Reporting safety defects.Chapter 14: IndexThis is an alphabetical listing of all that’s inthis manual. You can use it to quickly findsomething you want to read.

& Safety warningsYou will find a number of WARNINGs,CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual.These safety warnings alert you to poten-tial hazards that could result in injury toyou or others.Please read these safety warnings as wellas all other portions of this manual care-fully in order to gain a better understand-ing of how to use your SUBARU vehiclesafely.

WARNING

A WARNING indicates a situation inwhich serious injury or death couldresult if the warning is ignored.

CAUTION

A CAUTION indicates a situation inwhich injury or damage to yourvehicle, or both, could result if thecaution is ignored.

NOTEA NOTE gives information or sugges-tions how to make better use of yourvehicle.

& Safety symbol

You will find a circle with a slash through itin this manual. This symbol means “Donot”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let thishappen”, depending upon the context.


Black plate (5,1)


& Abbreviation listYou will find several abbreviations in thismanual. The meanings of the abbrevia-tions are shown in the following list.

Abbreviation Meaning

A/C Air conditioner

A/ELR Automatic/Emergency lockingretractor

ABS Anti-lock brake system

AKI Anti knock index

ALR Automatic locking retractor

AT Automatic transmission

ATF Automatic transmission fluid

AWD All-wheel drive

DRL Daytime running light

EBD Electronic brake force distri-bution

ELR Emergency locking retractor

GAW Gross axle weight

GAWR Gross axle weight rating

GVW Gross vehicle weight

GVWR Gross vehicle weight rating

HID High intensity discharge

INT Intermittent

LATCH Lower anchors and tethers forchildren

Abbreviation Meaning

LED Light emitting diode

MIL Malfunction indicator light

MMT Methylcyclopentadienyl man-ganese tricarbonyl

OBD On-board diagnostics

RON Research octane number

SRS Supplemental restraint sys-tem

TIN Tire identification number

TPMS Tire pressure monitoring sys-tem

VDC Vehicle dynamics control

Vehicle symbols

There are some of the symbols you maysee on your vehicle.For warning and indicator lights, refer to“Warning and indicator lights” F22.

Mark Name

WARNING

CAUTION

Passengers’ windows lock

Fuel

Front fog lights

Parking lights

Hazard warning flasher

Seat heater

3

– CONTINUED –

0


Black plate (6,1)


4

Mark Name

Child restraint lower an-chorages

Child restraint top tether an-chorages

Horn

Windshield wiper deicer

Wiper intermittent

Windshield wiper and washer

Windshield wiper mist (forsingle wipe)

Rear window wiper

Rear window washer

Lights

Headlight beam leveler

Mark Name

Parking lights, tail lights, li-cense plate lights and instru-ment panel illumination

Headlights

Turn signal

Illumination brightness

Engine hood

Fan speed

Instrument panel outlets

Instrument panel outlets andfoot outlets

Foot outlets

Windshield defroster and footoutlets

Windshield defroster

Mark Name

Rear window defogger/Out-side mirror defogger

Air recirculation

Outside air

Engine oil

Washer

Door lock (transmitter)

Door unlock (transmitter)

Rear gate (transmitter)

Power folding mirror


Black plate (7,1)


Safety precautions whendriving

& Seatbelt and SRS airbag

WARNING

. All persons in the vehicle shouldfasten their seatbelts BEFOREthe vehicle starts to move. Other-wise, the possibility of seriousinjury becomes greater in theevent of a sudden stop or acci-dent.

. To obtain maximum protection inthe event of an accident, thedriver and all passengers in thevehicle should always wear seat-belts when the vehicle is moving.The SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem) airbag does not do awaywith the need to fasten seatbelts.In combination with the seat-belts, it offers the best combinedprotection in case of a seriousaccident.

Not wearing a seatbelt increasesthe chance of severe injury ordeath in a crash even when thevehicle has the SRS airbag.

. The SRS airbags deploy withconsiderable speed and force.Occupants who are out of properposition when the SRS airbagdeploys could suffer very seriousinjuries. Because the SRS airbagneeds enough space for deploy-ment, the driver should alwayssit upright and well back in theseat as far from the steeringwheel as practical while stillmaintaining full vehicle controland the front passenger shouldmove the seat as far back aspossible and sit upright and wellback in the seat.

For instructions and precautions, carefullyread the following sections.. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-belts” F1-17.. For the SRS airbag system, refer to“*SRS airbag (Supplemental RestraintSystem airbag)” F1-45.

& Child safety

WARNING

. Never hold a child on your lap orin your arms while the vehicle ismoving. The passenger cannotprotect the child from injury in acollision, because the child willbe caught between the passen-ger and objects inside the vehi-cle.

. While riding in the vehicle, in-fants and small children shouldalways be placed in one of therear seating positions recom-mended in this Owner’s Manualin an infant or child restraintsystem which is appropriate forthe child’s age, height andweight. If a child is too big for achild restraint system, the childshould sit in a REAR seat and berestrained using the seatbelts.According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seat-ing positions. Never allow a childto stand up or kneel on the seat.

. Put children aged 12 and under ina REAR seat properly restrained

5

– CONTINUED –

0


Black plate (8,1)


6

at all times in a child restraintdevice or in a seatbelt. The SRSairbag deploys with considerablespeed and force and can injure oreven kill children, especially ifthey are 12 years of age andunder and are not restrained orimproperly restrained. Becausechildren are lighter and weakerthan adults, their risk of beinginjured from deployment is great-er.

. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARDFACING CHILD SAFETY SEAT INTHE FRONT SEAT. DOING SORISKS SERIOUS INJURY ORDEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOOCLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

. Always use the child safety lockswhenever a child rides in therear. Serious injury could resultif a child accidentally opened thedoor and fell out. Refer to “Childsafety locks” F2-21.

. Always lock the passenger’s win-dows using the lock switch whenchildren are riding in the vehicle.Failure to follow this procedurecould result in injury to a childoperating the power window. Re-fer to “Power windows” F2-21.

. Never leave unattended childrenin the vehicle. They could acci-dentally injure themselves orothers through inadvertent op-eration of the vehicle. Also, onhot or sunny days, temperaturein a closed vehicle could quicklybecome high enough to causesevere or possibly fatal injuriesto them.

For instructions and precautions, carefullyread the following sections.. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-belts” F1-17.. For the child restraint system, refer to“Child restraint systems” F1-29.. For the SRS airbag system, refer to“*SRS airbag (Supplemental RestraintSystem airbag)” F1-45.

& Engine exhaust gas (carbonmonoxide)

WARNING

. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.Engine exhaust gas containscarbon monoxide, a colorlessand odorless gas which is dan-gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

. Always properly maintain the en-

gine exhaust system to preventengine exhaust gas from enter-ing the vehicle.

. Never run the engine in a closedspace, such as a garage, exceptfor the brief time needed to drivethe vehicle in or out of it.

. Avoid remaining in a parkedvehicle for a lengthy time whilethe engine is running. If that isunavoidable, then use the venti-lation fan to force fresh air intothe vehicle.

. Always keep the front ventilatorinlet grille free from snow, leavesor other obstructions to ensurethat the ventilation system al-ways works properly.

. If at any time you suspect thatexhaust fumes are entering thevehicle, have the problemchecked and corrected as soonas possible. If you must driveunder these conditions, driveonly with all windows fully open.

. Keep the rear gate closed whiledriving to prevent exhaust gasfrom entering the vehicle.


Black plate (9,1)


& Drinking and driving

WARNING

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Alcohol in the blood-stream delays your reaction andimpairs your perception, judgmentand attentiveness. If you drive afterdrinking - even if you drink just alittle - it will increase the risk ofbeing involved in a serious or fatalaccident, injuring or killing yourself,your passengers and others. Inaddition, if you are injured in theaccident, alcohol may increase theseverity of that injury.

Please don’t drink and drive.

Drunken driving is one of the mostfrequent causes of accidents. Since alco-hol affects all people differently, you mayhave consumed too much alcohol to drivesafely even if the level of alcohol in yourblood is below the legal limit. The safestthing you can do is never drink and drive.However if you have no choice but todrive, stop drinking and sober up comple-tely before getting behind the wheel.

& Drugs and driving

WARNING

There are some drugs (over thecounter and prescription) that candelay your reaction time and impairyour perception, judgment and at-tentiveness. If you drive after takingthem, it may increase your, yourpassengers’ and other persons’ riskof being involved in a serious orfatal accident.

If you are taking any drugs, check withyour doctor or pharmacist or read theliterature that accompanies the medicationto determine if the drug you are taking canimpair your driving ability. Do not driveafter taking any medications that canmake you drowsy or otherwise affect yourability to safely operate a motor vehicle. Ifyou have a medical condition that requiresyou to take drugs, please consult withyour doctor.

Never drive if you are under the influenceof any illicit mind-altering drugs. For yourown health and well-being, we urge younot to take illegal drugs in the first placeand to seek treatment if you are addictedto those drugs.

& Driving when tired or sleepy

WARNING

When you are tired or sleepy, yourreaction will be delayed and yourperception, judgment and attentive-ness will be impaired. If you drivewhen tired or sleepy, your, yourpassengers’ and other persons’chances of being involved in aserious accident may increase.

Please do not continue to drive butinstead find a safe place to rest if youare tired or sleepy. On long trips, youshould make periodic rest stops to refreshyourself before continuing on your journey.When possible, you should share thedriving with others.

7

– CONTINUED –

0


Black plate (10,1)


8

& Car phone/cell phone anddriving

CAUTION

Do not use a car phone/cell phonewhile driving; it may distract yourattention from driving and can leadto an accident. If you use a carphone/cell phone, pull off the roadand park in a safe place beforeusing your phone. In some States/Provinces, only hands-free phonesmay legally be used while driving.

& Modification of your vehicle

CAUTION

Your vehicle should not be modifiedother than with genuine SUBARUparts and accessories. Other typesof modifications could affect itsperformance, safety or durability,and may even violate governmentalregulations. In addition, damage orperformance problems resultingfrom modification may not be cov-ered under warranties.

& Driving a vehicle equippedwith a navigation system

WARNING

Do not allow the monitor to distractyour attention from driving. Also, donot operate the controls of thenavigation system while driving.The loss of attention to drivingcould lead to an accident. If youwish to operate the controls of thenavigation system, first take thevehicle off the road and stop it in asafe place.

& Driving with petsUnrestrained pets can interfere with yourdriving and distract your attention fromdriving. In a collision or sudden stop,unrestrained pets or cages can be thrownaround inside the vehicle and hurt you oryour passengers. Besides, the pets canbe hurt under these situations. It is also fortheir own safety that pets should beproperly restrained in your vehicle. Re-strain a pet with a special travelingharness which can be secured to the rearseat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrierwhich can be secured to the rear seat byrouting a seatbelt through the carrier’s

handle. Never restrain pets or pet carriersin the front passenger’s seat. For furtherinformation, consult your veterinarian,local animal protection society or petshop.

& Tire pressures

WARNING

Driving at high speeds with exces-sively low tire pressures can causethe tires to deform severely and torapidly become hot. A sharp in-crease in temperature could causetread separation, and destruction ofthe tires. The resulting loss ofvehicle control could lead to anaccident.

Check and, if necessary, adjust thepressure of each tire (including the spare)at least once a month and before any longjourney.

Check the tire pressure when the tires arecold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust thetire pressures to the values shown on thetire placard. For detailed information, referto “Tires and wheels” F11-21.


Black plate (11,1)


& California proposition 65warning

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its consti-tuents, and certain vehicle compo-nents contain or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. In addi-tion, certain fluids in vehicles andcertain components of product wearcontain or emit chemicals known tothe State of California to causecancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm.

& California Perchlorate Advi-sory

Certain vehicle components such as air-bag modules, seatbelt pretensioners andkeyless entry transmitter batteries maycontain perchlorate material. Specialhandling may apply for service or vehicleend of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

& On-road and off-road drivingThis vehicle is classified as a utilityvehicle. Utility vehicles have a significantlyhigher rollover rate than other types ofvehicles. Your vehicle has a higher groundclearance and higher center of gravity,making it more likely to roll over thanordinary passenger cars. It also handlesand maneuvers differently from otherpassenger cars. For this reason, pleaseread carefully the following section andfollow the instructions and precautions inorder to prevent serious injury or deathdue to loss of control, rollover and otheraccidents. Refer to “On-road and off-roaddriving” F8-6.

9

0


Black plate (2,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22Left Page

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —


Black plate (1,1)

Table of contents

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1

Keys and doors 2

Instruments and controls

Climate control 4

Audio 5

Interior equipment 6

Starting and operating 7

Driving tips 8

In case of emergency 9

Appearance care 10

Maintenance and service 11

Specifications 12

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13

Index 14

3

北米Model "A3170BE-A" Edited: 2011/ 4/ 6


Black plate (14,1)


12

Illustrated index

& Exterior

1) Engine hood lock release (page 11-4)2) Headlight switch (page 3-28)3) Bulb replacement (page 11-36)4) Wiper switch (page 3-34)5) Moonroof (page 2-25)6) Roof rail (if equipped) (page 8-14)7) Door locks (page 2-5)8) Tire pressure (page 11-23)9) Flat tires (page 9-6)10) Tire chains (page 8-11)11) Fog light switch (page 3-32)12) Tie-down hooks (page 9-15)13) Towing hook (page 9-14)


Black plate (15,1)


1) Rear gate (page 2-24)2) Rear wiper switch (page 3-35)3) Rear window defogger button

(page 3-37)4) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 7-3)5) Child safety locks (page 2-21)6) Tie-down hooks (page 9-15)7) Bulb replacement (page 11-36)8) Towing hook (page 9-14)

13

– CONTINUED –

0


Black plate (16,1)


14

& Interior

! Passenger compartment area

1) Seatbelt (page 1-17)2) Lower anchorages for child restraint

system (page 1-37)3) Center console (page 6-6)4) Front seat (page 1-2)5) Second-row seat (page 1-8)6) Third-row seat (page 1-13)


Black plate (17,1)


1) Cargo area light (page 6-3)2) Dome lights (page 6-2)3) Second-row center seatbelt (page 1-22)4) Sun visors (page 6-4)5) Map light (page 6-3)6) Top tether anchorages (second-row seat)

(page 1-40)7) Top tether anchorages (third-row seat)

(page 1-40)

15

– CONTINUED –

0


Black plate (18,1)


16

1) Select lever (page 7-13)2) Hazard warning flasher switch

(page 3-5)3) Multi function display (page 3-24)4) Glove box (page 6-6)5) Audio (page 5-1)6) Climate control (page 4-1)7) Cup holder (page 6-8)


Black plate (19,1)


& Instrument panel 1) Door locks (page 2-5)2) Illumination brightness control

(page 3-29)3) Remote control mirror switch

(page 3-42)Power folding mirror switch (if equipped)(page 3-43)

4) Windshield wiper deicer (page 3-36)5) Traction Control system OFF switch

(page 7-25)6) Headlight beam leveler (if equipped)

(page 3-30)7) Light control switch (page 3-27)8) Combination meter (page 3-5)9) Wiper control lever (page 3-33)10) Cruise control (page 7-29)11) Horn (page 3-44)12) SRS airbag (page 1-45)13) Tilt steering (page 3-44)14) Hood lock release knob (page 11-4)15) Fuse box (page 11-34)16) Power windows (page 2-21)

17

– CONTINUED –

0


Black plate (20,1)


18

& Light control and wiper control levers/switches 1) Parking light switch (page 3-32)2) Windshield wiper (page 3-33)3) Mist (page 3-34)4) Windshield washer (page 3-35)5) Rear window wiper and washer switch

(page 3-35)6) Wiper intermittent time control switch

(page 3-34)7) Wiper control lever (page 3-34)8) Light control switch (page 3-27)9) Fog light switch (page 3-32)10) Headlight ON/OFF (page 3-28)11) Headlight flasher High/Low beam

change (page 3-28)12) Turn signal (page 3-29)


Black plate (21,1)


& Combination meter

! U.S.-spec. models

1) Temperature gauge (page 3-8)2) Tachometer (page 3-7)3) Speedometer (page 3-6)4) Fuel gauge (page 3-8)5) Trip meter and odometer

(page 3-6/page 3-7)6) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter

reset knob (page 3-7)7) Select lever/Gear position indicator

(page 3-21)

19

– CONTINUED –

0


Black plate (22,1)


20

! Canada-spec. models 1) Temperature gauge (page 3-8)2) Tachometer (page 3-7)3) Speedometer (page 3-6)4) Fuel gauge (page 3-8)5) Trip meter and odometer



(page 3-21)


Black plate (23,1)


! Other models 1) Temperature gauge (page 3-8)2) Tachometer (page 3-7)3) Speedometer (page 3-6)4) Fuel gauge (page 3-8)5) Trip meter and odometer



(page 3-21)

21

– CONTINUED –

0


Black plate (24,1)


22

& Warning and indicator lights

Mark Name Page

Driver’s seatbelt warninglight 3-10

Front passenger’s seat-belt warning light 3-10

SRS airbag systemwarning light 3-11

CHECK ENGINE warn-ing light/Malfunction indi-cator light

3-12

Charge warning light 3-13

Oil pressure warning light 3-13

AT OIL TEMP warninglight 3-13

/ ABS warning light 3-15

/ Brake system warninglight 3-16

Door open warning light 3-17

Mark Name Page

Low fuel warning light 3-17

AWD warning light 3-18

Vehicle Dynamics Con-trol warning light (U.S.-spec. models andCanada-spec. models)/Vehicle Dynamics Con-trol operation indicatorlight (all models)

3-18

Traction Control systemOFF indicator light (U.S.-spec. models andCanada-spec. models)

3-19

Vehicle Dynamics Con-trol warning light (LatinAmerica-spec. models)/Traction Control systemOFF indicator light (LatinAmerica-spec. models)

3-19

Security indicator light 3-21

Turn signal indicatorlights 3-21

High beam indicator light 3-22

Front fog light indicatorlight 3-22

Mark Name Page

Headlight indicator light 3-22

Cruise control indicatorlight 3-22

Cruise control set indica-tor light 3-22

Low tire pressure warn-ing light 3-14

Passenger airbag ON in-dicator light 3-12

Passenger airbag OFFindicator light 3-12

SPORT mode indicatorlight 3-21

Windshield washer fluidwarning light 3-17

Rear differential oil tem-perature warning light 3-13


Black plate (25,1)


& Cargo area 1) Jack handle (page 9-19)2) Maintenance tools (page 9-19)3) Jack (page 9-19)4) Spare tire (page 9-5)

23

0


Black plate (26,1)


24

Function settings

A SUBARU dealer can change the settings of the functions shown in the following table to meet your personal requirements. Contactthe nearest SUBARU dealer for details. If your vehicle is equipped with the genuine SUBARU navigation system, the settings for someof these functions can be changed using the navigation monitor. For details, please refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for thenavigation system.

Item Function Possible settings Default setting Page

Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-16

Monitoring start delay time (after closure of doors) 0 second/30 seconds 30 seconds 2-17

Impact sensor operation (only models with shocksensors (dealer option))

Operation/Non-operation Non-operation 2-20

Passive arming Operation/Non-operation Non-operation 2-19

Dome light/map lights illumination ON/OFF OFF 2-16

Remote keyless entry sys-tem

Hazard warning flasher Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-8

Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-11

Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-7

Remote engine start system(dealer option)

Horn chirp confirmation ON/OFF ON 7-10

Rear window defogger Rear window defogger Operation for 15 minutes/Continuous operation

Operation for 15 minutes 3-37

Windshield wiper deicer Windshield wiper deicer Operation for 15 minutes/Continuous operation

Operation for 15 minutes 3-36

Map lights/Dome light Operation of map lights/dome light OFF delaytimer

OFF/Short/Normal/Long Normal 6-2/6-3

Map lights Illumination in conjunction with a door open Operation/Non-operation Operation(Illumination - ON)

6-3

Battery drainage preventionfunction

Battery drainage prevention function Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-6


Black plate (27,1)


Item Function Possible settings Default setting Page

Seatbelt warning Sounds a chime while driving Operation/Non-operation Operation 1-18

25

0


Black plate (2,1)


— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —


Black plate (1,1)


Front seats........................................................... 1-2Power seat.......................................................... 1-3Memory function (driver’s seat – if equipped)....... 1-4Head restraint adjustment.................................... 1-5Active head restraint ........................................... 1-6Lumbar support .................................................. 1-7

Seat heater (if equipped) .................................... 1-7Second-row seats ............................................... 1-8

Forward and backward adjustment ...................... 1-8Reclining the seatback ........................................ 1-9Folding down the seatback................................. 1-10Head restraint adjustment................................... 1-12Armrest ............................................................. 1-13

Third-row seat .................................................... 1-13Access to the third-row seat ............................... 1-14Folding down the seatback................................. 1-15Head restraint adjustment................................... 1-16

Seatbelts ............................................................. 1-17Seatbelt safety tips............................................. 1-17Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ................... 1-18Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor(A/ELR) ............................................................ 1-18

Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 1-18

Fastening the seatbelt........................................ 1-18Seatbelt maintenance......................................... 1-26

Front seatbelt pretensioners............................. 1-27System monitors ............................................... 1-28System servicing ............................................... 1-28Precautions against vehicle modification............ 1-28

Child restraint systems ..................................... 1-29Where to place a child restraint system.............. 1-30Choosing a child restraint system ...................... 1-32Installing child restraint systems with A/ELRseatbelt ........................................................... 1-32

Installing a booster seat..................................... 1-36Installation of child restraint systems by use oflower and tether anchorages (LATCH) .............. 1-37

Top tether anchorages ....................................... 1-40*SRS airbag (Supplemental RestraintSystem airbag)................................................ 1-45Your vehicle’s SRS configuration ....................... 1-45SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system ........... 1-49SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag............. 1-60SRS airbag system monitors.............................. 1-71SRS airbag system servicing ............................. 1-72Precautions against vehicle modification............ 1-72

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1


Black plate (30,1)


1-2 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

Front seats

WARNING

. Never adjust the seat while driv-ing to avoid loss of vehicle con-trol and personal injury.

. Before adjusting the seat, makesure luggage and the hands andfeet of second-row seat passen-gers are clear of the adjustingmechanism.

. Do not put objects under the frontseats. They may interfere withfront seat locking and cause anaccident.

. Seatbelts provide maximum re-straint when the occupant sitswell back and upright in the seat.To reduce the risk of slidingunder the seatbelt in a collision,the front seatbacks should bealways used in the upright posi-tion while the vehicle is running.If the front seatbacks are notused in the upright position in acollision, the risk of sliding underthe lap belt and of the lap beltsliding up over the abdomen willincrease, and both can result inserious internal injury or death.

. The SRS airbags deploy withconsiderable speed and force.Occupants who are out of properposition when the SRS airbagdeploys could suffer very seriousinjuries. Because the SRS airbagneeds enough space for deploy-ment, the driver should alwayssit upright and well back in theseat as far from the steeringwheel as practical while stillmaintaining full vehicle controland the front passenger shouldmove the seat as far back aspossible and sit upright and wellback in the seat.

WARNING

Put children aged 12 and under in arear seat properly restrained at alltimes. The SRS airbag deploys withconsiderable speed and force andcan injure or even kill children,especially if they are 12 years ofage and under and are not re-strained or improperly restrained.Because children are lighter andweaker than adults, their risk ofbeing injured from deployment isgreater. Consequently, we stronglyrecommend that ALL children (in-cluding those in child seats andthose that have outgrown child re-straint devices) sit in a REAR seatproperly restrained at all times in achild restraint device or in a seat-belt, whichever is appropriate forthe child’s age, height and weight.

Always secure ALL types of childrestraint devices (including forwardfacing child seats) in one of the rearseating positions recommended inthis Owner’s Manual.

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONTSEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUSINJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILDBY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD


Black plate (31,1)


TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seating posi-tions than in the front seating posi-tions. For instructions and precau-tions concerning child restraint sys-tems, refer to “Child restraint sys-tems” F1-29.

& Power seat

! Forward and backward adjustment

To adjust the seat forward or backward,move the control switch forward or back-ward.

NOTEDuring backward-forward adjustmentof the seat, you cannot adjust the seatcushion angle or seat height.

! Reclining the seatback

WARNING

To prevent the passenger from slid-ing under the seatbelt in the event ofa collision, always put the seatbackin the upright position while thevehicle is in motion. Also, do notplace objects such as cushionsbetween the passenger and theseatback. If you do so, the risk ofsliding under the lap belt and of thelap belt sliding up over the abdomenwill increase, and both can result in

serious internal injury or death.

To adjust the angle of the seatback, movethe control switch.

! Seat cushion angle adjustment(driver’s seat)

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-3

– CONTINUED –

1


Black plate (32,1)



To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull upor push down the front end of the controlswitch.

! Seat height adjustment (driver’sseat)

To adjust the seat height, pull up or pushdown the rear end of the control switch.

& Memory function (driver’sseat – if equipped)

Two of your favorite seat positions can beregistered. Register the seat position withbutton “1” or “2” and retrieve the seatposition by pressing either button.

The following seat positions can beregistered.. Forward/backward position of the seat

. Angle of seatback

. Angle of seat cushion

. Height of seat

! Registration of seat position

WARNING

. Never adjust the seat while driv-ing to avoid loss of vehicle con-trol and personal injury.

. Before adjusting the seat, makesure luggage and the hands andfeet of second-row seat passen-gers are clear of the adjustingmechanism.

1. With the select lever in the “P” posi-tion, adjust the seat position.

2. While pressing the “SET” button, pressthe desired button “1” or “2”.3. The chime sounds once, and the seatposition is registered.

! Retrieval of seat position

WARNING

. Never retrieve the seat positionwhile driving to avoid loss ofvehicle control and personal in-jury.

. Perform the seat position retrie-val before driving. Be sure toconfirm that the select leverposition is in the “P” position.Do not drive until the retrieval ofthe seat position is complete.


Black plate (33,1)


. Be sure to press the correctbutton to retrieve your registeredseat position. If the seat positionis not optimum for you, it mayadversely affect your driving andmay reduce the effectiveness ofthe seatbelt. That could result inan accident involving seriousinjury or death.

. When retrieving a registered seatposition, make sure the hands,feet and possessions of second-row seat passengers are clear ofthe seat adjusting mechanism.

. When any trouble or a malfunc-tion occurs during the retrieval ofthe seat position, stop the retrie-val of the seat position using anyof the control switches for man-ual adjustment, seat memory setbutton, seat memory registeredbutton 1 or 2.

1. With the select lever in the “P” posi-tion, press the desired button “1” or “2”.2. The chime sounds once and the seatmoves to the registered position.3. When the seat moves to the registeredposition, the chime sounds twice.

NOTE. If a new position is registered for thesame button, the previous seat posi-tion is deleted.. Even if the battery is disconnected,the registered seat position is notdeleted.

& Head restraint adjustment

1) Head restraint2) Release button

Both the driver’s seat and the frontpassenger’s seat are equipped with headrestraints.The head restraint should be adjusted sothat the center of the head restraint isclosest to the top of the occupant’s ears.


– CONTINUED –

1


Black plate (34,1)



To raise:Pull the head restraint up.To lower:Push the head restraint down whilepressing the release button on the top ofthe seatback.To remove:While pressing the release button, pull outthe head restraint.To install:Install the head restraint into the holes thatare located on the top of the seatback untilthe head restraint locks.

WARNING

. Never drive the vehicle with thehead restraints removed becausethey are designed to reduce therisk of serious neck injury in theevent that the vehicle is struckfrom the rear. Therefore, whenyou remove the head restraints,you must reinstall all head re-straints to protect vehicle occu-pants.

. All occupants, including the dri-ver, should not operate a vehicleor sit in a vehicle’s seat until thehead restraints are placed in theirproper positions in order to mini-mize the risk of neck injury in the

event of a crash.

& Active head restraint

The front seats of your vehicle areequipped with active head restraints. Theyautomatically tilt forward slightly in theevent the vehicle is struck from the rear,decreasing the amount of rearward headmovement and thus reducing the risk ofwhiplash. For maximum effectiveness thehead restraint should be adjusted so thatthe center of the head restraint is closestto the top of the occupant’s ears.

CAUTION

. Each active head restraint iseffective only when its height isproperly adjusted and the driver/passenger sits in the correctposition on the seat.

. If your vehicle is involved in arear-end collision, have anauthorized SUBARU dealer in-spect the active head restraints.

. The active head restraints maynot operate in the event thevehicle experiences only a slightimpact in the rear.

. The active head restraints may bedamaged if they are pushed hardfrom behind or subjected toshock. As a result, they may notfunction if the vehicle suffers arear impact.


Black plate (35,1)


& Lumbar support

Pull the lever forward or backward.Pulling the lever forward will increase theamount of support for your lower back.Pulling the lever backward will decreasethe amount of support for your lower back.

Seat heater (if equipped)

The seat heater is equipped in the frontseats.

The seat heater operates when the igni-tion switch is in the “ON” position.

The seat heater can be adjusted in threelevels. Press the button to activate theseat heater. Each subsequent press of thebutton will reduce the level. Pushing thebutton four times or keeping the buttonpressed for approximately 1 second willturn the heater off. While the seat heater isoperating, its operating level is shown bythe number of illuminated indicators. Towarm the seat as quickly as possible, setthe heater with three indicators illumi-nated.

When the vehicle’s interior is warmedenough or before you leave the vehicle,always turn the switch off.

CAUTION

. There is a possibility that peoplewith delicate skin may sufferslight burns even at low tempera-tures if they use the seat heaterfor a long period of time. Whenusing the heater, always be sureto warn the persons concerned.

. Do not put anything on the seatwhich insulates against heat,such as a blanket, cushion, orsimilar items. This may cause theseat heater to overheat.

NOTEUse of the seat heater for a long periodof time while the engine is not runningcan cause battery discharge.


1


Black plate (36,1)



Second-row seats

WARNING

. Seatbelts provide maximum re-straint when the occupant sitswell back and upright in the seat.Do not put cushions or any othermaterials between occupantsand seatbacks or seat cushions.If you do so, the risk of slidingunder the lap belt and of the lapbelt sliding up over the abdomenwill increase, and both can resultin serious internal injury ordeath.

. Never adjust the seat while driv-ing. Doing so is dangerous as the

seat could move rapidly and youcould be injured.

. Before adjusting the seat, makesure the hands and feet of thethird-row seat passengers areclear of the adjusting mechan-ism.

. After adjusting the seat, push itslightly to make sure it is se-curely locked. If the seat is notsecurely locked, it may move orthe seatbelt may not operateproperly.

. Do not put objects under thesecond-row seats. They may in-terfere with the seat locking andcause an unexpected accident.

WARNING

Never stack luggage or other cargohigher than the top of the seatbackbecause it could tumble forward andinjure passengers in the event of asudden stop or accident.

& Forward and backward ad-justment

Pull the lever upward and slide the seat tothe desired position.


Black plate (37,1)


When the right seat or the left seat pair isslid rearward, it stops partway at the lockpoint so as not to trap the legs ofpassengers sitting on the third-row seat.It is possible to slide the seat or seat pairfurther rearward by releasing the lock thatstops it. To do this, simultaneously pull thelever under the outboard seat cushion andturn the lever on the side of the seatcushion outward when sliding the seat orseat pair.Once you have released the lock, you canslide the seat or seat pair back and forthwith only the lever under the seat cushionpulled. If you slide the seat or seat pairforward of the lock point, you will need torelease the lock again before you canslide it behind the point.Then release the lever and move the seat

back and forth to make sure that it issecurely locked into place.

CAUTION

If you slide the seat or seat pair aftof the lock point while the third-rowseat is occupied, be careful not totrap the legs of the third-row pas-sengers.

& Reclining the seatback

WARNING

To prevent the passenger from slid-ing under the seatbelt in the event ofa collision, always put the seatbackin the upright position while the

vehicle is in motion. Also, do notplace objects such as cushionsbetween the passenger and theseatback. If you do so, the risk ofsliding under the lap belt and of thelap belt sliding up over the abdomenwill increase, and both can result inserious internal injury or death.

CAUTION

. Never allow the third-row seatpassengers to adjust the seat-back of the second row. Doing sois dangerous as the seatback willtilt rapidly and could injure thepassengers.

. If the cargo area cover isequipped, be careful not to pinchyour hand between the headrestand the cargo area cover whenyou recline the seatback.


– CONTINUED –

1


Black plate (38,1)



Pull the lever up and adjust the seatbackto the desired position.Then release the lever and make sure theseatback is securely locked into place.

& Folding down the seatback

WARNING

. Never allow passengers to rideon the folded seatback or in thecargo area. Doing so may resultin serious injury or death.

. Secure skis and other long itemsproperly to prevent them frombeing thrown around inside thevehicle and causing serious in-jury during a sudden stop, asudden steering maneuver or a

rapid acceleration.

. If passengers are sitting on thethird-row seat, never drive whilefolding the second-row seat. Itcan be a serious interference atthe time of braking and impact.

. If passengers are sitting on thethird-row seat, never drive whilethe center seatback of the sec-ond-row seat is folded. Doing somay result in serious injury in theevent of hard braking or animpact.

. When you return the seatback toits original position, shake theseatback slightly to confirm thatit is securely fixed in place. If theseatback is not securely fixed inplace, the seatback may sud-denly fold down in the event ofsudden braking, or objects maymove out from the cargo area,which could cause serious injuryor death.

. After returning the seatback to itsoriginal position, be sure to placeall of the seatbelts and the tabattached to the seat cushionabove the seat cushion. Also,make certain that the shoulderbelts are fully visible.

1. Slide the seat or seat pair to itsrearmost position.2. Lower the head restraint to its lowestposition. Refer to “Head restraint adjust-ment” F1-12.3. Unlock the seatback by pulling thelever and then fold the seatback down.4. To return the seatback to its originalposition, raise the seatback until it locksinto place. Make sure it is securely locked.


Black plate (39,1)


By pulling the tab on the center seat, youcan fold only the seatback of the centerseat.To return the seatback to its originalposition, raise the seatback until it locksinto place. Make sure it is securely locked.

1) Bar

CAUTION

. Folding the seatback of the cen-ter seat will expose the bar thatretains it in the raised position.Be careful not to hurt yourself onit. Especially, do not rest yourfinger on the bar. Otherwise,when the seatback is raised, yourfinger could be pinched betweenthe bar and seatback and thusinjured.

. Raise the seatback of the centerseat while taking care not to trapyour hands or other parts of thebody between the center seatand window-side seat.

NOTE

1) Holder

With the seatback folded, attach thetongue plate of each rear/second-rowseatbelt to the corresponding holder.Do the same also before someone getsinto the third-row seat.


– CONTINUED –

1


Black plate (40,1)



& Head restraint adjustmentBoth the second-row window side seatsand the second-row center seat areequipped with head restraints.

WARNING

. Never drive the vehicle with thehead restraints removed becausethey are designed to reduce therisk of serious neck injury in theevent that the vehicle is struckfrom the rear. Therefore, whenyou remove the head restraints,you must reinstall all head re-straints to protect vehicle occu-pants.

. All occupants, including the dri-ver, should not operate a vehicleor sit in a vehicle’s seat until thehead restraints are placed in theirproper positions in order to mini-mize the risk of neck injury in theevent of a crash.

! Window side seats


To remove:While pressing the release button, pull outthe head restraint.To install:Install the head restraint into the holes thatare located on the top of the seatback untilthe head restraint locks.

! Center seat

CAUTION

The head restraint is not intended tobe used at the lowest position.Before sitting on the seat, raise thehead restraint to an appropriateposition depending on your sittingheight.

A) When not used (retracted position)B) When used (extended position)


Black plate (41,1)



To raise:Pull the head restraint up.To lower:Push the head restraint down whilepressing the release button on the top ofthe seatback.

The head restraint should be adjusted sothat the center of the head restraint isclosest to the top of the occupant’s ears.When the center seat is not occupied,lower the head restraint to improve rear-ward visibility.

& Armrest

To lower the armrest, pull on the strap ofthe armrest.

WARNING

To avoid serious injury, passengersmust never be allowed to sit on thecenter armrest while the vehicle is inmotion.

Third-row seat

WARNING

Seatbelts provide maximum re-straint when the occupant sits wellback and upright in the seat. Do notput cushions or any other materialsbetween occupants and seatbacksor seat cushions. If you do so, therisk of sliding under the lap belt andof the lap belt sliding up over theabdomen will increase, and both canresult in serious internal injury ordeath.


– CONTINUED –

1


Black plate (42,1)



WARNING

Never stack luggage or other cargohigher than the top of the seatbackbecause it could tumble forward andinjure passengers in the event of asudden stop or accident.

& Access to the third-row seatThere are levers on both sides of thesecond-row seat. Each lever is used tofacilitate access to the third-row seat.

WARNING

In its slid-forward position with theseatback tipped forward, the sec-ond-row seat is not locked and free

to move. Do not drive the vehiclewith the seat in this state or allowanyone to sit on the seat unless it iscompletely locked. Doing so mayresult in serious injury or death.

CAUTION

When getting into or out of the third-row seat, make sure the second-rowseat is in the completely slid-for-ward position and be sure to watchyour step.

! To access the third-row seat

Raise the lever. The seatback of thesecond-row seat will tip forward and theseat will slide forward.

Before driving the vehicle, adjust the fore/aft position of the second-row seat, raisethe seatback, and make sure the seatbackis securely locked in position.

! To get out from the third-row seat

Raise the lever from the third-row seat.The seatback of the second-row seat willtip forward and the seat will slide forward.Before driving the vehicle, adjust the fore/aft position of the second-row seat, raisethe seatback, and make sure the seatbackis securely locked in position.


Black plate (43,1)


& Folding down the seatback

WARNING

. Never allow passengers to rideon the folded seatback or in thecargo area. Doing so may resultin serious injury or death.

. Secure skis and other long itemsproperly to prevent them frombeing thrown around inside thevehicle and causing serious in-jury during a sudden stop, asudden steering maneuver or arapid acceleration.

. When you return the seatback toits original position, shake theseatback slightly to confirm thatit is securely fixed in place. If theseatback is not securely fixed inplace, the seatback may sud-denly fold down in the event ofsudden braking, or objects maymove out from the cargo area,which could cause serious injuryor death.

. After returning the seatback to itsoriginal position, be sure to placeall of the seatbelts and the tabattached to the seat cushionabove the seat cushion. Also,make certain that the shoulder

belts are fully visible.

1) Lowering strap2) Folding lever

1. Pull the lowering strap to lower thehead restraint.2. Pull up the folding lever to release theseatback lock, and fold down the seat-back. Refer to “Head restraint adjustment”F1-16.To return the seatback to its originalposition, raise the seatback until it locksinto place. Make sure it is securely locked.

NOTE

1) Holder

. Before folding or raising the seat-back of the third-row seat, confirm thatthe seatbelt is flat against the sidewallat the lower point and the webbing isattached to the holder.. When raising the seatback of thethird-row seat, if the seatbelt catcheson the seatback, hold the belt forwardof the seatback while latching theseatback.


– CONTINUED –

1


Black plate (44,1)



& Head restraint adjustmentBoth the third-row seats are equipped withhead restraints.

WARNING

. Never drive the vehicle with thehead restraints lowered when theseats are occupied because theyare designed to reduce the risk ofserious neck injury in the eventthat the vehicle is struck from therear.

. All occupants, including the dri-ver, should not operate a vehicleor sit in a vehicle’s seat until thehead restraints are placed in theirproper positions in order to mini-mize the risk of neck injury in theevent of a crash.

1) When not used (retracted position)2) When used (raised position)

1) Head restraint2) Lowering strap

To raise:Pull the head restraint up.

To lower:Pull the lowering strap.

When the seats are not occupied, lowerthe head restraints to improve rearwardvisibility.

CAUTION

. The head restraint is not intendedto be used at the lower position.Before sitting on the seat, raisethe head restraint.

. After returning the head re-straints to the raised position,shake the head restraint slightlyto confirm that it is securely fixedin place.

. When you lower the head re-straints, confirm that there areno passengers or objects on thethird-row seat.


Black plate (45,1)


Seatbelts

& Seatbelt safety tips

WARNING

. All persons in the vehicle shouldfasten their seatbelts BEFOREthe vehicle starts to move. Other-wise, the possibility of seriousinjury becomes greater in theevent of a sudden stop or acci-dent.

. All belts should fit snugly in orderto provide full restraint. Loosefitting belts are not as effective inpreventing or reducing injury.

. Each seatbelt is designed tosupport only one person. Neveruse a single belt for two or morepersons – even children. Other-wise, in an accident, seriousinjury or death could result.

. Replace all seatbelt assembliesincluding retractors and attach-ing hardware worn by occupantsof a vehicle that has been in aserious accident. The entire as-sembly should be replaced evenif damage is not obvious.

. Put children aged 12 and under in

a rear seat properly restrained atall times. The SRS airbag de-ploys with considerable speedand force and can injure or evenkill children, especially if they are12 years of age and under andare not restrained or improperlyrestrained. Because children arelighter and weaker than adults,their risk of being injured fromdeployment is greater. Conse-quently, we strongly recommendthat ALL children (includingthose in child seats and thosethat have outgrown child re-straint devices) sit in a REARseat properly restrained at alltimes in a child restraint deviceor in a seatbelt, whichever isappropriate for the child’s heightand weight.

Always secure ALL types of childrestraint devices (including for-ward facing child seats) in one ofthe rear seating positions recom-mended in this Owner’s Manual.

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARDFACING CHILD SEAT IN THEFRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKSSERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TOTHE CHILD BY PLACING THECHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO

THE SRS AIRBAG.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seat-ing positions. For instructionsand precautions concerning thechild restraint system, refer to“Child restraint systems” F1-29.

Your vehicle is equipped with a crashsensing and diagnostic module, which willrecord the use of the seatbelt(s) by thedriver and front passenger when any ofthe SRS frontal, side and curtain airbagsdeploy.

! Infants or small children

Use a child restraint system that issuitable for your vehicle. Refer to “Childrestraint systems” F1-29.

! Children

If a child is too big for a child restraintsystem, the child should sit in the rear seatand be restrained using the seatbelts.According to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained in therear seating positions than in the frontseating positions. Never allow a child tostand up or kneel on the seat.

If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses


– CONTINUED –

1


Black plate (46,1)



the face or neck, adjust the shoulder beltanchor height (window-side seating posi-tions only) and then if necessary move thechild closer to the belt buckle to helpprovide a good shoulder belt fit. Care mustbe taken to securely place the lap belt aslow as possible on the hips and not on thechild’s waist. If the shoulder portion of thebelt cannot be properly positioned, a childrestraint system should be used. Neverplace the shoulder belt under the child’sarm or behind the child’s back.

! Expectant mothers

Expectant mothers also need to use theseatbelts. They should consult their doctorfor specific recommendations. The lap beltshould be worn securely and as low aspossible over the hips, not over the waist.

& Emergency Locking Retrac-tor (ELR)

The driver’s seatbelt has an EmergencyLocking Retractor (ELR).The emergency locking retractor allowsnormal body movement but the retractorlocks automatically during a sudden stop,impact or if you pull the belt very quicklyout of the retractor.

& Automatic/Emergency Lock-ing Retractor (A/ELR)

Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto-matic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ELR). The Automatic/Emergency LockingRetractor normally functions as an Emer-gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The A/ELR has an additional locking mode,“Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)mode”, intended to secure a child restraintsystem.

The ALR mode functions as follows.When the seatbelt is once drawn outcompletely and is then retracted evenslightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt inthat position and the seatbelt cannot beextended. As the belt is rewinding, clickswill be heard which indicate the retractorfunctions as an ALR. When the seatbelt isretracted fully, the ALR mode is canceledand the ELR mode is restored.

When securing a child restraint system onthe rear passenger’s seats by using aseatbelt, the seatbelt must be changedover to the Automatic Locking Retractor(ALR) mode. For instructions on how toinstall the child restraint system using aseatbelt, refer to “Installing child restraintsystems with A/ELR seatbelt” F1-32.

When the child restraint system is re-moved, make sure that the retractor isrestored to the Emergency Locking Re-tractor (ELR) mode by allowing the seat-belt to retract fully.

& Seatbelt warning lightand chime

Refer to “Seatbelt warning light andchime” F3-10.

& Fastening the seatbelt

WARNING

. Never use a belt that is twisted orreversed. In an accident, this canincrease the risk or severity ofinjury.

. Keep the lap belt as low aspossible on your hips. In a colli-sion, this spreads the force of thelap belt over stronger hip bones


Black plate (47,1)


instead of across the weakerabdomen.

. Seatbelts provide maximum re-straint when the occupant sitswell back and upright in the seat.To reduce the risk of slidingunder the seatbelt in a collision,the front seatbacks should bealways used in the upright posi-tion while the vehicle is running.If the front seatbacks are notused in the upright position in acollision, the risk of sliding underthe lap belt and of the lap beltsliding up over the abdomen willincrease, and both can result inserious internal injury or death.

. Do not put cushions or any othermaterials between occupantsand seatbacks or seat cushions.If you do so, the risk of slidingunder the lap belt and of the lapbelt sliding up over the abdomenwill increase, and both can resultin serious internal injury ordeath.

WARNING

Never place the shoulder belt underthe arm or behind the back. If anaccident occurs, this can increasethe risk or severity of injury.

CAUTION

Metallic parts of the seatbelt canbecome very hot in a vehicle thathas been closed up in sunny weath-er; they could burn an occupant. Donot touch such hot parts until theycool.

! Front seatbelts

1. Adjust the seat position according tothe following procedure.Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to theupright position. Move the seatback as farfrom the steering wheel as practical whilestill maintaining full vehicle control.Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seat-back to the upright position. Move the seatas far back as possible.2. Sit well back in the seat.3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull thebelt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. Ifthe belt stops before reaching the buckle,return the belt slightly and pull it out moreslowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,let the belt retract slightly after giving it astrong pull, then pull it out slowly again.


– CONTINUED –

1


Black plate (48,1)



4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckleuntil you hear a click.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull up onthe shoulder belt.6. Place the lap belt as low as possibleon your hips, not on your waist.

! Adjusting the front seat shoulderbelt anchor height

The shoulder belt anchor height should beadjusted to the position best suited for thedriver/front passenger. Always adjust theanchor height so that the shoulder beltpasses over the middle of the shoulderwithout touching the neck.

To raise:Slide the anchor up.To lower:Push the release button and slide theanchor down.

Pull down on the anchor to make sure thatit is locked in place.

WARNING

When wearing the seatbelts, makesure the shoulder portion of thewebbing does not pass over yourneck. If it does, adjust the seatbeltanchor to a lower position. Placingthe shoulder belt over the neck mayresult in neck injury during suddenbraking or in a collision.

! Unfastening the seatbelt

Push the button on the buckle.

Before closing the door, make sure thatthe belts are retracted properly to avoidcatching the belt webbing in the door.


Black plate (49,1)


! Second-row seatbelts – excludingcenter seatbelt

1. Sit well back in the seat.2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull thebelt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. Ifthe belt stops before reaching the buckle,return the belt slightly and pull it out moreslowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,let the belt retract slightly after giving astrong pull on it, then pull it out slowlyagain.



! Adjusting the shoulder belt anchorheight (second-row seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should beadjusted to the position best suited for thepassenger. Always adjust the anchorheight so that the shoulder belt passesover the middle of the shoulder withouttouching the neck.

To raise:Slide the anchor up.To lower:Push the release button and slide theanchor down.

Pull down on the anchor to make sure thatit is locked in place.


– CONTINUED –

1


Black plate (50,1)



WARNING

When wearing the seatbelts, makesure the shoulder portion of thewebbing does not pass over yourneck. If it does, adjust the seatbeltanchor to a lower position. Placingthe shoulder belt over the neck mayresult in neck injury during suddenbraking or in a collision.



Before closing the door, make sure thatthe belts are retracted properly to avoidcatching the belt webbing in the door.

NOTE

1) Holder

With the seatback folded, attach thetongue plate of each rear/second-rowseatbelt to the corresponding holder.Do the same also before someone getsinto the third-row seat.

! Second-row center seatbelt

1) Center seatbelt tongue plate2) Connector (tongue)3) Connector (buckle)4) Center seatbelt buckle


Black plate (51,1)


WARNING

Fastening the seatbelt with the web-bing twisted can increase the risk orseverity of injury in an accident.When fastening the belt after it ispulled out from the retractor, espe-cially when inserting the connec-tor’s tongue plate into the matingbuckle (on right-hand side), alwayscheck that the webbing is nottwisted.

WARNING

Be sure to fasten both tongue platesto the respective buckles. If theseatbelt is used only as a shoulder

belt (with the connector’s tongueplate not fastened to the connec-tor’s buckle on the right-hand side),it cannot properly restrain the wear-er in position in an accident, possi-bly resulting in serious injury ordeath.

Center seatbelt is stowed in the recess ofthe ceiling.1. Remove the connector (tongue) platefrom the slot located at the front of therecess by pulling the connector (tongue)plate rearward.

2. Pull out the seatbelt slowly from theoverhead retractor.

3. After confirming that the webbing is nottwisted, insert the connector (tongue)attached at the webbing end into thebuckle on the right-hand side until a click


– CONTINUED –

1


Black plate (52,1)



is heard. Make sure that the “ ” mark onthe connector (tongue) and the “ ” markon the buckle are aligned.If the belt stops before reaching thebuckle, return the belt slightly and pull itout more slowly. If the belt still cannot beunlocked, let the belt retract slightly aftergiving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowlyagain.

4. Insert the center seatbelt tongue platein the center seatbelt buckle marked“CENTER” on the left-hand side until itclicks.

5. To make the lap part tight, pull up onthe shoulder belt. And place the lap belt aslow as possible on your hips, not on yourwaist.


Push the release button of the centerseatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) tounfasten the seatbelt.

1. Insert a key or other hard pointedobject into the slot in the connector(buckle) on the right-hand side and push


Black plate (53,1)


it in, and the connector (tongue) plate willdisconnect from the buckle.

2. With the belt held by hand, allow theretractor to roll up the belt slowly. Youshould hold the webbing end and guide itback into the retractor while it is rolling up.Neatly store the tongue plate in the recesson the ceiling and then insert the con-nector (tongue) plate into the slot locatedat the front of the recess.

CAUTION

. Do not allow the retractor to rollup the seatbelt too quickly.Otherwise, the metal tongueplates may hit against the trim,resulting in damaged trim.

. Have the seatbelt fully rolled upso that the tongue plates areneatly stored. A hanging tongueplate can swing and hit againstthe trim during driving, causingdamage to the trim.

! Third-row seatbelt

1. Sit well back in the seat.2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull thebelt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. Ifthe belt stops before reaching the buckle,return the belt slightly and pull it out moreslowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,let the belt retract slightly after giving astrong pull on it, then pull it out slowlyagain.



– CONTINUED –

1


Black plate (54,1)






NOTE

1) Holder

. Before folding or raising the seat-back of the third-row seat, confirm thatthe seatbelt is flat against the sidewallat the lower point and the webbing isattached to the holder.. When raising the seatback of thethird-row seat, if the seatbelt catcheson the seatback, hold the belt forwardof the seatback while latching theseatback.

& Seatbelt maintenanceTo clean the seatbelts, use a mild soapand lukewarm water. Never bleach or dyethe belts because this could seriouslyaffect their strength.

Inspect the seatbelts and attachmentsincluding the webbing and all hardwareperiodically for cracks, cuts, gashes,tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas.Replace the seatbelts even if only minordamage is found.

CAUTION

. Keep the belts free of polishes,oils, chemicals and particularlybattery acid.

. Never attempt to make modifica-tions or changes that will preventthe seatbelt from operating prop-erly.


Black plate (55,1)


Front seatbelt pretensioners

The driver’s and front passenger’s seat-belts have a seatbelt pretensioner. Theseatbelt pretensioners for the driver’s seatand front passenger’s seat operate at thesame time as the frontal, and side SRSairbags. If the vehicle rolls over, theyoperate simultaneously with the curtainairbag.

The front and side airbag sensors and therollover sensor are used as the preten-sioner sensors. If a sensor detects acertain predetermined amount of forceduring a frontal collision, a side impactcollision or a rollover collision of thevehicle, the front seatbelt is quickly drawnback in by the retractor to take up theslack so that the belt more effectively

restrains the front seat occupant.

When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,an operating noise will be heard and asmall amount of smoke will be released.These occurrences are normal and notharmful. This smoke does not indicate afire in the vehicle.

Once the seatbelt pretensioner has beenactivated, the seatbelt retractor remainslocked. Consequently, the seatbelt can notbe pulled out and retracted and thereforemust be replaced.

NOTE. Seatbelt pretensioners are not de-signed to activate in minor frontalimpacts, in minor side impacts or rearimpacts.. The seatbelt pretensioners for thedriver’s seat and front passenger’sseat operate at the same time as thefrontal, and side SRS airbags. If thevehicle rolls over, they operate simul-taneously with the curtain airbag.. Pretensioners are designed to func-tion on a one-time-only basis. In theevent that a pretensioner is activated,both the driver’s and front passenger’sseatbelt retractor assemblies must bereplaced and only by an authorizedSUBARU dealer. When replacing seat-

belt retractor assemblies, use onlygenuine SUBARU parts.. If either front seatbelt does notretract or cannot be pulled out due toa malfunction or activation of thepretensioner, contact your SUBARUdealer as soon as possible.. If the front seatbelt retractor assem-bly or surrounding area has beendamaged, contact your SUBARU dealeras soon as possible.. When you sell your vehicle, we urgeyou to explain to the buyer that it hasseatbelt pretensioners by alerting himto the contents of this section.

WARNING

. To obtain maximum protection,occupants should sit in an up-right position with their seatbeltsproperly fastened. Refer to “Seat-belts” F1-17.

. Do not modify, remove or strikethe front seatbelt retractor as-semblies or surrounding area.This could result in accidentalactivation of the seatbelt preten-sioners or could make the sys-tem inoperative, possibly result-ing in serious injury. Seatbeltpretensioners have no user-ser-


– CONTINUED –

1


Black plate (56,1)



viceable parts. For required ser-vicing of front seatbelt retractorsequipped with seatbelt preten-sioners, see your nearestSUBARU dealer.

. When discarding front seatbeltretractor assemblies or scrap-ping the entire vehicle due tocollision damage or for otherreasons, consult your SUBARUdealer.

& System monitorsA diagnostic system continually monitorsthe readiness of the seatbelt pretensionerwhile the vehicle is being driven. Theseatbelt pretensioners share the controlmodule with the airbag system. Therefore,if any malfunction occurs in a seatbeltpretensioner, the SRS airbag systemwarning light will illuminate. For details,refer to “SRS airbag system monitors”F1-71.

& System servicing

WARNING

. When discarding a seatbelt re-tractor assembly or scrappingthe entire vehicle damaged by a

collision, consult your SUBARUdealer.

. Tampering with or disconnectingthe system’s wiring could resultin accidental activation of theseatbelt pretensioner and/or air-bag or could make the systeminoperative, which may result inserious injury. Do not use elec-trical test equipment on anycircuit related to the seatbeltpretensioner and airbag sys-tems. For required servicing ofthe seatbelt pretensioner, seeyour nearest SUBARU dealer.

CAUTION

The front sub sensors are locatedon both sides of the radiator panel,and the airbag control module in-cluding the impact sensors is lo-cated under the center console. Ifyou need service or repair in thoseareas or near the front seatbeltretractors, we recommend that youhave an authorized SUBARU dealerperform the work.

NOTEIf the front part of the vehicle isdamaged in an accident to the extentthat the seatbelt pretensioner does notoperate, contact your SUBARU dealeras soon as possible.

& Precautions against vehiclemodification

Always consult your SUBARU dealer ifyou want to install any accessory parts toyour vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not perform any of the followingmodifications. Such modificationscan interfere with proper operationof the seatbelt pretensioners.

. Attachment of any equipment(bush bar, winches, snow plow,skid plate, etc.) other than genu-ine SUBARU accessory parts tothe front end.

. Modification of the suspensionsystem or front end structure.

. Installation of a tire of differentsize and construction from thetires specified on the vehicleplacard attached to the doorpillar or specified for individual


Black plate (57,1)


vehicle models in this Owner’sManual.

Child restraint systems

While riding in the vehicle, infants andsmall children should always be placed inan infant or child restraint system in one ofthe rear seating positions recommendedin this Owner’s Manual.

You should use an infant or child restraintsystem that meets Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standards or Canada Motor Vehi-cle Safety Standards, is compatible withyour vehicle and is appropriate for thechild’s age and size.

All child restraint systems are designed tobe secured in vehicle seats by lap belts orthe lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt(except those described in “Installation ofchild restraint systems by use of lower and

tether anchorages (LATCH)” F1-37).

Children could be endangered in anaccident if their child restraints are notproperly secured in the vehicle. Wheninstalling the child restraint system, care-fully follow the manufacturer’s instructions.

According to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained in therear seating positions than in the frontseating positions.

All U.S. states and Canadian provincesrequire that infants and small children berestrained in an approved child restraintsystem at all times while the vehicle ismoving.


– CONTINUED –

1


Black plate (58,1)



WARNING

Never let a passenger hold a childon his or her lap while the vehicle ismoving. The passenger cannot pro-tect the child from injury in a colli-sion, because the child will becaught between the passenger andobjects inside the vehicle. Addition-ally, holding a child in your lap orarms in the front seat exposes thatchild to another serious danger.Since the SRS airbag deploys withconsiderable speed and force, thechild could be injured or even killed.

WARNING

Children should be properly re-strained at all times. Never allow achild to stand up, or to kneel on anyseat. Unrestrained children will bethrown forward during sudden stopor in an accident and can be injuredseriously.

Additionally, children standing up orkneeling on or in front of the frontseat are exposed another seriousdanger. Since the SRS airbag de-ploys with considerable speed andforce, the child could be injured oreven killed.

& Where to place a child re-straint system

The following are SUBARU’s recommen-dations on where to place a child restraintsystem in your vehicle.

A: Front passenger’s seatYou should not install a child restraintsystem (including a booster seat) due tothe hazard to children posed by thepassenger’s airbag.

B: Second-row outboard seatsRecommended positions for all types ofchild restraint systems.In these positions, Automatic/EmergencyLocking Retractor (A/ELR) seatbelts andlower anchorages (bars) are provided forinstalling a child restraint system.Some types of child restraints might not beable to be secured firmly due to projectionof the seat cushion.In this seating position, you should useonly a child restraint system that has abottom base that fits snugly against the


Black plate (59,1)


contours of the seat cushion and can besecurely retained using the seatbelt.

C: Second-row center seatInstalling a child restraint system is notrecommended, although the A/ELR seat-belt and an upper anchorage (tetheranchorage) are provided in this position.Some types of child restraints might not beable to be secured firmly due to projectionof the seat cushion.In this seating position, you should useonly a child restraint system that has abottom base that fits snugly against thecontours of the seat cushion and can besecurely retained using the seatbelt.

D: Third-row seatInstalling a child restraint system is notrecommended, although the A/ELR seat-belt and two upper anchorages (tetheranchorages) are provided in these posi-tions.These seating positions are not equippedwith lower anchorages (bars) for installingLATCH system-type child restraints. How-ever, child restraint devices can be used inthese position using the A/ELR seatbeltsand upper anchorages (tether an-chorages) provided.Some types of child restraints might not beable to be secured firmly due to projectionof the seat cushion.

In this seating position, you should useonly a child restraint system that has abottom base that fits snugly against thecontours of the seat cushion and can besecurely retained using the seatbelt.

WARNING

Put children aged 12 and under inthe rear seat properly restrained atall times. The SRS airbag deployswith considerable speed and forceand can injure or even kill children,especially if they are 12 years of ageand under and are not restrained orimproperly restrained. Because chil-dren are lighter and weaker thanadults, their risk of being injuredfrom deployment is greater.

Consequently, be sure to secureALL types of child restraint devices(including forward facing childseats) in the REAR seats at all times.You should choose a restraint de-vice which is appropriate for thechild’s age, height and weight. Ac-cording to accident statistics, chil-dren are safer when properly re-strained in the rear seating posi-tions than in the front seating posi-tions.

WARNING

S I N CE YOUR VEH I C L E I SEQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER’SSRS AIRBAG, DO NOT INSTALL AREARWARD FAC ING CH ILDSAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT PAS-SENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO RISKSSERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TOTHE CHILD BY PLACING THECHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TOTHE SRS AIRBAG.


– CONTINUED –

1


Black plate (60,1)



& Choosing a child restraintsystem

Choose a child restraint system that isappropriate for the child’s age and size(weight and height) in order to provide thechild with proper protection. The childrestraint system should meet all applic-able requirements of Federal Motor Vehi-cle Safety Standards for United States orCanada Motor Vehicle Safety Standardsfor Canada. It can be identified by lookingfor the label on the child restraint systemor the manufacturer’s statement of com-pliance in the document attached to thesystem. Also it is important for you tomake sure that the child restraint systemis compatible with the vehicle in which itwill be used.

& Installing child restraint sys-tems with A/ELR seatbelt

WARNING

. Child restraint systems and seat-belts can become hot in a vehiclethat has been closed up in sunnyweather; they could burn a smallchild. Check the child restraintsystem before you place a childin it.

. Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint system in your vehicle.Unsecured child restraint sys-tems can be thrown around in-side of the vehicle in a suddenstop, turn or accident; they canstrike and injure vehicle occu-pants as well as result in seriousinjuries or death to the child.

CAUTION

When you install a child restraintsystem, follow the manufacturer’sinstructions supplied with it. Afterinstalling the child restraint system,check to ensure that it is heldsecurely in position. If it is not heldtight and secure, the danger of your

child suffering personal injury in theevent of an accident may be in-creased.

! Installing a rearward facing childrestraint

1. Slide the seat or seat pair to itsrearmost position.2. Adjust the seatback to the uprightposition.3. Place the child restraint system in therear seating position.4. Run the lap and shoulder belt throughor around the child restraint systemfollowing the instructions provided by itsmanufacturer.5. Insert the tongue plate into the buckleuntil you hear a click.


Black plate (61,1)


6. Take up the slack in the lap belt.7. Pull out the seatbelt fully from theretractor to change the retractor over fromthe Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)mode. Then, allow the belt to rewind intothe retractor. As the belt is rewinding,clicks will be heard which indicate theretractor functions as ALR.

8. Push and pull the child restraintsystem forward and from side to side tocheck if it is firmly secured.Sometimes a child restraint can be morefirmly secured by pushing it down into theseat cushion and then tightening theseatbelt.9. Pull at the shoulder portion of the beltto confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALRproperly functioning).

10. To remove the child restraint system,press the release button on the seatbeltbuckle and allow the belt to retractcompletely. The belt will return to theELR mode.

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONTPASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SORISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATHTO THE CHILD BY PLACING THECHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THESRS AIRBAG.


– CONTINUED –

1


Black plate (62,1)



NOTEWhen the child restraint system is nolonger in use, remove it and restore theELR mode of the retractor. That modeis restored by retracting the seatbeltfully.

! Installing forward facing child re-straint

Second-row outboard seat1) Head restraint2) Release button

Second-row center seat1) Head restraint2) Release button

Third-row seat1) Head restraint2) Lowering strap

1. When installing on the second-rowoutboard seat, remove the head restraint.When installing on the second-row cen-ter seat, raise the head restraint. Wheninstalling on the third-row seat, lower thehead restraint.

2. Slide the seat or seat pair to itsrearmost position.3. Adjust the seatback to the uprightposition.4. Place the child restraint system in theseating position.5. Run the lap and shoulder belt throughor around the child restraint systemfollowing the instructions provided by itsmanufacturer.6. Insert the tongue plate into the buckleuntil you hear a click.


Black plate (63,1)


7. Take up the slack in the lap belt.8. Pull out the seatbelt fully from theretractor to change the retractor over fromthe Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)function. Then, allow the belt to rewindinto the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,clicks will be heard which indicate theretractor functions as ALR.

9. Before having a child sit in the childrestraint system, try to move it back andforth and right and left to check if it is firmlysecured. Sometimes a child restraint canbe more firmly secured by pushing it downinto the seat cushion and then tighteningthe seatbelt.10. Pull at the shoulder portion of the beltto confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALRproperly functioning).

Second-row seat

Third-row seat

11. If the child restraint system requires atop tether, latch the hook onto the toptether anchor and tighten the top tether.For additional instructions, refer to “Top


– CONTINUED –

1


Black plate (64,1)



tether anchorages” F1-40.

12. To remove the child restraint system,press the release button on the seatbeltbuckle and allow the belt to retractcompletely. The belt will return to theELR mode.

NOTEWhen the child restraint system is nolonger in use, remove it and restore theELR function of the retractor. Thatfunction is restored by allowing theseatbelt to retract fully.

& Installing a booster seat

WARNING


. Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint system in your vehicle.Unsecured child restraint sys-tems can be thrown around in-side of the vehicle in a suddenstop, turn or accident; they canstrike and injure vehicle occu-pants as well as result in seriousinjuries or death to the child.

CAUTION

When you install a child restraintsystem, follow the manufacturer’sinstructions supplied with it. Afterinstalling the child restraint system,check to ensure that it is heldsecurely in position. If it is not heldtight and secure, the danger of yourchild suffering personal injury in theevent of an accident may be in-

creased.

1. Slide the seat or seat pair to itsrearmost position.2. Place the booster seat in the rearseating position and sit the child on it. Thechild should sit well back on the boosterseat.3. Run the lap and shoulder belt throughor around the booster seat and the childfollowing the instructions provided by itsmanufacturer.4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckleuntil you hear a click. Take care not totwist the seatbelt.Make sure the shoulder belt is positionedacross the center of child’s shoulder andthat the lap belt is positioned as low aspossible on the child’s hips.


Black plate (65,1)


5. To remove the booster seat, press therelease button on the seatbelt buckle andallow the belt to retract.

WARNING

. Never use a belt that is twisted orreversed. In an accident, this canincrease the risk or severity ofinjury to the child.

. Never place the shoulder beltunder the child’s arm or behindthe child’s back. If an accidentoccurs, this can increase the riskor severity of injury to the child.

. The seatbelt should fit snugly inorder to provide full restraint.Loose fitting belts are not as

effective in preventing or redu-cing injury.

. Place the lap belt as low aspossible on the child’s hips. Ahigh-positioned lap belt will in-crease the risk of sliding underthe lap belt and of the lap beltsliding up over the abdomen, andboth can result in serious inter-nal injury or death.

. Make sure the shoulder belt ispositioned across the center ofchild’s shoulder. Placing theshoulder belt over the neck mayresult in neck injury during sud-den braking or in a collision.

& Installation of child restraintsystems by use of lower andtether anchorages (LATCH)

WARNING


. Do not leave an unsecured child

restraint system in your vehicle.Unsecured child restraint sys-tems can be thrown around in-side of the vehicle in a suddenstop, turn or accident; they canstrike and injure vehicle occu-pants as well as result in seriousinjuries or death to the child.

CAUTION

When you install a child restraintsystem, follow the manufacturer’sinstructions supplied with it. Afterinstalling the child restraint system,check to ensure that it is heldsecurely in position. If it is not heldtight and secure, the danger of yourchild suffering personal injury in theevent of an accident may be in-creased.

Some types of child restraint systems canbe installed in a rear seating position ofyour vehicle without use of the seatbelts.Such child restraint systems are securedto the dedicated anchorages provided onthe vehicle body.The lower and tether anchorages aresometimes referred to as the LATCHsystem (Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren).


– CONTINUED –

1


Black plate (66,1)



The second-row seat has four loweranchorages (bars) and three upper an-chorages (tether anchorages) for accom-modating such child restraint systems.

The lower anchorages (bars) are used forinstalling a child restraint system only onthe window-side seating positions. Foreach window-side seating position, twolower anchorages are provided.Each lower anchorage is located wherethe seat cushion meets the seatback.

The tether anchorages (upper an-chorages) are provided for all the seatingpositions of the second-row seat.

On each outboard second-row seat, youwill find marks “ ” at the bottom of theseatback.


Black plate (67,1)


Each lower anchorage is located wherethe seat cushion meets the seatback.

CAUTION

When you install a child restraintsystem, follow the manufacturer’sinstructions supplied with it. Afterinstalling the child restraint system,check to ensure that it is heldsecurely in position. If it is not heldtight and secure, the danger of yourchild suffering personal injury in theevent of an accident may be in-creased.

1. Slide the seat or seat pair to itsrearmost position.2. Make the clearance between the seat

cushion and seatback a little wider tolocate the two anchorages (bars) for theposition where you want to install the childrestraint system.

3. While following the instructions sup-plied by the child restraint system manu-facturer, connect the lower hooks onto thelower anchorages located at “ ” marks onthe bottom of the seatback. When thehooks are connected, make sure theadjacent seatbelts are not caught.

4. If your child restraint system is aflexible attachment type (which usestether belts to connect the child restraintsystem properly to the lower anchorages),while pushing the child restraint into theseat cushion, pull both left and right lowertether belts up to secure the child restraintsystem firmly by taking up the slack in thebelt.5. Connect the top tether hook to thetether anchorage and firmly tighten thetether. For information on how to set thetop tether, refer to “Top tether anchorages”F1-40.


– CONTINUED –

1


Black plate (68,1)



6. Before seating a child in the childrestraint system, try to move seat backand forth and left and right to verify that itis held securely in position.7. To remove the child restraint system,follow the reverse procedures of installa-tion.

If you have any question concerning thistype of child restraint system, ask yourSUBARU dealer.

& Top tether anchoragesYour vehicle is equipped with five toptether anchorages so that a child restraintsystem having a top tether can beinstalled in a rear seating position. Wheninstalling a child restraint system using toptether, proceed as follows, while observingthe instructions by the child restraint

system manufacturer.

Since a top tether can provide additionalstability by offering another connectionbetween a child restraint system and thevehicle, we recommend that you use a toptether whenever one is required or avail-able.

! Tether anchorage location

! Second-row seat

Three tether anchorages, i.e., ones for theright, center and left seats, are alreadyinstalled on the back of each seatback.Open the cover flap to use each ancho-rage.

! Third-row seat

Two tether anchorages are attached to therear edge of the cargo area.Open the cover flap to use each ancho-rage.


Black plate (69,1)


! To hook the top tether

! Second-row outboard seat

1. Remove the head restraint at thewindow-side seating position where thechild restraint system has been installedwith the lower anchorages or seatbelt; liftup the head restraint while pressing therelease button. Store the head restraint inthe cargo area. Avoid placing the headrestraint in the passenger compartment toprevent it from being thrown around in thepassenger compartment in a sudden stopor a sharp turn.

2. Confirm that there are no obstaclesaround the anchorages.

3. Fasten the top tether hook of the childrestraint system to the appropriate upperanchorage.4. Tighten the top tether securely.

CAUTION

When the child restraint system is tobe secured using the top tether,pass the top tether under the headrestraint between the head restraintstay posts.

CAUTION

Be sure to install the top tether withthe head restraint raised to thehighest position. If the head re-straint is in any of the lower posi-tions, the top tether will touch thehead restraint and the resultingslack will prevent its secure installa-tion.


– CONTINUED –

1


Black plate (70,1)



CAUTION

Do not route the top tether over thehead restraint. It may happen thatthe top tether cannot be fastenedtightly.

! Second-row center seat

1. Raise the head restraint to the highestposition at the seating position where thechild seat has been installed using theseatbelt or lower anchorages; lift up thehead restraint while pressing the releasebutton.

2. Confirm that there are no obstaclesaround the anchorages.



Black plate (71,1)


CAUTION

When the child restraint system is tobe secured using the top tether,pass the top tether under the headrestraint between the head restraintstay posts.

CAUTION

Be sure to install the top tether withthe head restraint raised to thehighest position. If the head re-straint is in any of the lower posi-tions, the top tether will touch thehead restraint and the resultingslack will prevent its secure installa-tion.

CAUTION

Do not route the top tether over thehead restraint. It may happen thatthe top tether cannot be fastenedtightly.

! Third-row seat

1) Head restraint2) Lowering strap

1. Pull the lowering strap to lower thehead restraint.


– CONTINUED –

1


Black plate (72,1)



2. Open the lid of the cargo area, thenremove the covers for the anchorages.


CAUTION

Do not pass the top tether under thehead restraint. The top tether willtouch the head restraint and theresulting slack will prevent its se-cure installation.

CAUTION

Do not use the top tether with thehead restraint in a raised position,otherwise the top tether cannot befastened tightly.


Black plate (73,1)


CAUTION

Prevent the top tether from touchingcargo in the cargo area. The toptether may become slack if thecargo changes shape or moves.

*SRS airbag (SupplementalRestraint System airbag)

*SRS: This stands for supplemental re-straint system. This name is used be-cause the airbag system supplements thevehicle’s seatbelts.

Your vehicle is equipped with a crashsensing and diagnostic module, which willrecord the use of the seatbelt(s) by thedriver and front passenger when any ofthe SRS frontal, side and curtain airbagsdeploy. The recorded information cannotbe transmitted to any central communica-tions system or other external device.

& Your vehicle’s SRS config-uration

The driver’s seat, the front passenger’sseat, and the outboard seats of the rear/second seating row of your vehicle areeach provided with, in addition to a lap/shoulder belt, one or more airbags asfollows.. Frontal airbag (one each for driver’sseat and front passenger’s seat). Side airbag (one each for driver’s seatand front passenger’s seat). Curtain airbag (one each for the out-board sides of cabin, extending fromdriver’s and front passenger’s seats to

second seating row)

These SRS airbags are designed onlyas a supplement to the primary protec-tion provided by the seatbelt.

The system also controls front seatbeltpretensioners. For operation instructionsand precautions concerning the seatbeltpretensioner, refer to “Front seatbelt pre-tensioners” F1-27.

WARNING

. To obtain maximum protection inthe event of an accident, thedriver and all passengers in thevehicle should always wear seat-belts when the vehicle is moving.The SRS airbag is designed onlyas a supplement to the primaryprotection provided by the seat-belt. It does not do away with theneed to fasten seatbelts. In com-bination with the seatbelts, itoffers the best combined protec-tion in case of a serious accident.

Not wearing a seatbelt increasesthe chance of severe injury ordeath in a crash even when thevehicle has the SRS airbag.

For instructions and precautionsconcerning the seatbelt system,


– CONTINUED –

1


Black plate (74,1)



refer to “Seatbelts” F1-17.

. Do not sit or lean unnecessarilyclose to the SRS airbag. Becausethe SRS airbag deploys withconsiderable speed – faster thanthe blink of an eye – and force toprotect in high speed collisions,the force of an airbag can injurean occupant whose body is tooclose to SRS airbag.

It is also important to wear yourseatbelt to help avoid injuriesthat can result when the SRSairbag contacts an occupant notin proper position such as onethrown forward during pre-acci-dent braking.

Even when properly positioned,there remains a possibility thatan occupant may suffer minorinjury such as abrasions andbruises to the face or armsbecause of the SRS airbag de-ployment force.

. The SRS airbags deploy withconsiderable speed and force.Occupants who are out of properposition when the SRS airbagdeploys could suffer very seriousinjuries. Because the SRS airbagneeds enough space for deploy-

ment, the driver should alwayssit upright and well back in theseat as far from the steeringwheel as practical while stillmaintaining full vehicle controland the front passenger shouldmove the seat as far back aspossible and sit upright and wellback in the seat.

. Do not place any objects over ornear the SRS airbag cover orbetween you and the SRS airbag.If the SRS airbag deploys, thoseobjects could interfere with itsproper operation and could bepropelled inside the vehicle andcause injury.

WARNING

. Put children aged 12 and under ina rear seat properly restrained atall times. The SRS airbag de-ploys with considerable speedand force and can injure or evenkill children, especially if they are12 years of age and under andare not restrained or improperlyrestrained. Because children arelighter and weaker than adults,their risk of being injured fromdeployment is greater.

Consequently, we strongly re-commend that ALL children (in-cluding those in child seats andthose that have outgrown childrestraint devices) sit in a REARseat properly restrained at alltimes in a child restraint deviceor in a seatbelt, whichever isappropriate for the child’s age,height and weight.

Always secure ALL types of childrestraint devices (including for-ward facing child seats) in one ofthe rear seating positions recom-mended in this Owner’s Manual.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properly


Black plate (75,1)


restrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seat-ing positions.

For instructions and precautionsconcerning the child restraintsystem, refer to “Child restraintsystems” F1-29.

. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARDFACING CHILD SEAT IN THEFRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKSSERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TOTHE CHILD BY PLACING THECHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TOTHE SRS AIRBAG.

. Never allow a child to stand up,or to kneel on the front passen-ger’s seat, or never hold a childon your lap or in your arms. TheSRS airbag deploys with consid-erable force and can injure oreven kill the child.

CAUTION

. When the SRS airbag deploys,some smoke will be released.This smoke could cause breath-ing problems for people with ahistory of asthma or otherbreathing trouble. If you or yourpassengers have breathing pro-

blems after SRS airbag deploys,get fresh air promptly.

. A deploying SRS airbag releaseshot gas. Occupants could getburned if they come into directcontact with the hot gas.

NOTEWhen you sell your vehicle, we urgeyou to explain to the buyer that it isequipped with SRS airbags by alertinghim or her to the applicable section inthis Owner’s Manual.


– CONTINUED –

1


Black plate (76,1)



! Components

1) Airbag control module (including impactand rollover sensors)

2) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)3) Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s

side)4) Front sub sensor (left-hand side)

5) Front sub sensor (right-hand side)6) Side airbag module (driver’s side)7) Side airbag module (front passenger’s

side)8) Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand

side)

9) Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-hand side)

10) Airbag wiring11) Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)12) Seatbelt pretensioner (front passenger’s

side)13) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house

right-hand side)14) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house

left-hand side)15) Curtain airbag module (right-hand side)16) Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)17) Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger’s

side)18) Front passenger’s seatbelt tension sen-

sor19) Front passenger’s occupant detection

system weight sensor20) Front passenger’s occupant detection

control module21) Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and

OFF indicator22) SRS airbag system warning light23) Satellite safing sensor (under the sec-

ond-row center seat)


Black plate (77,1)


& SUBARU advanced frontalairbag system

Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARUadvanced frontal airbag system that com-plies with the new advanced frontal airbagrequirements in the amended FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS)No. 208.The SUBARU advanced frontal airbagsystem automatically determines the de-ployment force of the driver’s SRS frontalairbag at the time of deployment as well aswhether or not to activate the frontpassenger’s SRS frontal airbag and, ifactivated, the deployment force of theSRS frontal airbag at the time of deploy-ment.Your vehicle has warning labels on thedriver’s and front passenger’s sun visorsbeginning with the phrase “EVEN WITHADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tagattached to the glove box lid beginningwith the phrase “Even with Advanced AirBags”. Make sure that you carefully readthe instructions on the warning labels andtag.Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBARUadvanced frontal airbag system is asupplemental restraint system and mustbe used in combination with a seatbelt. Alloccupants should wear a seatbelt or beseated in an appropriate child restraint

system.The driver’s SRS frontal airbag is stowedin the center portion of the steering wheel.The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbagis stowed near the top of the dashboardunder an “SRS AIRBAG” mark.

In a moderate to severe frontal collision,the driver’s and front passenger’s SRSfrontal airbags deploy and supplement theseatbelts by reducing the impact on thedriver’s and front passenger’s head andchest.

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-CING CHILD SAFETY SEAT IN THEFRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKSSERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO

THE CHILD BY PLACING THECHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TOTHE SRS AIRBAG.

WARNING

Never allow a child to stand up, or tokneel on the front passenger’s seat.The SRS airbag deploys with con-siderable force and can injure oreven kill the child.


– CONTINUED –

1


Black plate (78,1)



WARNING

Never hold a child on your lap or inyour arms. The SRS airbag deployswith considerable force and caninjure or even kill the child.

WARNING

The SRS airbag deploys with con-siderable speed and force. Occu-pants who are out of proper positionwhen the SRS airbag deploys couldsuffer very serious injuries. Be-cause the SRS airbag needs enoughspace for deployment, the drivershould always sit upright and wellback in the seat as far from thesteering wheel as practical whilestill maintaining full vehicle controland the front passenger shouldmove the seat as far back aspossible and sit upright and wellback in the seat.

It is also important to wear your

seatbelt to help avoid injuries thatcan result when the SRS airbagcontacts an occupant not in properposition such as one thrown towardthe front of the vehicle during pre-accident braking.

WARNING

Do not put any objects over thesteering wheel pad and dashboard.If the SRS frontal airbag deploys,those objects could interfere with itsproper operation and could be pro-pelled inside the vehicle and causeinjury.


Black plate (79,1)


WARNING

Do not attach accessories to thewindshield, or fit an extra-wide mir-ror over the rear view mirror. If theSRS airbag deploys, those objectscould become projectiles that couldseriously injure vehicle occupants.

! Driver’s SRS frontal airbag

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses adual stage inflator. The inflator operates indifferent ways depending on the severityof impact, backward-forward adjustmentof the driver’s seat position and whether ornot he/she is wearing the seatbelt.The backward-forward adjustment of thedriver’s seat position is monitored by the

driver’s seat position sensor under thedriver’s seat.Whether or not the driver is wearing theseatbelt is monitored by the seatbeltbuckle switch.Observe the following precautions. Failureto do so may cause the seatbelt buckleswitch and/or the seat position sensor tomalfunction, preventing the SUBARU ad-vanced frontal airbag system from func-tioning correctly or causing the system tofail.. Do not place articles/metal objects orinstall any accessory other than a genuineSUBARU accessory under the driver’sseat. Do not allow the rear seat occupantto kick the driver’s seat or push up itsbottom surface with his/her feet.. Do not place a magnet near theseatbelt buckle or under the driver’s seat.

If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or thedriver’s seat position sensor have failed,the SRS airbag system warning light willilluminate. Although the driver’s SRSfrontal airbag can deploy regardless ofthe backward-forward adjustment of thedriver’s seat position even when thewarning light illuminates, have the systeminspected by your SUBARU dealer im-mediately if the SRS airbag system warn-ing light illuminates.

NOTEThe driver’s SRS side airbag, SRScurtain airbag and seatbelt preten-sioner are not controlled by theSUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys-tem.

! Front passenger’s SRS frontal air-bag

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbaguses a dual stage inflator. The inflatoroperates in different ways depending onthe severity of impact.The total load on the seat is monitored bythe occupant detection system’s weightsensor located under the seat.The system has another sensor thatmonitors the tension of the front passen-ger seatbelt. Using the total seat load andseatbelt tension data from the sensors,the occupant detection system determineswhether the front passenger’s SRS frontalairbag should or should not be inflated.The occupant detection system may notinflate the front passenger’s SRS frontalairbag even when the driver’s SRS frontalairbag deploys. This is normal.Observe the following precautions. Failureto do so may prevent the SUBARUadvanced frontal airbag system fromfunctioning correctly or cause the systemto fail.


– CONTINUED –

1


Black plate (80,1)



. Do not apply any strong impact to thefront passenger’s seat such as by kicking.. Do not spill liquid on the front passen-ger’s seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it offimmediately.. Do not remove or disassemble the frontpassenger’s seat.. Do not install any accessory (such asan audio amplifier) other than a genuineSUBARU accessory under the front pas-senger’s seat.. Do not place anything (shoes, umbrel-la, etc.) under the front passenger’s seat.. The front passenger’s seat must not beused with the head restraint removed.. Do not leave any article including achild restraint system on the front passen-ger’s seat or the seatbelt tongue andbuckle engaged when you leave yourvehicle.. Do not place a magnet near theseatbelt buckle and the seatbelt retractor.

If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or frontpassenger’s occupant detection systemhave failed, the SRS airbag systemwarning light will illuminate. Have thesystem inspected by your SUBARU deal-er immediately if the SRS airbag systemwarning light illuminates.If your vehicle has sustained impact, thismay affect the proper function of the

SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system.Have your vehicle inspected at yourSUBARU dealer.

NOTEThe front passenger’s SRS side airbag,SRS curtain airbag and seatbelt pre-tensioner are not controlled by theSUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys-tem.

! Passenger’s frontal airbag ON andOFF indicators

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ONindicator

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFFindicator

The front passenger’s frontal airbag ONand OFF indicators show you the status ofthe front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.

The indicators are located in the centerportion of the instrument panel.When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position, both the ON and OFFindicators illuminate for 6 seconds duringwhich time the system is checked. Follow-ing the system check, both indicators turnoff for 2 seconds. After that, one of theindicators illuminates depending on thestatus of the front passenger’s SRS frontalairbag determined by the SUBARU ad-vanced frontal airbag system monitoring.If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbagis activated, the passenger’s frontal airbagON indicator will illuminate while the OFFindicator will remain off.If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbagis deactivated, the passenger’s frontalairbag ON indicator will remain off whilethe OFF indicator will illuminate.With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”position, if both the ON and OFF indica-tors simultaneously remain illuminated oroff even after the system check period, thesystem is malfunctioning. Contact yourSUBARU dealer immediately for an in-spection.


Black plate (81,1)


! Conditions in which front passen-ger’s SRS frontal airbag is notactivated

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbagwill not be activated when any of thefollowing conditions are met regarding thefront passenger’s seat.. The seat is empty.. The seat is equipped with a rearwardfacing child restraint system and an infantis restrained with it. (See WARNING thatfollows.). The seat is equipped with a forwardfacing child restraint system and a smallchild is restrained with it. (See WARNINGthat follows.). The seat is equipped with a boosterseat and a small child is in the boosterseat. (See WARNING that follows.). The seat is relieved of the occupantload for a time exceeding the predeter-mined monitoring time period.. The seat is occupied by a child whohas outgrown a child restraint system(See WARNING that follows.) or by asmall adult.. The front passenger’s occupant detec-tion system is malfunctioning.

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONTPASSENGER’S SEAT EVEN IF THEFRONT PASSENGER’S SRS FRON-TAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Besure to install it in one of the rearseating positions recommended inthis Owner’s Manual in a correctmanner. Also, it is strongly recom-mended that any forward facingchild seat or booster seat be in-stalled in one of the rear seatingpositions recommended in thisOwner’s Manual, and that evenchildren who have outgrown a childrestraint system be also seated in aREAR seat. This is because childrensitting in the front passenger’s seatmay be killed or severely injuredshould the front passenger’s SRSfrontal airbag deploy. REAR seatsare the safest place for children.

When the front passenger’s seat is occu-pied by a child, observe the followingprecautions. Failure to do so may increasethe load on the front passenger’s seat,activating the front passenger’s SRSfrontal airbag even though that seat isoccupied by a child.

. Do not place any article on the seatother than the child occupant and a childrestraint system.. Do not place more than one child onthe seat.. Do not install any accessory such as atable or TV onto the seatback.. Do not store a heavy load in theseatback pocket.. Do not allow the rear/second-row seatoccupant to place his/her hands or legs onthe front passenger’s seatback, or allowhim/her to pull the seatback.

! If the front passenger’s frontal air-bag ON indicator illuminates and theOFF indicator turns off even whenan infant or a small child is in a childrestraint system (including boosterseat)

Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”position if the front passenger’s frontalairbag ON indicator illuminates and theOFF indicator turns off even when aninfant or a small child is in a child restraintsystem (including booster seat). Removethe child restraint system from the seat. Byreferring to the child restraint manufac-turer’s recommendations as well as thechild restraint system installation proce-dures in the “Child restraint systems” F1-29 section in this chapter, correctly install


– CONTINUED –

1


Black plate (82,1)



the child restraint system. Turn the ignitionswitch to the “ON” position and make surethat the front passenger’s frontal airbagON indicator turns off and the OFFindicator illuminates.

If the ON indicator still remains illuminatedwhile the OFF indicator turns off, take thefollowing actions.. Ensure that no article is placed on theseat other than the child restraint systemand the child occupant.. Ensure that there is no article left in theseatback pocket.

If the ON indicator still remains illuminatedwhile the OFF indicator turns off aftertaking relevant corrective actions de-scribed above, relocate the child restraintsystem to one of the rear seating positionsrecommended in this Owner’s Manual andimmediately contact your SUBARU dealerfor an inspection.

NOTEWhen a child who has outgrown a childrestraint system or a small adult isseated in the front passenger’s seat,the SUBARU advanced frontal airbagsystem may or may not activate thefront passenger’s SRS frontal airbagdepending on the occupant’s seatingposture. If the front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbag is activated (the ONindicator remains illuminated whilethe OFF indicator turns off), take thefollowing actions.. Ensure that no article is placed onthe seat other than the occupant.. Ensure that there is no article left inthe seatback pocket.

If the ON indicator still remains illumi-nated while the OFF indicator turns offdespite the fact that the actions notedabove have been taken, seat the child/small adult in the rear seat and im-mediately contact your SUBARU dealerfor an inspection. Even if the systemhas passed the dealer inspection, it isrecommended that on subsequent tripsthe child/small adult always take therear seat.

Children who have outgrown a childrestraint system should always wear theseatbelt irrespective of whether the airbagis deactivated or activated.

! Conditions in which front passen-ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated

The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbagwill be activated for deployment uponimpact when any of the following condi-tions is met regarding the front passen-ger’s seat.. When the seat is occupied by an adult.

. When a heavy article is placed on theseat.

When the front passenger’s seat is occu-pied by an adult, observe the followingprecautions. Failure to do so may lessenthe load on the front passenger’s seat,deactivating the front passenger’s SRSfrontal airbag despite the fact that the seatis occupied by an adult.. Do not allow the second-row seatoccupant to lift the front passenger’s seatcushion using his/her feet.. Do not place any article under the frontpassenger’s seat, or squeeze any articlefrom behind and under the seat. This maylift the seat cushion.. Do not squeeze any article betweenthe front passenger’s seat and side trim/pillar, door or center console box. Thismay lift the seat cushion.

! If the passenger’s frontal airbag OFFindicator illuminates and the ONindicator turns off even when thefront passenger’s seat is occupiedby an adult

This can be caused by the adult incor-rectly sitting in the front passenger’s seat.Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”position. Ask the front passenger to setthe seatback to the upright position, sit up


Black plate (83,1)


straight in the center of the seat cushion,correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/her legs out forward, and adjust the seat tothe rearmost position. Turn the ignitionswitch to the “ON” position. If the OFFindicator remains illuminated while the ONindicator remains off, take the followingactions.. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”position.. Ensure that there are no articles,books, shoes, or other objects trappedunder the seat, at the rear of the seat, oron the side of the seat.. Next, turn the ignition switch to the“ON” position and wait 6 seconds to allowthe system to complete self-checking.Following the system check, both indica-tors turn off for 2 seconds. Now, the ONindicator should illuminate while the OFFindicator remains off.

If the OFF indicator still remains illumi-nated while the ON indicator remains off,ask the occupant to move to the rear seatand immediately contact your SUBARUdealer for an inspection.

! Effect vehicle modifications madefor persons with disabilities mayhave on SUBARU advanced frontalairbag system operation (U.S. only)

Changing or moving any parts of the frontseats, seatbelts, front bumper, front sideframe, instrument panel, combination me-ter, steering wheel, steering column, tire,suspension or floor panel can affect theoperation of the SUBARU advanced air-bag system. If you have any questions,you may contact the following SUBARUdistributors.

<Continental U.S., Alaska and the Districtof Columbia>Subaru of America, Inc.Customer Dealer Services DepartmentP.O. Box 6000Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-60001-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)

<Hawaii>Servco Subaru Inc., dba Subaru Hawaii2850 Pukoloa Street, Suite 202, Honolulu,HI 96819808-839-2273

<Guam>Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige Automo-bile491, East Marine Drive, Route 1 Dededo,Guam671-633-2698

<Puerto Rico>Trebol MotorsP.O. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico00910787-793-2828

There are currently no SUBARU distribu-tors in any other U.S. territories. If you arein such an area, please contact theSUBARU distributor or dealer from whichyou bought your vehicle.


– CONTINUED –

1


Black plate (84,1)



! Operation

1) Driver’s side2) Passenger’s side

The SRS airbag can function only whenthe ignition switch is in the “ON” position.The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag

system is designed to determine theactivation or deactivation condition of thefront passenger’s SRS frontal airbagdepending on the total load on the frontpassenger’s seat monitored by the frontpassenger’s occupant detection systemweight sensor. For this reason, only thedriver’s SRS frontal airbag may deploy inthe event of a collision, but this does notmean failure of the system.

If the front sub sensors located on bothsides of the radiator panel and the impactsensors in the airbag control moduledetect a predetermined amount of forceduring a frontal collision, the controlmodule sends signals to the airbagmodule(s) (only driver’s module or bothdriver’s and front passenger’s modules)instructing the module(s) to inflate theSRS frontal airbag(s). The driver’s andfront passenger’s SRS frontal airbags usedual stage inflators. The two inflators ofeach airbag are triggered either sequen-tially or simultaneously, depending on theseverity of impact, backward-forward ad-justment of the driver’s seat position andfastening/unfastening of the seatbelt in thecase of the driver’s SRS frontal airbag anddepending on the severity of impact andthe total load on the seat in the case of thefront passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.

After deployment, the SRS airbag imme-diately starts to deflate so that the driver’svision is not obstructed. The time requiredfrom detecting impact to the deflation ofthe SRS airbag after deployment is short-er than the blink of an eye.

When only the driver’s SRS frontal airbagdeploys and both the driver’s and frontpassenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy,the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbeltpretensioners operate at the same time.

Although it is highly unlikely that the SRSairbag would activate in a non-accidentsituation, should it occur, the SRS airbagwill deflate quickly, not obscuring visionand will not interfere with the driver’sability to maintain control of the vehicle.

When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden,fairly loud inflation noise will be heard andsome smoke will be released. Theseoccurrences are a normal result of thedeployment. This smoke does not indicatea fire in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not touch the SRS airbag systemcomponents around the steeringwheel and dashboard with barehands right after deployment. Doingso can cause burns because the


Black plate (85,1)


components can be very hot as aresult of deployment.

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and frontpassenger’s SRS frontal airbag are de-signed to deploy in the event of anaccident involving a moderate to severefrontal collision. They are not designed todeploy in most lesser frontal impactsbecause the necessary protection can beachieved by the seatbelt alone. Also, theyare not designed to deploy in most side orrear impacts or in most rollover accidentsbecause deployment of only the driver’sSRS frontal airbag or both driver’s andfront passenger’s SRS frontal airbagswould not help the occupant in thosesituations. The driver’s and front passen-ger’s SRS frontal airbags are designed tofunction on a one-time-only basis.

SRS airbag deployment depends on thelevel of force experienced in the passen-ger compartment during a collision. Thatlevel differs from one type of collision toanother, and it may have no bearing onthe visible damage done to the vehicleitself.

! Examples of accidents in which thedriver’s/driver’s and front passen-ger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will mostlikely deploy.

A head-on collision against a thick con-crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activatesonly the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or bothdriver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontalairbags. The airbag(s) will also be acti-vated when the vehicle is exposed to afrontal impact similar in fashion andmagnitude to the collision describedabove.

! Examples of the types of accidentsin which it is possible that thedriver’s/driver’s and front passen-ger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will de-ploy.

The only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or


– CONTINUED –

1


Black plate (86,1)



both driver’s and front passenger’s SRSfrontal airbags may be activated when thevehicle sustains a hard impact in theundercarriage area from the road surface(such as when the vehicle plunges into adeep ditch, is severely impacted orknocked hard against an obstacle on theroad such as a curb).


Black plate (87,1)


! Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver’s/driver’sand front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur.

1) The vehicle strikes an object, such as atelephone pole or sign pole.

2) The vehicle slides under the load bed ofa truck.

3) The vehicle sustains an oblique offsetfrontal impact.

4) The vehicle sustains an offset frontalcollision.

There are many types of collisions whichmight not necessarily require deploymentof driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’sSRS frontal airbag(s). In the event ofaccidents like those illustrated, the dri-ver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRSfrontal airbag(s) may not deploy depend-ing on the level of accident forces in-volved.


– CONTINUED –

1


Black plate (88,1)



! Examples of the types of accidentsin which the driver’s/driver’s andfront passenger’s SRS frontalairbag(s) will basically not deploy.

The driver’s and front passenger’s SRSfrontal airbags are designed not to deploy

in most cases if the vehicle is struck fromthe side or from behind, or if it rolls onto itsside or roof, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision.

1) First impact2) Second impact

In an accident where the vehicle isimpacted more than once, the driver’sand/or front passenger’s SRS frontalairbag(s) will deploy only once on the firstimpact.

Example: In the case of a double collision,first with another vehicle, then against aconcrete wall in immediate succession,once either or both of the driver’s and frontpassenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/areactivated on the first impact, it/they will notbe activated on the second impact.

& SRS side airbag and SRScurtain airbag

The SRS side airbag is stored in the doorside of each front seat seatback, whichbears an “SRS AIRBAG” label.In a moderate to severe side impactcollision, the SRS side airbag on theimpacted side of the vehicle deploysbetween the occupant and the door paneland supplements the seatbelt by reducingthe impact to the occupant’s chest andwaist. The SRS side airbag operates onlyfor front seat occupants.The SRS curtain airbag on each side ofthe cabin is stored in the roof side(between the front pillar and a point overthe second-row seat). An “SRS AIRBAG”mark is located at the top of each centerpillar.In a moderate to severe side impactcollision, the SRS curtain airbag on theimpacted side of the vehicle deploysbetween the occupant and the sidewindow and supplements the seatbelt byreducing the impact on the occupant’shead.In a rollover, SRS curtain airbags on bothsides of the vehicle deploy between theoccupant and the side window and sup-plement the seatbelt by reducing theimpact to the occupant’s head.


Black plate (89,1)


The SRS curtain airbag does not operatefor third-row seat occupants.

WARNING

The SRS side airbag and SRScurtain airbag are designed as onlya supplement to the primary protec-tion provided by the seatbelt. Theydo not do away with the need tofasten seatbelts. It is also importantto wear your seatbelt to help avoidinjuries that can result when anoccupant is not seated in a properupright position.

WARNING

. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily

close to either front door. TheSRS side airbag is stored in bothfront seat seatbacks next to thedoor, and it provides protectionby deploying rapidly (faster thanthe blink of an eye) in the event ofa side impact collision. However,the force of SRS side airbagdeployment may cause injuriesif your head or other parts of thebody are too close to the SRSside airbag.

. Since your vehicle is equippedwith SRS curtain airbags, do notsit or lean unnecessarily close tothe front or rear door on eitherside. Also, do not put your head,arms and hands out of the win-dow. The SRS curtain airbag oneach side of the cabin is stored inthe roof side (between the frontpillar and a point over the sec-ond-row seat), and it providesprotection by deploying rapidly(faster than the blink of an eye) inthe event of a side impact or arollover. However, the force of itsdeployment may cause injuries ifyour head is too close to it.

WARNING

Do not rest your arm on either frontdoor or its internal trim. It could beinjured in the event of SRS sideairbag deployment.


– CONTINUED –

1


Black plate (90,1)



WARNING

. Never allow a child to kneel onthe front passenger’s seat facingthe side window or wrap his/herarms around the front seat seat-

back. In the event of an accident,the force of the SRS side airbagdeployment could injure the childseriously because his/her heador arms or other parts of thebody are too close to the SRSside airbag.

Since your vehicle is alsoequipped with a front passen-ger’s SRS frontal airbag, childrenaged 12 and under should beplaced in a rear seat anyway andshould be properly restrained atall times.

. Never allow a child to kneel onany passenger’s seat facing theside window or put their head,arms or hands out of the window.In the event of an accident, theforce of the SRS curtain airbagdeployment could injure the childseriously because his/her head isclose to the SRS curtain airbag.

WARNING

. Do not attach accessories to thedoor trim or near either SRS sideairbags and do not place objectsnear the SRS side airbags. In theevent of the SRS side airbagdeployment, they could be pro-pelled dangerously toward thevehicle’s occupants and causeinjuries.

. Do not attach a hands-free micro-phone or any other accessory toa front pillar, a center pillar, a rearpillar, the windshield, a side win-dow, an assist grip, or any othercabin surface that would be neara deploying SRS curtain airbag.


Black plate (91,1)


A hands-free microphone orother accessory in such a loca-tion could be propelled throughthe cabin with great force by thecurtain airbag, or it could preventcorrect deployment of the curtainairbag. In either case, the resultcould be serious injuries.

WARNING

Do not hang coat hangers or otherhard or pointed objects on the coathooks. If such items were hangingon the coat hooks during deploy-ment of the SRS curtain airbags,they could cause serious injuries bycoming off the coat hooks and beingthrown through the cabin or by

preventing deployment of the cur-tain airbags.

Before hanging clothing on the coathooks, make sure there are no sharpobjects in the pockets. Hang cloth-ing directly on the coat hooks with-out using hangers.

WARNING

Do not put any kind of cover orclothes or other objects over eitherfront seatback and do not attachlabels or stickers to the front seatsurface on or near the SRS sideairbag. They could prevent properdeployment of the SRS side airbag,reducing protection available to the

front seat’s occupant.

! Operation

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtainairbag can function only when the ignitionswitch is in the “ON” position.

The driver’s and front passenger’s SRSside airbags and SRS curtain airbagsdeploy independently of each other be-cause each has its own impact sensor.Therefore, they may not both deploy in thesame accident. Also, the SRS side airbagand SRS curtain airbag deploys indepen-dently of the driver’s and front passen-ger’s SRS frontal airbags in the steeringwheel and instrument panel.

An impact sensor, which senses impactforce, is located in each of the left and


– CONTINUED –

1


Black plate (92,1)



right center pillars and rear wheel houses.Another impact sensor, which also sensesimpact force, is located under the second-row center seat. In addition, a rolloversensor is located inside the airbag controlmodule.

If one of the center pillar impact sensorsand the impact sensor that is locatedunder the second-row center seat to-gether sense an impact force above apredetermined level in a side collision, thecontrol module causes both the SRS sideairbag and curtain airbag on the impactedside to inflate regardless of whether therear wheel house impact sensor on thesame side senses an impact. At this time,the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbeltpretensioners also operate at the sametime.

If one of the rear wheel house impactsensors and the impact sensor that islocated under the second-row center seattogether sense an impact force above apredetermined level in a side collision, thecontrol module causes only the SRScurtain airbag on the impacted side toinflate.

If the rollover sensor detects rollover of thevehicle, the control module inflates theSRS curtain airbags. At this time, thedriver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt

pretensioners also operate at the sametime.

After deployment, the SRS side airbagimmediately starts to deflate. The timerequired from detection of an impact todeflation of an SRS side airbag afterdeployment is shorter than the blink ofan eye.

The SRS curtain airbag remains inflatedfor a while following deployment thenslowly deflates.

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtainairbag deploy even when no one occupiesthe seat on the side on which an impact isapplied.

When the SRS side airbag and SRScurtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loudinflation noise will be heard and somesmoke will be released. These occur-rences are a normal result of the deploy-ment. This smoke does not indicate a firein the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not touch the SRS side airbagsystem components around thefront seat seatback with bare handsright after deployment. Doing so cancause burns because the compo-nents can be very hot as a result of

deployment.

After deployment, do not touch anypart of the SRS curtain airbagsystem (from the front pillar to thepart of the roof side over thesecond-row seat). Doing so cancause burns because the compo-nents can be very hot as a result ofdeployment.

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtainairbag are designed to deploy in the eventof an accident involving a moderate tosevere side impact collision. Also, in thecase of a rollover, the SRS curtain airbagdeploys. They are not designed to deployin most lesser side impact. Also, they arenot designed to deploy in most frontal ormost rear impacts because SRS sideairbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy-ment would not help the occupant in thosesituations.

Each SRS side airbag and SRS curtainairbag are designed to function on a one-time-only basis.

SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbagdeployment depend on the level of forceexperienced in the passenger compart-ment during a side impact collision. Thatlevel differs from one type of collision toanother, and it may have no bearing on


Black plate (93,1)


the visible damage done to the vehicleitself. Also, the SRS curtain airbag de-ploys depending on the vehicle’s positionand inclination at the time of the rollover.

! Example of the type of accident inwhich the SRS side airbag will mostlikely deploy.

A severe side impact near the front seatactivates the SRS side airbag.


– CONTINUED –

1


Black plate (94,1)



! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag will mostlikely deploy.

1) A severe side impact near the front seator the second-row seat activates theSRS curtain airbag.

2) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.3) If the angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal

or if the skidding vehicle’s tires hit acurbstone laterally.


Black plate (95,1)


! Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the SRS sideairbag and the SRS curtain airbag will deploy.

1) Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hardsurface

2) Falling into or jumping over a deep hole3) Landing hard or vehicle falling

It is possible that the SRS side and curtainairbags will deploy if a serious impactoccurs to the underside of your vehicle.Some examples are shown in the illustra-tion.


– CONTINUED –

1


Black plate (96,1)



! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely todeploy.

1) The vehicle is involved in an obliqueside-on impact.

2) The vehicle is involved in a side-onimpact in an area outside the vicinity ofthe passenger compartment.

3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole orsimilar object.

4) The vehicle is involved in a side-onimpact from a motorcycle.

5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.

There are many types of collisions whichmight not necessarily require SRS sideairbag deployment. In the event of acci-dents like those illustrated, the SRS sideairbag may not deploy depending on thelevel of accident forces involved.


Black plate (97,1)


! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag is unlikelyto deploy.

1) The vehicle is involved in an obliqueside-on impact.

2) The vehicle is involved in a side-onimpact in an area outside the vicinity ofthe passenger compartment.

3) The vehicle is involved in a side-onimpact from a motorcycle.

There are many types of collisions whichmight not necessarily require SRS curtainairbag deployment. In the event of acci-dents like those illustrated, the SRScurtain airbag may not deploy dependingon the level of accident forces involved.


– CONTINUED –

1


Black plate (98,1)



! Examples of the types of accidentsin which the SRS side airbag andSRS curtain airbag will basically notdeploy.

1) The vehicle is involved in frontal collisionwith another vehicle (moving or station-ary).

2) The vehicle is struck from behind.

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtainairbag are not designed to deploy in mostcases if the vehicle is involved in a frontalcollision or is struck from behind. Exam-ples of such accidents are illustrated.

1) First impact2) Second impactA) SRS curtain airbagB) SRS side airbag

In an accident where the vehicle is struckfrom the side more than once, the SRSside airbag and SRS curtain airbag deployonly once on the first impact.

Example: In the case of a double sideimpact collision, first with one vehicle andimmediately followed by another from thesame direction, once the SRS side airbag

and SRS curtain airbag are activated onthe first impact, they will not be activatedon the second.

! Example of the type of accident inwhich the SRS curtain airbag willbasically not deploy.

The SRS curtain airbags are not basicallydesigned to deploy if the vehicle pitchesend over end.


Black plate (99,1)


& SRS airbag system monitors

A diagnostic system continually monitorsthe readiness of the SRS airbag system(including front seatbelt pretensioners)while the vehicle is being driven. TheSRS airbag system warning light “AIR-BAG” will show normal system operationby lighting for approximately 6 secondswhen the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position.

The following components are monitoredby the indicator.. Front sub sensor (right-hand side). Front sub sensor (left-hand side). Airbag control module (including im-pact and rollover sensors). Frontal airbag module (driver’s side). Frontal airbag module (front passen-

ger’s side). Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-hand side). Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand side). Side airbag module (driver’s side). Side airbag module (front passenger’sside). Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheelhouse right-hand side). Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheelhouse left-hand side). Curtain airbag module (right-hand side). Curtain airbag module (left-hand side). Satellite safing sensor (under the sec-ond-row center seat). Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side). Seatbelt pretensioner (front passen-ger’s side). Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen-ger’s side). Front passenger’s seatbelt tensionsensor. Front passenger’s occupant detectionsystem weight sensor. Front passenger’s occupant detectioncontrol module. Front passenger’s frontal airbag ONand OFF indicator. All related wiring

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any ofthe following conditions, there maybe a malfunction in the seatbeltpretensioners and/or SRS airbagsystem. Immediately take your vehi-cle to your nearest SUBARU dealerto have the system checked. Unlesschecked and properly repaired, theseatbelt pretensioners and/or SRSairbags will operate improperly (e.g.SRS airbags may inflate in a veryminor collision or not inflate in asevere collision), which may in-crease the risk of injury.

. Flashing or flickering of the warn-ing light

. No illumination of the warninglight when the ignition switch isfirst turned to the “ON” position

. Continuous illumination of thewarning light

. Illumination of the warning lightwhile driving


– CONTINUED –

1


Black plate (100,1)



& SRS airbag system servicing

WARNING

. When discarding an airbag mod-ule or scrapping the entire vehi-cle damaged by a collision, con-sult your SUBARU dealer.

. The SRS airbag has no user-serviceable parts. Do not useelectrical test equipment on anycircuit related to the SRS airbagsystem. For required servicing ofthe SRS airbag, consult yournearest SUBARU dealer. Tamper-ing with or disconnecting thesystem’s wiring could result inaccidental inflation of the SRSairbag or could make the systeminoperative, which may result inserious injury.

CAUTION

If you need service or repair in areasindicated in the following list, havethe work performed by an author-ized SUBARU dealer. The SRS air-bag control module, impact sensorsand airbag modules are stored inthese areas.

. Under the center console

. Inside each front fender

. Steering wheel and column andnearby areas

. Top of the dashboard on frontpassenger’s side and nearbyareas

. Each front seat and nearby area

. Inside each center pillar

. In each roof side (from the frontpillar to a point over the second-row seat)

. Between the second-row seatcushion and rear wheel houseon each side

. Under the second-row centerseat

In the event that the SRS airbag isdeployed, replacement of the systemshould be performed only by an author-ized SUBARU dealer. When the compo-nents of the SRS airbag system arereplaced, use only genuine SUBARUparts.

NOTEIn the following cases, contact yourSUBARU dealer as soon as possible.. The front part of the vehicle was

involved in an accident in which onlythe driver’s SRS frontal airbag or bothdriver’s and front passenger’s SRSfrontal airbags did not deploy.. The pad of the steering wheel, thecover over the front passenger’s SRSfrontal airbag, or either roof side (fromthe front pillar to a point over thesecond-row seat) is scratched,cracked, or otherwise damaged.. Center pillar, rear wheel house orrear floor pan, or an area near theseparts, was involved in an accident inwhich the SRS side airbag and SRScurtain airbag did not deploy.. The fabric or leather of either frontseatback is cut, frayed, or otherwisedamaged.. The rear part of the vehicle wasinvolved in an accident in which noSRS airbag was deployed.

& Precautions against vehiclemodification

WARNING

To avoid accidental activation of thesystem or rendering the systeminoperative, which may result inserious injury, no modificationsshould be made to any components


Black plate (101,1)


or wiring of the SRS airbag system.

This includes following modifica-tions.

. Installation of custom steeringwheels

. Attachment of additional trimmaterials to the dashboard

. Installation of custom seats

. Replacement of seat fabric orleather

. Installation of additional fabric orleather on the front seat

. Attachment of a hands-free mi-crophone or any other accessoryto a front pillar, a center pillar, arear pillar, the windshield, a sidewindow, an assist grip, or anyother cabin surface that would benear a deploying SRS curtainairbag.

. Installation of additional electri-cal/electronic equipment such asa mobile two-way radio on ornear the SRS airbag systemcomponents and/or wiring is notadvisable. This could interferewith proper operation of theSRS airbag system.

CAUTION

Do not perform any of the followingmodifications. Such modificationscan interfere with proper operationof the SRS airbag system.

. Attachment of any equipment(bush bar, winches, snow plow,skid plate, etc.) other than genu-ine SUBARU accessory parts.

. Modification of the suspensionsystem or front end structure.

. Installation of a tire of differentsize and construction from thetires specified on the vehicleplacard attached to the driver’sdoor pillar or specified for indivi-dual vehicle models in this Own-er’s Manual.

. Attachment of any equipment(side steps or side sill protectors,etc.) other than genuine SUBARUaccessory parts to the side body.

Always consult your SUBARU dealer ifyou want to install any accessory parts onyour vehicle.


1


Black plate (2,1)


— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —


Black plate (3,1)


Keys ..................................................................... 2-2Key number plate................................................ 2-2

Immobilizer .......................................................... 2-3Security ID plate.................................................. 2-3Security indicator light ........................................ 2-4Key replacement ................................................. 2-4

Door locks ........................................................... 2-5Locking and unlocking from the outside .............. 2-5Locking and unlocking from the inside ................ 2-5Battery drainage prevention function ................... 2-6

Power door locking switches............................. 2-7Key lock-in prevention function ........................... 2-8

Remote keyless entry system ............................ 2-8Locking the doors ............................................... 2-9Unlocking the doors ........................................... 2-10Unlocking the rear gate ...................................... 2-10Illuminated entry ................................................ 2-10Vehicle finder function........................................ 2-10Sounding a panic alarm...................................... 2-11Selecting audible signal operation ...................... 2-11Replacing the battery ......................................... 2-11

Replacing lost transmitters ................................ 2-12Alarm system..................................................... 2-16

System operation............................................... 2-16Activating and deactivating the alarm system ..... 2-16If you have accidentally triggered the alarmsystem ............................................................ 2-17

Arming the system ............................................ 2-17Disarming the system ........................................ 2-18Valet mode ........................................................ 2-18Passive arming.................................................. 2-19Tripped sensor identification .............................. 2-20Shock sensors (dealer option)............................ 2-20

Child safety locks .............................................. 2-21Windows............................................................. 2-21

Power windows ................................................. 2-21Rear gate............................................................ 2-24Moonroof (if equipped)...................................... 2-25

Tilt function ....................................................... 2-26Sliding function ................................................. 2-26Anti-entrapment function.................................... 2-26Sun shade ......................................................... 2-27

Keys and doors

2


Black plate (104,1)


2-2 Keys and doors

Keys

1) Master key2) Submaster key3) Valet key4) Key number plate5) Security ID plate

Three types of keys are provided for yourvehicle.Master key, submaster key and valet key.

The master key and submaster key fit alllocks on your vehicle.. Ignition switch. Driver’s door. Glove box

The valet key fits only the ignition switchand door locks. You can keep the glove

box locked when you leave your vehicleand valet key at a parking facility.

CAUTION

Do not attach a large key holder orkey case to either key. If it bangsagainst your knees while you aredriving, it could turn the ignitionswitch from the “ON” position to the“Acc” or “LOCK” position, therebystopping the engine.

& Key number plate

1) Key number plate2) Security ID plate

The key number is stamped on the keynumber plate attached to the key set.Write down the key number and keep it inanother safe place, not in the vehicle. Thisnumber is needed to make a replacementkey if you lose your key or lock it inside thevehicle.

For information on making replacementkeys for models with the immobilizersystem, refer to “Security ID plate” F2-3.


Black plate (105,1)


Immobilizer

CAUTION

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party re-sponsible for compliance could voidthe user’s authority to operate theequipment.

The immobilizer system is designed toprevent an unauthorized person fromstarting the engine. Only keys registeredwith your vehicle’s immobilizer system canbe used to operate your vehicle. Even ifan unregistered key fits into the ignitionswitch and can be turned to the “START”position, the engine will automatically stopafter several seconds.

Each immobilizer key contains a trans-ponder in which the key’s ID code isstored. When a key is inserted into theignition switch and turned to the “ON”position, the transponder transmits thekey’s ID code to the immobilizer system’sreceiver. If the transmitted ID codematches the ID code registered in theimmobilizer system, the system allows theengine to be started. Since the ID code istransmitted and acted upon almost in-

stantly, the immobilizer system does notimpede normal starting of the engine.If the engine does not start, pull out thekey once before trying again. Refer to“Ignition switch” F3-3.

This device complies with Part 15 ofthe FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of ICRules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) this de-vice may not cause harmful interfer-ence, and (2) this device must acceptany interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

CAUTION

. Do not place the key under directsunlight or anywhere it maybecome hot.

. Do not get the key wet. If the keygets wet, wipe it dry with a clothimmediately.

NOTETo protect your vehicle from theft,please pay close attention to the fol-lowing security precautions.. Never leave your vehicle unattendedwith its keys inside.. Before leaving your vehicle, close all

windows and lock the doors and reargate.. Do not leave spare keys or anyrecord of your key number in thevehicle.

& Security ID plate

1) Key number plate2) Security ID plate

The security ID is stamped on the securityID plate attached to the key set. Writedown the security ID and keep it inanother safe place, not in the vehicle.This number is needed to make a replace-ment key if you lose your key or lock itinside the vehicle.This number is also needed for replace-ment or repair of the engine control unit,

Keys and doors 2-3

– CONTINUED –

2


Black plate (106,1)


2-4 Keys and doors

integrated unit, and combination meter.

& Security indicator light

The security indicator light deters potentialthieves by indicating that the vehicle isequipped with an immobilizer system. Itbegins flashing approximately 60 secondsafter the ignition switch is turned from the“ON” position to the “Acc” or “LOCK”position or immediately after the key ispulled out.If the security indicator light does not flash,the immobilizer system may be malfunc-tioning. If this occurs, contact yourSUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

In case an unauthorized key is used (e.g.an imitation key), the security indicatorlight illuminates.

NOTEEven if the security indicator lightflashes irregularly or its fuse blows(the light does not flash if its fuse isblown), the immobilizer system willfunction normally.

& Key replacementYour key number plate and security IDplate will be required if you ever need areplacement key made. Any new key mustbe registered for use with your vehicle’simmobilizer system before it can be used.Up to four keys can be registered for usewith one vehicle.For security, all the keys registered withyour vehicle’s immobilizer system willhave their ID codes erased and re-registered when a new key is made.Therefore, all of your vehicle’s keys mustbe presented when a new key is regis-tered. Any key that is not re-registeredwhen a new key is made cannot be usedafter the other keys are re-registered. Forinformation on replacement keys and onthe registration of keys with your immo-bilizer system, contact your SUBARUdealer.

NOTEA vehicle that is equipped with theremote engine start system as a dealer

option can register up to three keys foruse with one vehicle.


Black plate (107,1)


Door locks

& Locking and unlocking fromthe outside

To lock the driver’s door from the outsidewith the key, turn the key toward the front.To unlock the door, turn the key toward therear.

Lift the outside door handle to open anunlocked door.

Locking without the key

To lock the door from the outside withoutthe key, rotate the lock lever rearward andthen close the door.

Locking without the key

To lock the door from the outside using the

power door locking switch, push the “ ”sides of the switch and then close thedoor. In this case, all closed doors and therear gate are locked at the same time.

Always make sure that all doors and therear gate are locked before leaving yourvehicle.

NOTEMake sure that you do not leave the keyinside the vehicle before locking thedoors from the outside without the key.

& Locking and unlocking fromthe inside

WARNING

Keep all doors locked when youdrive, especially when small chil-dren are in your vehicle.

Along with the proper use of seat-belts and child restraints, lockingthe doors reduces the chance ofbeing thrown out of the vehicle in anaccident.

Keys and doors 2-5

– CONTINUED –

2


Black plate (108,1)


2-6 Keys and doors

It also helps prevent passengersfrom falling out if a door is acciden-tally opened, and intruders fromunexpectedly opening doors andentering your vehicle.

To lock the door from the inside, rotate thelock lever rearward.

To unlock the door from the inside, rotatethe lock lever forward.

The red mark on the lock lever appearswhen the door is unlocked.Pull the inside door handle to open anunlocked door.Always make sure that all doors and therear gate are closed and locked beforestarting to drive.

& Battery drainage preventionfunction

If any of the doors or the rear gate is notcompletely closed, the interior lights willremain illuminated as a result. However,several lights are automatically turned offby the battery drainage prevention func-tion to prevent the battery from dischar-

ging. The following interior lights areaffected by this function.

Item Switchposition

Automatically turningoff

Map lights OFF Approximately 30seconds later

Dome light DOOR Approximately 10minutes later

Ignitionswitch light — Approximately 10

minutes later

Door steplights — None*

Cargo arealight DOOR None*

*: Door step lights and the cargo area light arenot affected by the battery drainage preventionfunction, so the lights do not turn off automa-tically. To turn off the lights, it is necessary thateach door and the rear gate are completelyclosed.

The operational/non-operational setting ofthis function can be changed by aSUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARUdealer to change the setting.

NOTE. The factory setting (default setting)for this function is set as “operational”.. When leaving the vehicle, pleasemake sure that all doors and the rear


Black plate (109,1)


gate are completely closed.. The battery drainage preventionfunction does not operate while thekey is in the ignition switch.

Power door locking switches

Driver’s switch1) Lock2) Unlock

Front passenger’s switch1) Lock2) Unlock

All doors and the rear gate can be lockedand unlocked by the power door lockingswitches located at the driver’s side andthe front passenger’s side doors.

To lock all doors and the rear gate, pushthe “ ” side of the switch.To unlock all doors and the rear gate, pushthe “ ” side of the switch.

When you close the doors after you setthe door locks, the doors remain locked.

NOTEMake sure that you do not leave the keyinside the vehicle before locking thedoors from the outside using the power

Keys and doors 2-7

– CONTINUED –

2


Black plate (110,1)


2-8 Keys and doors

door locking switches.

& Key lock-in prevention func-tion

This function prevents the doors frombeing locked with the key still in theignition switch.

! Behavior with key lock-in preven-tion function operational

. With either the driver’s or front passen-ger’s door open, the doors automaticallyremain unlocked even if the “ ” side of thedoor locking switch is pushed.. It is possible to lock the all doors andthe rear gate by holding the “ ” side of thedoor locking switch pushed for 3 secondswith the driver’s door open and thenclosing the driver’s door.

! Behavior with key lock-in preven-tion function non-operational

. If the lock lever is turned to the rear(“LOCK”) position with the driver’s dooropen and the driver’s door is then closedwith the lock lever in that position, thedriver’s door is locked.. If the spare key is used to lock thedriver’s door from the outside of thevehicle, the door is locked.

This function’s operational/non-opera-

tional setting can be changed by aSUBARU dealer. Contact a SUBARUdealer for details.

NOTEWhen leaving the vehicle, make sureyou are holding the key before lockingthe doors.

Remote keyless entry system

CAUTION

. Do not expose the remote trans-mitter to severe shocks, such asthose experienced as a result ofdropping or throwing.

. Do not take the remote transmit-ter apart except when replacingthe battery.

. Do not get the remote transmitterwet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry witha cloth immediately.

. When you carry the remote trans-mitter on an airplane, do notpress the button of the remotetransmitter while in the airplane.When any button of the remotetransmitter is pressed, radiowaves are sent and may affectthe operation of the airplane.When you carry the remote trans-mitter in a bag on an airplane,take measures to prevent thebuttons of the remote transmitterfrom being pressed.

This device complies with Part 15 ofthe FCC Rules and with RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject


Black plate (111,1)


to the following two conditions: (1) Thisdevice may not cause harmful inter-ference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, in-cluding interference that may causeundesired operation.Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equip-ment.

The transmitter for the remote keylessentry system is located inside the keyhead.

The remote keyless entry system has thefollowing functions.. Locking and unlocking the doors andrear gate without a key. Unlocking the rear gate without key. Sounding a panic alarm. Arming and disarming the alarm sys-tem. For detailed information, refer to“Alarm system” F2-16.

The operable distance of the remotekeyless entry system is approximately 30feet (10 meters). However, this distancewill vary depending on environmentalconditions.The system’s operable distance will beshorter in areas near a facility or electronic

equipment emitting strong radio wavessuch as a power plant, broadcast station,TV tower, or remote controller of homeelectronic appliances.

NOTEThe remote keyless entry system doesnot operate when the ignition key isinserted in the ignition switch or whenany of the doors or the rear gate is notfully closed.

: Rear gate unlock button: Unlock/disarm button

: Lock/arm buttonA: Panic button

& Locking the doors

Press the “ ” button to lock all doors andrear gate. An electronic chirp will soundonce and the turn signal lights will flashonce.If any of the doors or the rear gate is notfully closed, an electronic chirp will soundfive times and the turn signal lights willflash five times to alert you that any of thedoors or the rear gate is not properlyclosed. When you close the door, it willautomatically lock and then an electronicchirp will sound once and the turn signallights will flash once.

Keys and doors 2-9

– CONTINUED –

2


Black plate (112,1)


2-10 Keys and doors

& Unlocking the doors

Press the “ ” button to unlock the driver’sdoor. An electronic chirp will sound twiceand the turn signal lights will flash twice.To unlock all doors and the rear gate,briefly press the “ ” button a second timewithin 5 seconds.

NOTEIf the interval between the first andsecond presses of the “ ” button (forunlocking of all of the doors and therear gate) is extremely short, the sys-tem may not respond.

& Unlocking the rear gate

Pressing the “ ” button opens the reargate.An electronic chirp will sound twice andthe turn signal lights will flash twice.

& Illuminated entryInterior lights such as the map light, domelight and cargo area light will illuminatewhen the “ ” button is pressed. Theselights remain illuminated for approximately30 seconds if any of the doors or the reargate is not opened.If the “ ” button is pressed before 30seconds have elapsed, these lights willturn off.To activate this function, set the followinginterior light switches to the indicated

positions:Map light: OFF positionDome light: DOOR positionCargo area light: DOOR position

A SUBARU dealer can change the illumi-nation period setting of the interior lights inaccordance with your preference. Contactthe nearest SUBARU dealer for details.

& Vehicle finder functionUse this function to find your vehicleparked among many vehicles in a largeparking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet(10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the “ ”button three times in a 5-second periodwill cause your vehicle’s horn to soundonce and its turn signal lights to flash threetimes.

NOTEIf the interval between presses is tooshort when you press the “ ” buttonthree times, the system may not re-spond to the signals from the remotetransmitter.


Black plate (113,1)


& Sounding a panic alarm

To activate the alarm, press the “PANIC”button once.The horn will sound and the turn signallights will flash.To deactivate the panic alarm, press anybutton on the remote transmitter. Unless abutton on the remote transmitter ispressed, the alarm will be deactivatedafter approximately 30 seconds.

& Selecting audible signal op-eration

Using an electronic chirp, the system willgive you an audible signal when the doorslock and unlock. If desired, you may turnthe audible signal off.Do the following to deactivate the audible

signal. You can also use the same stepsto restore the function.1. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut alldoors and the rear gate.2. Hold down the UNLOCK side of thepower door locking switch.3. While holding down the “UNLOCK”side of the power door locking switch, pullthe key out and re-insert it into the ignitionswitch at least 6 times within 10 secondsafter Step 2.4. Open and close the driver’s door oncewithin 10 seconds after step 3.5. The turn signal lights flash 3 times toindicate completion of the setting.

You may have the above settings done byyour SUBARU dealer.

& Replacing the battery

CAUTION

. Do not let dust, oil or water get onor in the transmitter when repla-cing the battery.

. Be careful not to damage theprinted circuit board in the trans-mitter when replacing the battery.

. Be careful not to allow children totouch the battery and any re-moved parts; children could

swallow them.

. There is a danger of explosion ifan incorrect replacement batteryis used. Replace only with thesame or equivalent type of bat-tery.

. Batteries should not be exposedto excessive heat such as sun-shine, fire or the like.

When the transmitter battery begins to getweak, transmitter range will begin todecrease. Replace the battery as soonas possible.

To replace the battery:

1. Remove the screw on the key head.

Keys and doors 2-11

– CONTINUED –

2


Black plate (114,1)


2-12 Keys and doors

2. Open the key head using a flat-headscrewdriver.

3. Remove the transmitter case from thekey head.

4. Open the transmitter case by releasingthe hooks.5. Remove the old battery from theholder.

1) Negative (−) side facing up

6. Replace with a new battery (TypeCR1620 or equivalent) making sure toinstall the new battery with the negative(−) side facing up.7. Put together the transmitter case byfitting the hooks on both sides of the case.8. Put the transmitter case in the keyhead and then put together the key head.9. Reinstall the screw on the key head.

After the battery is replaced, the trans-mitter must be synchronized with theremote keyless entry system’s controlunit. Press either the “ ” or “ ” buttonsix times to synchronize the unit.

& Replacing lost transmittersIf you lose a transmitter or want topurchase additional transmitters (up tofour can be programmed), you should re-program all of your transmitters for secur-ity reasons. It is recommended that youhave your dealer program all of yourtransmitters into your system.

! Programming the transmitters

The remote keyless entry system isequipped with a special code learningfeature that allows you to program newtransmitter codes into the system or todelete old ones. The system can learn upto four unique transmitter codes. The fourtransmitter codes may be the same or


Black plate (115,1)


different.Programming transmitter codes intosystem:

Key tag

Transmitter circuit board

To register a new transmitter with the

remote keyless entry system, it is neces-sary to program the transmitter’s code(identification number) into the system. Atag showing the code is affixed to the keyunit, and another is affixed to the circuitboard inside the transmitter. If there is notag, open the transmitter case and make anote of the eight-digit number. Programthe number into the system in accordancewith the following procedure.1. Firmly close the doors and the reargate.2. Open the driver’s door, sit on thedriver’s seat, and close the door.3. Perform the following steps within 45seconds.

(1) Open and close the driver’s dooronce.

1) LOCK2) ON

(2) Insert the key into the ignitionswitch, then turn it from the “LOCK”position to the “ON” position 10 timeswithin 15 seconds.

NOTE. When you complete step (2), anelectronic tone will sound once, abuzzer will continue to sound and theinterior light will continue to flash untilthe transmitter codes are completelyregistered.. If you do not perform steps (1) and(2) within 45 seconds, an error willoccur. Neither an electronic tone northe buzzer will sound, and the interiorlamp will not flash. In this event, per-

Keys and doors 2-13

– CONTINUED –

2


Black plate (116,1)


2-14 Keys and doors

form the whole procedure again begin-ning with part 1.

4. Open and close the door once within15 seconds.

NOTE. When part 4 of the procedure iscompleted, an electronic tone willsound for 30 seconds.. If you do not perform the operationsin part 4 within 15 seconds, an errorwill occur and the electronic tone willnot sound. In this event, perform theregistration steps again beginning withpart 3 of the procedure.

5. Before the electronic tone stopssounding, push the “ ” side of the powerdoor locking switch the same number oftimes as the leftmost digit of the transmit-

ter code. For example, push the lockingswitch eight times if the leftmost digit ofthe code is 8.

NOTE. The electronic tone will stop sound-ing when you start entering the num-ber.. If you do not start entering thenumber using the lock knob beforethe electronic tone stops sounding, anerror will occur. In this event, performthe registration steps again beginningwith part 3 of the procedure.. If the interval between one push ofthe knob and the next exceeds 5seconds, an error will occur. In thisevent, perform the procedure againbeginning with part 4. If an error occurssix times, perform the procedure againstarting with part 3.

6. When you have finished entering thenumber, push the “ ” side of the lockingswitch within 5 seconds.

NOTE. An electronic tone will sound.. If you push the “ ” side of thelocking switch when more than 5seconds have passed, an error willoccur. In this event, perform the proce-dure again beginning with part 4. If anerror occurs six times, perform theprocedure again starting with part 3.

7. Perform parts 5 and 6 of the procedurefor each of the remaining digits of thetransmitter code beginning with the sec-ond digit (counting from the left) andfinishing with the eighth digit.


Black plate (117,1)


NOTE. When you finish entering the eighthdigit, an electronic tone will sound for30 seconds.. If the interval between one push ofthe switch and the next exceeds 5seconds, an error will occur. In thisevent, perform the procedure againbeginning with part 4. If an error occurssix times, perform the procedure againstarting with part 3.

8. Before the electronic tone stopssounding, use the power door lockingswitch to reenter the transmitter codebeginning with the leftmost digit.

NOTEIf you do not start entering the numberusing the lock knob before the electro-nic tone stops sounding, an error willoccur. In this event, perform the proce-dure again beginning with part 3.

9. When you have finished entering thecode a second time, an electronic tone willsound for 1 second and automatic doorlocking and unlocking operation will takeplace once to indicate completion ofregistration, provided the code enteredthe second time is identical to that enteredthe first time.

NOTEIf the code entered the second time isnot identical to the code entered thefirst time, an error will occur. In thisevent, perform the procedure againbeginning with part 5. If an error occursfive times, perform the procedure againstarting with part 3.

10. If you wish to program another trans-mitter code into the system (up to fourtransmitter codes can be programmed intothe system), perform the procedure begin-ning with part 4. When you have finishedprogramming all of the necessary trans-mitter codes into the system, remove thekey from the ignition switch.11. Test every registered transmitter toconfirm correct operation.

! Deleting old transmitter codes

The control unit of the remote keylessentry system has four memory locations tostore transmitter codes, giving it the abilityto operate with up to four transmitters.When you lose a transmitter, the losttransmitter’s code remains in the memory.For security reasons, lost transmittercodes should be deleted from the mem-ory.To delete old transmitter codes, programfour transmitter codes into the system. If

you have only one current transmitter,program it four times. If you have twocurrent transmitters, program each onetwice. If you have three current transmit-ters, program two of them once and thethird one twice. This process will leaveonly current transmitter codes in thesystem’s memory.

NOTEMake sure no one else is operatingtheir keyless entry system within rangeof your vehicle when programmingtransmitters. If someone else were tooperate their remote transmitter whileyou are programming your transmit-ters, it is possible that their transmittercode will be programmed into yoursystem, allowing them unauthorizedaccess to your vehicle.

Keys and doors 2-15

2


Black plate (118,1)


2-16 Keys and doors

Alarm system

The alarm system helps to protect yourvehicle and valuables from theft. The hornsounds and the turn signal lights flash ifsomeone attempts to break into yourvehicle.

The system can be armed and disarmedwith the remote transmitter.The system does not operate when thekey is inserted into the ignition switch.

Your vehicle’s alarm system has been setfor activation at the time of shipment fromthe factory. You can set the system fordeactivation yourself or have it done byyour SUBARU dealer.

& System operationThe alarm system will give the followingalarms when triggered.. The vehicle’s horn will sound for 30seconds.. The turn signal lights will flash for 30seconds.

If any of the doors or the rear gate remainsopen after the 30-second period, the hornwill continue to sound for a maximum of 3minutes. If any of the doors or the reargate is closed while the horn is sounding,the horn will stop sounding with a delay of

up to 30 seconds.The alarm is triggered by:. Opening any of the doors or the reargate. Physical impact to the vehicle, such asforced entry (only vehicles with shocksensors (dealer option))

NOTEThe alarm system can be set to triggerthe illumination of the following interiorlights.. Dome light (illuminates only whenthe dome light switch is in the “DOOR”position). Map lights

The notifications regarding the domelight and the map lights are deactivatedas the factory setting. A SUBARUdealer can activate the system. Contactyour SUBARU dealer for details.

& Activating and deactivatingthe alarm system

To change the setting of your vehicle’salarm system for activation or deactiva-tion, do the following.1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to“Disarming the system” F2-18.2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all

doors and the rear gate.3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”position.4. Hold down the UNLOCK side of thedriver’s power door locking switch, openthe driver’s door within the following 1second, and wait 10 seconds withoutreleasing the switch. The setting will thenbe changed as follows.

If the system was previously activated:The odometer/trip meter screen displays“AL oF” and the horn sounds twice,indicating that the system is now deacti-vated.

If the system was previously deacti-vated:The odometer/trip meter screen displays“AL on” and the horn sounds once,indicating that the system is now acti-vated.

NOTEYou may have the above settingchange done by your SUBARU dealer.


Black plate (119,1)


& If you have accidentally trig-gered the alarm system

! To stop the alarm

Do any of the following operations.. Press any button on the remote trans-mitter.. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”position.

& Arming the system

! To arm the system using remotetransmitter

1. Close all windows and the moonroof.2. Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.3. Open the doors and get out of thevehicle.4. Make sure that the engine hood islocked.5. Close all doors and the rear gate.

: Press to Arm the system.: Press to Disarm the system.

6. Briefly press the “ ” button (for lessthan 2 seconds). All doors and the reargate will lock, an electronic chirp willsound once, the turn signal lights will flash

once and the indicator lights will startflashing rapidly. After rapid flashing for 30seconds (standby time), the indicatorlights will then flash slowly (twice approxi-mately every 2 seconds), indicating thatthe system has been armed for surveil-lance.

If any of the doors or the rear gate is notfully closed, an electronic chirp soundsfive times, the turn signal lights flash fivetimes to alert you that the doors or the reargate are not properly closed. When youclose the door, the system will automati-cally arm and doors will automatically lock.

! To arm the system using powerdoor locking switches

1. Close all windows.2. Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.3. Open the doors and get out of thevehicle.4. Make sure that the engine hood islocked.5. Close the doors and the rear gate butleave only the driver’s door or the frontpassenger’s door open.

Keys and doors 2-17

– CONTINUED –

2


Black plate (120,1)


2-18 Keys and doors

6. Push the front side (“LOCK” side) ofthe power door locking switch to set thedoor locks.7. Close the door. An electronic chirp willsound once, the turn signal lights will flashonce and the indicator lights will startflashing rapidly. After rapid flashing for 30seconds (standby time), the indicatorlights will then flash slowly (twice approxi-mately every 2 seconds), indicating thatthe system has been armed for surveil-lance.

NOTE. The system can be armed even if theengine hood, the windows and/ormoonroof are opened. Always makesure that they are fully closed beforearming the system.

. The 30-second standby time can beeliminated if you prefer. Have it per-formed by your SUBARU dealer.. The system is in the standby modefor a 30-second period after locking thedoors with the remote transmitter. Thesecurity indicator light will flash atshort intervals during this period.. If any of the following actions isdone during the standby period, thesystem will not switch to the surveil-lance state.

– Doors are unlocked using theremote transmitter.– Any of the doors or the rear gateis opened.– Ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position.

& Disarming the systemBriefly press the “ ” button (for less than2 seconds) on the remote transmitter. Thedriver’s door will unlock, an electronicchirp will sound twice and the turn signallights will flash twice. The flashing of thesecurity indicator light will then changeslowly (once approximately every 3 sec-onds from twice approximately every 2seconds), indicating that the alarm systemhas been disarmed.

To unlock all other doors and the reargate, briefly press the “ ” button a

second time within 5 seconds.

NOTEIf the interval between the first andsecond presses of the “ ” button (forunlocking of all of the doors and therear gate) is extremely short, the sys-tem may not respond.

! Emergency disarming

If you cannot disarm the system using thetransmitter (i.e. the transmitter is lost,broken or the transmitter battery is tooweak), you can disarm the system withoutusing the transmitter.The system can be disarmed if you turnthe ignition switch from the “LOCK” to the“ON” position with a registered key.

& Valet modeWhen you choose the valet mode, thealarm system does not operate. In valetmode, the remote transmitter is used onlyfor locking and unlocking the doors andrear gate and panic activation.

To enter the valet mode, change thesetting of your vehicle’s alarm system fordeactivation mode. Refer to “Activatingand deactivating the alarm system” F2-16. The security indicator light will con-tinue to flash once every 3 secondsindicating that the system is in the valet


Black plate (121,1)


mode.

To exit valet mode, change the setting ofyour vehicle’s alarm system for activationmode. Refer to “Activating and deactivat-ing the alarm system” F2-16.

& Passive armingWhen passive arming mode has beenprogrammed by the dealer, arming of thesystem is automatically accomplishedwithout using the remote transmitter. Notethat in this mode, DOORS MUST BEMANUALLY LOCKED.

! To enter the passive mode

If you wish to program the passive armingmode, have it done by your SUBARUdealer.

! Arming the system

CAUTION

In passive mode, the system willautomatically activate the alarm butWILL NOT automatically lock thedoors. In order to lock the doorsyou must either lock them as in-dicated in step 4 below or with thekey once they have been closed.Failure to lock the doors manuallywill result in a higher security risk.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”position.

1) LOCK2) ON

2. Turn the ignition switch from “ON” to“LOCK” position and remove the key fromthe ignition switch.3. Open the doors and get out of thevehicle.

4. Before closing the doors, lock all doorswith the inside door lock levers.5. Close the doors. The system willautomatically arm after 1 minute.

In the passive mode, the system can alsobe armed with the remote transmitter orwith the power door locking switches. Ifthe remote transmitter or power doorlocking switch is used to lock the vehicle,arming will take place immediately regard-less of whether or not the passive modehas been selected.

! Disarming the system

To disarm the system, briefly press the“ ” button on the transmitter.

Keys and doors 2-19

– CONTINUED –

2


Black plate (122,1)


2-20 Keys and doors

& Tripped sensor identificationThe security indicator light flashes whenthe alarm system has been triggered.Also, the number of flashes indicates thelocation of unauthorized intrusion or theseverity of impact on the vehicle.

When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position, the indicator light willilluminate for 1 second and then flash asfollows.. When a door or rear gate was opened:5 times. When the ignition switch was turned tothe “ON” position by using a key notregistered with your immobilizer system: 3times. When a strong impact or multipleimpacts were sensed: twice (only vehicleswith shock sensors (dealer option)). When a light impact was sensed: once(only vehicles with shock sensors (dealeroption))

NOTEAny of the above indicator light flash-ing patterns will recur each time theignition switch is turned to the “ON”position. Rearming the alarm systemcancels the flashing pattern of thesecurity indicator light.

& Shock sensors (dealer op-tion)

The shock sensors trigger the alarmsystem when they sense impacts appliedto the vehicle and when any of theirelectric wires is cut. The alarm systemcauses the horn to sound and the turnsignal lights to flash for a short time whenthe sensed impact is weak, but it warns ofa strong impact or multiple impacts bysounding the horn and flashing the turnsignal lights, both lasting approximately 30seconds.If you desire, your SUBARU dealer canconnect them and set them for activationor deactivation.

NOTE. The shock sensors are not alwaysable to sense impacts caused by break-ing in, and cannot sense an impact thatdoes not cause vibration (such asbreaking the glass using a rescuehammer).. The shock sensors may sense vi-bration like those shown in the follow-ing list and trigger the alarm system.Select the settings of the alarm systemand shock sensors appropriately de-pending on where you usually parkyour vehicle.

Example:– Vibration from construction site– Vibration in multistory car park– Vibration from trains

. You can have the sensitivity of theshock sensors adjusted to your pre-ference by your SUBARU dealer.


Black plate (123,1)


Child safety locks

WARNING

Always use the child safety lockwhenever a child rides in the rear.Serious injury could result if a childaccidentally opened the door andfell out.

Each rear door has a child safety lock thatprevents the door from being opened evenif the inside door handle is pulled.

When the child safety lock lever is in thelock position, the door cannot be openedfrom inside regardless of the position ofthe inner door handle lock lever. The doorcan only be opened from the outside.

Windows

& Power windows

WARNING

To avoid serious personal injurycaused by entrapment, always con-form to the following instructionswithout exception.

. When operating the power win-dows, be extremely careful toprevent anyone’s fingers, arms,neck or head from being caughtin the window.

. Always lock the passengers’ win-dows using the lock switch whenchildren are riding in the vehicle.

. Before leaving the vehicle, al-ways remove the key from theignition switch for safety andnever allow an unattended childto remain in the vehicle. Failureto follow this procedure couldresult in injury to a child operat-ing the power window.

The power windows operate only whenthe ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

! Driver’s side switches

1) Lock switch2) For driver’s window3) For front passenger’s window4) For rear left window5) For rear right window

All door windows can be controlled by thepower window switch cluster at the driverside door.

Keys and doors 2-21

– CONTINUED –

2


Black plate (124,1)


2-22 Keys and doors

! Operating the driver’s window

1) Open2) Automatically open

To open:Push the switch down lightly and hold it.The window will open as long as theswitch is held.

This switch also has a one-touch autodown feature that allows the window to beopened fully without holding the switch.Push the switch down until it clicks andrelease it, and the window will fully open.To stop the window halfway, pull theswitch up lightly.

To close:Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. Thewindow will close as long as the switch isheld.

! Operating the passengers’ windows

To open:Push the appropriate switch down andhold it until the window reaches thedesired position.

To close:Pull the switch up and hold it until thewindow reaches the desired position.


Black plate (125,1)


! Locking the passengers’ windows

Push the lock switch. When the lockswitch is in the “LOCK” position, thepassengers’ windows cannot be openedor closed.Press the switch again to cancel thepassengers’ window locking.

NOTEWhen the lock switch is pushed to the“LOCK” position, the indicator lights inthe passenger’s window switches (in-cluded in the power window switchcluster on the driver’s door) all turn off.

! Passengers’ side switches

Front passenger’s window switch1) Open2) Close

Rear passengers’ window switches1) Open2) Close

To open:Push the switch down and hold it until thewindow reaches the desired position.To close:Pull the switch up and hold it until thewindow reaches the desired position.

When the lock switch on the powerwindow switch cluster, located on thedriver’s side door, is in the “LOCK”position, the passengers’ windows cannotbe operated with the passengers’switches.

Keys and doors 2-23

2


Black plate (126,1)


2-24 Keys and doors

Rear gate

The rear gate can be locked and unlockedusing any of the following systems.. Power door locking switch: Refer to“Power door locking switches” F2-7.. Remote keyless entry system (ifequipped): Refer to “Remote keyless entrysystem” F2-8.

To open:First unlock the rear gate lock then pushthe button.

To close:Lower the rear gate slowly and push downfirmly until the latch engages.The rear gate can be lowered easily if youpull it down holding the recessed grip.

WARNING

. To prevent dangerous exhaustgas from entering the vehicle,always keep the rear gate closedwhile driving.

. Do not attempt to shut the reargate while holding the recessedgrip. Also avoid closing the reargate by pulling on the recessedgrip from inside the cargo space.There is a danger of your handbeing caught and injured.

CAUTION

. Do not jam a plastic bag in orplace cellophane tape on the reargate stays or scratch the stayswhile loading or unloading cargo.That could cause leakage of gasfrom the stays, which may resultin their inability to hold the reargate open.

. Be careful not to hit your head orface on the rear gate when open-ing or closing the rear gate andwhen loading or unloading car-go.


Black plate (127,1)


NOTEIf the rear gate cannot be unlocked dueto a discharged vehicle battery, amalfunction in the door locking/unlock-ing system or other causes, you canunlock it by manually operating therear gate lock release lever. For theprocedure, refer to “Rear gate – if therear gate cannot be unlocked” F9-18.

Moonroof (if equipped)

WARNING

Never let anyone’s hands, arms,head or any objects protrude fromthe moonroof. A person could beseriously injured if the vehicle stopssuddenly or turns sharply or if thevehicle is involved in an accident.

To avoid serious personal injurycaused by entrapment, always con-form to the following instructionswithout exception.

. Before closing the moonroof,make sure that no one’s hands,arms, head or other objects willbe accidentally caught in themoonroof.

. Before leaving the vehicle, al-ways remove the key from theignition switch for safety andnever allow an unattended childto remain in the vehicle. Failureto follow this procedure couldresult in injury to a child operat-ing the moonroof.

. Never try to check the anti-en-trapment function by deliberatelyplacing part of your body in themoonroof.

CAUTION

. Do not sit on the edge of the openmoonroof.

. Do not operate the moonroof iffalling snow or extremely coldconditions have caused it tofreeze shut.

. The anti-entrapment functiondoes not operate when the moon-roof is being tilted down. Be sureto confirm that it is safe to do sobefore tilting the moonroof down.

The moonroof has both tilting and slidingfunctions.

The moonroof operates only when theignition switch is in the “ON” position.

Keys and doors 2-25

– CONTINUED –

2


Black plate (128,1)


2-26 Keys and doors

& Tilt function

1) Tilt switch2) Raise3) Lower

The tilting function will only operate whenthe moonroof is fully closed.

Push the rear side of the “Tilt” switch toraise the moonroof.Push the front side of the “Tilt” switch tolower the moonroof.

Release the switch after the moonroof hasbeen raised or has been lowered com-pletely. Pushing the switch continuouslymay cause damage to the moonroof.

NOTEOne-touch operation does not takeplace when the moonroof is raised orlowered. Push the switch continuouslyto raise or lower the moonroof.

& Sliding function

1) Open/Close switch2) Open3) Close

Push the “Open/Close” switch rearward toopen the moonroof. The sun shade willalso be opened together with the moon-roof.Push the “Open/Close” switch forward toclose the moonroof. The moonroof willstop halfway. Push it again to close themoonroof completely.

To stop the moonroof at a selected mid-way position while opening or closing it,momentarily push the switch to the“OPEN” or “CLOSE” side.After washing the vehicle or after it rains,wipe away water on the roof prior toopening the moonroof to prevent dropsof water from falling into the passengercompartment.

& Anti-entrapment functionWhen the moonroof senses a substantialenough object trapped between its glassand the vehicle’s roof during closure, itautomatically moves back to either of thefollowing positions according to the pointat which it senses the object.. When the moonroof senses the objectat a point between the halfway stopposition and fully closed position, it movesback to the halfway stop position andstops there.. When the moonroof senses the objectat a point between the halfway stopposition and fully open position, it movesback to the fully open position and stopsthere.

The anti-entrapment function may also beactivated by a strong shock on the moon-roof even when there is nothing trapped.


Black plate (129,1)


CAUTION

Never attempt to test this functionusing fingers, hands or other partsof your body.

NOTEFor the sake of safety, it is recom-mended that you avoid driving with themoonroof fully opened.

& Sun shade

The sun shade can be slid forward orbackward by hand while the moonroof isclosed.If the moonroof is opened, the sun shadealso moves back.

Keys and doors 2-27

2


Black plate (2,1)


— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —


Black plate (5,1)


Ignition switch ..................................................... 3-3LOCK.................................................................. 3-3Acc..................................................................... 3-4ON...................................................................... 3-4START ................................................................ 3-4Key reminder chime ............................................ 3-4Ignition switch light ............................................. 3-4

Hazard warning flasher....................................... 3-5Meters and gauges.............................................. 3-5

Combination meter illumination ........................... 3-5Canceling the function for meter needle/gaugemovement and combination meter sequentialillumination upon turning on the ignitionswitch............................................................... 3-5

Speedometer....................................................... 3-6Odometer............................................................ 3-6Double trip meter ................................................ 3-7Tachometer ......................................................... 3-7Fuel gauge.......................................................... 3-8Temperature gauge ............................................. 3-8

Warning and indicator lights .............................. 3-9Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 3-10SRS airbag system warning light ........................ 3-11Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFFindicators......................................................... 3-12

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunctionindicator light................................................... 3-12

Charge warning light .......................................... 3-13Oil pressure warning light .................................. 3-13AT OIL TEMP warning light ................................. 3-13

Rear differential oil temperature warninglight ................................................................ 3-13

Low tire pressure warning light .......................... 3-14ABS warning light.............................................. 3-15Brake system warning light................................ 3-16Low fuel warning light ....................................... 3-17Door open warning light .................................... 3-17Windshield washer fluid warning light ................ 3-17All-Wheel Drive warning light ............................. 3-18Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light (U.S.-spec models and Canada-spec. models)/VehicleDynamics Control operation indicator light (allmodels) ........................................................... 3-18

Traction Control system OFF indicator light(U.S.-spec models and Canada-spec.models) ........................................................... 3-19

Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light (LatinAmerica-spec. models)/Traction Control OFFindicator light (Latin America-spec. models) ..... 3-19

Security indicator light....................................... 3-21SPORT mode indicator light ............................... 3-21Select lever/Gear position indicator .................... 3-21Turn signal indicator lights................................. 3-21High beam indicator light ................................... 3-22Cruise control indicator light.............................. 3-22Cruise control set indicator light ........................ 3-22Headlight indicator light ..................................... 3-22Front fog light indicator light.............................. 3-22

Clock .................................................................. 3-22Outside temperature indicator .......................... 3-23

Low outside temperature warning ...................... 3-24


3


Black plate (6,1)



Multi function display (vehicles without agenuine SUBARU navigation system) ........... 3-24Current fuel consumption ................................... 3-25Average fuel consumption .................................. 3-25Driving range on remaining fuel.......................... 3-26Journey time...................................................... 3-27

Light control switch ........................................... 3-27Headlights.......................................................... 3-28High/low beam change (dimmer)......................... 3-28Headlight flasher ................................................ 3-28Daytime running light system ............................. 3-29

Turn signal lever ................................................ 3-29Illumination brightness control ......................... 3-29Headlight beam leveler (if equipped) ................ 3-30

Parking light switch........................................... 3-32Front fog light switch ........................................ 3-32Wiper and washer.............................................. 3-33

Windshield wiper and washer switches .............. 3-34Rear window wiper and washer switch ............... 3-35

Windshield wiper deicer.................................... 3-36Rear window defogger button .......................... 3-37Mirrors ................................................................ 3-38

Type A inside mirror (if equipped) ...................... 3-38Type B inside mirror (if equipped) ...................... 3-38Type C inside mirror (if equipped) ...................... 3-41Outside mirrors ................................................. 3-42

Tilt steering wheel ............................................. 3-44Horn.................................................................... 3-44


Black plate (133,1)


Ignition switch

WARNING

. Never turn the ignition switch to“LOCK” while the vehicle isbeing driven or towed becausethat will lock the steering wheel,preventing steering control. Andwhen the engine is turned off, ittakes a much greater effort thanusual to steer.

. Before leaving the vehicle, al-ways remove the key from theignition switch for safety andnever allow an unattended childto remain in the vehicle. Failureto follow this procedure couldresult in injury to a child orothers. Children could operatethe power windows, the moon-roof or other controls or evenmake the vehicle move.

CAUTION

Do not attach a large key holder orkey case to either key. If it bangedagainst your knees or hands whileyou were driving, it could turn theignition switch from the “ON” posi-

tion to the “Acc” or “LOCK” posi-tion, thereby stopping the engine.Also, if the key is attached to akeyholder or to a large bunch ofother keys, centrifugal force may acton it as the vehicle moves, resultingin unwanted turning of the ignitionswitch.

The ignition switch has four positions:LOCK, Acc, ON and START.

NOTE. Keep the ignition switch in the“LOCK” position when the engine isnot running.. Using electrical accessories for along time with the ignition switch in the“ON” or “Acc” position can cause thebattery to go dead.

. If the ignition switch will not movefrom the “LOCK” position to the “Acc”position, turn the steering wheelslightly to the left and right as you turnthe ignition switch.

& LOCKThe key can only be inserted or removedin this position. The ignition switch will lockthe steering wheel when you remove thekey.If turning the key is difficult, turn thesteering wheel slightly to the right and leftas you turn the key.

The key can be turned from “Acc” to“LOCK” only when the select lever is in the“P” position.

Instruments and controls 3-3

– CONTINUED –

3


Black plate (134,1)


3-4 Instruments and controls

& AccIn this position the electrical accessories(radio, accessory power outlet, etc.) canbe used.

& ONThis is the normal operating position afterthe engine is started.

& START

CAUTION

Do not turn the ignition switch to the“START” position while the engineis running.

The engine is started in this position. Thestarter cranks the engine to start it. Whenthe key is released (after the engine hasstarted), the key automatically returns tothe “ON” position.

If your registered key fails to start theengine, pull out the key once (the securityindicator light will blink), and then insertthe key in the ignition switch and turn it tothe “START” position and again try to startthe engine.

NOTEThe engine may not start in the follow-ing cases.

. The key grip is touching another keyor a metallic key holder.

. The key is near another key that

contains an immobilizer transponder.. The key is near or touching anothertransmitter.

& Key reminder chimeThe reminder chime sounds when thedriver’s door opens and the key is in the“LOCK” or “Acc” positions. The chimestops when the key is removed from theignition switch.

& Ignition switch lightFor easy access to the ignition switch inthe dark, the ignition switch light illumi-nates when the driver’s door is opened.The light remains on for several secondsand then gradually turns off after driver’sdoor is closed. Also, the light turns offimmediately if the key is turned to the “ON”position.


Black plate (135,1)


Hazard warning flasher

The hazard warning flasher is used towarn other drivers when you have to parkyour vehicle under emergency conditions.The hazard warning flasher works with theignition switch in any position.

To turn on the hazard warning flasher,push the hazard warning button on theinstrument panel. To turn off the flasher,push the button again.

NOTEWhen the hazard warning flasher is on,the turn signals do not work.

Meters and gauges

NOTELiquid crystal displays are used insome of the meters and gauges onthe combination meter. You will findtheir indications hard to see if you wearpolarized glasses.

& Combination meter illumina-tion

When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position, the various parts of thecombination meter are illuminated in thefollowing sequence.1. Warning lights, indicator lights, meterrims, meter needles, odometer, trip meter,and gauge back lights illuminate.2. Meter needles and gauges each showMAX reading.3. Meter needles and gauges each showMIN reading.4. Meter and gauge dials illuminate.5. Regular illumination (for driving) be-gins.

NOTEThe above sequence of operations maynot take place if you quickly turn the

ignition switch to start the engine. Thisis not a malfunction.

& Canceling the function formeter needle/gauge move-ment and combination metersequential illumination uponturning on the ignition switch

It is possible to activate or deactivate themovement of the meter needles andgauges and sequential illumination of thecombination meter that takes place whenthe ignition switch is turned to the “ON”position.Turn the ignition switch to the “Acc”position. With the A trip meter indicationselected, briefly press the trip knob twice.You can now establish the activated/deactivated setting for movement of the


– CONTINUED –

3


Black plate (136,1)



meter needles and gauges when theignition switch is turned to the “ON”position. To change the current setting,press the trip knob for at least 2 seconds.

: Activated: Deactivated

With the function deactivated, the combi-nation meter illuminates as follows.1. Warning lights, indicator lights, meterrims, meter needles, odometer, trip meter,and gauge back lights illuminate.2. Meter and gauge dials illuminate.3. Regular illumination (for driving) be-gins.

Briefly press the trip knob again. You cannow establish the activated/deactivatedsetting for sequential illumination of the

combination meter when the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON” position. Tochange the current setting, press the tripknob for at least 2 seconds.

: Activated: Deactivated

Briefly press the knob to return to the A tripmeter indication.

If you turn the ignition switch to the“LOCK” position, turn the ignition switchto the “ON” position, or open and close thedriver’s door during the setting procedure,the new setting will be canceled.Also, if you do not press the trip knob for aperiod of 10 seconds, the new setting willbe canceled.

NOTE. It is not possible to cancel sequen-tial illumination of the combinationmeter while sequential illumination isactually taking place. Cancel sequen-tial illumination when regular illumina-tion (for driving) has begun.. When you open the driver’s doorwith the ignition switch in the “LOCK”position, the meters’ needles and rimsare lit. The illumination stops workingwhen you shut the driver’s door orautomatically after 30 seconds.

& SpeedometerThe speedometer shows the vehiclespeed.

& Odometer

This meter displays the odometer whenthe ignition switch is in the “LOCK”, “Acc”or “ON” position.The odometer shows the total distancethat the vehicle has been driven.

If you press the trip knob when the ignitionswitch is in the “LOCK” or “Acc” position,the odometer/trip meter will light up. If youdo not press the trip knob within 10seconds of illumination of the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip meter will turnoff.


Black plate (137,1)


The odometer/trip meter will also turn off ifyou open and close the driver’s doorwithin 10 seconds of illumination of theodometer/trip meter.

& Double trip meter

This meter displays two trip meters whenthe ignition switch is in the “LOCK”, “Acc”or “ ON” position.The trip meter shows the distance that thevehicle has been driven since you last setit to zero.To change the mode indication, brieflypush the knob.Each press of the knob changes the modeindication alternately.

To set the trip meter to zero, select the Atrip or B trip meter by pushing the knoband keep the knob pushed for more than 2seconds.

If you press the trip knob when the ignitionswitch is in the “LOCK” position, theodometer/trip meter will light up. It ispossible to switch between the A tripmeter and B trip meter indications whilethe odometer/trip meter is lit up. If you donot press the trip knob within 10 secondsof illumination of the odometer/trip meter,the odometer/trip meter will turn off. Also,if you open and close the driver’s doorwithin 10 seconds of illumination of theodometer/trip meter, the odometer/tripmeter will turn off.

CAUTION

To ensure safety, do not attempt tochange the function of the indicatorduring driving, as an accident couldresult.

NOTEIf the connection between the combina-tion meter and battery is broken for anyreason such as vehicle maintenance orfuse replacement, the data recorded onthe trip meter will be lost.

! Vehicle communication systemmalfunction indication

The vehicle communication system car-ries various types of information (vehiclespeed, running conditions, etc.) to controlmodules. In the event of a malfunction inthis communication system, the trip meterwill show “ ”.If the trip meter shows “ ”, immediatelycontact the nearest SUBARU dealer andhave the vehicle communication systeminspected.

NOTEIf you press the trip knob while the tripmeter is showing “ ”, the trip meterindication will appear for 10 seconds.

& TachometerThe tachometer shows the engine speedin thousands of revolutions per minute.

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine with the


– CONTINUED –

3


Black plate (138,1)



pointer of the tachometer in the redzone. This may cause severe da-mage to the engine.

NOTETo protect the engine while the selectlever is in the “P” or “N” position, theengine is controlled so that the enginespeed may not become too high even ifthe accelerator pedal is depressedhard.

& Fuel gauge

The fuel gauge shows the approximateamount of fuel remaining in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly duringbraking, turning or acceleration due to fuel

level movement in the tank.If you press the trip knob while the ignitionswitch is in the “LOCK” or “Acc” position,the fuel gauge will light up and indicate theamount of fuel remaining in the tank.

NOTE

You will see the “ ” sign in the fuelgauge meter.This indicates that the fuel filler door(lid) is located on the right side of thevehicle.

& Temperature gauge

1) Normal operating range

The temperature gauge shows enginecoolant temperature when the ignitionswitch is in the “ON” position.

The coolant temperature will vary inaccordance with the outside temperatureand driving conditions.

We recommend that you drive moderatelyuntil the pointer of the temperature gaugereaches near the middle of the range.Engine operation is optimum with theengine coolant at this temperature range.Also, high revving operation while theengine is not sufficiently warmed upshould be avoided.


Black plate (139,1)


CAUTION

If the pointer exceeds the normaloperating range, safely stop thevehicle as soon as possible.

Refer to “Engine overheating” F9-14.

Warning and indicator lights

Several of the warning and indicator lightsilluminate momentarily and then turn offwhen the ignition switch is initially turnedto the “ON” position. This permits check-ing the operation of the bulbs.Apply the parking brake and turn theignition switch to the “ON” position. Forthe system check, the following lightsilluminate and turn off after several sec-onds or after the engine has started:

: Driver’s seatbelt warning light(The seatbelt warning light turns offonly when the driver fastens theseatbelt.)

: Front passenger’s seatbelt warninglight(The seatbelt warning light turns offonly when the front seat passengerfastens the seatbelt.)

: SRS airbag system warning light

: CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-function indicator light

: Charge warning light

: Oil pressure warning light

: AT OIL TEMP warning light

/ : ABS warning light

: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light(U.S.-spec. models and Canada-spec.models)/Vehicle Dynamics Control op-eration indicator light (all models)

: Traction Control system OFF indicatorlight (U.S.-spec. models and Canada-spec. models)

: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light(Latin America-spec. models)/TractionControl system OFF indicator light(Latin America-spec. models)

/ : Brake system warning light

: AWD warning light

: Low tire pressure warning light

: SPORT mode indicator light

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ONindicator light

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFFindicator light

: Low fuel warning light

: Cruise control indicator light

: Cruise control set indicator light

: Rear differential oil temperature warn-ing light

: Windshield washer fluid warning light


– CONTINUED –

3


Black plate (140,1)



: Door open warning light

If any lights do not illuminate, it indicates aburned-out bulb or a malfunction of thecorresponding system.Consult your authorized SUBARU dealerfor repair.

& Seatbelt warning lightand chime

Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbeltwarning device at the driver’s and frontpassenger’s seat.With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”position, this device reminds the driverand front passenger to fasten their seat-belts by illuminating the warning lights inthe locations indicated in the followingillustrations and sounding a chime.

Driver’s warning light

Front passenger’s warning light

! Operation

If the driver and/or front passenger have/has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when

the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”position, the seatbelt warning light(s) willflash for 6 seconds, to warn that theseatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the dri-ver’s seatbelt is not fastened, a chime willalso sound simultaneously.

NOTE. If the driver’s and/or front passen-ger’s seatbelt(s) is/are still not fastened6 seconds later, the seatbelt warningdevice operates as follows accordingto the vehicle speed.

– At speeds lower than approxi-mately 9 mph (15 km/h)The warning light(s) for unfastenedseatbelt(s) will alternate betweensteady illumination and flashing at15-second intervals. The chime willnot sound.– At speeds higher than approxi-mately 9 mph (15 km/h)The warning light(s) for unfastenedseatbelt(s) will alternate betweenflashing and steady illumination at15-second intervals and the chimewill sound while the warning light(s)is/are flashing.

. It is possible to cancel the warningoperation that follows the 6-secondwarning after turning ON the ignitionswitch. When the ignition switch is


Black plate (141,1)


turned ON next time, however, thecomplete sequence of the warningoperation resumes. For further detailsabout canceling the warning operation,please contact your SUBARU dealer.

If there is no passenger on the frontpassenger’s seat, the seatbelt warningdevice for the front passenger’s seat willbe deactivated. The front passenger’soccupant detection system monitorswhether or not there is a passenger onthe front passenger’s seat. Observe thefollowing precautions. Failure to do somay prevent the device from functioningcorrectly or cause the device to fail.. Do not install any accessory such as atable or TV onto the seatback.. Do not store a heavy load in theseatback pocket.. Do not allow the second-row seatoccupant to place his/her hands or legson the front passenger’s seatback, orallow him/her to pull the seatback.

If the seatbelt warning device for the frontpassenger’s seat does not function cor-rectly (e.g., it is activated even when thefront passenger’s seat is empty or it isdeactivated even when the front passen-ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt),take the following actions.. Ensure that no article is placed on the

seat other than a child restraint systemand its child occupant.. Ensure that there is no article left in theseatback pocket.

If still the seatbelt warning device for frontpassenger’s seat does not function cor-rectly after taking relevant corrective ac-tions described above, immediately con-tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec-tion.

& SRS airbag systemwarning light

When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position, the SRS airbag systemwarning light will illuminate for approxi-mately 6 seconds and turn off. This showsthe SRS frontal airbag and SRS sideairbag and SRS curtain airbag and seat-belt pretensioners are in normal operation.

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any ofthe following conditions, there maybe a malfunction in the seatbeltpretensioners and/or SRS airbagsystem. Immediately take your vehi-cle to your nearest SUBARU dealerto have the system checked. Unlesschecked and properly repaired, the

seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRSairbags will operate improperly (e.g.SRS airbags may inflate in a veryminor collision or not inflate in asevere collision), which may in-crease the risk of injury.

. Flashing or flickering of the warn-ing light

. No illumination of the warninglight when the ignition switch isfirst turned to the “ON” position

. Continuous illumination of thewarning light

. Illumination of the warning lightwhile driving


– CONTINUED –

3


Black plate (142,1)



& Front passenger’s frontalairbag ON and OFF indica-tors

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ONindicator

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFFindicator

The front passenger’s frontal airbag ONand OFF indicators show you the status ofthe front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.The indicators are located in the centerportion of the dashboard.When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position, both the ON and OFFindicators illuminate for 6 seconds duringwhich time the system is checked. Follow-ing the system check, both indicators turnoff for 2 seconds. After that, one of theindicators illuminates depending on the

status of the front passenger’s SRS frontalairbag determined by the SUBARU ad-vanced frontal airbag system monitoring.If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbagis activated, the passenger’s frontal airbagON indicator will illuminate while the OFFindicator will remain off.If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbagis deactivated, the passenger’s frontalairbag ON indicator will remain off whilethe OFF indicator will illuminate.If both the ON and OFF indicators remainilluminated or off simultaneously, thesystem is malfunctioning. Contact yourSUBARU dealer immediately for an in-spection.

& CHECK ENGINE warn-ing light/Malfunction in-dicator light

CAUTION

If the CHECK ENGINE light illumi-nates while you are driving, haveyour vehicle checked/repaired byyour SUBARU dealer as soon aspossible. Continued vehicle opera-tion without having the emissioncontrol system checked and re-paired as necessary could causeserious damage, which may not be

covered by your vehicle’s warranty.

If this light illuminates steadily or blinkswhile the engine is running, it may indicatethat there is a problem or potentialproblem somewhere in the emission con-trol system.

! If the light illuminates steadily

If the light illuminates steadily while drivingor does not turn off after the engine starts,an emission control system malfunctionhas been detected.You should have your vehicle checked byan authorized SUBARU dealer immedi-ately.

NOTEThis light also illuminates when the fuelfiller cap is not tightened until it clicks.

If you have recently refueled your vehicle,the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warninglight/malfunction indicator light illuminatingcould be a loose or missing fuel filler cap.Remove the cap and retighten it until itclicks. Make sure nothing is interferingwith the sealing of the cap. Tightening thecap will not make the CHECK ENGINEwarning light turn off immediately. It maytake several driving trips. If the light doesnot turn off, take your vehicle to yourauthorized SUBARU dealer immediately.


Black plate (143,1)


! If the light is blinking

If the light is blinking while driving, anengine misfire condition has been de-tected which may damage the emissioncontrol system.To prevent serious damage to the emis-sion control system, you should do thefollowing.. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard acceleration.. Avoid steep uphill grades.. Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi-ble.. Stop towing a trailer as soon aspossible.

The CHECK ENGINE warning light maystop blinking and illuminate steadily afterseveral driving trips. You should have yourvehicle checked by an authorizedSUBARU dealer immediately.

& Charge warning light

If this light illuminates when the engine isrunning, it may indicate that the chargingsystem is not working properly.

If the light illuminates while driving or doesnot turn off after the engine starts, stop theengine at the first safe opportunity andcheck the alternator belt. If the belt isloose, broken or if the belt is in good

condition but the light remains illuminated,contact your nearest SUBARU dealerimmediately.

& Oil pressure warninglight

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine with theoil pressure warning light illumi-nated. This may cause serious en-gine damage.

If this light illuminates when the engine isrunning, it may indicate that the engine oilpressure is low and the lubricating systemis not working properly.If the light illuminates while driving or doesnot turn off after the engine starts, stop theengine at the first safe opportunity andcheck the engine oil level. If the oil level islow, add oil immediately. If the engine oil isat the proper level but the light remainsi l luminated, contact your nearestSUBARU dealer immediately.

& AT OIL TEMP warninglight

If this light illuminates when the engine isrunning, it may indicate that the automatictransmission fluid temperature is too hot.

If the light illuminates while driving, im-mediately stop the vehicle in a safe placeand let the engine idle until the warninglight turns off.

! Automatic transmission controlsystem warning

If the light flashes after the engine starts, itmay indicate that the automatic transmis-sion control system is not working prop-erly. Contact your nearest SUBARU deal-er for service immediately.

& Rear differential oiltemperature warninglight

CAUTION

Reduce vehicle speed and park thevehicle in a safe place as soon aspossible if the R.DIFF TEMP lightilluminates. Continued driving withthis light illuminated can damagethe rear differential and other partsof the powertrain.

If this light illuminates when the engine isrunning, it may indicate that the reardifferential oil temperature is too hot.

If the light illuminates while driving, reducevehicle speed and stop the vehicle at the


– CONTINUED –

3


Black plate (144,1)



nearest safe place.Park the vehicle for several minutes. Afterthe light turns off, you can start driving.If the light does not turn off, contact thenearest SUBARU dealer for service.

NOTE. If the tire pressures are not correctand/or the tires are not all the samesize and brand, the rear differential willbe heavily loaded when the vehicle isdriven, resulting in an abnormally highoil temperature.. The rear differential oil will deterio-rate if its temperature increases en-ough for the rear differential oil tem-perature warning light to illuminate. It isadvisable to have the rear differentialoil replaced as soon as possible.

& Low tire pressurewarning light

When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position, the low tire pressure warn-ing light will illuminate for approximately 2seconds to check that the tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS) is functioningproperly. If there is no problem and all tiresare properly inflated, the light will turn off.Each tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked monthly when cold

and inflated to the inflation pressurerecommended by the vehicle manufac-turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle has tires ofa different size than the size indicated onthe vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-sure label, you should determine theproper tire inflation pressure for thosetires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehiclehas been equipped with a tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS) that illuminatesa low tire pressure telltale when one ormore of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, you shouldstop and check your tires as soon aspossible, and inflate them to the properpressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat andcan lead to tire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,and may affect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tire maintenance,and it is the driver’s responsibility tomaintain correct tire pressure, even ifunder-inflation has not reached the levelto trigger illumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.Your vehicle has also been equipped with

a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicatewhen the system is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-bined with the low tire pressure telltale.When the system detects a malfunction,the telltale will flash for approximately oneminute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continueupon subsequent vehicle start-ups as longas the malfunction exists. When themalfunction indicator is illuminated, thesystem may not be able to detect or signallow tire pressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a variety ofreasons, including the installation of re-placement or alternate tires or wheels onthe vehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. Always check theTPMS malfunction telltale after replacingone or more tires or wheels on yourvehicle to ensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow the TPMSto continue to function properly.Should the warning light illuminate stea-dily after blinking for approximately oneminute, have the system inspected byyour nearest SUBARU dealer as soon aspossible.

WARNING

If this light does not illuminatebriefly after the ignition switch is


Black plate (145,1)


turned ON or the light illuminatessteadily after blinking for approxi-mately one minute, you should haveyour Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-tem checked at a SUBARU dealer assoon as possible.

If this light illuminates while driving,never brake suddenly and keepdriving straight ahead while gradu-ally reducing speed. Then slowlypull off the road to a safe place.Otherwise an accident involvingserious vehicle damage and seriouspersonal injury could occur.

If this light still illuminates whiledriving after adjusting the tire pres-sure, a tire may have significantdamage and a fast leak that causesthe tire to lose air rapidly. If you havea flat tire, replace it with a spare tireas soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or awheel rim is replaced without theoriginal pressure sensor/transmitterbeing transferred, the Low tire pres-sure warning light will illuminatesteadily after blinking for approxi-mately one minute. This indicatesthat the TPMS is unable to monitorall four road wheels. Contact yourSUBARU dealer as soon as possiblefor tire and sensor replacement and/

or system resetting. If the lightilluminates steadily after blinkingfor approximately one minute,promptly contact a SUBARU dealerto have the system inspected.

CAUTION

The tire pressure monitoring systemis NOT a substitute for manuallychecking tire pressure. The tirepressure should be checked peri-odically (at least monthly) using atire gauge. After any change to tirepressure(s), the tire pressure mon-itoring system will not re-check tireinflation pressures until the vehicleis first driven more than 20 mph (32km/h). Therefore, after adjusting thetire pressures, increase the vehiclespeed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) tostart the TPMS re-checking of thetire inflation pressures. If the tirepressures are now above the severelow pressure threshold, the low tirepressure warning light should turnoff a few minutes later. Therefore, besure to install the specified size forthe front and rear tires.

& ABS warning light

CAUTION

If the warning light behaves asfollows, the ABS system may notwork properly.

When the warning light illuminates,the ABS function shuts down; how-ever, the conventional brake systemcontinues to operate normally.

. The warning light does not illu-minate when the ignition switchis turned to the “ON” position.

. The warning light illuminateswhen the ignition switch isturned to the “ON” position, butit does not turn off even when thevehicle speed exceeds approxi-mately 8 mph (12 km/h).

. The warning light illuminates dur-ing driving.

If any of these conditions occur,have the ABS system repaired atthe first available opportunity byyour SUBARU dealer.

The ABS warning light illuminates to-gether with the brake system warning lightif the EBD system becomes malfunction-ing. For further details of the EBD system


– CONTINUED –

3


Black plate (146,1)



malfunction warning, refer to “Brake sys-tem warning light” F3-16.

NOTEIf the warning light behavior is asdescribed in the following, the ABSsystem may be considered normal.. The warning light illuminates rightafter the engine is started but turns offimmediately, remaining off.. The warning light remains illumi-nated after the engine has been started,but it turns off when the vehicle speedreaches approximately 8 mph (12km/h).. The warning light illuminates duringdriving, but it turns off immediately andremains off.

When driving with an insufficient batteryvoltage such as when the engine is jumpstarted, the ABS warning light may illumi-nate. This is due to the low battery voltageand does not indicate a malfunction.When the battery becomes fully charged,the light will turn off.

& Brake systemwarning light

WARNING

. Driving with the brake systemwarning light illuminated is dan-gerous. This indicates your brakesystem may not be workingproperly. If the light remainsilluminated, have the brakes in-spected by a SUBARU dealerimmediately.

. If at all in doubt about whetherthe brakes are operating prop-erly, do not drive the vehicle.Have your vehicle towed to thenearest SUBARU dealer for re-pair.

This light has the following three functions.

! Parking brake warning

The light illuminates with the parkingbrake applied while the ignition switch isin the “ON” position. It turns off when theparking brake is fully released.

! Brake fluid level warning

This light illuminates when the brake fluidlevel has dropped to near the “MIN” levelof the brake fluid reservoir with the ignitionswitch in the “ON” position and with the

parking brake fully released.

If the brake system warning light shouldilluminate while driving (with the parkingbrake fully released and with the ignitionswitch positioned in “ON”), it could be anindication of leaking of brake fluid or wornbrake pads. If this occurs, immediatelystop the vehicle at the nearest safe placeand check the brake fluid level. If the fluidlevel is below the “MIN” mark in thereservoir, do not drive the vehicle. Havethe vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARUdealer for repair.

! Electronic Brake Force Distribution(EBD) system warning

The brake system warning light alsoilluminates if a malfunction occurs in theEBD system. In that event, it illuminatestogether with the ABS warning light.The EBD system may be malfunctioning ifthe brake system warning light and ABSwarning light illuminate simultaneouslyduring driving.Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-tional braking system will still function.However, the rear wheels will be moreprone to locking when the brakes areapplied harder than usual and the vehi-cle’s motion may therefore become some-what harder to control.If the brake system warning light and ABS


Black plate (147,1)


warning light illuminate simultaneously,take the following steps.1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,flat place.2. Shut down the engine, apply theparking brake, and then restart it.3. Release the parking brake. If bothwarning lights turn off, the EBD systemmay be malfunctioning.Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARUdealer and have the system inspected.4. If both warning lights illuminate againand remain illuminated after the enginehas been restarted, shut down the engineagain, apply the parking brake, and checkthe brake fluid level.5. If the brake fluid level is not below the“MIN” mark, the EBD system may bemalfunctioning. Drive carefully to thenearest SUBARU dealer and have thesystem inspected.6. If the brake fluid level is below the“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.Instead, have the vehicle towed to thenearest SUBARU dealer for repair.

& Low fuel warning light

CAUTION

Immediately put fuel in the tankwhenever the low fuel warning lightilluminates. Engine misfires as aresult of an empty tank could causedamage to the engine.

The low fuel warning light illuminateswhen the tank is nearly empty approxi-mately 2.6 US gal (10 liters, or 2.2 Impgal). It only operates when the ignitionswitch is in the “ON” position. When thislight illuminates, fill the fuel tank immedi-ately.

NOTEThis light does not turn off unless thetank is replenished up to an internalfuel quantity of approximately 4.0 USgal (15 liters, 3.3 Imp gal).

& Door open warning light

The indicators are located in the centerportion of the dashboard.When any of the doors or the rear gate isnot fully closed, it is indicated by thecorresponding part of the door openwarning light.

Always make sure this light is out beforeyou start to drive.

& Windshield washerfluid warning light

This light illuminates when the fluid level inthe windshield washer fluid tank falls tothe lower limit (approximately 0.6 US qt,0.6 liter, 0.5 Imp qt).


– CONTINUED –

3


Black plate (148,1)



& All-Wheel Drive warn-ing light

WARNING

Continued driving with the AWDwarning light flashing can lead topowertrain damage. If the AWDwarning light flashes, promptly parkin a safe place then check whetherall four tires are the same diameterand whether any of the tires has apuncture or has lost air pressure forsome other reason.

NOTEIf the temporary spare tire is used, theAWD warning light may flash. Use ofthe temporary spare tire should there-fore be restricted to the minimum timenecessary. Replace the temporaryspare tire with a conventional tire assoon as possible.

This light flashes if the vehicle is drivenwith tires of different diameters fitted on itswheels or with the air pressure exces-sively low in any of its tires.

& Vehicle DynamicsControl warning light(U.S.-spec models andCanada-spec. models)/Vehicle Dynamics Con-trol operation indicatorlight (all models)

! Vehicle Dynamics Control warninglight (U.S.-spec models andCanada-spec. models)

CAUTION

The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-tem provides its ABS controlthrough the electrical circuit of theABS system. Accordingly, if the ABSis inoperative, the Vehicle DynamicsControl system becomes unable toprovide ABS control. As a result, theVehicle Dynamics Control systemalso becomes inoperative, causingthe warning light to illuminate.Though both the Vehicle DynamicsControl and ABS systems are inop-erative in this case, the ordinaryfunctions of the brake system arestill available. You will be safe whiledriving with this condition, but drivecarefully and have your vehicle

checked at a SUBARU dealer assoon as possible.

NOTE. If the electrical circuit of the VehicleDynamics Control system itself mal-functions, the warning light only illumi-nates. At this time, the ABS (Anti-lockBrake System) remains fully opera-tional.. The warning light illuminates whenthe electronic control system of theABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control systemmalfunctions.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system isprobably inoperative under any of thefollowing conditions. Have your vehiclechecked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-ately.. The warning light does not illuminatewhen the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position.. The warning light illuminates while thevehicle is running.

NOTEIf the warning light behavior is asdescribed in the following examples,the Vehicle Dynamics Control systemmay be considered normal.. The warning light illuminates right


Black plate (149,1)


after the engine is started but turns offimmediately, remaining off.. The warning light illuminates afterthe engine has started and turns offwhile the vehicle is subsequently beingdriven.. The warning light illuminates duringdriving, but it turns off immediately andremains off.

! Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-tion indicator light

U.S.-spec. models and Canada-spec.models:The indicator light flashes during activa-tion of the skid suppression function andduring activation of the traction controlfunction.

NOTE. The light may remain illuminated fora short period of time after the enginehas been started, especially in coldweather. This does not indicate theexistence of a problem. The lightshould turn off as soon as the enginehas warmed up.. The indicator light illuminates whenthe engine has developed a problemand the CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator light is on.

Latin America-spec. models:The indicator light flashes when the skidsuppression function is activated. It illumi-nates when only the traction controlfunction is operating.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system isprobably malfunctioning under any of thefollowing conditions. Have your vehiclechecked at a SUBARU dealer as soon aspossible .. The light does not illuminate when theignition switch is turned to the “ON”position.. The light does not turn off even afterthe lapse of several minutes (the enginehas warmed up) after the engine hasstarted (U.S.-spec. models and Canada-spec. models)/even after a period ofapproximately 2 seconds after the ignitionswitch has been turned to the “ON”position (Latin America-spec. models).

& Traction Control sys-tem OFF indicator light(U.S.-spec models andCanada-spec. models)

This light illuminates when the TractionControl system OFF switch is pressed todeactivate the Traction Control system.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is

probably malfunctioning under any of thefollowing conditions. Have your vehiclechecked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-ately.. The light does not illuminate when theignition switch is turned to the “ON”position.. The light does not turn off even after aperiod of approximately 2 seconds afterthe ignition switch has been turned to the“ON” position.

& Vehicle DynamicsControl warning light(Latin America-spec.models)/Traction Con-trol OFF indicator light(Latin America-spec.models)

This warning light functions to indicatemalfunctions in the Vehicle DynamicsControl system as well as to indicate thatthe Traction Control system has beendeactivated.It illuminates in the event of a malfunctionin the system and is on when the systemis not operating.


– CONTINUED –

3


Black plate (150,1)



! Vehicle Dynamics Control warninglight

CAUTION

The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-tem provides its ABS controlthrough the electrical circuit of theABS system. Accordingly, if the ABSis inoperative, the Vehicle DynamicsControl system becomes unable toprovide ABS control. As a result, theVehicle Dynamics Control systemalso becomes inoperative, causingthe warning light to illuminate.Though both the Vehicle DynamicsControl and ABS systems are inop-erative in this case, the ordinaryfunctions of the brake system arestill available. You will be safe whiledriving with this condition, but drivecarefully and have your vehiclechecked at a SUBARU dealer assoon as possible.

NOTE. If the electrical circuit of the VehicleDynamics Control system itself mal-functions, only the warning light illumi-nates. At this time, the ABS (Anti-lockBrake System) remains fully opera-tional.

. The warning light illuminates whenthe electronic control system of theABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control systemmalfunctions.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system isprobably inoperative under any of thefollowing conditions. Have your vehiclechecked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-ately.. The warning light does not illuminatewhen the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position.. The warning light illuminates while thevehicle is running.

NOTEIf the warning light behavior is asdescribed in the following conditions,the Vehicle Dynamics Control systemmay be considered normal.. The warning light illuminates rightafter the engine is started but turns offimmediately, remaining off.. The warning light illuminates afterengine startup and turns off while thevehicle is subsequently being driven.. The warning light illuminates duringdriving, but it turns off immediately andremains off.

! Traction Control OFF indicator light

. It illuminates when the Traction ControlOFF switch is pressed.. It also illuminates when the TractionControl system is deactivated.

NOTE. The light may remain illuminated fora while after the engine has beenstarted, especially in cold weather. Thisdoes not indicate the existence of aproblem. The light should turn off assoon as the engine has warmed up.. The indicator light illuminates whenthe engine has developed a problemand the CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator light illuminates.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system isprobably malfunctioning under the listedcondition. Have your vehicle checked at aSUBARU dealer as soon as possible.. The light does not turn off even afterthe lapse of several minutes (the enginehas warmed up) after the engine hasstarted.


Black plate (151,1)


& Security indicator light

The indicators are located in the centerportion of the dashboard.This indicator light shows the status of thealarm system. It also indicates operationof the immobilizer system.

! Alarm system

It blinks to show the driver the operationalstatus of the alarm system. For detailedinformation, refer to “Alarm system” F2-16.

! Immobilizer system

This light blinks approximately 60 secondsafter the ignition switch is turned from“ON” position to the “Acc” or “LOCK”position or immediately after the key ispulled out. Refer to “Immobilizer” F2-3.

If the indicator light does not flash, it mayindicate that immobilizer system may bemalfunctioning. Contact your nearestSUBARU dealer immediately.

In the event that an unauthorized key (forexample, an unauthorized duplicate) isused, the security indicator light illumi-nates.

& SPORT mode indicatorlight

When the select lever is moved to themanual gate, the SPORT mode is se-lected and the indicator light illuminates.Refer to “SPORT mode” F7-18.

& Select lever/Gear position in-dicator

The select lever/gear position indicatorshows the position of the select lever.When manual mode is selected, the gearposition indicator shows the current gearposition and the upshift/downshift indica-tor illuminates. Refer to “Automatic trans-mission” F7-12.

& Turn signal indicatorlights

These lights show the operation of the turnsignal or lane change signal.If the indicator lights do not blink or blinkrapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burnedout. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.Refer to “Replacing bulbs” F11-36.


– CONTINUED –

3


Black plate (152,1)



& High beam indicatorlight

This light shows that the headlights are inthe high beam mode.This indicator light also illuminates whenthe headlight flasher is operated.

& Cruise control indica-tor light

This light illuminates when the “CRUISE”main switch is pressed to activate thecruise control function.

NOTE. If you move the cruise control leveror press the main switch button whileturning the ignition switch “ON”, thecruise control function is deactivatedand the cruise control indicator lightflashes. To reactivate the cruise controlfunction, turn the ignition switch backto the “Acc” or “LOCK” position, andthen turn it again to the “ON” position.. If this indicator light and the CHECKENGINE warning light/malfunction in-dicator light flash simultaneously dur-ing driving, have the vehicle checkedby your nearest SUBARU dealer.

& Cruise control set in-dicator light

This light illuminates when vehicle speedhas been set to use the cruise controlfunction.

& Headlight indicatorlight

This indicator light illuminates when thelight switch is turned to the “ ” position(to turn on the parking lights) or to the“ ” position (to turn on the headlights).

& Front fog light indicatorlight

This indicator light illuminates while thefront fog lights are illuminated.

Clock

NOTEIf your vehicle is equipped with agenuine SUBARU navigation system,refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-ment for the navigation system.

The clock shows the time while theignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON”position.


Black plate (153,1)


To adjust the time shown by the clock,press the “+” button or the “−” button. Theindicated time will change in 1-minuteincrements. If you keep the buttonpressed, the rate at which the indicatedtime changes will speed up.When you keep either the “+” or “−” buttonpressed, time change will pause for 1second at the end of each 30-minutechange. The clock will start going forwardor backward again quickly after this 1-second pause.

CAUTION

To ensure safety, do not attempt toset the time during driving, as anaccident could result.

Outside temperature indica-tor

NOTEIf your vehicle is equipped with agenuine SUBARU navigation system,refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-ment for the navigation system.

U.S.-spec. models

Except U.S.-spec. models

The outside temperature indicator showsthe outside temperature in a range from−22 to 1228F (−30 to 508C) when theignition switch is in the “ON” position.

The indicator can give a false readingunder any of the following conditions.. When there is too much sun.. During idling; while running at lowspeeds in a traffic jam; when the engineis restarted immediately following a shut-down.. When the actual outside temperaturefalls outside the specified indicator range.


– CONTINUED –

3


Black plate (154,1)



& Low outside temperaturewarning

U.S.-spec. models


When the outside temperature drops to378F (38C) or lower, the temperature

indication flashes to show that the roadsurface may be frozen.If the outside temperature drops to 378F(38C) or lower while the display is givingan indication other than the outsidetemperature, the display switches to theoutside temperature indication and flashesfor 5 seconds before returning to itsoriginal indication.If the display is already indicating anoutside temperature of 378F (38C) or lowerwhen the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position, the indication does notflash.

NOTEThe outside temperature indicationmay differ from the actual outsidetemperature. The road surface freezewarning indication should be treatedonly as a guide. Be sure to check thecondition of the road surface beforedriving.

Multi function display (vehi-cles without a genuineSUBARU navigation system)

NOTE. If your vehicle is equipped with agenuine SUBARU navigation system,refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-ment for the navigation system.. A liquid crystal display is used in themulti function display. You will find itsindications hard to see if you wearpolarized glasses.

With the ignition switch in the “ON”position, each successive push of the“INFO” button toggles the display in thefollowing sequence.

Press the “INFO” button for more than 1second to turn off the display. The displaywill turn on again if you press either the“INFO” button or “AUDIO” button.


Black plate (155,1)


& Current fuel consumption

U.S.-spec. models


This indication shows the rate of fuelconsumption at the present moment.

& Average fuel consumption

U.S.-spec. models


This indication shows the average rate offuel consumption since the trip meter waslast reset.

Pressing the trip knob toggles the indica-tion between the average fuel consump-tion corresponding to the A trip meterindication and the average fuel consump-tion corresponding to the B trip meterindication.When either of the trip meter indications isreset, the corresponding average fuelconsumption value is also reset.

NOTE. The indicated values vary in accor-dance with changes in the vehicle’srunning conditions. Also, the indicatedvalues may differ slightly from theactual values and should thus betreated only as a guide.. When either trip meter indication isreset, the average fuel consumptioncorresponding to that trip meter indica-tion is not shown until the vehicle hassubsequently covered a distance of 1mile (or 1 km).


– CONTINUED –

3


Black plate (156,1)



& Driving range on remainingfuel

U.S.-spec. models


The driving range indicates the distancethat can be driven taking into account the

amount of fuel remaining in the tank andthe average rate of fuel consumption.When the low fuel warning light illumi-nates, the driving range indication flashesfor 5 seconds. (The display first switchesto the driving range indication if it wasoriginally giving some other indication.)

U.S.-spec. models


If the driving range is shown as “ ”,there is only a tiny amount of fuel left in thetank. You must refuel the vehicle immedi-ately.

NOTE. The driving range on remaining fuelis only a guide. The indicated valuemay differ from the actual driving rangeon remaining fuel, so you must imme-diately fill the tank when the low fuelwarning light illuminates.. When the low fuel warning lightilluminates, the display automaticallyshows “ ” even if the currentlyselected indication is not for the driv-ing range on remaining fuel.


Black plate (157,1)


& Journey time

The journey time shows the time that haselapsed since the ignition switch wasturned to the “START” position.

The journey time indication flashes eachtime a complete hour has elapsed. If the

display is giving an indication other thanthe journey time, the display switches tothe journey time, flashes for 5 seconds,and returns to its original indication eachtime a complete hour has elapsed.

NOTEThe journey time is reset when theignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”position. It is also reset if the ignitionswitch is turned to the “LOCK” or“Acc” position prior to restarting ofthe engine.

Light control switch

WARNING

To prevent battery discharge result-ing from accidentally leaving yourlights on when your vehicle isparked, the light switch operatesonly when the ignition switch is inthe “ON” position. In any otherposition, the vehicle’s lights will beout.

If you park your vehicle on a road-side at night, use the hazard warn-ing flasher to alert the other drivers.

The light switch operates only when theignition switch is in the “ON” position.


– CONTINUED –

3


Black plate (158,1)



& Headlights

To turn on the headlights, turn the knob onthe end of the turn signal lever.

first positionParking lights, instrument panel illumina-tion, tail lights and license plate light areon.

second positionHeadlights, parking lights, instrument pa-nel illumination, tail lights, and licenseplate light are on.

& High/low beam change (dim-mer)

To change from low beam to high beam,push the turn signal lever forward. Whenthe headlights are on high beam, the highbeam indicator light “ ” on the combina-tion meter also illuminates.To switch back to low beam, pull the leverback to the detent position.

& Headlight flasher

CAUTION

Do not hold the lever in the flashingposition for more than just a fewseconds.

To flash the headlights, pull the levertoward you and then release it. The highbeam will remain on for as long as youhold the lever. The headlight flasher workseven though the light switch is in the“OFF” position.

When the headlights are on high beam,the high beam indicator light “ ” on thecombination meter also illuminates.


Black plate (159,1)


& Daytime running light system

WARNING

The brightness of the illumination ofthe high beam headlights is reducedby the daytime running light system.The light switch must always beturned to the “ ” position when itis dark outside.

The high beam headlights will automati-cally illuminate at reduced brightnesswhen the engine has started, under thefollowing conditions.. The select lever is in a position otherthan the “P” position.. The parking brake is fully released.. The light switch is in the “OFF” or “ ”position.

NOTEWhen the light switch is in the “ ”position, the front side marker lights,parking lights and license plate lightsare also illuminated.

Turn signal lever

To activate the right turn signal, push theturn signal lever up. To activate the leftturn signal, push the turn signal leverdown. When the turn is finished, the leverwill return automatically. If the lever doesnot return after cornering, return the leverto the neutral position by hand.

To signal a lane change, push the turnsignal lever up or down slightly and hold itduring the lane change. The turn signalindicator lights will flash in the direction ofthe turn or lane change. The lever willreturn automatically to the neutral positionwhen you release it.

Illumination brightness con-trol

When the light switch is in the “OFF”position, you can adjust the brightness ofthe instrument panel illumination for bettervisibility.The brightness of audio, air conditioner,multi-function display (if equipped) andinstrument panel illumination automati-cally dims when the light switch is in the“ ” or “ ” position. You can adjustbrightness of the illumination for bettervisibility.

To brighten, turn the control dial upward.To darken, turn the control dial downward.


– CONTINUED –

3


Black plate (160,1)



NOTEWhen the control dial is turned fullyupward, the illumination brightnessbecomes the maximum and the auto-matic dimming function does not workat all.

Headlight beam leveler (ifequipped)

Adjust the headlight beam level with thefollowing dial positions according to thenumber of passengers and load condition.


Black plate (161,1)


Dial position Number of front seatoccupants

Number of 2nd seatoccupants

Number of 3rd seatoccupants

Load in the luggagecompartment area

Trailer towing

0 1 or 2 0 0 No load No

1 2 0 2 No load No

2 2 3 2 No load No

32 3 2 Full load No

2 3 2 Full load Yes

41 0 0 Full load No

1 0 0 Full load Yes

5 Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable


3


Black plate (162,1)



Parking light switch

The parking light switch operates regard-less of the ignition switch position.

By pushing the front end of this switch,following lights will illuminate.– Parking lights– Front and rear side marker lights– Tail lights– License plate lights

To turn off, push the rear end of theparking light switch.Avoid leaving these lights on for a longtime because that will run down thebattery.

Front fog light switch

The front fog lights operate only when thelight switch is in the “ ” position.However, the front fog lights turn off whenthe headlights are switched to high beam.

To turn on the front fog lights, turn the foglight switch on the turn signal lever upwardto the “ ” position.To turn off the front fog lights, turn theswitch back down to the “OFF” position.

The indicator light on the combinationmeter will illuminate when the fog lightsare illuminated.


Black plate (163,1)


Wiper and washer

WARNING

In freezing weather, do not use thewindshield washer until the wind-shield is sufficiently warmed by thedefroster.

Otherwise the washer fluid canfreeze on the windshield, blockingyour view.

CAUTION

. Do not operate the washer con-tinuously for more than 10 sec-onds, or when the washer fluidtank is empty. This may causeoverheating of the washer motor.Check the washer fluid levelfrequently, such as at fuel stops.

. Do not operate the wipers whenthe windshield or rear window isdry. This may scratch the glass,damage the wiper blades andcause the wiper motor to burnout. Before operating the wiperon a dry windshield or rearwindow, always use the wind-shield washer.

. In freezing weather, be sure thatthe wiper blades are not frozen tothe windshield or rear windowbefore switching on the wipers.Attempting to operate the wiperwith the blades frozen to thewindow glass could cause notonly the wiper blades to bedamaged but also the wiper mo-tor to burn out. If the wiperblades are frozen to the windowglass, be sure to operate thedefroster, wiper deicer ( i fequipped) or rear window defog-ger before turning on the wiper.

. If the wipers stop during opera-tion because of ice or some otherobstruction on the window, thewiper motor could burn out evenif the wiper switch is turned off. Ifthis occurs, promptly stop thevehicle in a safe place, turn theignition switch to the “LOCK”position and clean the windowglass to allow proper wiper op-eration.

. Use clean water if windshieldwasher fluid is unavailable. Inareas where water freezes inwinter, use SUBARU WindshieldWasher Fluid or the equivalent.Refer to “Windshield washer

fluid” F11-28.

Also, when driving the vehiclewhen there are freezing tempera-tures, use non-freezing type wi-per blades.

. Do not clean the wiper bladeswith gasoline or a solvent, suchas paint thinner or benzine. Thiswill cause deterioration of thewiper blades.

NOTE. The front wiper motor is protectedagainst overloads by a circuit breaker.The motor operates continuously un-der an unusually heavy load, the circuitbreaker may trip to stop the motortemporarily. If this happens, park yourvehicle in a safe place, turn off thewiper switch, and wait for approxi-mately 10 minutes. The circuit breakerwill reset itself, and the wipers willagain operate normally.. Clean your wiper blades and win-dow glass periodically with a washersolution to prevent streaking, and toremove accumulations of road salt orroad film. Keep the washer buttondepressed at least for 1 second so thatwasher solution will be sprinkled allover the windshield or rear window.


– CONTINUED –

3


Black plate (164,1)



. Grease, wax, insects or other mate-rial on the windshield or the wiperblades results in jerky wiper operationand streaking on the glass. If youcannot remove those streaks afteroperating the washer or if the wiperoperation is jerky, clean the outer sur-face of the windshield or rear windowand the wiper blades using a sponge orsoft cloth with a neutral detergent ormild abrasive cleaner. After cleaning,rinse the window glass and wiperblades with clean water. The glass isclean if no beads form on the glasswhen you rinse with water.. If you cannot eliminate the streakingeven after following this procedure,replace the wiper blades with newones. For replacement instructions,refer to “Replacement of wiper blades”F11-29.

& Windshield wiper and washerswitches

The wiper operates only when the ignitionswitch is in the “ON” or “Acc” position.

! Windshield wipers

OFF: Off: Intermittent

LO: Low speedHI: High speed

To turn the wipers on, push the wipercontrol lever down.

To turn the wipers off, return the lever tothe “OFF” position.

! Mist (for a single wipe)

For a single wipe of the wipers, pull thelever toward you. The wipers operate untilyou release the lever.

! Wiper intermittent time control


Black plate (165,1)


When the wiper switch is in the “ ”position, turn the dial to adjust the operat-ing interval of the wiper.The operating interval can be adjusted innine steps.The intermittent operation interval variesdepending on the vehicle speed in any ofthe adjustment steps (longer when thevehicle speed is low; shorter when thevehicle speed is high).

! Washer

To wash the windshield, push the washerbutton at the end of the wiper control lever.The washer fluid sprays until you releasethe washer button. The wipers operatewhile you push the button.

NOTE

The windshield washer fluid warninglight illuminates when the washer fluidlevel in the tank has dropped to thelower limit. If the warning light illumi-nates, refill the tank with fluid. For thetank refilling method, refer to “Wind-shield washer fluid” F11-28.

& Rear window wiper andwasher switch

: Washer (accompanied by wiper operation)ON: ContinuousINT: IntermittentOFF: Off

: Washer

! Rear wiper

To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob onthe end of the wiper control lever upwardto the “INT” or “ON” position.To turn the wiper off, return the knob onthe end of the lever to the “OFF” position.

With the switch turned to the “INT”position, the rear wiper will operate inter-mittently at intervals corresponding to thevehicle speed (longer when the vehicle


– CONTINUED –

3


Black plate (166,1)



speed is low; shorter when the vehiclespeed is high).When you subsequently move the selectlever of the automatic transmission to the“R” position, the rear wiper will switch tocontinuous operation. When you move theselect lever from the “R” position to someother position, the rear wiper will return tointermittent operation.

! Washer

To wash the rear window while the rearwiper is operating, turn the knob on theend of the wiper control lever upward tothe “ ” position. The washer fluid spraysuntil you release the knob.To wash the rear window when the rearwiper is not in use, turn the knob on theend of the wiper control lever downward tothe “ ” position. The washer fluid spraysand the wiper operates until you releasethe knob.

Windshield wiper deicer

The windshield wiper deicer operates onlywhen the ignition switch is in the “ON”position.

To turn on the windshield wiper deicer,push the control switch. The indicator lightlocated on the switch illuminates while thewindshield wiper deicer is operating.

To turn it off, push the control switch again.It also turns off when the ignition switch isturned to the “Acc” or “LOCK” position.

The windshield wiper deicer will automa-tically shut off after approximately 15minutes. If the windshield wiper bladeshave been deiced completely before thattime, push the control switch to turn it off. Ifdeicing is not complete, you have to push

the control switch to turn it on again.

Your SUBARU dealer can set your wind-shield wiper deicer to the continuousoperation mode. Contact your SUBARUdealer for details.

Once the windshield wiper deicer hasbeen set to the continuous operationmode, it should be in the continuousoperation mode at any time when thecontrol switch is pushed to the “ON”position.

If the battery voltage drops below thepermissible level, continuous operation ofthe windshield wiper deicer is canceledand the system stops operating.

CAUTION

To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not operate thewindshield wiper deicer continu-ously for any longer than necessary.

NOTE. Turn on the windshield wiper deicerif the wipers are frozen to the wind-shield.. If the windshield is covered withsnow, remove the snow so that thewindshield wiper deicer works effec-


Black plate (167,1)


tively.. While the windshield wiper deicer isin the continuous operation mode, ifthe vehicle speed remains at 9 mph (15km/h) or less for 15 minutes, the wind-shield wiper deicer automatically stopsoperating.

Rear window defogger but-ton

The rear window defogger operates onlywhen the ignition switch is in the “ON”position.

To turn on the defogger, push the controlswitch that is located on the climatecontrol panel. The indicator light locatedon the control switch illuminates while therear window defogger is operating.

To turn it off, push the control switch again.It also turns off when the ignition switch isturned to the “Acc” or “LOCK” position.

The defogger will automatically shut offafter approximately 15 minutes. If the rearwindow has been cleared completely

before that time, push the control switchto turn it off. If defrosting or defogging isnot complete, you have to push the controlswitch to turn it on again.Your SUBARU dealer can set your rearwindow defogger to the continuous opera-tion mode. Contact your SUBARU dealerfor details.

Once the rear window defogger has beenset to the continuous operation mode, itshould be in the continuous operationmode at any time when the control switchis pushed to the “ON” position.

If the battery voltage drops below thepermissible level, continuous operation ofthe rear window defogger is canceled andthe system stops operating.

CAUTION

. Do not use sharp instruments orwindow cleaner containing abra-sives to clean the inner surfaceof the rear window. They maydamage the conductors printedon the window.

. To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not operate thedefogger continuously for anylonger than necessary.


– CONTINUED –

3


Black plate (168,1)



NOTEThe outside mirror defogger also oper-ates while the rear window defogger isoperating.

Mirrors

Always check that the inside and outsidemirrors are properly adjusted before youstart driving.

& Type A inside mirror (ifequipped)

The mirror has a day and night position.Pull the tab at the bottom of the mirrortoward you for the night position. Push itaway for the day position. The nightposition reduces glare from headlights.

& Type B inside mirror (ifequipped)

1) Rear view image display2) Electronic compass display3) Auto dimming indicator4) Multifunction button5) Photosensor

The mirror has the following features.. Rear view image display. Auto-dimming function for anti-glarecapability. Electronic compass display

You can display the various functions ofthese features based on how long youpress the multifunction button.


Black plate (169,1)


Gearposition

Period oftime multi-functionbutton ispressed

Functiondisplayed

R (reverse)

Briefly Rear view displayON/OFF*

More than3 seconds

Help lines indica-tion ON/OFF

ExceptR (reverse)

Briefly Auto-dimmingfunction ON/OFF*

3 to 6seconds

Electronic com-pass display ON/OFF

6 to 9seconds

Enter the com-pass zone settingmode

9 to 12seconds

Enter the com-pass calibrationmode

*: The setting returns to “ON” as a defaultsetting every time the ignition switch is turned tothe “ON” position.

! Rear view image display

When the ignition switch is “ON” and theselect lever is set to “R”, the rear viewcamera automatically displays the rearview image behind the vehicle on theinside mirror.

Also, the following help lines are indicatedas a guide to help you realize the actualdistance from the display.

1) Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line)2) Approx. 10 feet (3 m) from the bumper

(green horizontal line)3) Approx. 6.5 feet (2 m) from the bumper

(green horizontal line)4) Approx. 3 feet (1 m) from the bumper

(yellow horizontal line)5) Approx. 1.5 feet (0.5 m) from the bumper

(red horizontal line)

These help lines are removable. Toremove the help lines, perform the follow-ing procedure.1. Display the rear view image on themirror.2. Press the multifunction button for morethan 3 seconds to remove the help lines.

To display the help lines, press the multi-function button for more than 3 seconds.

For precautions about the rear viewcamera and the rear view image, refer to“Rear view camera” F6-21.

! Auto-dimming function

The auto-dimming function is an anti-glarecapability which automatically reducesglare coming from headlights of vehiclesbehind you.

By briefly pressing the multifunction but-ton, the auto-dimming function is toggledon or off. When the auto-dimming functionis on, the auto dimming indicator light(green) will illuminate.

Even with the mirror in anti-glare mode,the mirror surface turns bright if thetransmission is shifted into reverse. Thisis to ensure good rearward visibility duringreversing.


– CONTINUED –

3


Black plate (170,1)



The mirror has a photosensor attached onboth the front and back sides. Use carenot to cover the sensors with stickers, orother similar items. Periodically wipe thesensors clean using a piece of dry softcotton cloth or an applicator.

NOTEWhen cleaning the mirror, use a papertowel or similar item dampened withglass cleaner. Do not spray glasscleaner directly on the mirror surface.By doing so, the sprayed glass cleanercould enter the inside of the mirrorhousing. That may cause a malfunctionin the mirror.

! Electronic compass display

By pressing the multifunction button for 3to 6 seconds, the compass display istoggled on or off. When the compassdisplay is on, an illuminated compassreading will appear on the mirror.

Using the electronic compass properly,the following compass zone adjustmentand compass calibration will be neces-sary.

! Compass zone adjustment

1. The compass zone has been set tozone “8” at the time of shipment from thefactory. Refer to the “Compass calibrationzones” map, which is attached to the endof this manual to verify that the compasszone setting is correct for your geographi-cal location.2. Press and hold the multifunction but-ton for 6 to 9 seconds, and then release it.The zone number will be displayed.3. Press the multifunction button repeat-edly to cycle the display through allpossible zone settings. Stop cycling whenthe correct zone number for your locationis displayed.4. Releasing the button for 3 seconds willexit the zone setting mode.

! Compass calibration

1. For optimum calibration, switch off allnonessential electrical accessories (rearwindow defogger, heater/air conditioningsystem, spotlight, etc.) and ensure alldoors are shut.2. Drive to an open, level area away fromlarge metallic objects or structures andmake certain the ignition switch is in the“ON” position.3. Press and hold the multifunction but-ton for 9 to 12 seconds, and then releaseit. The compass will enter the calibrationmode, then “C” and the direction will bedisplayed.4. Drive slowly in a circle until “C”disappears from the display. Driving intwo or three circles might be necessary.The compass is now calibrated.5. Further calibration may be necessaryshould outside influences cause the com-pass to read inaccurately. You will noticeany outside influence if the compass tendsto read in only one particular direction.Should you encounter this situation, returnto step 1 of the above procedure andrecalibrate the compass.


Black plate (171,1)


& Type C inside mirror (ifequipped)

1) Left button2) Auto dimming indicator3) Photosensor4) Right button

This mirror has an anti-glare feature whichautomatically reduces glare coming fromheadlights of vehicles behind you. It alsocontains a built-in compass.. By pressing and releasing the leftbutton, the automatic dimming function istoggled on or off. When the automaticdimming function is on, the auto dimmingindicator light (green) located to the rightof the button will illuminate.. By pressing and releasing the rightbutton, the compass display is toggled on

or off. When the compass is on, anilluminated compass reading will appearin the lower part of the mirror.

Even with the mirror in anti-glare mode,the mirror surface turns bright if thetransmission is shifted into reverse. Thisis to ensure good rearward visibility duringreversing.

! Photosensors

The mirror has a photosensor attached onboth the front and back sides. If the glarefrom the headlights of vehicles behind youstrikes the mirror, these sensors detect itand make the reflection surface of themirror dimmer to help prevent you frombeing blinded. For this reason, use carenot to cover the sensors with stickers, orother similar items. Periodically wipe the

sensors clean using a piece of dry softcotton cloth or an applicator.

! Compass calibration

1. For optimum calibration, switch off allnonessential electrical accessories (rearwindow defogger, heater/air conditioningsystem, spotlight, etc.) and ensure alldoors are shut.2. Drive to an open, level area away fromlarge metallic objects or structures andmake certain the ignition switch is in the“ON” position.3. Press and hold the left button for 3seconds then release, and the compasswill enter the calibration mode. “CAL” anddirection will be displayed.4. Drive slowly in a circle until “CAL”disappears from the display (approxi-mately two or three circles). The compassis now calibrated.5. Further calibration may be necessaryshould outside influences cause the mirrorto read inaccurately. You will know thatthis has occurred if your compass beginsto read in only limited directions. Shouldyou encounter this situation, return to stepone of the above procedure and recali-brate the mirror.


– CONTINUED –

3


Black plate (172,1)



! Compass zone adjustment

1. The zone setting is factory preset toZone 8. Refer to the “Compass calibrationzone” map attached to the end of thismanual to verify that the compass zonesetting is correct for your geographicallocation.2. Press and hold the right button for 3seconds then release, and the word“ZONE” will briefly appear and then thezone number will be displayed.3. Press the right-hand button repeatedlyto cycle the display through all possiblezone settings. Stop cycling when thecorrect zone setting for your location isdisplayed.4. Releasing the button for 3 seconds willexit the zone setting mode.

& Outside mirrors

! Convex mirror (passenger side)

WARNING

Objects look smaller in a convexmirror and farther away than whenviewed in a flat mirror. Do not usethe convex mirror to judge thedistance of vehicles behind youwhen changing lanes. Use the insidemirror (or glance backwards) todetermine the actual size and dis-tance of objects that you view inconvex mirror.

! Remote control mirror switch

The remote control mirrors operate onlywhen the ignition switch is in the “ON” or“Acc” position.1. Turn the knob to the “L” side to adjustthe left-hand mirror or to the “R” side toadjust the right-hand mirror.2. Move the knob in the direction youwant to move the mirror.3. Return the knob to the neutral positionto prevent unintentional operation.

The mirrors can also be adjusted manu-ally.


Black plate (173,1)


! Outside mirror defogger

The outside mirror defogger shares thecontrol switch with the rear window de-fogger. Therefore, the outside mirror de-fogger always operates with the rearwindow defogger.

If the rear window defogger is set to thecontinuous operation mode, the outsidemirror defogger also follows the contin-uous setting.

For details, refer to “Rear window defog-ger button” F3-37.

CAUTION

To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not operate the de-fogger continuously for any longer

than necessary.

! Power folding mirror switch (ifequipped)

1) Power folding mirror switch

The power folding mirror switch operatesonly when the ignition switch is in the “ON”or “Acc” position.To fold the outside mirrors, push the powerfolding mirror switch. To unfold the mirrors,push the switch again.

NOTE. When the temperature is low, theoutside mirrors may stop during opera-tion. Push the switch again. When theoutside mirrors do not work by switchoperation, move them several times

manually. This makes it possible tooperate them by switch operation.. When you operate the power foldingmirror switch continuously, it maytemporarily stop working. This is nota malfunction. Operate it again afterwaiting for a short period of time.. When you unfold the outside mirrorsmanually, the mirrors may becomeunstable. Be sure to unfold the mirrorsby switch operation. If the outsidemirrors are still unstable, fold themirrors again manually and then unfoldthem by switch operation.


3


Black plate (174,1)



Tilt steering wheel

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel tiltposition while driving. This maycause loss of vehicle control andresult in personal injury.

1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to“Front seats” F1-2.2. Pull the tilt lock lever down.3. Move the steering wheel to the desiredlevel.4. Pull the lever up to lock the steeringwheel in place.

5. Make sure that the steering wheel issecurely locked by moving it up and down.

Horn

To sound the horn, push the horn pad.


Black plate (7,1)


Ventilator.............................................................. 4-2Airflow ................................................................ 4-2Ventilator ............................................................ 4-4

Automatic climate control system ..................... 4-5Control panel ...................................................... 4-5Rear air conditioner............................................. 4-9Temperature sensors........................................... 4-9

Operating tips for heater and airconditioner....................................................... 4-10Cleaning ventilator grille..................................... 4-10Efficient cooling after parking in directsunlight ........................................................... 4-10

Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerantcircuit.............................................................. 4-10

Checking air conditioning system before summerseason ............................................................ 4-10

Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity andlow temperature weather conditions ................. 4-10

Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engineis heavily loaded.............................................. 4-11

Refrigerant for your climate control system ........ 4-11Air filtration system........................................... 4-11

Replacing the air filter........................................ 4-11

Climate control

4


Black plate (178,1)


4-2 Climate control

Ventilator

& Airflow

Ventilator and airflow: Standard: If equipped


Black plate (179,1)


! Airflow mode selection

*: If equipped

Climate control 4-3

– CONTINUED –

4


Black plate (180,1)


4-4 Climate control

& Ventilator

! Center ventilators

Move the tab to adjust the flow direction.

! Side ventilators

1) Open2) Close

Move the tab to adjust the flow direction.To open the ventilator, turn the side grilleopen/close wheel upward.To close it, turn the wheel downward.

! Rear ventilators

Move the tab or rotate it to adjust the flowdirection.


Black plate (181,1)


Automatic climate controlsystem

NOTE. Operate the automatic climate con-trol system when the engine is running.. The blower fan rotates at a lowspeed when the engine coolant tem-perature is low.For efficient defogging or dehumidify-ing in cold weather, press the “A/C”button.. The vehicle has a rear air condi-tioner. The fan speed of the rear airconditioner can be adjusted, but otheradjustments (outlet air temperature, airdistribution, etc.) are not possible forthe rear air conditioner. For details,refer to “Rear air conditioner” F4-9.

The automatic climate control systemautomatically controls outlet air tempera-ture, fan speed, airflow distribution, airinlet control, and air conditioner compres-sor operation. It activates when the“AUTO” button is pressed, and is used tomaintain a constant, comfortable climatewithin the passenger compartment.The temperature can be set within a rangeof 65 to 858F (18 to 328C).

& Control panel

1) Temperature control dial (driver’s side)2) Defroster button3) Fan speed control dial4) Rear window defogger button (Refer to

“Rear window defogger button” F3-37.)5) Temperature control dial (passenger’s

side)6) Air conditioner button7) Airflow mode selection button8) Air inlet selection button9) OFF button10) AUTO button

! AUTO button

AUTO mode operation:

When the “AUTO” button is pressed, theindicator light on the button illuminates. Inthis state, fan speed, airflow distribution,air inlet control, and air conditioner com-pressor operation are automatically con-trolled.

Manual mode operation:If you operate any of the buttons on thecontrol panel other than the “OFF” buttonand temperature control dial during auto-matic mode operation, the indicator lightwill turn off. You can then manually controlthe system as desired using the buttonyou operated.To change the system back to the AUTOmode, press the “AUTO” button.

Climate control 4-5

– CONTINUED –

4


Black plate (182,1)


4-6 Climate control

! OFF button

The Automatic Climate Control systemturns off (the air conditioner compressorand fan turn off) when the “OFF” button ispressed.When the “OFF” button is pressed, theoutside air introduction mode (air inletselection OFF) is automatically selected.

! Temperature control dial

Driver’s side

Passenger’s side

It is possible to make separate tempera-ture settings for the driver’s side andpassenger ’s side. Each temperature

setting is shown on the display. With thedial set at your desired temperature, thesystem automatically adjusts the tempera-ture of air supplied from the outlets suchthat the desired temperature is achievedand maintained.

Turning the dial counterclockwise andreleasing it reduces the temperature by18F (0.58C). Turning the dial clockwiseand releasing it increases the temperatureby 18F (0.58C). Holding the dial in eitherturned position causes the temperature tochange continuously.

With the minimum temperature set, thesystem gives maximum cooling perfor-mance. With the maximum temperatureset, the system gives maximum heatingperformance.


Black plate (183,1)


! – Defroster button

To defrost or dehumidify the windshieldand front door windows, push the defros-ter button “ ”. When the “ ” button ispushed, the indicator light on the buttonilluminates and the following operation isperformed.. The outside air is drawn into thepassenger compartment and the airflowis directed towards the windshield and thefront door windows.. The air conditioner compressor auto-matically operates to quickly defog thewindshield. However, the indicator light onthe air conditioner button will not illumi-nate.

After eliminating the fogging from thewindshield, return the climate control

system to the AUTO mode by pushingthe “AUTO” button or turn off by pushingthe “OFF” button.Alternatively, push the “ ” button againto return the system to the setting that wasselected before you activated the defros-ter.

! Fan speed control dial

The fan speed control dial has 7 positions:AUTO position and 6 different fan speedpositions.The fan speed is shown on the center ofthe dial.With the fan speed control dial in theAUTO position, the fan speed changesautomatically corresponding the variousconditions: air temperature inside andoutside of the passenger’s compartment,

intensity of the sunlight, etc.

! A/C – Air conditioner button

If the windshield starts to fog when theclimate control system is operated in theAUTO mode, push the air conditionerbutton to defog and dehumidify.When this button is pushed, the airconditioner compressor turns on and theindicator light on the button illuminates.After eliminating the fogging from thewindshield, set the system back to theAUTO mode by pushing the “AUTO”button.

Climate control 4-7

– CONTINUED –

4


Black plate (184,1)


4-8 Climate control

NOTEThe air conditioner compressor maynot operate when the outside air tem-perature is approximately 328F (08C) orlower.

! Airflow mode selection button

Select the desired airflow mode by push-ing the airflow mode selection button. Theselected airflow mode is shown on thecenter of the dial.

There are five airflow modes that activatethe following air outlets.

(Ventilation): Instrument panel outlets

(Bi-level): Instrument panel outlets andfoot outlets

(Heat): Foot outlets, both side outlets ofthe instrument panel and some throughwindshield defroster outlets (A smallamount of air flows to the windshield andboth side windows to prevent fogging.)

(Heat-def): Windshield defroster out-lets, foot outlets and both side outlets ofthe instrument panel

: Windshield defroster outlets and bothside outlets of the instrument panel

For details, refer to “Airflow mode selec-tion” F4-3.

NOTEWhen the “ ” or “ ” mode is se-lected, the air conditioner compressoroperates automatically to defog thewindshield more quickly, regardless ofthe position of the air conditionerbutton. However the indicator on theair conditioner button will not illumi-nate. At the same time, the air inletselection is automatically set to “out-side air” mode.

! Air inlet selection button

ON position (recirculation): Interior air isrecirculated inside the vehicle. Push theair inlet selection button to the ON positionfor fast cooling with the air conditioner orwhen driving on a dusty road. Theindicator light will illuminate.OFF position (outside air): Outside air isdrawn into the passenger compartment.Push the air inlet selection button to theOFF position when the interior has cooledto a comfortable temperature and the roadis no longer dusty. The indicator light willturn off.

WARNING

Continued operation in the ON posi-tion may fog up the windows. Switch


Black plate (185,1)


to the OFF position as soon as theoutside dusty condition clears.

NOTEWhen driving on a dusty road or behinda vehicle that emits unpleasant exhaustgases, set the air inlet selection buttonto the ON position.From time to time, return the air inletselection button to the OFF position todraw outside air into the passengercompartment.

& Rear air conditioner

The rear air conditioner blows cool air outof the rear ventilators while the “A/C”button on the control panel is in the “ON”position. The fan speed of the rear airconditioner can be adjusted using the rearair conditioner dial behind the centerconsole. The fan speed can be adjustedin four steps by turning the dial. Turn thedial to the “OFF” position to stop the fan.

NOTE. When the “A/C” button is in the“OFF” position and when the “A/C”indicator is not illuminated duringAUTO mode operation, the air condi-tioner compressor does not operate,meaning that the system merely blowsuncooled air out of the ventilators.

. The outlet air temperature of the rearair conditioner cannot be adjusted.. The rear air conditioner cannot beused as a heater.

& Temperature sensors

1) Interior air temperature sensor2) Solar sensor

The automatic climate control systememploys several sensors. These sensorsare delicate. If they are treated incorrectlyand become damaged, the system maynot be able to control the interior tempera-ture correctly. To avoid damaging thesensors, observe the following precau-tions.– Do not subject the sensors to impact.– Keep water away from the sensors.

Climate control 4-9

– CONTINUED –

4


Black plate (186,1)


4-10 Climate control

– Do not cover the sensors.

The sensors are located as follows.– Solar sensor: beside windshielddefroster grille– Interior air temperature sensor: on theside of the driver-side part of the centerpanel– Outside temperature sensor: behindfront grille

Operating tips for heater andair conditioner

& Cleaning ventilator grille

Always keep the front ventilator inlet grillefree of snow, leaves, or other obstructionsto ensure efficient heating and defrosting.Since the condenser is located in front ofthe radiator, this area should be kept cleanbecause cooling performance is impairedby any accumulation of insects and leaveson the condenser.

& Efficient cooling after parkingin direct sunlight

After parking in direct sunlight, drive withthe windows open for a few minutes toallow outside air to circulate into the

heated interior. This results in quickercooling by the air conditioner. Keep thewindows closed during the operation ofthe air conditioner for maximum coolingefficiency.

& Lubrication oil circulation inthe refrigerant circuit

Operate the air conditioner compressor ata low engine speed (at idle or low drivingspeeds) a few minutes each month duringthe off-season to circulate its oil.

& Checking air conditioningsystem before summer sea-son

Check the air conditioner unit for refriger-ant leaks, hose conditions, and properoperation each spring. Have the air con-ditioning system checked by yourSUBARU dealer.

& Cooling and dehumidifying inhigh humidity and low tem-perature weather conditions

Under certain weather conditions (highrelative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) asmall amount of water vapor emissionfrom the air outlets may be noticed. Thiscondition is normal and does not indicateany problem with the air conditioning


Black plate (187,1)


system.

& Air conditioner compressorshut-off when engine isheavily loaded

To improve acceleration and gas mileage,the air conditioner compressor is designedto temporarily shut off during air condi-tioner operation whenever the acceleratoris fully depressed such as during rapidacceleration or when driving on a steepupgrade.

& Refrigerant for your climatecontrol system

Your air conditioner uses ozone friendlyrefrigerant HFC134a. Therefore, the meth-od of adding, changing or checking therefrigerant is different from the method forCFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARUdealer for service. Repairs needed as aresult of using the wrong refrigerant arenot covered under warranty.

Air filtration system

Replace the filter element according to thereplacement schedule shown in the fol-lowing. This schedule should be followedto maintain the filter’s dust collectionability. Under extremely dusty conditions,the filter should be replaced more fre-quently. It is recommended that you haveyour filter checked or replaced by yourSUBARU dealer. For replacement, werecommend the use of a genuineSUBARU air filter kit.

Replacement schedule:

Every 15 months or 15,000 miles (24,000km) whichever comes first

& Replacing the air filter

1. Remove the instrument panel sidecover.

NOTEThe instrument panel side cover is heldin place with four pins.

Climate control 4-11

– CONTINUED –

4


Black plate (188,1)


4-12 Climate control

2. Unhook the strap.

3. Remove the glove box by detachingthe one clip on the side.

4. Remove the air filter cover by detach-ing the five clips.

5. Unhook the air filter and draw it out.

6. Replace the air filter with a new one.7. Install the air filter cover.8. Install the glove box.

9. Attach the strap to the hook.


Black plate (189,1)


10. Secure the glove box with the one clip.11. Install the instrument panel side cover.

CAUTION

Contact your SUBARU dealer if thefollowing occurs, even if it is not yettime to change the filter.

– Reduction of the airflow throughthe vents.

– Windshield gets easily fogged ormisted.

NOTEThe filter can influence the air condi-tioning, heating and defroster perfor-mance if not properly maintained.

Climate control 4-13

4


Black plate (2,1)


— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —


Black plate (9,1)


Antenna system .................................................. 5-2Printed antenna................................................... 5-2FM reception....................................................... 5-2

Installation of accessories.................................. 5-2Audio set ............................................................. 5-3

Type A audio set ................................................. 5-3Type B audio set ................................................. 5-3

Type A audio set (if equipped) ........................... 5-4Radio operation................................................... 5-4Compact disc player operation ........................... 5-10

Type B audio set (if equipped).......................... 5-15Radio operation ................................................. 5-15Built in CD changer operation ............................ 5-21

Audio control buttons ....................................... 5-26MODE button..................................................... 5-26

Auxiliary input jack............................................ 5-28Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) systemoperation (if equipped) ................................... 5-29

Precautions to observe when handling acompact disc................................................... 5-29

Audio

5


Black plate (192,1)


5-2 Audio

Antenna system

& Printed antenna

CAUTION

Do not use sharp instruments orwindow cleaner containing abra-sives to clean the inner surface ofthe window on which the antenna isprinted. Doing so may damage theantenna printed on the window.

The antenna is printed on the innersurface of the rear window glass.

NOTEAntenna performance will deterioratesignificantly if you apply tinting film or

any other material over the antennaportion of the rear window glass.

& FM receptionAlthough FM is normally static free,reception can be affected by the surround-ing area, atmospheric conditions, stationstrength and transmitter distance. Build-ings or other obstructions may causemomentary static, flutter or station inter-ference. If reception continues to beunsatisfactory, switch to a stronger station.

NOTEIf a cell phone is placed near the radio,it may cause the radio to emit noisewhen it receives calls. This noise doesnot indicate a radio malfunction.

Installation of accessories

Always consult your SUBARU dealerbefore installing a citizen band radio orother transmitting device in your vehicle.Such devices may cause the electroniccontrol system to malfunction if they areincorrectly installed or if they are notsuited for the vehicle.


Black plate (193,1)


Audio set

Your SUBARU may be equipped with oneof the following audio sets. See the pagesindicated in this section for operatingdetails.

& Type A audio set

. Radio operation: refer to page 5-4

. CD (compact disc) player operation:refer to page 5-10

& Type B audio set

. Radio operation: refer to page 5-15

. Built-in CD changer operation: refer topage 5-21

Audio 5-3

5


Black plate (194,1)


5-4 Audio

Type A audio set (if equipped)

The audio set will operate only when the ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON” position.

& Radio operation

(1) Satellite radio mode button(2) FM AM mode button(3) Auxiliary audio unit and Rear seat

entertainment selection button(4) Tuning button(5) AUDIO button(6) Power switch, volume control dial(7) Seek button(8) Scan button(9) Tone and Balance button(10) Preset button

! Power switch and volume control

The dial (6) is used for both power (ON/OFF) and volume control. The radio isturned ON and OFF by pushing the dialand the volume is controlled by turning thedial. The dial can also be used for toneand balance adjustment.

! Tone and balance control

The volume control dial (6) normallyfunctions as a volume control. This dialbecomes a control for Bass, Midrange,Treble, Fader or Balance when you selectthe appropriate tone and balance controlmode.Choose desired volume level for eachmode by turning the volume control dial.The control function returns to volumecontrol mode after approximately 5 sec-onds.


Black plate (195,1)


! To change tone and balance controlmodes

Each brief press of the “TONE BAL”button (9) changes control modes in thefollowing sequence starting from volumecontrol mode. (When the radio is firstturned on, the control mode is in thevolume control.)

The “TONE BAL” button is used forselecting the following control modes.

Audio 5-5

– CONTINUED –

5


Black plate (196,1)


5-6 Audio

Control mode (range of le-vels)

Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise

Bass control (−6 to +6) For less bass sound For more bass sound

Midrange control (−6 to +6) For less midrange sound For more midrange sound

Treble control (−6 to +6) For less treble sound For more treble sound

Fader control (R9 to F9) To increase rear speaker vo-lume and decrease front speak-

er volume

To increase front speaker vo-lume and decrease rear speaker

volume

Balance control (L9 to R9) To increase left speaker volumeand decrease right speaker vo-

lume

To increase right speaker vo-lume and decrease left speaker

volume

Volume control (0 to 40) For less volume For more volume

AUX volume control* (0 to40) For less volume For more volume

*: Only when an AUX audio product is connected.

! FM/AM radio

! FM/AM selection button

Push the “FM AM” button (2) when theradio is off to turn on the radio.Push the “FM AM” button when the radiois on to select FM1, FM2 or AM reception.

! Stereo indicator

The stereo indicator “ST” will illuminatewhen an FM stereo broadcast is received.

! Manual tuning

Press the “ ” side of the “TUNE TRACK”button (4) to increase the tuning frequencyand press the “ ” side of the button todecrease it.Each time the button is pressed, thefrequency interval can be changed be-tween 10 kHz in the AM mode and 0.2MHz in the FM mode.If you hold down the “ ” side of thebutton, the tuning frequency will increasecontinuously, and if you hold down the “ ”side of the button, the tuning frequencywill decrease continuously. Release thebutton when your desired frequency isreached.


Black plate (197,1)


NOTEWhile you are holding down either sideof the “TUNE TRACK” button, thetuning frequency will not stop chan-ging even if the frequency of a recei-vable station is reached.

! Seek tuning

If you press the “ ” or “ ” side of the“SEEK FLDR” button (7), the radio willautomatically search for a receivablestation and stop at the first one it finds.This function may not be available, how-ever, when radio signals are weak. In sucha situation, perform manual tuning toselect the desired station.

! Automatic tuning (SCAN)

Press the “SCAN” button (8) to change theradio to the SCAN mode. In this mode, theradio scans through the radio band until astation is found. The radio will stop at thestation for 5 seconds while displaying thefrequency, after which scanning will con-tinue until the entire band has beenscanned from the low end to the highend. Press the “SCAN” button again tocancel the SCAN mode and to stop on anydisplayed frequency.Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the “SEEKFLDR” button (7) again to cancel the scanmode and to stop on any displayed

frequency.When the “SCAN” button is pressed forautomatic tuning, stations are scanned inthe direction of low frequencies to highfrequencies only.Automatic tuning may not function prop-erly if the station reception is weakened bydistance from the station or proximity totall buildings and hills.

! Selecting preset stations

Presetting a station with a preset button(10) allows you to select that station in asingle operation. Up to six, AM, FM1 andFM2 stations each may be preset.

! How to preset stations

1. Press the “FM AM” button (2) to selectFM1, FM2, or AM reception.2. Press the “SCAN” button (8) or tunethe radio manually until the desired stationfrequency is displayed.3. Press and hold one of the presetbuttons (10) to store the frequency. If thebutton is pressed briefly, the precedingselection will remain in memory.

NOTE. If the connection between the radioand battery is broken for any reasonsuch as vehicle maintenance or radioremoval, all stations stored in the

preset buttons are cleared. If thisoccurs, it is necessary to reset thepreset buttons.. If a cell phone is placed near theradio, it may cause the radio to emitnoise when it receives calls. This noisedoes not indicate a radio malfunction.

! Satellite radio mode (if equipped)

To receive satellite radio, it is necessary toinstall the SUBARU genuine satellitereceiver (optional part) and to enter intoa contract with a satellite radio networkservice such as “Sirius XMTM satelliteradio” (for U.S.A. only) or “Sirius satelliteradio” (for Canada only). For details,please contact your SUBARU dealer.

! Sirius satellite radio (for Canadaonly)

Sirius satellite radio is a recent innovationthat allows the listener to experiencedigital sound quality and to have a greatervariety of channels.Use of satellite radio (Sirius) requires atuner, antenna and a service contract. Fordetails, please contact your SUBARUdealer or visit Sirius Satellite Radio atwww.sirius.ca or call 1-888-539-7474 formore information. Sirius, the Sirius doglogo, channel names and logos are trade-marks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.

Audio 5-7

– CONTINUED –

5


Black plate (198,1)


5-8 Audio

! Sirius XMTM Satellite Radio Activa-tion (for U.S.A. only)

Models with Sirius XMTM are eligible for a3-month complimentary subscription tothe Sirius XMTM Satellite Radio service.Activation process:You can activate the XM Satellite Radiofrom the website of the XM Satellite Radio.For details, visit the website.

! Satellite radio reception

Satellite radio signals are best received inareas with a clear view of the open sky. Inareas where there are tall buildings, trees,tunnels or other structures that mayobstruct the signal of the satellites, theremay be signal interruptions. Other circum-stances that may result in signal lossinclude driving near a wall, steep cliff orhill, or driving on the lower level of a multi-tiered road or inside a parking garage.

To help reduce this condition, satelliteradio providers have installed ground-based repeaters in heavily populatedareas. However, you may still experiencereception problems in some areas.

! Displaying satellite radio ID of tuner

When you activate satellite radio, youshould have your satellite radio tuner IDready because each tuner is identified by

its unique satellite radio tuner ID.The satellite radio ID will be needed whenyou activate satellite radio and receivesatellite radio customer support.The satellite radio ID can be found on theaudio display by tuning the channel to “0”.Turn the “TUNE TRACK” button (4) toselect the satellite radio channel.

! Band selection button

Push the “SAT” button (1) when the radiois off to turn on the radio.Push the “SAT” button when the radio ison to select SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3 recep-tion.

! Channel selection

Press “ ” of the “TUNE TRACK” button(4) to select the next channel and press“ ” of the button to select the previouschannel.Keep pressing “ ” of the button tochange to the next channel continuouslyand keep pressing “ ” of the button tochange to the previous channel continu-ously.

! Category selection

Press “ ” or “ ” of the “SEEK FLDR”button (7) to display the current category.Press “ ” again to select the nextcategory, and press “ ” again to select

the previous category.

! Channel scan

Press the “SCAN” button (8) to change theradio to the SCAN mode. In this mode, theradio scans through the channels until astation is found. The radio will stop at thestation for 5 seconds while displaying thechannel number, after which scanning willcontinue until the entire channel has beenscanned from the low end to the high end.Also during the category selection, chan-nel scan can be performed in that cate-gory.Press the “SCAN” button again to cancelthe SCAN mode and to stop on anydisplayed channel.

! Selecting preset channels

Presetting a channel with a preset button(10) allows you to select that channel in asingle operation. Up to six, SAT1, SAT2and SAT3 channels each may be preset.

! How to preset channels

1. Press the “SAT” button (1) to selectSAT1, SAT2 and SAT3 reception.2. Press the “SCAN” button (8) or the“TUNE TRACK” button (4) to select thechannel.3. Press and hold one of the presetbuttons (10) to store the channel. If the


Black plate (199,1)


button is pressed briefly, the precedingselection will remain in memory.

NOTEIf the connection between the radio andbattery is broken for any reason suchas vehicle maintenance or radio re-moval, all channels stored in the presetbuttons are cleared. If this occurs, it isnecessary to reset the preset buttons.

! Display selection

Press the “AUDIO” button (5) while receiv-ing satellite radio to change the display asfollows.

! Rear seat entertainment

If your vehicle is equipped with a RearSeat Entertainment System, you canenjoy audio outputs from the systemthrough the vehicle’s speakers by press-ing the “RSE AUX” button (3). Press thebutton again to return to the audio setsound.

NOTEIf your vehicle is equipped with a RearSeat Entertainment System, refer to the

Owner’s Manual supplement for theRear Seat Entertainment System forfurther details.

Audio 5-9

– CONTINUED –

5


Black plate (200,1)


5-10 Audio

& Compact disc player operation (1) CD button(2) Track button(3) AUDIO button(4) Seek and Folder button(5) Random button(6) Repeat button(7) Scan button(8) Eject button

! To playback a compact disc

! When CD is not in the player

Hold a disc with a finger in the center holewhile gripping the edge of the disc, theninsert it in to the slot (with the label sideup) and the player will automatically pullthe disc into position.

NOTE. DO NOT INSERT TWO DISCS INTOTHE DISC INSERTION SLOT AT THESAME TIME.. Be sure to insert a disc with the labelside up. If you insert the disc the labelside down, “CHECK DISC” will appearon the display and the player will notplay anything.. After the last song finishes, theplayer will automatically return to track1 (the first song on the disc).


Black plate (201,1)


. If you insert a disc that cannot beplayed by the player, “CHECK DISC”will appear on the display and theplayer will revert to the previouslyselected mode.. The player is designed to be able toplay music CD-Rs and music CD-RWs,but it may not be able to play certainones.. CDs (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch CDs) are notsupported, and if inserted, they will beimmediately ejected.

! When CD is in the player

When the “CD” button (1) is pressed, theplayer will start playback.

NOTEAfter the last song finishes, the playerwill automatically return to track 1 (thefirst song on the disc).

! To stop playback of a CD

When the “PUSH POWER” button ispressed during playback of a CD, the CDstops playing temporarily. To let the CDresume playing, press the button again.

! To select a song from its beginning

! Forward direction

Briefly press the “ ” side of the “TUNETRACK” button (2) to skip to the beginning

of the next track. Each time this side of thebutton is pressed, the indicated tracknumber will increase.

NOTEIn an MP3 folder, skipping past the lasttrack will take you back to the first trackin the folder.

! Backward direction

Briefly press the “ ” side of the “TUNETRACK” button (2) to skip to the beginningof the current track. Each time this side ofthe button is pressed, the indicated tracknumber will decrease.


! Fast-forwarding and rewinding

! Fast-forwarding

Press and hold the “ ” side of the “TUNETRACK” button (2) to fast-forward thetrack.Release the button to stop fast-forwarding.

NOTEIf you fast-forward past the last trackon the disc, the player will select thefirst track on the disc and start playing

it.

! Rewinding

Press and hold the “ ” side of the “TUNETRACK” button (2) to rewind the track.Release the button to stop rewinding.

NOTEIf you rewind to the beginning of thefirst track on the disc, the rewindingwill stop and the player will startplaying the first track on the disc.

! Folder selection (MP3 disc)

Press the “ ” side of the “SEEK FLDR”button (4) briefly to select the next folder.Pressing the “ ” side of the same buttonthe first time makes the player go back tothe beginning of the currently selectedtrack; pressing it a second time makes itgo back to the previously selected track.

NOTEOnly MP3 folders are recognized whenan attempt to select the next or pre-vious folder is made. If no appropriatefolder exists on the disc, pressing the“ ” or “ ” side of the “SEEK FLDR”button has no effect.

Audio 5-11

– CONTINUED –

5


Black plate (202,1)


5-12 Audio

! Repeating

! To repeat the currently playing track

To repeat a track, briefly press the “RPT”button (6) while the track is playing. Thedisplay will show “RPT”, and the track willbe repeated.To cancel the track repeat-play mode:Press the “RPT” button once (non-MP3disc)Press the “RPT” button twice (MP3 disc)The “RPT” indication will turn off, and thenormal playback mode will be resumed.

NOTE. With an MP3 disc inserted, eachtime you briefly press the button, themode will change to the next one in thefollowing sequence.

If you accidentally press the button andcancel the track repeat-play mode,press it again to reselect the repeat-play mode.. The repeat-play mode will be can-celed if you perform any of the follow-ing steps.

– Press the “RDM” button.– Press the “SCAN” button.– Press the “ ” button.

– Select the radio mode.– Press the “RSE AUX” button.– Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the“SEEK FLDR” button (MP3 disc).– Turn off the power of the audioequipment.– Turn the ignition switch to the“LOCK” position.

! To repeat the currently playing folder(MP3 disc)

To repeat the currently playing folder,press the “RPT” button (6) twice while atrack is playing. The display will show “F-RPT”, and the folder will be playedrepeatedly.To cancel the folder repeat-play mode,press the “RPT” button once more. The“F-RPT” indication will turn off, and thenormal playback mode will be resumed.

NOTE. Each time you briefly press thebutton, the mode will change to thenext one in the following sequence.

If you accidentally press the button andcancel the folder repeat-play mode,press it again to reselect the folderrepeat-play mode.

. The folder repeat-play mode will becancelled if you perform any of thefollowing steps.

– Press the “RDM” button.– Press the “SCAN” button.– Press the “ ” button.– Select the radio mode.– Press the “RSE AUX” button.– Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the“SEEK FLDR” button (MP3 disc).– Turn off the power of the audioequipment.– Turn the ignition switch to the“LOCK” position.

! Random playback

! Non-MP3 disc

Press the “RDM” button (5) briefly duringdisc playback to play all of the tracks onthe disc in a random order. The display willshow “RDM”, and all of the tracks on thedisc will be played in a random order.To cancel random mode, press the buttonagain. The “RDM” indication will turn off,and the normal playback mode will beresumed.

NOTERandom playback will be cancelled ifyou perform any of the following steps.. Press the “RPT” button.


Black plate (203,1)


. Press the “SCAN” button.

. Press the “ ” button.

. Select the radio mode.

. Press the “RSE AUX” button.

. Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the“SEEK FLDR” button.. Turn off the power of the audioequipment.. Turn the ignition switch to the“LOCK” position.

! MP3 disc

Press the “RDM” button (5) during discplayback to play all of the tracks in thefolder currently being played in randomorder. Press the “RDM” button again toplay all of the tracks on the disc in randomorder. The display will show “RDM” duringthe random mode.To cancel the random mode, press the“RDM” button during “in-disc” randomplayback. The “RDM” indication will turnoff, and the normal playback mode will beresumed.


If you accidentally press the button andcancel the random mode, press it againto reselect the random mode.. Random playback will be cancelledif you perform any of the followingsteps.

– Press the “RPT” button.– Press the “SCAN” button.– Press the “ ” button.– Select the radio mode.– Press the “RSE AUX” button.– Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the“SEEK FLDR” button.– Turn off the power of the audioequipment.– Turn the ignition switch to the“LOCK” position.

! Scan

The scan mode lets you listen to the first10 seconds of each track on the disc/folder in succession. Press the “SCAN”button (7) to start scanning through alltracks upward beginning with the trackfollowing the currently selected one. Afterall tracks on the disc/folder has been

scanned, normal playback mode is re-stored.To cancel a scan, press the button again.

NOTEThe scan mode will be cancelled if youperform any of the following opera-tions.. Press the “RPT” button.. Press the “RDM” button.. Press the “ ” button.. Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the“TUNE TRACK” button.. Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the“SEEK FLDR” button (MP3 disc).. Select the radio mode.. Press the “RSE AUX” button.. Turn off the power of the audioequipment.. Turn the ignition switch to the“LOCK” position.

! To eject a disc from the player

When a disc is being played back or whena disc is in the player, press the “ ”button (8). The disc will be ejected.

NOTE. Avoid driving the vehicle with a CDsticking out, because vibration mightmake it fall out.. If the disc is left ejected for more

Audio 5-13

– CONTINUED –

5


Black plate (204,1)


5-14 Audio

than approximately 15 seconds afterthe ignition switch is turned to the“LOCK” position, a disc protectionfunction will operate, automaticallyreloading the disc. In this case, thedisc is not played.

! Display selection (MP3 disc)

If you press the “AUDIO” button (3) duringplayback, the indication will change to thenext one in the following sequence.

! Page (track/folder title) scroll (MP3disc)

If, having pressed the “AUDIO” button (3)to select track title or folder title display,you press the “AUDIO” button again forless than 0.5 second, the title will bescrolled so you can see all of it. You willsee eight characters at a time.

NOTEThe display is designed to show titlesfor up to three pages (64 characters intotal).


Black plate (205,1)


Type B audio set (if equipped)

The audio set will operate only when the ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON” positions.

& Radio operation

(1) Satellite radio mode button(2) FM AM mode button(3) Auxiliary audio unit and Rear seat

entertainment selection button(4) Tuning button(5) AUDIO button(6) Power switch, volume control dial(7) Seek button(8) Scan button(9) Tone and Balance button(10) Preset button

! Power switch and volume control

The dial (6) is used for both power (ON/OFF) and volume control. The radio isturned ON and OFF by pushing the dialand the volume is controlled by turning thedial. The dial can also be used for toneand balance adjustment.

! Tone and balance control

The volume control dial (6) normallyfunctions as a volume control. This dialbecomes a control for Bass, Midrange,Treble, Fader or Balance when you selectthe appropriate tone and balance controlmode.Choose desired volume level for eachmode by turning the volume control dial.The control function returns to volumecontrol mode after approximately 5 sec-onds.

Audio 5-15

– CONTINUED –

5


Black plate (206,1)


5-16 Audio

! To change tone and balance controlmodes

Each brief press of the “TONE BAL”button (9) changes control modes in thefollowing sequence starting from volumecontrol mode. (When the radio is firstturned on, the control mode is in thevolume control.)

The “TONE BAL” button is used forselecting the following control modes.


Black plate (207,1)


Control mode (Range of le-vels)

Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise

Bass control (−6 to +6) For less bass sound For more bass sound

Midrange control (−6 to +6) For less midrange sound For more midrange sound

Treble control (−6 to +6) For less treble sound For more treble sound

Fader control (R9 to F9) To increase rear speaker vo-lume and decrease front

speaker volume

To increase front speaker vo-lume and decrease rear speaker

volume

Balance control (L9 to R9) To increase left speaker volumeand decrease right speaker vo-

lume

To increase right speaker vo-lume and decrease left speaker

volume

Volume control (0 to 40) For less volume For more volume

AUX volume control* (0 to40) For less volume For more volume

*: Only when an AUX audio product is connected.

! FM/AM radio

! FM/AM selection button

Push the “FM AM” button (2) when theradio is off to turn on the radio.Push the “FM AM” button when the radiois on to select FM1, FM2 or AM reception.

! Stereo indicator

The stereo indicator “ST” will illuminatewhen an FM stereo broadcast is received.

! Manual tuning

Press the “ ” side of the “TUNE TRACK”button (4) to increase the tuning frequencyand press the tuning button marked “ ” todecrease it.Each time the button is pressed, thefrequency interval can be changed be-tween 10 kHz in the AM mode and 0.2MHz in the FM mode.If you hold down the “ ” side of thebutton, the tuning frequency will increasecontinuously, and if you hold down the “ ”side of the button, the tuning frequencywill decrease continuously. Release thebutton when your desired frequency isreached.

Audio 5-17

– CONTINUED –

5


Black plate (208,1)


5-18 Audio

NOTEWhile you are holding down either sideof the TUNE/TRACK button, the tuningfrequency will not stop changing evenif the frequency of a receivable stationis reached.

! Seek tuning (SEEK)

If you press the “ ” or “ ” side of the“SEEK FLDR” button (7), the radio willautomatically search for a receivablestation and stop at the first one it finds.This function may not be available, how-ever, when radio signals are weak. In sucha situation, perform manual tuning toselect the desired station.

! Scan tuning (SCAN)

Press the “SCAN” button (8) to change theradio to the SCAN mode. In this mode, theradio scans through the radio band until astation is found. The radio will stop at thestation for 5 seconds while displaying thefrequency, after which scanning will con-tinue until the entire band has beenscanned from the low end to the highend. Press the “SCAN” button again tocancel the SCAN mode and to stop on anydisplayed frequency.Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the “SEEKFLDR” button (7) again to cancel the scanmode and to stop on any displayed

frequency.When the “SCAN” button is pressed forautomatic tuning, stations are scanned inthe direction of low frequencies to highfrequencies only.Automatic tuning may not function prop-erly if the station reception is weakened bydistance from the station or proximity totall buildings and hills.

! Selecting preset stations

Presetting a station with a preset buttonallows you to select that station in a singleoperation. Up to six AM, FM1 and FM2stations each may be preset.

! How to preset stations

1. Press the “FM AM” button (2) to selectFM1, FM2 or AM reception.2. Press the “SCAN” button (8) or tunethe radio manually until the desired stationfrequency is displayed.3. Press and hold one of the presetbuttons to store the frequency. If thebutton is pressed briefly, the precedingselection will remain in memory.

NOTE. If the connection between the radioand battery is broken for any reasonsuch as vehicle maintenance or radioremoval, all stations stored in the

preset buttons are cleared. If thisoccurs, it is necessary to reset thepreset buttons.. If a cell phone is placed near theradio, it may cause the radio to emitnoise when it receives calls. This noisedoes not indicate a radio malfunction.

! Satellite radio mode (if equipped)

To receive satellite radio, it is necessary toinstall the SUBARU genuine satellitereceiver (optional part) and to enter intoa contract with a satellite radio networkservice such as “Sirius XMTM satelliteradio” (for U.S.A. only) or “Sirius satelliteradio” (for Canada only). For details,please contact your SUBARU dealer.

! Sirius satellite radio (for Canadaonly)

Refer to “Sirius satellite radio (for Canadaonly)” F5-7.

! Sirius XMTM Satellite Radio Activa-tion (for U.S.A. only)

Refer to “Sirius XMTM Satellite RadioActivation (for U.S.A. only)” F5-8.

! Satellite radio reception

Refer to “Satellite radio reception” F5-8.

! Displaying satellite radio ID of tuner

When you activate satellite radio, you


Black plate (209,1)


should have your satellite radio tuner IDready because each tuner is identified byits unique satellite radio tuner ID.The satellite radio ID will be needed whenyou activate satellite radio and receivesatellite radio customer support.The satellite radio ID can be found on theaudio display by tuning the channel to “0”.Turn the “TUNE/TRACK” button (4) toselect the satellite radio channel.

! Band selection button

Push the “SAT” button (1) when the radiois off to turn on the radio.Push the “SAT” button when the radio ison to select SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3 recep-tion.

! Channel selection

Press “ ” of the “TUNE TRACK” button(4) to select the next channel and press“ ” of the button to select the previouschannel.Keep pressing “ ” of the button tochange to the next channel continuouslyand keep pressing “ ” of the button tochange to the previous channel continu-ously.

! Category selection

Press “ ” or “ ” of the “SEEK FLDR”button (7) to display the current category.

Press “ ” again to select the nextcategory, and press “ ” again to selectthe previous category.

! Channel scan

Press the “SCAN” button (8) to change theradio to the SCAN mode. In this mode, theradio scans through the channels until astation is found. The radio will stop at thestation for 5 seconds while displaying thechannel number, after which scanning willcontinue until the entire channel has beenscanned from the low end to the high end.Also during the category selection, chan-nel scan can be performed in that cate-gory.Press the “SCAN” button again to cancelthe SCAN mode and to stop on anydisplayed channel.

! Selecting preset channels

Presetting a channel with a preset button(10) allows you to select that channel in asingle operation. Up to six, SAT1, SAT2and SAT3 channels each may be preset.

! How to preset channels

1. Press the “SAT” button (1) to selectSAT1, SAT2 and SAT3 reception.2. Press the “SCAN” button (8) or the“TUNE TRACK” button (4) to select thechannel.

3. Press and hold one of the presetbuttons (10) to store the channel. If thebutton is pressed briefly, the precedingselection will remain in memory.

NOTEIf the connection between the radio andbattery is broken for any reason suchas vehicle maintenance or radio re-moval, all channels stored in the presetbuttons are cleared. If this occurs, it isnecessary to reset the preset buttons.

! Display selection

Press the “AUDIO” button (5) while receiv-ing satellite radio to change the display asfollows.

! Rear seat entertainment

If your vehicle is equipped with a RearSeat Entertainment System, you canenjoy audio outputs from the systemthrough the vehicle’s speakers by press-ing the “RSE AUX” button (3). Press thebutton again to return to the audio setsound.

Audio 5-19

– CONTINUED –

5


Black plate (210,1)


5-20 Audio

NOTEIf your vehicle is equipped with a RearSeat Entertainment System, refer to theOwner’s Manual supplement for theRear Seat Entertainment System forfurther details.


Black plate (211,1)


& Built in CD changer operation (1) CD button(2) Track button(3) AUDIO button(4) Seek and Folder button(5) Random button(6) Repeat button(7) Scan button(8) Eject button(9) Disc select button(10) Load button

NOTE. Be sure to insert a disc with the labelside up. If you insert the disc the labelside down, “CHECK DISC” will appearon the display and the player will notplay anything.. If a disc is inserted during a radiobroadcast, the disc will interrupt thebroadcast.. The player is designed to be able toplay music CD-Rs and music CD-RWs,but it may not be able to play certainones.. CDs (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch CDs) are notsupported, and if inserted, they will beimmediately ejected.. Insert discs slowly, one at a time.Inserting discs one over another couldresult in malfunction of the CD chan-ger.

Audio 5-21

– CONTINUED –

5


Black plate (212,1)


5-22 Audio

! How to insert a CD(s)

! Inserting a CD

1. Briefly press the “LOAD” button (10). Ifthe magazine in the player has an idleposition where you can insert a disc, thedisc number indicator associated with theidle position will blink.If no indicator blinks, it means that there isno idle position in the magazine.2. After the disc number indicator hasstarted to flash, insert the disc when“LOAD” flashes on the display. The discwill then be automatically drawn in, andthe player will begin to play back the firsttrack of the disc.

. To insert more discs in succession,repeat Steps 1 and 2. The magazine willbe loaded with discs in the ascendingorder of position number.If you do not insert any disc in 15 secondsafter you have pressed the “LOAD” button,the player will begin to play back the firsttrack of the last disc you have inserted.. The disc indicator steadily lights up if adisc is already inserted in the correspond-ing position of the magazine.. While the player is in the loading mode,if you press “FM AM” button, the player willenter the standby mode. Press the “CD”button (1) to start playback.

! Inserting a disc in a desired position

1. Briefly press the “LOAD” button (10). Ifthe magazine in the player has an idleposition where you can insert a disc, thedisc number indicator associated with theidle position will blink.The positions in the magazine the indica-tor of which steadily lights up are alreadyloaded with discs.2. Press the disc select button (9) at theposition where you want to insert a disc.3. Insert the disc when “LOAD” flasheson the display. The disc will then beautomatically drawn in, and the player willbegin to play the first track on the disc.

. If you wish to insert another disc,repeat the procedure beginning with step1.If you do not insert any disc in 15 secondsafter you have pressed the “LOAD” button,the player will begin to play back the firsttrack of the last disc you have inserted.. While the player is in the loading mode,if you press “FM AM” button, the player willenter standby mode. Press the “CD”button (1) to start playback.

! Loading all the magazine (full discloading mode)

1. If you press and hold the “LOAD”

button (10), the player will produce a beepsound and will enter the full disc loadingmode.2. A “disc number” indicator will blink,and “ALL LOAD” will be on display for aperiod of 15 seconds. If a disc is success-fully loaded during this period, the discnumber indicator will stop blinking and willsteadily light.3. When the loading of a disc is com-plete, the next disc number indicator willblink. Then repeat Step 2.4. When the magazine is filled with discsby repeating Steps 2 and 3, the player willstart playback of the discs, beginning withthe one inserted first.

If you fail to insert any disc during each 15seconds interval, the full disc loadingmode will be canceled, and the player willstart playback of the disc inserted first.

! How to play back a CD or make apause

! When there is no CD inserted:

Properly insert a CD. Refer to “How toinsert a CD(s)” F5-22.When a CD is loaded, the player will startplayback of the CD, beginning with thefirst track.


Black plate (213,1)


! When there are CDs loaded:

Press the preferred disc select button (9),the disc number indicator of which isconstantly illuminated. The player will thenstart playback of the selected CD, begin-ning with the first track.If a disc that the player cannot read hasbeen loaded, “CHECK DISC” will appearon the display and the player will not playanything.

! To select a song from its beginning

! Forward direction

Briefly press the “ ” side of the “TUNETRACK” button (2) to skip to the beginningof the next track. Each time the button ispressed, the indicated track number willincrease.


! Backward direction

Briefly press the “ ” side of the “TUNETRACK” button (2) to skip to the beginningof the current track. Each time the buttonis pressed, the indicated track number willdecrease.

NOTEIn an MP3 folder, skipping past the firsttrack will take you to the last track inthe folder.

! Fast-forwarding and rewinding

! Fast-forwarding

Press and hold the “ ” side of the “TUNETRACK” button (2) to fast-forward thetrack.Release the button to stop fast-forwarding.

NOTEIf you fast-forward to the end of the lasttrack, fast-forwarding will stop and theplayer will start playback beginningwith the first track.

! Rewinding

Press and hold the “ ” side of the “TUNETRACK” button (2) to rewind the track.Release the button to stop rewinding.

NOTEIf you rewind to the beginning of thefirst track, the rewinding will stop andthe player will start playback.

! Repeating

! To repeat the currently playing track

To repeat a track, briefly press the “RPT”button (6) while the track is playing. Thedisplay will show “RPT”, and the track willbe repeated.To cancel the track repeat-play mode,briefly press the “RPT” button twice. The“RPT” indication will turn off, and thenormal playback mode will be resumed.


If you accidentally press the button andcancel the track repeat-play mode,press it again to reselect the repeat-play mode.. The repeat-play mode will be can-celled if you perform any of the follow-ing steps.

– Press the “RDM” button.– Press the “SCAN” button.– Press the “ ” button.– Press the disc select button.– Select the radio mode.– Press the “RSE AUX” button.

Audio 5-23

– CONTINUED –

5


Black plate (214,1)


5-24 Audio

– Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the“SEEK FLDR” button (MP3 disc).– Turn off the power of the audioequipment.– Turn the ignition switch to the“LOCK” position.

! To repeat the currently playing disc/folder

To repeat the currently playing disc/folder,press the “RPT” button (6) twice while atrack is playing. The display will show “D-RPT”, and the disc/folder will be playedrepeatedly.To cancel the disc/folder repeat-playmode, press the “RPT” button once more.The “D-RPT” indication will turn off, andthe normal playback mode will be re-sumed.


If you accidentally press the button andcancel the disc/folder repeat-playmode, press it again to reselect thedisc/folder repeat-play mode.. The disc/folder repeat-play mode

will be cancelled if you perform any ofthe following steps.

– Press the “RDM” button.– Press the “SCAN” button.– Press the “ ” button.– Press the disc select button.– Select the radio mode.– Press the “RSE AUX” button.– Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the“SEEK FLDR” button (MP3 disc).– Turn off the power of the audioequipment.– Turn the ignition switch to the“LOCK” position.

! Random playback

! Non-MP3 disc

Press the “RDM” button (5) briefly duringdisc playback to play all of the tracks onthe disc in a random order. The display willshow “RDM”, and all of the tracks on thedisc will be played in a random order.To cancel random mode, press the buttonagain. The “RDM” indication will turn off,and the normal playback mode will beresumed.

NOTERandom playback will be cancelled ifyou perform any of the following steps.. Press the “RPT” button.

. Press the “SCAN” button.

. Press the “ ” button.

. Select the radio mode.

. Press the “RSE AUX” button.

. Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the“SEEK FLDR” button.. Turn off the power of the audioequipment.. Turn the ignition switch to the“LOCK” position.

! MP3 disc

Press the “RDM” button (5) during discplayback to play all of the tracks in thefolder currently being played in randomorder. Press the “RDM” button again toplay all of the tracks on the disc in randomorder. The display will show “RDM” duringthe random mode.To cancel the random mode, press the“RDM” button during “in-disc” randomplayback. The “RDM” indication will turnoff, and the normal playback mode will beresumed.



Black plate (215,1)


If you accidentally press the button andcancel the random mode, press it againto reselect the random mode.. Random playback will be cancelledif you perform any of the followingsteps.

– Press the “RPT” button.– Press the “SCAN” button.– Press the “ ” button.– Select the radio mode.– Press the “RSE AUX” button.– Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the“SEEK FLDR” button.– Turn off the power of the audioequipment.– Turn the ignition switch to the“LOCK” position.

! SCAN

The scan mode lets you listen to the first10 seconds of each track in succession.Press the “SCAN” button (7) to startscanning upward beginning with the trackfollowing the currently selected one. Whenall tracks in the disc/folder have beenscanned, normal playback will be re-sumed. To cancel the scan mode, press

the button again.

NOTEThe scan mode will be cancelled if youperform any of the following steps.. Press the “RPT” button.. Press the “RDM” button.. Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the“TUNE TRACK” button.. Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the“SEEK FLDR” button (MP3 disc).. Press the “ ” button.. Press the disc select button.. Select the radio mode.. Press the “RSE AUX” button.. Turn off the power of the audioequipment.. Turn the ignition switch to the“LOCK” position.

! Display selection (MP3 disc)

If you press the “AUDIO” button (3) duringplayback, the indication will change to thenext one in the following sequence.

! Page (track/folder title) scroll (MP3disc)

If, having pressed the “AUDIO” button (3)to select track title or folder title display,you press the “AUDIO” button again forless than 0.5 second, the title will bescrolled so you can see all of it. You willsee eight characters at a time.

NOTEThe display is designed to show titlesfor up to three pages (64 characters intotal).

! Folder selection (MP3 disc)

Press the “ ” side of the “SEEK FLDR”button (4) briefly to select the next folder.Pressing the “ ” side of the same buttonthe first time makes the player go back tothe beginning of the currently selectedtrack; pressing it a second time makes itgo back to the previously selected track.

NOTEOnly MP3 folders are recognized whenan attempt to select the next or pre-vious folder is made. If no appropriatefolder exists on the disc, pressing the“ ” or “ ” side of the “SEEK FLDR”button has no effect.

Audio 5-25

– CONTINUED –

5


Black plate (216,1)


5-26 Audio

! How to unload CDs from the player

! Ejecting a CD from the player

Of the discs loaded, you can select andremove only one disc.1. Use the disc select button (9) to selectthe disc to be ejected.2. Briefly press the “ ” button (8). Theselected disc will be ejected. The discnumber indicator will flash at this time.When you remove the ejected disc, thedisc number indicator will turn off.

To remove more discs in succession,repeat Steps 1 and 2.

! Ejecting all discs from the player (alldisc ejection mode)

1. If you press and hold the “ ” button(8), the player will produce a beep soundand will enter the all disc ejection mode.2. Remove the disc that has beenejected. The other discs loaded will thenbe ejected one after another. If you do notremove the disc that has been ejected, the“All disc ejection mode” will be canceled.

NOTE. Avoid driving the vehicle with a CDsticking out, because vibration mightmake it fall out.. If you press the “ ” button while

the player is in all disc ejection mode,the mode will be cancelled followingejection of the disc that is currentlybeing ejected.. If you press the “CD” button whilethe player is in all disc ejection mode,the player will draw in the discs thathave been ejected and play them.

Audio control buttons

These buttons are located on the spokesof the steering wheel. They allow thedriver to control audio functions withouttaking his/her hands off the steeringwheel.

& MODE button

This button is used to select the desiredaudio mode. Each time it is pressed, themode changes to the next one in thefollowing sequence.

*1: The frequency last received in the selected


Black plate (217,1)


waveband will be displayed.

*2: Only when a CD is in the player.

*3: Only vehicle equipped with RSE (Rear SeatEntertainment)

! “ ” and “ ” buttons

! With radio mode selected

Press the “ ” button to select the nextchannel and press the “ ” button to selectthe previous channel.That station’s frequency will be shown onthe audio display.

! With CD mode selected

Press the “ ” button to skip forward in thetrack order. Pressing the “ ” button thefirst time makes the player go back to thebeginning of the current track; pressing it

the second time makes it go back to theprevious track.The track number will be shown on theaudio display.

! Volume control buttons

Press the “+” button to increase thevolume. Press the “−” button to reducethe volume.A number indicating the volume will beshown on the audio display.

! MUTE button

Press this button if you wish to immedi-ately cut the volume to zero.The audio display will show “MUTE”.If you press the button again, the originalsound volume will return and “MUTE”turns off.

NOTEIf your vehicle is equipped with agenuine SUBARU navigation system,the display will show “ ”.

Audio 5-27

5


Black plate (218,1)


5-28 Audio

Auxiliary input jack

You can connect an external audio deviceto the vehicle’s audio system and playback audio via the vehicle’s speakers.An auxiliary (AUX) input jack is equippedin the lower compartment of the centerconsole. A stereo mini pin plug (3.5ø) canbe inserted in this jack. The connectioncable is available at electrical appliance orsimilar stores.

To use the AUX input jack:1. Connect a portable audio player to theAUX input jack.2. Press the “RSE AUX” button on theaudio control panel to turn on the auxiliaryaudio input.3. Play back the portable audio player.

Refer to the Owner’s Manual for theportable audio player.

NOTE. The output sound of the portableaudio player is not loud, and the soundvia the vehicle’s speakers that areconnected to the vehicle audio setmay be very low. If you turn up thevolume of the audio set, the volumebecomes louder. However, when youchange from one portable audio playerto another one, the volume levels viathe vehicle’s speakers may be signifi-cantly louder compared to the priordevice. To avoid a large volume differ-ence, turn down the volume when youchange between portable audioplayers.. In some cases, when the soundvolume of the portable audio player islow, the sound becomes bad when youturn up the volume of the vehicle audiosystem. In this case, adjust the soundvolume of the portable audio player.. In some cases, noise occurs be-cause of a bad connection between theportable player and the vehicle audiosystem. Try cleaning the stereo jackand audio plug.. If noise is not reduced, check fordisconnection of the cord or malfunc-

tions of the portable player.


Black plate (219,1)


Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) system operation (ifequipped)

If your vehicle is equipped with the RearSeat Entertainment (RSE) system, youcan listen to the audio via the vehiclespeakers. Push the “RSE AUX” button toplay a DVD using the Rear Seat Entertain-ment system.For detailed operating procedures, refer tothe Owner’s Manual supplement for theRear Seat Entertainment (RSE) system.

NOTE. To watch a DVD in the front seatsusing the monitor of the navigationsystem, park the vehicle in a safelocation and apply the parking brake.Images of the DVD will not be displayedon the front monitor unless the parkingbrake is applied.. The harman/kardon® audio systemis a stereo system with 2 channels. If aharman/kardon® audio system isequipped, the Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) system may not generate asatisfying realistic sound when playing5.1 channel audio sources.

Precautions to observe whenhandling a compact disc

Use only compact discs (CDs, CD-Rs andCD-RWs) that have the mark shown in thefollowing illustration. Also, some compactdiscs cannot be played.

Audio 5-29

– CONTINUED –

5


Black plate (220,1)


5-30 Audio

. You cannot use a DualDisc in the CDplayer. If you insert a DualDisc into theplayer, the disc may not come out again,possibly causing the player to malfunction.. In cold and/or rainy weather, dew canform inside the CD player, preventingnormal operation. If this happens, ejectthe CD and wait for the player to dry out.. Skipping may occur when the CDplayer is subjected to severe vibration(for example, when the vehicle is drivenon a rough surface).. To remove a disc from the case, pressthe center of the case and hold bothedges of the disc. If the disc surface istouched directly, contamination couldcause poor tone quality. Do not touch thedisc surface.. Use a clean disc whenever possible. If

there are deposits, wipe the disc surfacefrom the center outward with a dry, softcloth. Be sure not to use a hard cloth,thinner, benzine, alcohol, etc.. Do not use any disc that is scratched,deformed, or cracked. Also, do not useany disc that has a non-standard shape(for example, a heart shape). Malfunctionsor problems might result.. A disc is vulnerable to heat. Neverkeep it either in places exposed to directsunlight, near heaters or in vehiclesparked in the sun or on hot days.


Black plate (11,1)


Interior light ......................................................... 6-2Dome light .......................................................... 6-2Cargo area light .................................................. 6-3Rear gate light .................................................... 6-3Map light............................................................. 6-3Automatic ambient light for center console area(if equipped)...................................................... 6-4

Sun visors ........................................................... 6-4Sun visor extension plate .................................... 6-5Vanity mirror with light ........................................ 6-5

Storage compartment ......................................... 6-6Glove box ........................................................... 6-6Center console box ............................................. 6-6Rear console....................................................... 6-7Overhead console ............................................... 6-8

Cup holder ........................................................... 6-8Front passenger’s cup holder .............................. 6-8Second-row seat cup holders .............................. 6-9Third-row seat cup holders.................................. 6-9

Bottle holders ...................................................... 6-9Accessory power outlets................................... 6-10Coat hook ........................................................... 6-12Shopping bag hook............................................ 6-13

Floor mat ............................................................ 6-13Cargo area cover (if equipped) ......................... 6-14

Using the cover ................................................. 6-14To remove the cover .......................................... 6-15To install the cover housing ............................... 6-15

Convenient tie-down hooks .............................. 6-16Under-floor storage compartment .................... 6-16HomeLink® Wireless Control System (ifequipped) ........................................................ 6-17Garage door opener programming in theU.S.A............................................................... 6-18

Programming rolling-code-protected garage dooropeners in the U.S.A. ....................................... 6-19

Programming for entrance gates and garage dooropeners in Canada........................................... 6-20

Programming other devices ............................... 6-21Operating the HomeLink® Wireless ControlSystem............................................................ 6-21

Erasing HomeLink® button memory .................... 6-21In case a problem occurs................................... 6-21

Rear view camera (if equipped) ........................ 6-21How to use the rear view camera ....................... 6-22Viewing range on the screen.............................. 6-23Help line............................................................ 6-24

Interior equipment

6


Black plate (224,1)


6-2 Interior equipment

Interior light

When leaving your vehicle, make sure thelights are turned off to avoid batterydischarge.

& Dome light

Models with Rear Seat Entertainment

Models without Rear Seat Entertainment1) ON2) DOOR3) OFF

The dome light switch has the followingthree positions.

ON: The light remains on continuously.OFF: The light remains off.DOOR: The dome light illuminates auto-matically in the following cases.. Any of the doors or the rear gate isopened.. The doors or the rear gate are un-locked using the remote keyless entrytransmitter.. The ignition switch is turned from the“Acc” position to the “LOCK” position.

The automatically illuminated dome lightremains on for several seconds and thengradually turns off after all doors and therear gate are closed. While the light isilluminated, if any of the following opera-tions are performed, the dome light turnsoff immediately.. The ignition switch is turned from the“LOCK” position to “Acc” or “ON” position.. All doors and the rear gate are lockedusing the remote keyless entry transmitter.

The setting of the period for which the lightremains on (OFF delay timer) can bechanged by a SUBARU dealer. Contactthe nearest SUBARU dealer for details.


Black plate (225,1)


& Cargo area light

1) DOOR2) OFF3) ON

The cargo area light switch has thefollowing three positions.DOOR: The light illuminates when the reargate is opened. The light remains illumi-nated for several seconds and turns offafter the rear gate is closed.OFF: The light remains off.ON: The light remains on continuously.

& Rear gate light

The rear gate light is located inside thevehicle on the rear gate. Push the rightside of the switch to turn it on, and pushthe left side of the switch to turn it off.

& Map light

To turn on the map light, push the switch.To turn it off, push the switch again.

When leaving the vehicle, make sure thelights are turned off to avoid batterydischarge.

Although the map light switches are in theOFF position, the map lights illuminateautomatically in the following cases.. Any of the doors or the rear gate isopened.

– The operational/non-operationalsetting of this function can be changedby a SUBARU dealer. Contact yourSUBARU dealer to change the setting.– The factory setting (default setting)for this function is set as “operational”

Interior equipment 6-3

– CONTINUED –

6


Black plate (226,1)



(automatic illumination - ON).. The doors are unlocked using theremote keyless entry transmitter.. The ignition switch is turned from the“Acc” position to the “LOCK” position.

The automatically illuminated map lightsremain illuminated for several secondsand then gradually turn off after all doorsare closed.

While the lights are illuminated, if any ofthe following operations are performed,the map lights turn off immediately.. The ignition switch is turned from the“LOCK” position to the “Acc” or “ON”position.. All doors and the rear gate are lockedusing the remote keyless entry transmitter.

The setting of the period for which the lightremains illuminated (OFF delay timer) canbe changed by a SUBARU dealer. Con-tact your SUBARU dealer for details.

NOTEIf any of the doors or the rear gate isnot completely closed, the map lightswill remain illuminated as a result.However, the map lights are automati-cally turned off by the battery drainageprevention function to prevent thebattery from discharging. For details,

refer to “Battery drainage preventionfunction” F2-6.

& Automatic ambient light forcenter console area (ifequipped)

The automatic ambient light illuminateswhen the ignition switch is in the “ON”position and the light control switch is inthe “ ” position or “ ” position. Thelight dimly illuminates the area around thecenter console. The light turns off whenthe light control switch is in the “OFF”position. Also, the brightness of the light isadjusted by the illumination brightnesscontrol dial.

Sun visors

To block out glare, swing down the visors.To use the sun visor at a side window,swing it down and move it sideways.


Black plate (227,1)


& Sun visor extension plate

With the sun visor positioned over the sidewindow, you can use the sun visorextension plate to prevent glare throughthe gap between the sun visor and centerpillar. To use the extension plate, pull ittoward the rear of the vehicle. When youhave finished using it, stow it by pushing ittoward the front of the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not pull out the extension platewith the sun visor positioned overthe windshield. The extension platewould obstruct your view of therearview mirror.

& Vanity mirror with light

CAUTION

Keep the vanity mirror cover closedwhile the car is being driven to avoidbeing temporarily blinded by theglare of bright light.

To use the vanity mirror, swing down thesun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.The light beside the vanity mirror illumi-nates when the mirror cover is opened.

NOTEUse of the vanity mirror light for a longperiod of time while the engine is notrunning can cause battery discharge.


6


Black plate (228,1)



Storage compartment

CAUTION

. Always keep the storage com-partment closed while driving toreduce the risk of injury in theevent of sudden stops or anaccident.

. Do not store spray cans, contain-ers with flammable or corrosiveliquids or any other dangerousitems in the storage compart-ment.

& Glove box

1) Lock2) Unlock

To open the glove box, pull the handle. Toclose it, push the lid firmly upward.To lock the glove box, insert the key andturn it clockwise. To unlock the glove box,insert the key and turn it counterclockwise.

& Center console box

The center console box has a two-layerstructure consisting of an upper compart-ment and a lower compartment.


Black plate (229,1)


! Upper compartment

1) Upper compartment lock release

Pull up the upper compartment lockrelease to open the upper compartment.

! Lower compartment

1) Lower compartment lock release

Pull up the lower compartment lockrelease to open the lower compartment.

& Rear console

The rear console is located in the back ofthe center console box. Pull it out to use it.


– CONTINUED –

6


Black plate (230,1)



& Overhead console

To open the console, push on the lid lightlyand it will automatically open.

CAUTION

When your vehicle is parked in thesun or on a warm day, the inside ofthe overhead console heats up.Avoid storing plastic or other heat-vulnerable or flammable articlessuch as a lighter in the overheadconsole.

Cup holder

CAUTION

Take care to avoid spills. Beverages,if hot, might burn you and/or yourpassengers. Spilled beverages mayalso damage upholstery or carpets.

& Front passenger’s cup holder

CAUTION

Do not pick up a cup from the cupholder or put a cup in the holderwhile you are driving, as this maydistract you and lead to an accident.

The dual cup holder is built into the centerconsole near the select lever.

To access the cup holder, push therelease button.


Black plate (231,1)


& Second-row seat cup holders

A dual cup holder is built in the armrest.

CAUTION

When a cup containing a beverageis in the cup holder, do not slide orrecline any seat. Otherwise, thebeverage could spill while drivingand, if the beverage is hot, it couldburn you and/or your passengers.

& Third-row seat cup holders

A cup holder is located at each side of thethird-row seat.

CAUTION

When placing a beverage in a cupholder, make sure it is capped.Otherwise, the beverage could spillwhile driving and, if the beverage ishot, it could burn you and/or yourpassengers.

Bottle holders

CAUTION

. Do not pick up a bottle from thebottle holder or put a bottle in theholder while you are driving, asthis may distract you and lead toan accident.

. When placing a beverage in adoor pocket, make sure it iscapped. Otherwise, the beveragecould spill when opening/closingthe door or while driving and, ifthe beverage is hot, it could burnyou and/or your passengers.

The door pocket equipped on each door


– CONTINUED –

6


Black plate (232,1)



trim can be used to hold beverage bottlesand other items.

Accessory power outlets

Power outlets in the center console

Power outlets in the rear cabin

Accessory power outlets are provided inthe center console (lower compartment)and in the rear cabin.

Electrical power (12V DC) from the batteryis available at any of the outlets when theignition switch is in either the “Acc” or “ON”position.You can use an in-vehicle electricalappliance by connecting it to an outlet.The maximum power rating of an appli-ance that can be connected is shown inthe following list. Do not use an appliancewhich exceeds the indicated wattage foreach outlet.. The two outlets in the center console:120W or less (When using appliancesconnected to two outlets simultaneously,the total power consumed by them mustnot exceed 120W.). The two outlets in the rear cabin: 120Wor less (When using appliances con-nected to two outlets simultaneously, thetotal power consumed by them must notexceed 120W.)

CAUTION

. Do not attempt to use a cigarettelighter in the accessory poweroutlets.

. Do not place any foreign objects,


Black plate (233,1)


especially metal ones such ascoins or aluminum foil, into theaccessory power outlet. Thatcould cause a short circuit. Al-ways put the cap on the acces-sory power outlet when it is notin use.

. Use only electrical applianceswhich are designed for 12V DC.

The maximum power rating of anappliance that can be connectedis shown in the following list. Donot use an appliance which ex-ceeds the indicated wattage foreach outlet.

– The two outlets in the centerconsole: 120W or less (Whenusing appliances connectedto two outlets simultaneously,the total power consumed bythem must not exceed 120W.)

– The two outlets in the rearcabin: 120W or less (Whenusing appliances connectedto two outlets simultaneously,the total power consumed bythem must not exceed 120W.)

Overloading the accessorypower outlet can cause a shortcircuit. Do not use dual adaptersor more than one electrical appli-

ance.

. If the plug on your electric appli-ance is either too loose or tootight for the accessory poweroutlet, this can result in a poorcontact or cause the plug to getstuck. Only use plugs that fitproperly.

. Use of an electric appliance in theaccessory power outlet for a longperiod of time while the engine isnot running can cause batterydischarge.

. Before driving your vehicle, makesure that the plug and the cordon your electrical appliance willnot interfere with your shiftinggears and operating the accel-erator and brake pedals. If theydo, do not use the electricalappliance while driving.

NOTEIt is possible, when using the outlet inthe center console (lower compart-ment) with the lid closed, to pass theelectrical appliance’s cord through agap between the center console (lower


– CONTINUED –

6


Black plate (234,1)



compartment) and the lid. It is alsopossible to pass the cord through agroove in the lid and up to the centerconsole (upper compartment).

Coat hook

A coat hook is attached to each hand gripfor the outboard second-row passenger’sseats.

WARNING

Do not hang coat hangers or otherhard or pointed objects on the coathooks. If such items were hangingon the coat hooks during deploy-ment of the SRS curtain airbags,they could cause serious injuries bycoming off the coat hooks and beingthrown through the cabin or bypreventing correct airbag deploy-ment. Before hanging clothing onthe coat hooks, make sure there areno pointed objects in the pockets.

Hang clothing directly on the coathooks without using hangers.

CAUTION

Never hang anything on the coathook that might obstruct the driver’sview or that could cause injury insudden stops or in a collision. Anddo not hang items on the coat hookthat weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or more.


Black plate (235,1)


Shopping bag hook

CAUTION

Do not hang items on the shoppingbag hook that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) ormore.

A shopping bag hook is attached to eachside of the cargo area.

Floor mat

A retaining pin is located on the driver’sside of the vehicle next to the fuel fillerdoor release. Fit the grommet in the carpetonto the pin to prevent the carpet frommoving.

CAUTION

If the floor mat slips forward andinterferes with the movement of thepedals during driving, it could causean accident. Observe the followingprecautions to prevent the floor matfrom slipping forward.

. Be sure to use a genuineSUBARU floor mat designed withgrommets in the correct loca-tions.

. Make sure that the driver’s floormat is placed back in its properlocation and is correctly securedon its retaining pins.


– CONTINUED –

6


Black plate (236,1)



. Do not use more than one floormat.

Cargo area cover (ifequipped)

The cargo area cover is provided forcovering the cargo area and to protect itscontents from direct sunlight. This cover isdetachable to make room for additionalcargo.

& Using the cover

1) Holder

1. Insert the seatbelt webbing into theholder of the third-row seat.2. Fold down the seatback of the third-row seat. Refer to “Folding down theseatback” F1-15.

3. To extend the cover, pull the end of thecover out of the housing, then insert itshooks into the catches as shown. Torewind it, unhook it from the catches andit will rewind automatically. You shouldhold on to the cover and guide it back intothe cover housing while it is rewinding.

WARNING

Do not place anything on the ex-tended cover. Putting excessiveweight on the extended cover canbreak it and an object on the covercould tumble forward in the event ofa sudden stop or collision. Thiscould cause serious injury.


Black plate (237,1)


CAUTION

. Be careful not to pinch your handbetween the headrest and thecargo area cover when you re-cline the second-row seat.

. Be careful not to scratch the reargate stays while extending andrewinding the cover.

Scratches on the stays couldcause leakage of gas from thestays, which may result in theirinability to hold the rear gateopen.

NOTEWhen the head restraint is adjusted atthe rearmost position of the seat withthe seatback leaned back, the headrestraint comes in contact with thecargo area cover. In this case, raisethe seatback before adjusting the headrestraint.If the head restraint is correctly fixed inany of the lock positions, the headrestraint does not contact the cargoarea cover even when the seatback isreclined.

& To remove the cover1. Rewind the cover.

2. Pull either sleeve on the end of thecover housing to shorten the cover’slength.3. Take it off the retainer.

& To install the cover housing

1. Remove the cover at the cover hous-ing retaining part using a flat-head screw-driver.2. Pull either sleeve on the end of thecover housing to shorten the cover’slength.


– CONTINUED –

6


Black plate (238,1)



3. Insert the projections located on theboth ends of the sleeve into the recessesof the retainers.

Convenient tie-down hooks

CAUTION

The convenient tie-down hooks aredesigned only for securing lightcargo. Never try to secure cargothat exceeds the capacity of thehooks. The maximum load capacityis 44 lbs (20 kg) per hook.

The cargo area is equipped with four tie-down hooks so that cargo can be securedwith a luggage net or ropes.

When using the tie-down hooks, turn themdown out of the storing recesses. Whennot in use, put the hooks up into thestoring recesses.

Under-floor storage compart-ment

The subfloor storage compartment islocated under the floor of the cargo areaand can be used to store small items. Toopen the lid, pull the handle up.

CAUTION

. Always keep the lid of the sub-floor storage compartmentclosed while driving to reducethe risk of injury in the event ofsudden stop or an accident.

. Do not store spray cans, contain-ers with flammable or corrosiveliquids or any other dangerousitems in the subfloor storagecompartment.


Black plate (239,1)


Hang the hook provided on the undersideof the lid on the rear edge of the roof tokeep the lid open.

HomeLink® Wireless ControlSystem (if equipped)

1) HomeLink® buttons2) Indicator light3) Hand-held transmitter*

* Not part of your vehicle’s remotekeyless entry system but of aHomeLink®-compatible device.

The HomeLink® Wireless Control System,located on the driver’s sun visor, is ahandy way to operate, from inside of yourvehicle, up to three remote-controlledindoor and outdoor devices, such asgarage door openers, entrance gates,door locks, home lighting, and securitysystems. There are three HomeLink®

buttons on the sun visor, each of whichyou can program for operation of one

desired device. For details on the devicetypes which can be operated by thissystem, consult the HomeLink website atwww.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

Note the following about this system:If your vehicle is equipped with theHomeLink® Wireless Control System, itcomplies with Part 15 of the FederalCommunication Commission Rules in theU.S. and the RSS-210 of Industry Canadain Canada. Its operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:(1) this device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, includ-ing interference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes and modifications to this systemby anyone other than an authorizedservice facility could void authorization touse this equipment.

HomeLink and the HomeLink house areregistered trademarks of Johnson Con-trols, Inc.

WARNING

. When p r o g r amm i n g t h eHomeLink® Wireless Control Sys-tem, you may be operating a


– CONTINUED –

6


Black plate (240,1)



garage door opener or otherdevice. Make sure that peopleand objects are out of the wayof the garage door opener orother device to prevent potentialharm or damage.

. Do not use the HomeLink® Wire-less Control System with anygarage door opener that lacksthe safety stop and reverse fea-ture as required by applicablesafety standards. A garage dooropener which cannot detect anobject, signaling the door to stopand reverse, does not meet thesesafety standards. Using a garagedoor opener without these fea-tures increases risk of seriousinjury or death. For more infor-mation, consult the HomeLinkwebsite at www.homelink.comor call 1-800-355-3515.

CAUTION

When programming the HomeLink®

Wireless Control System to operatea garage door opener or an entrancegate, unplug the device’s motorfrom the outlet during programmingto prevent motor burnout.

NOTE. After programming your HomeLink®

Wireless Control System for the de-sired devices, retain the hand-heldtransmitters for further programmingor device testing in the event of aproblem.. It is recommended that you insert anew battery in the hand-held transmit-ter of a device to ensure correctprogramming.

& Garage door opener pro-gramming in the U.S.A.

NOTEWhen programming the HomeLink®

Wireless Control System for a garagedoor opener, it is suggested that youpark the vehicle outside the garage.

1. Unplug the motor of the garage dooropener from the outlet.

NOTEWhen reprogramming any of theHomeLink® buttons that are alreadyprogrammed for other devices, performthe procedure in step 2.

2. Press and hold the two outsideHomeLink® buttons until the indicator lightbegins to flash (after 10 seconds). Re-lease both buttons.3. Hold the end of the garage dooropener’s hand-held transmitter between1 and 3 inches (25 and 76 mm) away fromthe HomeLink® buttons on the driver’s sunvisor, keeping the indicator light in view.


Black plate (241,1)


4. Using both hands, simultaneouslypush the hand-held transmitter buttonand the desired HomeLink® button. DONOT release the buttons until step 5 hasbeen completed.5. Hold down both buttons until theHomeLink® indicator light flashes, firstslowly then rapidly. When the indicatorlight flashes rapidly, both buttons may bereleased. (The rapidly flashing light indi-cates successful programming of the newfrequency signal.)6. Press and hold the programmed but-ton and check the HomeLink® indicatorlight. If the indicator light stays on con-tinuously, your garage door should acti-vate and the programming is completed.If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2seconds and then stays on continuously,

your garage door opener may be pro-tected by a rolling code feature. In thiscase you need to perform additional steps.Refer to “Programming rolling-code-pro-tected garage door openers in the U.S.A.”F6-19.

NOTERolling-code-protected garage dooropeners are manufactured after 1996.See the instruction manual of yourgarage opener for confirmation.

7. Reconnect the motor of your garagedoor opener to the outlet.8. Test your garage door opener bypressing the programmed HomeLink® but-ton.

& Programming rolling-code-protected garage door open-ers in the U.S.A.

If your garage door opener has a rollingcode feature, program the HomeLink®

Wireless Control System for it by followingsteps 1 through 5 in “Garage door openerprogramming in the U.S.A.” F6-18 above.Then continue with the following steps.

NOTEThe assistance of a second personmay make the programming quicker

and easier.

1. Locate the training button on thegarage door opener motor head unit.The exact location and color of the buttonmay vary by brand of garage door opener.If it is difficult to locate the training button,refer to your garage door opener’s instruc-tion manual.


– CONTINUED –

6


Black plate (242,1)



1) Training button

2. Press the training button on thegarage door opener motor head unit(which activates the “training light” on theunit). Proceed to step 3 within 30 seconds.3. Inside the vehicle, firmly press andrelease the HomeLink® button that wasprogrammed in the section above. Pressand release the button a second time tocomplete the programming procedure.

NOTESome garage door openers may re-quire you to do the above procedure athird time to complete the program-ming.

4. The garage door opener should nowrecognize the HomeLink® Wireless Control

System and your garage door openershould activate when the HomeLink®

button is pressed.

& Programming for entrancegates and garage door open-ers in Canada

1. Unplug the motor of the entrance gateor garage door opener from the outlet.

2. Press and hold the two outside buttonsuntil the HomeLink® indicator light beginsto flash (after 10 seconds). Release bothbuttons.

NOTEWhen reprogramming any of theHomeLink® buttons that are alreadyprogrammed for other devices, perform

the procedure in step 2.

3. Hold the end of the entrance gate’s/garage door opener’s hand-held transmit-ter between 1 and 3 inches (25 and 76mm) away from the HomeLink® buttons onthe driver’s sun visor, keeping the indica-tor light in view.

4. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®

button.5. Press and release (“cycle”) the hand-held transmitter button every 2 secondsuntil step 6 is complete.6. When the indicator light flashes slowlyand then rapidly after several seconds,release both buttons.7. Plug the motor of the entrance gate/garage door opener to the outlet.8. Test your entrance gate/garage door


Black plate (243,1)


opener by pressing the programmedHomeLink® button.

& Programming other devicesTo program other devices such as doorlocks, home lighting and security systems,contact HomeLink at www.homelink.comor call 1-800-355-3515.

& Operating the HomeLink®

Wireless Control SystemOnce programmed, the HomeLink® Wire-less Control System can be used toremote-control the devices to which itsbuttons are programmed. To activate adevice, simply press the appropriate but-ton. The indicator light illuminates, indicat-ing that the signal is being transmitted.

& Erasing HomeLink® buttonmemory

NOTE. Performing this procedure erasesthe memory of all the preprogrammedbuttons simultaneously. The memoryof individual buttons cannot be erased.. It is recommended that upon thesale of the vehicle, the memory of allprogrammed HomeLink® buttons beerased for security purposes.

1. Press and hold the two outside buttonsuntil the indicator light begins to flash(after 10 seconds).

2. Release both buttons.

& In case a problem occursIf you cannot activate a device using thecorresponding HomeLink® button afterprogramming, contact HomeLink atwww.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515 for assistance.

Rear view camera (ifequipped)

A rear view camera is attached to the reargate. When the ignition switch is “ON” andthe select lever is set to “R”, the rear viewcamera automatically displays the rearview image behind the vehicle on thenavigation monitor or on the inside mirror.

WARNING

. Since the rear view camera usesa wide-angle lens, the image onthe monitor is different from theactual view in terms of distance.

. Since the range of the image onthe monitor is limited, you shouldalways check the rear view and


– CONTINUED –

6


Black plate (244,1)



the surrounding area with youreyes and mirrors, and movebackward at a slow speed. Mov-ing backward only by checkingthe rear view image from thecamera could cause an accident.

. Do not disassemble or modify thecamera, switch or wiring. Ifsmoke comes out or you smella strange odor, stop using therear view camera immediately.Contact your SUBARU dealerfor an inspection. Continued usemay result in accident, fire orelectric shock.

CAUTION

. If your vehicle is washed with ahigh-pressure washer, do notallow water to contact the cameradirectly. Entry of water in thecamera lens may result in con-densation, malfunction, fire orelectric shock.

. Since the camera is a precisiondevice, do not subject it to strongimpacts. Otherwise, malfunction,fire or electric shock may occur.

. If mud or snow sticks to or isfrozen on the camera, you must

be very careful removing it.Otherwise, damage done to thecamera may cause a fire orelectric shock. Pour water orlukewarm water over the camerato remove mud and ice, and wipeit with a soft, dry cloth.

. Do not put a flame close to thecamera or wiring. Otherwise, da-mage or fire may occur.

. When replacing the fuse, be sureto use a fuse with the specifiedrating. Use of a fuse with adifferent rating may result in amalfunction.

. If the rear view camera is used fora long time while the engine isnot operated, the battery maybecome completely discharged.

NOTE. Do not wipe the camera with alcohol,benzine or paint thinner. Otherwise,discoloration may occur. To removecontamination, wipe the camera with acloth moistened with a diluted neutraldetergent and then wipe it with a soft,dry cloth.. When waxing the vehicle, be carefulnot to apply the wax to the camera. If itcomes in contact with the camera,

moisten a clean cloth with a dilutedneutral detergent to remove the wax.. The camera lens has hard coating tohelp prevent scratches. However, whenwashing the vehicle or cleaning thecamera lens, be careful not to scratchthe camera lens. Do not use a washingbrush directly on the camera lens. Themonitor screen may be adversely af-fected.. Strong light shined on the cameralens may develop white light stripesaround the light source. This is not amalfunction.. Under the fluorescent light, the dis-play may flicker. However, this is not amalfunction.. The image of the rear view cameramay be slightly different from theactual color of the objects.

& How to use the rear viewcamera

When the select lever is set to “R”, the rearview camera automatically displays therear view image from the vehicle. Whenthe lever is set to other positions, theimage before setting to “R” is displayed.1. Set the ignition switch to “ON”.2. Set the select lever to “R”.


Black plate (245,1)


NOTE. The image of the rear view camerahas priority over other screen displays.. The image of the rear view camera ishorizontally reversed as is the casewith the vehicle rearview mirror or theside view mirror.. It may be difficult to see the image ofthe rearview camera in the followingcases. This is not a malfunction of thecamera.

– The vehicle is in a dark place (atnight, in a tunnel, etc.).– The vehicle is in an extremely hotor cold place.– An object (such as raindrops,snow, dirt, etc.) that disturbs theview of the rear view camera sticksto the lens of the camera.– Strong light shined directly onthe camera lens (occasionally, thereare vertical lines on the screen).

& Viewing range on the screen

Range of view

Range of view

Image from camera

The area from the rear end of the bumpercan be viewed. Areas at both ends of thebumper and areas just under the bumpercannot be viewed.Also, the image from the rear view cameralooks shorter than the actual distance.

CAUTION

The range that can be viewed withthe rear view camera is limited.Always be sure to check with youreyes when moving backward andproceed slowly.


– CONTINUED –

6


Black plate (246,1)



Range of view

Image from camera

The area above the camera cannot beviewed. If there is an object that has awide projection on its upper part such as asign pole behind the vehicle, the projec-

tion cannot be seen on the screen.

CAUTION

The range that can be viewed withthe rear view camera is limited.Always be sure to check with youreyes when moving backward andproceed slowly.

& Help lineThe help line (distance marker and vehiclewidth line) is a guide to help you realizethe actual distance from the screen.

Help lines displayed on the navigationmonitor

Help lines displayed on the inside mirror1) Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line)2) Approx. 10 feet (3 m) from the bumper

(green horizontal line)3) Approx. 6.5 feet (2 m) from the bumper

(green horizontal line)4) Approx. 3 feet (1 m) from the bumper

(yellow horizontal line)5) Approx. 1.5 feet (0.5 m) from the bumper

(red horizontal line)

When the select lever is set to position“R”, the monitor screen displays the helplines together with the rear view image.

CAUTION

. When moving backward, alwayscheck the back with your eyeswithout relying on the help lines.

. The actual position may be dif-


Black plate (247,1)


ferent from the indication of thehelp lines.

. Differences may occur due tonumber of passengers or loadedcargo.

. When the vehicle is on a slope orwhen the vehicle is inclinedagainst the road, the indicationis different from the actual posi-tion.

! Difference between screen and ac-tual road

The distance markers show the distancefor a level road when the vehicle is notloaded. It may be different from the actualdistance depending on the loading condi-tions or road conditions.

!When there is an upward slope at theback

1) 3 feet (1 m)

The distance on the screen looks fartherthan the actual distance.

! When there is a downward slope atthe back

1) 3 feet (1 m)

The distance on the screen looks nearerthan the actual distance.

NOTEWhen cargo is loaded, the rear viewdistance on the screen looks fartherthan the actual distance as in anupward slope.


– CONTINUED –

6


Black plate (248,1)



! Feature of distance marker

1) 3 feet (1 m) line2) 6.5 feet (2 m) line3) 10 feet (3 m) line

The distance marker shows the distanceon the road. If there is a car or other objectclose behind, distance cannot be correctlydisplayed.


Black plate (13,1)


Fuel ...................................................................... 7-2Fuel requirements ............................................... 7-2Fuel filler lid and cap........................................... 7-3

State emission testing (U.S. only)...................... 7-5Preparing to drive ............................................... 7-7Starting the engine.............................................. 7-7Stopping the engine............................................ 7-8Remote engine start system (dealer option) ..... 7-8

Starting your vehicle ........................................... 7-9Remote start safety features ................................ 7-9Entering the vehicle while it is running via remotestart.................................................................. 7-9

Entering the vehicle following remote engine startshutdown.......................................................... 7-9

Pre-heating or pre-cooling the interior of thevehicle ............................................................. 7-10

Service mode ..................................................... 7-10Remote engine start transmitter programmingand programmable feature option ..................... 7-10

System maintenance .......................................... 7-11Automatic transmission..................................... 7-12

Select lever ........................................................ 7-13Shift lock function .............................................. 7-14Selection of manual mode .................................. 7-16Driving tips ........................................................ 7-17SPORT mode ..................................................... 7-18

Power steering................................................... 7-18Braking ............................................................... 7-19

Braking tips....................................................... 7-19Brake system .................................................... 7-19Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ............. 7-20

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).......................... 7-20ABS system self-check ...................................... 7-21ABS warning light.............................................. 7-21

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)system............................................................. 7-22Steps to take if EBD system malfunctions .......... 7-22

Vehicle Dynamics Control system.................... 7-23Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor.......... 7-25Traction Control system OFF switch................... 7-25

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ........ 7-27Parking your vehicle ......................................... 7-28

Parking brake .................................................... 7-28Parking tips ....................................................... 7-29

Cruise control .................................................... 7-29To set cruise control .......................................... 7-30To temporarily cancel the cruise control ............. 7-30To turn off the cruise control.............................. 7-31To change the cruising speed ............................ 7-31Cruise control indicator light.............................. 7-32Cruise control set indicator light ........................ 7-32

Starting and operating

7


Black plate (252,1)


7-2 Starting and operating

Fuel

CAUTION

Use of a fuel which is low in qualityor use of an inappropriate fueladditive may cause engine damage.

& Fuel requirementsThe engine is designed to operate usingunleaded gasoline with an octane ratingof 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher.

! Fuel octane rating

This octane rating is the average of theResearch Octane and Motor Octanenumbers and is commonly referred to asthe Anti Knock Index (AKI).Using a gasoline with a lower octanerating can cause persistent and heavyknocking, which can damage the engine.Do not be concerned if your vehiclesometimes knocks lightly when you driveup a hill or when you accelerate. Contactyour SUBARU dealer if you use a fuel withthe specified octane rating and yourvehicle knocks heavily or persistently.

! Unleaded gasoline

The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designedto accept only an unleaded gasoline filler

nozzle. Under no circumstances shouldleaded gasoline be used because it willdamage the emission control system andmay impair driveability and fuel economy.

! California fuel

If your vehicle was certified to CaliforniaEmission Standards as indicated on theunderhood tune-up label, it is designed tooptimize engine and emission controlsystem performance with gasoline thatmeets the clean burning low-sulfur Cali-fornia gasoline specifications. If you live inany other state than California, yourvehicle will operate on gasoline meetingFederal specifications. Gasoline sold out-side California is permitted to have highersulfur levels, which may affect the perfor-mance of your vehicle’s catalytic converterand may produce a sulfur exhaust odor orsmell. SUBARU recommends that you trya different brand of unleaded gasolinehaving lower sulfur to determine if theproblem is fuel related before returningyour vehicle to an authorized dealer forservice. The CHECK ENGINE warninglight/Malfunction indicator light may alsoilluminate. If this occurs, return to yourauthorized SUBARU dealer for diagnosis.If it is determined that the condition iscaused by the type of fuel used, repairsmay not be covered by your warranty.

! MMT

Some gasoline contains an octane-en-hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). Ifyou use such fuels, your emission controlsystem performance may deteriorate andthe CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-function indicator light may illuminate. Ifthis happens, return to your authorizedSUBARU dealer for service. If it isdetermined that the condition is causedby the type of fuel used, repairs may notbe covered by your warranty.

! Gasoline for cleaner air

CAUTION

Do not let fuel spill on the exteriorsurfaces of the vehicle. Fuels con-taining alcohol may cause paintdamage, which is not covered underthe SUBARU Limited Warranty.

Your use of gasoline with detergentadditives will help prevent deposits fromforming in your engine and fuel system.This helps keep your engine in tune andyour emission control system workingproperly, and is a way of doing your partfor cleaner air. If you continuously use ahigh quality fuel with the proper detergentand other additives, you should never


Black plate (253,1)


need to add any fuel system cleaningagents to your fuel tank.

Many gasolines are now blended withmaterials called oxygenates. Use of thesefuels can also help keep the air cleaner.Oxygenated blend fuels, such as MTBE(Methyl Tertiary Butyl ether) or ethanol(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used inyour vehicle, but should contain no morethan 15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for theproper operation of your SUBARU.In addition, some gasoline suppliers arenow producing reformulated gasolines,which are designed to reduce vehicleemissions. SUBARU approves the use ofreformulated gasoline.

If you are not sure what the fuel contains,you should ask your service stationoperators if their gasolines contain deter-gents and oxygenates and if they havebeen reformulated to reduce vehicle emis-sions.

As additional guidance, only use fuelssuited for your vehicle as explained in thefollowing.. Fuel should be unleaded and have anoctane rating no lower than that specifiedin this manual.. Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) issometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline.

Methanol can be used in your vehicleONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuelmixture AND if it is accompanied bysufficient quantities of the proper cosol-vents and corrosion inhibitors required toprevent damage to the fuel system. Do notuse fuel containing methanol EXCEPTunder these conditions.. If undesirable driveability problems areexperienced and you suspect they may befuel related, try a different brand of gaso-line before seeking service at yourSUBARU dealer.. Fuel system damage or driveabilityproblems which result from the use ofimproper fuel are not covered under theSUBARU Limited Warranty.

& Fuel filler lid and cap

! Refueling

Only one person should be involved inrefueling. Do not allow others to approachthe area of the vehicle near the fuel fillerpipe while refueling is in progress.Be sure to observe any other precautionsthat are posted at the service station.

1. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the lidrelease lever up. The lever is on the floorat the left of the driver’s seat.

2. Open the fuel filler lid.

Starting and operating 7-3

– CONTINUED –

7


Black plate (254,1)



WARNING

Before opening the fuel filler cap,first touch the vehicle body or ametal portion of the fuel pump orsimilar object to discharge anystatic electricity that may be presenton your body. If your body is carry-ing an electrostatic charge, there isa possibility that an electric sparkcould ignite the fuel, which couldburn you. To avoid acquiring a newstatic electric charge, do not getback into the vehicle while refuelingis in progress.

1) Open2) Close

3. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning itslowly counterclockwise.

WARNING

. Gasoline vapor is highly flam-mable. Before refueling, alwaysfirst stop the engine and close allvehicle doors and windows.Make sure that there are nolighted cigarettes, open flamesor electrical sparks in the adja-cent area. Refueling must beperformed outside. Quickly wipeup any spilled fuel.

. When opening the cap, grasp itfirmly and turn it slowly to theleft. Do not remove the capquickly. Fuel may be under pres-sure and spray out of the fuelfiller neck, especially in hotweather. If you hear a hissingsound while you are removingthe cap, wait for the sound tostop and then slowly open thecap to prevent fuel from sprayingout and creating a fire hazard.

. When refueling, insert the fuelnozzle securely into the fuel fillerpipe. If the nozzle is lifted or notfully inserted, its automatic stop-ping mechanism may not func-

tion, causing fuel to overflow thetank and creating a fire hazard.

. Stop refueling when the auto-matic stop mechanism on thefuel nozzle activates. If you con-tinue to add fuel, temperaturechanges or other conditionsmay cause fuel to overflow fromthe tank and create a fire hazard.

4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel fillerpump automatically turns off. Do not addany more fuel.

CAUTION

Make sure that the cap is tighteneduntil it clicks to prevent fuel spillagein the event of an accident.

5. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwiseuntil you hear a clicking noise. Be certainnot to catch the tether under the cap whiletightening.6. Close the fuel filler lid completely.If you spill any fuel on the painted surface,rinse it off immediately. Otherwise, thepainted surface could be damaged.


Black plate (255,1)


NOTE

. You will see the “ ” sign in the fuelgauge. This indicates that the fuel fillerdoor (lid) is located on the right side ofthe vehicle.. If the fuel filler cap is not tighteneduntil it clicks or if the tether is caughtunder the cap, the CHECK ENGINEwarning light/malfunction indicatorlight may illuminate. Refer to “CHECKENGINE warning light/Malfunction in-dicator light” F3-12.

CAUTION

. Never add any cleaning agents tothe fuel tank. The addition of acleaning agent may cause da-

mage to the fuel system.

. After refueling, turn the cap to theright until it clicks to ensure thatit is fully tightened. If the cap isnot securely tightened, fuel mayleak out while the vehicle is beingdriven or fuel spillage couldoccur in the event of an accident,creating a fire hazard.

. Do not let fuel spill on the exteriorsurfaces of the vehicle. Becausefuel may damage the paint, besure to wipe off any spilled fuelquickly. Paint damage caused byspilled fuel is not covered underthe SUBARU Limited Warranty.

. Always use a genuine SUBARUfuel filler cap. If you use thewrong cap, it may not fit, andyour fuel tank and emission con-trol system may be damaged. Itcould also lead to fuel spillageand a fire.

. Immediately put fuel in the tankwhenever the low fuel warninglight illuminates. Engine misfiresas a result of an empty tankcould cause damage to the en-gine.

State emission testing (U.S.only)

WARNING

Testing of an All-Wheel Drive modelmust NEVER be performed on asingle two-wheel dynamometer. At-tempting to do so will result inuncontrolled vehicle movement andmay cause an accident or injuries topersons nearby.

CAUTION

. At state inspection time, remem-ber to tell your inspection orservice station in advance not toplace your SUBARU AWD vehicleon a two-wheel dynamometer.Otherwise, serious transmissiondamage will result.

. Resultant vehicle damage due toimproper testing is not coveredunder the SUBARU Limited War-ranty and is the responsibility ofthe state inspection program orits contractors or licensees.

California and a number of federal stateshave Inspection/Maintenance programs to


– CONTINUED –

7


Black plate (256,1)



inspect your vehicle’s emission controlsystem. If your vehicle does not pass thistest, some states may deny renewal ofyour vehicle’s registration.

Your vehicle is equipped with a computerthat monitors the performance of theengine’s emission control system. Certi-fied emission inspectors will inspect theOn-Board Diagnostic (OBDII) system aspart of the state emission inspectionprocess. The OBDII system is designedto detect engine and transmission pro-blems that might cause the vehicle emis-sions to exceed allowable limits. OBDIIinspections apply to all 1996 model yearand newer passenger cars and trucks.Over 30 states plus the District of Colum-bia have implemented emission inspec-tion of the OBDII system.. The inspection of the OBDII systemconsists of a visual operational check ofthe “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/mal-function indicator light (MIL) and anexamination of the OBDII system with anelectronic scan tool.. A vehicle passes the OBDII systeminspection if proper operation of the“CHECK ENGINE” warning light is ob-served, there are no stored diagnostictrouble codes, and the OBDII readinessmonitors are all complete.

. A vehicle fails the OBDII inspection ifthe “CHECK ENGINE” warning light is notproperly operating (light is illuminated or isnot working due to a burned out bulb) orthere is one or more diagnostic troublecodes stored in the vehicle’s computer.. A state emission inspection may reject(not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number ofOBDII system readiness monitors “NOTREADY” is greater than one. If thevehicle’s battery has been recently re-placed or disconnected, the OBDII systeminspection may indicate that the vehicle isnot ready for the emission test. Under thiscondition, the vehicle driver should beinstructed to drive his/her vehicle for a fewdays to reset the readiness monitors andreturn for an emission re-inspection.. Owners of rejected or failing vehiclesshould contact their SUBARU Dealer forservice.

Some states still use dynamometers intheir emission inspection program. Adynamometer is a treadmill or roller-liketesting device that allows your vehicle’swheels to turn while the vehicle remains inone place. Prior to your vehicle being puton a dynamometer, tell your emissioninspector not to place your SUBARUAWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynam-ometer. Otherwise, serious transmis-sion damage will result.

The U.S. Environmental ProtectionAgency (EPA) and states using two-wheeldynamometers in their emission testingprogram have EXEMPTED SUBARUAWD vehicles from the portion of thetesting program that involves a two-wheeldynamometer. There are some states thatuse four-wheel dynamometers in theirtesting program. When properly used, thisequipment should not damage a SUBARUAWD vehicle.

Under no circumstances should the rearwheels be jacked off the ground, norshould the driveshaft be disconnected forstate emission testing.


Black plate (257,1)


Preparing to drive

You should perform the following checksand adjustments every day before youstart driving.1. Check that all windows, mirrors, andlights are clean and unobstructed.2. Check the appearance and conditionof the tires. Also check tires for properinflation.3. Look under the vehicle for any sign ofleaks.4. Check that the hood and rear gate arefully closed.5. Check the adjustment of the seat.6. Check the adjustment of the insideand outside mirrors.7. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that yourpassengers have fastened their seatbelts.8. Check the operation of the warningand indicator lights when the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON” position.9. Check the gauges, indicator and warn-ing lights after starting the engine.

NOTEEngine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid,washer fluid and other fluid levelsshould be checked daily, weekly or atfuel stops.

Starting the engine

CAUTION

. Do not operate the starter motorcontinuously for more than 10seconds. If the engine fails tostart after operating the starterfor 5 to 10 seconds, wait for 10seconds or more before tryingagain.

. If you restart the engine while thevehicle is moving, shift the selectlever into the “N” position. Donot attempt to place the selectlever of a moving vehicle into the“P” position.

1. Apply the parking brake.2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac-cessories.3. Shift the select lever to the “P” or “N”position (preferably “P” position). Thestarter will only operate when the selectlever is at the “P” or “N” position.4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”position and check the operation of thewarning and indicator lights. Refer to“Warning and indicator lights” F3-9.5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”position without depressing the accelera-

tor pedal. Release the key immediatelyafter the engine has started.If the engine does not start, try thefollowing.

(1) Turn the ignition switch to the“LOCK” position and wait for at least10 seconds. After checking that theparking brake is firmly set, turn theignition switch to the “START” positionwhile depressing the accelerator pedalslightly (approximately a quarter of thefull stroke). Release the acceleratorpedal as soon as the engine starts.(2) If this fails to start the engine, turnthe ignition switch back to the “LOCK”position and wait for at least 10seconds. Then fully depress the accel-erator pedal and turn the ignitionswitch to the “START” position. If theengine starts, quickly release theaccelerator pedal.(3) If this fails to start the engine, turnthe ignition switch again to the “LOCK”position. After waiting for 10 secondsor longer, turn the ignition switch to the“START” position without depressingthe accelerator pedal.(4) If the engine still refuses to start,contact your nearest SUBARU dealerfor assistance.

6. Confirm that all warning and indicatorlights have turned off after the engine has


– CONTINUED –

7


Black plate (258,1)



started. The fuel injection system auto-matically lowers the idle speed as theengine warms up.

While the engine is warming up, makesure that the select lever is at the “P” or“N” position and that the parking brake isapplied.

NOTE. The engine may be difficult to startwhen the battery has been discon-nected and reconnected (for mainte-nance or other purposes). This diffi-culty is caused by the electronicallycontrolled throttle’s self-diagnosisfunction. To overcome it, keep theignition switch in the “ON” positionfor approximately 10 seconds beforestarting the engine.. To protect the engine while theselect lever is in the “P” or “N”position, the engine is controlled sothat the engine speed may not becometoo high even if the accelerator pedal isdepressed hard.

Stopping the engine

WARNING

Do not stop the engine when thevehicle is moving. This will causeloss of power to the power steeringand the brake booster, making steer-ing and braking more difficult. Itcould also result in accidental acti-vation of the “LOCK” position on theignition switch, causing the steeringwheel to lock.

The ignition switch should be turned offonly when the vehicle is stopped and theengine is idling.

Remote engine start system(dealer option)

WARNING

. Do not start the engine using theremote start system in an en-closed environment (e.g. closedgarage). Prolonged operation ofa motor vehicle in an enclosedenvironment can cause a harmfulbuild-up of Carbon Monoxide.Carbon Monoxide is harmful toyour health. Exposure to highlevels of Carbon Monoxide cancause headaches, dizziness or inextreme cases unconsciousnessand/or death.

. Before performing any servicingof the vehicle, temporarily placethe remote engine start system inservice mode to prevent thesystem from unexpectedly start-ing the engine.


Black plate (259,1)


& Starting your vehicleThe remote engine start system is acti-vated by pressing the “ ” button twicewithin 3 seconds on your remote enginestart transmitter. The system will checkcertain pre-conditions before starting, andif all safety parameters are correct, theengine will start within 5 seconds. Whilethe vehicle is operating via remote enginestart, the vehicle’s power window featureswill be disabled. Also, the system has atimer and will shut down after 15 minutes ifyou do not operate the vehicle. Press andhold the “ ” button for 2 seconds again toturn the vehicle off. If the vehicle’s startercranks but does not start or starts andstalls, the remote engine start system willpower off then attempt to start the vehicle

an additional four times. If the vehicle failsto start after the additional attempts, theremote engine start system will abort andreturn to a non activated state.

& Remote start safety featuresFor safety and security reasons, thesystem will fail to start and beep the horntwice or shut down the engine duringremote start operation if any of thefollowing occur:. The brake pedal is depressed beforethe vehicle ignition switch is turned “on”. The key was already in the ignitionswitch. The engine hood is opened. The vehicle’s engine idle speed hasreached a level over 3,000 RPM. The alarm is triggered by opening anyof the doors or the rear gate.

NOTE. The security indicator light on thedashboard will stop flashing whileunder remote engine start operation,but the vehicle is still protected.. If the vehicle is entered duringremote engine start operation, thesystem will not record entry in thealarm history.

& Entering the vehicle while itis running via remote start

1. Unlock the vehicle doors using theremote keyless entry system. If the vehi-cle’s doors are unlocked manually usingthe key, the vehicle’s alarm system willtrigger and the remote engine start systemwill turn off. Inserting the key into theignition switch and turning it to the “ON”position or pressing the unlock button “ ”on the remote keyless entry transmitterwill disarm the alarm system. Refer to“Alarm system” F2-16.2. Enter the vehicle. Do not depress thebrake pedal.3. Insert the key into the ignition switchand turn to the “ON” position. If the ignitionswitch is accidentally turned to the“START” position, the system’s “starteranti-grind” feature will prevent the starterfrom re-cranking.4. Depress the brake pedal. The remotestarter disengages, the vehicle’s powerwindow features are re-enabled and thevehicle will operate normally.

& Entering the vehicle follow-ing remote engine start shut-down

An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle isopened by the remote keyless entry


– CONTINUED –

7


Black plate (260,1)



transmitter within a few seconds immedi-ately following remote engine start shut-down.

& Pre-heating or pre-coolingthe interior of the vehicle

Before exiting the vehicle, set the tem-perature controls to the desired settingand operation. After the system starts thevehicle, the heater or air-conditioning willactivate and heat or cool the interior toyour setting.

& Service modeIn service mode, the remote start functionis temporarily disabled to prevent thesystem from unexpectedly starting theengine while being serviced.

! To engage the service mode

Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”position, depress and hold the brake pedalthen, press and release the “ ” button onthe remote engine start transmitter threetimes. The system will pause for 1 secondand then flash the parking lights and honkthe horn three times indicating that thesystem is in service mode. When attempt-ing to activate the remote start systemwhile in service mode, the parking lightswill flash and the horn will honk two timesand will not start.

! To disengage the service mode

Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”position, depress and hold the brakepedal, then press and release the “ ”button on the remote engine start trans-mitter three times. The system will pausefor 1 second and flash the parking lightsone time indicating that the system hasexited service mode.

NOTEWhen taking your vehicle in for service,it is recommended that you inform theservice personnel that your vehicle isequipped with a remote engine startsystem.

& Remote engine start trans-mitter programming and pro-grammable feature option

New transmitters can be programmed tothe remote engine start system in theevent that remote engine start transmittersare lost, stolen or damaged. The remoteengine start system also has one pro-grammable feature that can be adjustedfor user preference.The remote engine start system can beprogrammed to either make an audiblehorn chirp upon remote start activation ornot. Remote engine start transmitter pro-gramming and feature programming can

be adjusted using the following procedure.1. Open the driver’s door (the driver’sdoor must remain opened throughout theentire process).2. Insert the key into the vehicle’s ignitionswitch and turn to the “ON” position.3. Locate the small black programmingbutton behind the fuse box cover, on thedriver’s side left under the dashboardpanel.4. Press and hold the black programmingbutton for 10 to 15 seconds. The horn willhonk and the parking lights will flash threetimes to indicate that the system hasentered programming mode. At this pointyou can perform either action (step 5 orstep 6).5. To program a remote transmitter:press and release the “ ” button on eachtransmitter. The horn will honk and theparking lights will flash one time to indicatea successful transmitter learn each timethe “ ” button is pressed. You canprogram up to eight transmitters.6. To toggle the Horn Confirmation chirpsON/OFF: press and release the brake totoggle the feature. The horn will chirp andthe parking lights will flash one time toindicate Confirmation Horn Chirps are“OFF”. The horn will honk and the parkinglights will flash 2 times to indicate Con-firmation Horn Chirps are “ON”. Depres-


Black plate (261,1)


sing the brake pedal repeatedly will togglethe feature ON or OFF each time.7. To exit the remote transmitter andfeature programming mode, turn the igni-tion switch to the “LOCK” position, removethe key from the ignition switch and testoperation of the remote transmitter(s) andhorn confirmation feature.

& System maintenance

! Changing the batteries

CAUTION

. Do not let dust, oil or water get onor in the remote engine starttransmitter when replacing thebattery.

. Be careful not to damage theprinted circuit board in the re-mote engine start transmitterwhen replacing the battery.

. Be careful not to allow children totouch the battery and any re-moved parts; children couldswallow them.

. There is a danger of explosion ifan incorrect replacement batteryis used. Replace only with thesame or equivalent type of bat-tery.

. Batteries should not be exposedto excessive heat such as sun-shine, fire or the like.

The two 3-volt lithium batteries (modelCR-1220) supplied in your remote enginestart transmitter should last approximatelythree years, depending on usage. Whenthe batteries begin to weaken, you willnotice a decrease in range (distance fromthe vehicle that your remote engine startsystem operates). Follow the instructionsbelow to change the remote controlbatteries. 1. Carefully pry the remote engine start

transmitter halves apart using a small flat-head screwdriver.


– CONTINUED –

7


Black plate (262,1)



2. Remove the circuit board from thebottom half of the case and slide the whiteplastic battery holder out from under thebattery tab releasing the batteries. Re-move the old batteries and replace withnew ones. Be sure to observe the (+) signon the old batteries before removing themto ensure that the new batteries areinserted properly (battery “+” should bepointed away from the transmitter circuitboard on both batteries).3. Carefully snap the case halves backtogether, then test the remote engine startsystem.

NOTEThis device complies with Part 15 ofthe FCC Rules and with RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject

to the following two conditions: (1) Thisdevice may not cause harmful inter-ference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, in-cluding interference that may causeundesired operation.Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equip-ment.

Automatic transmission

The automatic transmission is electroni-cally controlled and provides 5 forwardspeeds and 1 reverse speed. Also, it has amanual mode and a SPORT mode.

WARNING

Do not shift from the “P” or “N”position into the “D” or “R” positionwhile depressing the acceleratorpedal. This may cause the vehicleto jump forward or backward.

CAUTION

. Shift into the “P” or “R” positiononly after the vehicle is comple-tely stopped. Shifting while thevehicle is moving may causedamage to the transmission.

. Do not race the engine for morethan 5 seconds in any positionexcept the “N” or “P” positionwhen the brake is set or whenchocks are used in the wheels.This may cause the automatictransmission fluid to overheat.

. Avoid shifting from one of theforward driving positions into the


Black plate (263,1)


“R” position or vice versa untilthe vehicle has completelystopped. Such shifting maycause damage to the transmis-sion.

. When parking the vehicle, firstsecurely apply the parking brakeand then place the select lever inthe “P” position. Avoid parkingfor a long time with the selectlever in any other position asdoing so could result in a deadbattery.

NOTE. When the engine coolant tempera-ture is still low, the automatic transmis-sion will upshift to higher enginespeeds than when the coolant tempera-ture is sufficiently high in order toshorten the warm-up time and improvedriveability. The gearshift timing willautomatically shift to the normal timingafter the engine has warmed up.. Immediately after ATF (automatictransmission fluid) is replaced, youmay feel that the automatic transmis-sion operation is somewhat unusual.This results from invalidation of datawhich the on-board computer hascollected and stored in memory to

allow the transmission to shift at themost appropriate times for the currentcondition of your vehicle. Optimizedshifting will be restored as the vehiclecontinues to be driven for a while.

& Select lever

: With the brake pedal depressed, shiftwhile pressing the button in.

: Shift while pressing the button in.: Shift without pressing the button.

The select lever has four positions, “P”,“R”, “N”, “D” and also has manual gate forusing “SPORT” mode or manual mode.

1) Select lever button

! P (Park)

This position is for parking the vehicle andstarting the engine.

In this position, the transmission is me-chanically locked to prevent the vehiclefrom rolling freely.

When you park the vehicle, first set theparking brake fully, then shift into the “P”position. Do not hold the vehicle with onlythe transmission.

To shift the select lever from the “P” to anyother position, you have to depress thebrake pedal fully then push the selectlever button on the lever knob when theignition switch is in the “ON” position. Thisprevents the vehicle from lurching when it


– CONTINUED –

7


Black plate (264,1)



is started.

If the select lever does not move from the“P” position with the brake pedal de-pressed, the select lever button pushedin, and the ignition switch in the ONposition, refer to “Shift lock function” F7-14.

! R (Reverse)

This position is for backing the vehicle.

To shift from the “N” to “R” position, stopthe vehicle completely then move thelever to the “R” position while pushingthe select lever button.

! N (Neutral)

This position is for restarting a stalledengine.In this position the wheels and transmis-sion are not locked. In this position, thetransmission is neutral; the vehicle will rollfreely, even on the slightest incline unlessthe parking brake or foot brake is applied.Avoid coasting with the transmissionneutral.During coasting, there is no engine brak-ing effect.

NOTEWhen the ignition switch has beenturned to the “LOCK” position, move-ment of the select lever from the “N”

position to the “R” position is possiblefor a limited time period by depressingthe brake pedal and then becomesimpossible. If the select lever becomesimpossible to be moved after a limitedtime period, turn the ignition switch tothe “ON” position. You will then be ableto move the select lever to the “P”position.

WARNING

Do not drive the vehicle with theselect lever in the “N” (Neutral)position. Engine braking has noeffect in this condition and the riskof an accident is consequently in-creased.

! D (Drive)

This position is for normal driving.The transmission automatically shifts intoa suitable gear from 1st to 5th according tothe vehicle speed and the accelerationyou require.

When more acceleration is required in thisposition, depress the accelerator pedalfully to the floor and hold that position. Thetransmission will automatically downshiftto 4th, 3rd, 2nd or 1st gear. When yourelease the pedal, the transmission will

return to the original gear position.To use the SPORT mode, move the leverfrom this position into the manual gate.To use the manual mode, move the leverfrom this position into the manual gatethen move it toward the “+” and “−” ends.

! While climbing a grade

When driving up a hill, undesired upshift to4th or 5th gear is prevented from takingplace when the accelerator is released.This minimizes the chance of subsequentdownshifting to a lower gear when accel-erating again. This prevents repeatedupshifting and downshifting resulting in asmoother operation of the vehicle.

NOTEThe transmission may downshift to 2ndor 1st gear, depending on the way theaccelerator pedal is depressed to ac-celerate the vehicle again.

& Shift lock functionThe shift lock function helps prevent theimproper operation of the select lever.. The select lever cannot be operatedunless the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position and the brake pedal isdepressed.. The select lever cannot be moved from


Black plate (265,1)


the “P” position to any other positionbefore the brake pedal is depressed.Depress the brake pedal first, and thenoperate the select lever.. Only the “P” position allows you to turnthe key from the “Acc” position to the“LOCK” position and remove the key fromthe ignition key cylinder.. If the ignition switch is turned to the“LOCK” position while the select lever is inthe “N” position, the select lever may notbe moved to the “P” position after a periodof time. Therefore, move the select leverto the “P” position with the brake pedaldepressed soon after the ignition switch isturned to the “LOCK” position.

! Shift lock release

If the select lever cannot be operated, turnthe ignition switch back to the “ON”position then move the select lever to the“P” position with the select lever buttonpressed and brake pedal depressed.

If the select lever does not move afterperforming the above procedure, performthe following steps.. When the select lever cannot beshifted from “P” to “N”:Refer to “Shift lock release using the shiftlock release button” F7-15.

. When the select lever cannot beshifted from “N” to “R” or “P”:Within 60 seconds after placing the igni-tion switch in the “Acc” position, move theselect lever to the “R” or “P” position withthe select lever button pressed and brakepedal depressed.

If you must perform the above procedure,the shift lock system (or the vehicle controlsystem) may be malfunctioning. Contact aSUBARU dealer for an inspection as soonas possible.

If the select lever does not move afterperforming the above procedure, refer to“Shift lock release using the shift lockrelease button” F7-15.

! Shift lock release using the shiftlock release button

Perform the following procedure to releasethe shift lock.1. Apply the parking brake and stop theengine.

2. Remove the cover by prying on theedge with a flat-head screwdriver.

NOTETo prevent damage to the cover, wrapthe tip of the flat-head screwdriver withvinyl tape or a cloth before removingthe cover.


– CONTINUED –

7


Black plate (266,1)



1) Shift lock release button2) Select lever button

3. Move the select lever while performingthe following operations.

. Depressing the brake pedal

. Pushing the shift lock release buttonusing a screwdriver. Pushing the select lever button

If the select lever does not move afterperforming the above procedure, the shiftlock system may be malfunctioning. Con-tact a SUBARU dealer for an inspectionas soon as possible.

& Selection of manual mode

With the vehicle either moving or station-ary, move the select lever from the “D”position to the manual gate then move it tothe “+” end or “−” end of the manual gateto select manual mode.

1) Upshift indicator2) Downshift indicator3) Gear position indicator

When the manual mode is selected, thegear position indicator and upshift indica-tor and/or downshift indicator in thetachometer illuminate. The gear positionindicator shows the currently selectedgear in the 1st-to-5th-gear range. Theupshift and downshift indicators showwhen a gearshift is possible. When theupshift indicator “ ” is illuminated, up-shifting is possible. When the downshiftindicator “ ” is illuminated, downshiftingis possible. When both indicators areilluminated, upshifting and downshiftingare both possible. When the vehicle stops(for example, at traffic signals), the down-shift indicator turns off.


Black plate (267,1)


Gearshifts can be performed using theselect lever.

Shift to the next-higher gear by brieflypushing the select lever toward the “+”end of the manual gate.Shift to the next-lower gear by brieflypulling the select lever toward the “−”end of the manual gate.

NOTEPlease read the following points care-fully and bear them in mind when usingthe manual mode.. When the temperature of the engineoil is higher than normal, warningbeeps are emitted and the shift positionindicator shows “−”. If these warningsare issued, deselect the manual modeto protect the engine from damage.

. The transmission does not automa-tically shift up in the manual mode.Perform gearshifts in accordance withroad conditions so that the tachometerneedle does not enter the red zone. Ifthe engine speed reaches a predeter-mined level, a fuel-cut function willoperate. Shift up if this happens. Also,the transmission may automaticallyshift up to protect the engine.. If you attempt to shift down whenthe engine speed is too high, i.e., whena downshift would push the tachometerneedle beyond the red zone, beeps willbe emitted to warn you that the down-shift is not possible.. If you attempt to shift up when thevehicle speed is too low, the transmis-sion will not respond.. You can perform a skip-shift (forexample, from 4th to 2nd) by operatingthe select lever twice in rapid succes-sion.. The transmission automatically se-lects 1st gear when the vehicle stopsmoving.. If the temperature of the automatictransmission fluid becomes too high,the “AT OIL TEMP” warning light willilluminate and upshifts to 5th gear willnot be possible. Immediately stop thevehicle in a safe place and let theengine idle until the warning light turns

off.

& Driving tips. On a road surface where there is a riskof wheelspin (for example, a snow- orgravel-covered road), you can pull awayfrom a standstill safely and easily by firstselecting the 2nd gear of the manualmode.. Always apply the foot or parking brakewhen the vehicle is stopped in the “D” or“R” position.. Always set the parking brake whenparking your vehicle. Do not hold thevehicle with only the transmission.. Do not keep the vehicle in a stationaryposition on an uphill grade by using the“D” position. Use the brake instead.. The engine may, on rare occasions,knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler-ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill.This phenomenon does not indicate aproblem.. A slight reduction in output torque mayoccur before the engine warms up.


– CONTINUED –

7


Black plate (268,1)



& SPORT mode

SPORT mode is used when power isneeded for rapid acceleration or for uphilldriving. To select this mode, move theselect lever from the “D” position to themanual gate.

When selected, the SPORT mode indica-tor light on the combination meter willilluminate.To deselect SPORT mode, move theselect lever to the “D” position or selectmanual mode. To subsequently reselectSPORT mode, move the select lever tothe “D” position and from there to themanual gate.In this mode, the transmission shifts up athigher vehicle speeds and shifts downmore responsively than in normal mode.

Power steering

CAUTION

Do not hold the steering wheel at thefully locked position left or right formore than 5 seconds. This maydamage the power steering pump.

The power steering system operates onlywhen the engine is running.If you lose power steering assist becausethe engine stops or the system fails tofunction, you can steer but it will takemuch more effort.

NOTERight after the engine has been startedand before it has warmed up, you mayhear a noise coming from areas adja-cent to the power steering pump whichis located at the right-front area of theengine compartment. This noise isnormal. It does not indicate powersteering system trouble.


Black plate (269,1)


Braking

& Braking tips

WARNING

Never rest your foot on the brakepedal while driving. This can causedangerous overheating of thebrakes and needless wear on thebrake pads and linings.

! When the brakes get wet

When driving in rain or after washing thevehicle, the brakes may get wet. As aresult, brake stopping distance will belonger. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicleat a safe speed while lightly depressingthe brake pedal to heat up the brakes.

! Use of engine braking

Remember to make use of engine brakingin addition to foot braking. When descend-ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used,the brakes may start working improperlybecause of brake fluid overheating,caused by overheated brake pads. Tohelp prevent this, shift into a lower gear toget stronger engine braking.

! Braking when a tire is punctured

Do not depress the brake pedal suddenlywhen a tire is punctured. This could cause

a loss of control of the vehicle. Keepdriving straight ahead while graduallyreducing speed. Then slowly pull off theroad to a safe place.

& Brake system

! Two separate circuits

Your vehicle has a dual circuit brakesystem. Each circuit works diagonallyacross the vehicle. If one circuit of thebrake system should fail, the other half ofthe system still works. If one circuit fails,the brake pedal will go down much closerto the floor than usual and you will need todepress it down much harder. And a muchlonger distance will be needed to stop thevehicle.

! Brake booster

The brake booster uses engine manifoldvacuum to assist braking force. If enginemanifold vacuum becomes insufficient,such as when driving at high altitude, avacuum pump assures a sufficient va-cuum to operate the brake booster. Do notturn off the engine while driving becausethat will turn off the brake booster, result-ing in poor braking power.The brakes will continue to work evenwhen the brake booster completely stopsfunctioning. If this happens, however, youwill have to depress the pedal much

harder than normal and the braking dis-tance will increase.

NOTESome sound accompanying operationof the vacuum pump may be heardfrom the engine compartment duringdriving. This does not indicate a mal-function.

! Brake assist system

WARNING

Do not be overconfident about thebrake assist. It is not a system thatbrings more braking ability to thevehicle beyond its braking capabil-ity. Always use the utmost carewhen driving regarding vehiclespeed and safe distance.

CAUTION

When you need to brake suddenly,continue depressing the brake pedalstrongly to bring the effect of thebrake assist.

NOTEWhen you depress the brake pedal


– CONTINUED –

7


Black plate (270,1)



suddenly, the brake pedal might wig-gle. This is a normal operation phe-nomenon, and it is not a malfunction.

Brake assist is a driver assistance system.It assists the brake power when the drivercannot depress the brake pedal stronglyand the brake power is insufficient.Brake assist generates the brake poweraccording to the speed at which the driverdepresses the brake pedal.

& Disc brake pad wear warningindicators

The disc brake pad wear warning indica-tors on the disc brakes give a warningnoise when the brake pads are worn.If a squeaking or scraping noise is heardfrom the disc brakes while braking, im-

mediately have your vehicle inspected bythe nearest SUBARU dealer.

ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys-tem)

WARNING

Always use the utmost care indriving – overconfidence becauseyou are driving with an ABSequipped vehicle could easily leadto a serious accident.

CAUTION

. The ABS system does not alwaysdecrease stopping distance. Youshould always maintain a safefollowing distance from othervehicles.

. When driving on badly surfacedroads, gravel roads, icy roads, orover deep newly fallen snow,stopping distances may be long-er for a vehicle with the ABSsystem than one without. Whendriving under these conditions,therefore, reduce your speed andleave ample distance from othervehicles.

. When you feel the ABS systemoperating, you should maintain


Black plate (271,1)


constant brake pedal pressure.Do not pump the brake pedalsince doing so may defeat theoperation of the ABS system.

The ABS system prevents the lock-up ofwheels which may occur during suddenbraking or braking on slippery road sur-faces. This helps prevent the loss ofsteering control and directional stabilitycaused by wheel lock-up.

When the ABS system is operating, youmay hear a chattering noise or feel a slightvibration in the brake pedal. This is normalwhen the ABS operates.

The ABS system will not operate when thevehicle speed is below approximately 6mph (10 km/h).

& ABS system self-checkYou may feel a slight shock in the brakepedal and hear the operating sound ofABS from the engine compartment justafter the vehicle is started. This is causedby an automatic functional test of the ABSsystem being carried out and does notindicate any abnormal condition.

& ABS warning light

The ABS warning light illuminates whenthe ignition switch is turned to the “ON”position and turns off after approximately 2seconds.This is an indication that the ABS systemis working properly.

CAUTION

If the warning light behaves asfollows, the ABS system may notbe working properly.

When the warning light illuminates,the ABS function shuts down; how-ever, the conventional brake systemcontinues to operate normally.

. The warning light does not illu-minate when the ignition switch

is turned to the “ON” position.

. The warning light illuminateswhen the ignition switch isturned to the “ON” position, butit does not turn off even when thevehicle speed exceeds approxi-mately 8 mph (12 km/h).

. The warning light illuminates dur-ing driving.

If these occur, have the ABS systemrepaired at the first available oppor-tunity by your SUBARU dealer.

NOTEIf the warning light behavior is asdescribed in the following, the ABSsystem may be considered normal.. The warning light illuminates rightafter the engine is started but turns offimmediately, remaining off.. The warning light remains illumi-nated after the engine has been started,but it turns off when the vehicle speedreaches approximately 8 mph (12km/h).. The warning light illuminates duringdriving, but it turns off immediately andremains off.

When driving with an insufficient batteryvoltage such as when the engine is jump


– CONTINUED –

7


Black plate (272,1)



started, the ABS warning light may illumi-nate. This is due to the low battery voltageand does not indicate a malfunction.When the battery becomes fully charged,the light will turn off.

Electronic Brake Force Dis-tribution (EBD) system

The EBD system maximizes the effective-ness of the brakes by allowing the rearbrakes to supply a greater proportion ofthe braking force. It functions by adjustingthe distribution of braking force to the rearwheels in accordance with the vehicle’sloading condition and speed.The EBD system is an integral part of theABS system and uses some of the ABSsystem’s components to perform its func-tion of optimizing the distribution of brak-ing force. If any of the ABS componentsused by the EBD system malfunction, theEBD system also stops working.

When the EBD system is operating, youmay hear a chattering noise or feel a slightvibration in the brake pedal. This is normaland does not indicate a malfunction.

& Steps to take if EBD systemmalfunctions

If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system,the system stops working and the brakesystem warning light and ABS warninglight illuminate simultaneously.

The EBD system may be malfunctioning ifthe brake system warning light and ABSwarning light illuminate simultaneouslyduring driving.Even if the EBD system malfunctions, theconventional braking system will still func-tion. However, the rear wheels will bemore prone to locking when the brakesare applied harder than usual and thevehicle’s motion may therefore becomesomewhat harder to control.If the brake system warning light and ABS


Black plate (273,1)


warning light illuminate simultaneously,take the following steps.1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,flat location.2. Shut down the engine, apply theparking brake, and then restart it.3. Release the parking brake. If bothwarning lights turn off, the EBD systemmay be malfunctioning.Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARUdealer and have the system inspected.4. If both warning lights illuminate againand remain illuminated after the enginehas been restarted, shut down the engineagain, apply the parking brake, and checkthe brake fluid level. Refer to “Brake fluid”F11-17.5. If the brake fluid level is not below the“MIN” mark, the EBD system may bemalfunctioning. Drive carefully to thenearest SUBARU dealer and have thesystem inspected.6. If the brake fluid level is below the“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.Instead, have the vehicle towed to thenearest SUBARU dealer for repair.

WARNING

. Driving with the brake systemwarning light illuminated is dan-

gerous. This indicates your brakesystem may not be workingproperly. If the light remainsilluminated, have the brakes in-spected by a SUBARU dealerimmediately.

. If at all in doubt about whetherthe brakes are operating prop-erly, do not drive the vehicle.Have your vehicle towed to thenearest SUBARU dealer for re-pair.

Vehicle Dynamics Controlsystem

WARNING

Always use the utmost care indriving – overconfidence becauseyou are driving with a Vehicle Dy-namics Control system equippedvehicle could easily lead to a ser-ious accident.

CAUTION

. Even if your vehicle is equippedwith Vehicle Dynamics Controlsystem, winter tires should beused when driving on snow-cov-ered or icy roads; in addition,vehicle speed should be reducedconsiderably. Simply having aVehicle Dynamics Control sys-tem does not guarantee that thevehicle will be able to avoidaccidents in any situation.

. Activation of the Vehicle Dy-namics Control system is anindication that the road beingtravelled on has a slippery sur-face; since having Vehicle Dy-namics Control is no guarantee


– CONTINUED –

7


Black plate (274,1)



that full vehicle control will bemaintained at all times and underall conditions, its activationshould be seen as a sign thatthe speed of the vehicle shouldbe reduced considerably.

. Whenever suspension compo-nents, steering components, oran axle are removed from avehicle equipped with VehicleDynamics Control system, havean inspection of that systemperformed by an authorizedSUBARU dealer.

. The following precautions shouldbe observed in order to ensurethat the Vehicle Dynamics Con-trol system is operating properly.

– All four wheels should befitted with tires of the samesize, type, and brand. Further-more, the amount of wearshould be the same for allfour tires.

– Keep the tire pressure at theproper level as shown on thevehicle placard attached tothe driver’s side door pillar.

In the event of wheelspin and/or skiddingon a slippery road surface and/or during

cornering and/or an evasive maneuver,the Vehicle Dynamics Control systemadjusts the engine’s output and thewheels’ respective braking forces to helpmaintain traction and directional control.. Traction Control FunctionThe traction control function is designed toprevent spinning of the driving wheels onslippery road surfaces, thereby helping tomaintain traction and directional control.Activation of this function is shown bysteady illumination of the Vehicle Dy-namics Control operation indicator light.. Skid Suppression FunctionThe skid suppression function is designedto help maintain directional stability bysuppressing the wheels’ tendency to slidesideways during steering operations. Acti-vation of this function is shown by flashingof the Vehicle Dynamics Control operationindicator light.

NOTE. Slight twitching of the brake pedalmay be felt when the Vehicle DynamicsControl system operates; a small de-gree of vehicle or steering wheel shak-ing may also be noticed in this situa-tion. These are normal characteristicsof Vehicle Dynamics Control operationand are no cause for alarm.. When driving off immediately after

starting the engine, a short operationnoise may be noticed coming from theengine compartment. This noise isgenerated as a result of a check beingperformed on the Vehicle DynamicsControl system and is normal.. Depending on the timing of activa-tion of the brakes, the brake pedal mayseem to jolt when you drive off afterstarting the engine. This is a conse-quence of the Vehicle Dynamics Con-trol operational check and is normal.. In the circumstances shown in thefollowing list, the vehicle may be moreunstable than it feels to the driver. TheVehicle Dynamics Control System maytherefore operate. Such operation doesnot indicate a system malfunction.

– on gravel-covered or ruttedroads– on unfinished roads– when the vehicle is towing atrailer– when the vehicle is fitted withsnow tires or winter tires

. Activation of the Vehicle DynamicsControl system will cause operation ofthe steering wheel to feel slightlydifferent compared to that for normalconditions.. Even if the vehicle is equipped witha Vehicle Dynamics Control system, it


Black plate (275,1)


is important that winter tires be usedwhen driving on snow-covered or icyroads. (All four wheels should be fittedwith tires of the same size and brand).. It is always important to reducespeed when approaching a corner,even if the vehicle is equipped withVehicle Dynamics Control.. All four wheels should be fitted withtires of the same size, type, and brand;furthermore, the amount of wearshould be the same for all four tires. Ifthese precautions are not observedand non-matching tires are used, it isquite possible that the Vehicle Dy-namics Control system will be unableto operate correctly as intended.. Always turn off the engine beforereplacing a tire as failure to do so mayrender the Vehicle Dynamics Controlsystem unable to operate correctly.

& Vehicle Dynamics Controlsystem monitor

Refer to the following sections.. “Vehicle Dynamics Control warninglight (U.S.-spec models and Canada-spec. models)/Vehicle Dynamics Controloperation indicator light (all models)” F3-18. “Traction Control system OFF indicatorlight (U.S.-spec models and Canada-spec. models)” F3-19. “Vehicle Dynamics Control warninglight (Latin America-spec. models)/Trac-tion Control OFF indicator light (LatinAmerica-spec. models)” F3-19

& Traction Control system OFFswitch

Traction Control system OFF indicatorlight (U.S.-spec. models and Canada-spec.models)


– CONTINUED –

7


Black plate (276,1)



Traction Control system OFF indicatorlight (Latin America-spec. models)

Traction Control system OFF switch

Pressing the switch to deactivate theTraction Control system can facilitate thefollowing operations.

. a standing start on a steeply slopingroad with a snowy, gravel-covered, orotherwise slippery surface. extrication of the vehicle when itswheels are stuck in mud or deep snow

When the switch is pressed during engineoperation, the Traction Control systemOFF indicator light on the combinationmeter illuminates. The Traction Controlsystem will be deactivated and the vehiclewill behave like a model not equipped withthe Traction Control system. When theswitch is pressed again to reactivate theTraction Control system OFF indicatorlight turns off.With the Traction Control system deacti-vated, traction enhancement offered byTraction Control system is unavailable.Therefore you should not deactivate theTraction Control system except underabove-mentioned situations.

NOTE. When the switch has been pressedto deactivate the Traction Control sys-tem, the Traction Control system auto-matically reactivates itself the next timethe ignition key is turned to the “LOCK”position and the engine is restarted.. If the switch is held down for 10seconds or longer, the indicator lightturns off, the Traction Control system

is activated, and the system ignoresany further pressing of the switch. Tomake the switch usable again, turn theignition key to the “LOCK” position andrestart the engine.. When the switch is pressed todeactivate the Traction Control system,the vehicle’s running performance iscomparable with that of a vehicle thatdoes not have a Traction Controlsystem. Do not deactivate the TractionControl system except when absolutelynecessary.


Black plate (277,1)


Tire pressure monitoringsystem (TPMS)

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-vides the driver with a warning messageby sending a signal from a sensor that isinstalled in each wheel when tire pressureis severely low.The tire pressure monitoring system willactivate only when the vehicle is driven atspeeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also,this system may not react immediately to asudden drop in tire pressure (for example,a blow-out caused by running over asharp object).

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates while driving, neverbrake suddenly and keep drivingstraight ahead while gradually redu-cing speed. Then slowly pull off theroad to a safe place. Otherwise anaccident involving serious vehicledamage and serious personal injurycould occur.

Check the pressure for all four tiresand adjust the pressure to the COLDtire pressure shown on the tireplacard on the door pillar on thedriver’s side.

Even when the vehicle is driven avery short distance, the tires getwarm and their pressures increaseaccordingly. Be sure to let the tirescool thoroughly before adjustingtheir pressures to the standardvalues shown on the tire placard.Refer to “Tires and wheels” F11-21.The tire pressure monitoring systemdoes not function when the vehicleis stationary. After adjusting the tirepressures, increase the vehiclespeed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h)to start the TPMS re-checking of thetire inflation pressures. If the tirepressures are now above the severe

low pressure threshold, the low tirepressure warning light should turnoff a few minutes later.

If this light still illuminates whiledriving after adjusting the tire pres-sure, a tire may have significantdamage and a fast leak that causesthe tire to lose air rapidly. If you havea flat tire, replace it with a spare tireas soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or awheel rim is replaced without theoriginal pressure sensor/transmitterbeing transferred, the low tire pres-sure warning light will illuminatesteadily after blinking for approxi-mately one minute. This indicatesthe TPMS is unable to monitor allfour road wheels. Contact yourSUBARU dealer as soon as possiblefor tire and sensor replacement and/or system resetting.

Do not inject any tire liquid oraerosol tire sealant into the tires,as this may cause a malfunction ofthe tire pressure sensors. If the lightilluminates steadily after blinking forapproximately one minute, promptlycontact a SUBARU dealer to havethe system inspected.


– CONTINUED –

7


Black plate (278,1)



CAUTION

Do not place metal film or any metalparts under the driver’s seat. Thismay cause poor reception of thesignals from the tire pressure sen-sors, and the tire pressure monitor-ing system will not function prop-erly.

NOTEThis device complies with Part 15 ofthe FCC Rules and with RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subjectto the following two conditions: (1) Thisdevice may not cause harmful inter-ference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, in-cluding interference that may causeundesired operation.Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equip-ment.

Parking your vehicle

WARNING

. Never leave unattended childrenor pets in the vehicle. They couldaccidentally injure themselves orothers through inadvertent op-eration of the vehicle. Also, onhot or sunny days, the tempera-ture in a closed vehicle couldquickly become high enough tocause severe or possibly fatalinjuries to them.

. Do not park the vehicle overflammable materials such as drygrass, waste paper or rags, asthey may burn easily if they comenear hot engine or exhaust sys-tem parts.

. Be sure to stop the engine if youtake a nap in the vehicle. Ifengine exhaust gas enters thepassenger compartment, occu-pants in the vehicle could diefrom carbon monoxide (CO) con-tained in the exhaust gas.

& Parking brake

CAUTION

. Never drive while the parkingbrake is set because this willcause unnecessary wear on thebrake linings. Before starting todrive, always make sure that theparking brake has been fullyreleased.

. Never drive with your foot on theparking brake pedal.

To set the parking brake, hold down thebrake pedal while depressing the parkingbrake pedal as far as it will go.


Black plate (279,1)


To release the parking brake, hold downthe brake pedal while depressing theparking brake pedal and slowly releasingit.When the parking brake is set while theengine is running, the brake systemwarning light illuminates. After startingthe vehicle, be sure that the warning lighthas turned off before the vehicle is driven.Refer to “Brake system warning light” F3-16.

& Parking tipsWhen parking your vehicle, always set theparking brake firmly and put the selectlever in the “P” (Park) position. Always setthe parking brake firmly when parking yourvehicle. Never rely on the transmissionalone to hold the vehicle.

When parking on a hill, always turn thesteering wheel. When the vehicle isheaded up the hill, the front wheels shouldbe turned away from the curb.

When facing downhill, the front wheelsshould be turned into the curb.

Cruise control

Cruise control enables you to maintain aconstant vehicle speed without holdingyour foot on the accelerator pedal and it isoperative when the vehicle speed is 25mph (40 km/h) or more. Make sure themain switch is turned “OFF” when thecruise control is not in use to avoidunintentionally setting the cruise control.

NOTEIf you move the cruise control lever orpress the main switch button whileturning the ignition switch “ON”, thecruise control function is deactivatedand the cruise control indicator lightflashes. To reactivate the cruise controlfunction, turn the ignition switch backto the “Acc” or “LOCK” position, andthen turn it again to the “ON” position.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control underany of the following conditions.These may cause loss of vehiclecontrol.

. driving up or down a steep grade

. driving on slippery or windingroads

. driving in heavy traffic


– CONTINUED –

7


Black plate (280,1)



. towing a trailer

& To set cruise control

1. Push the main switch button.

The cruise control indicator light on the

combination meter will illuminate.2. Depress the accelerator pedal until thevehicle reaches the desired speed.

3. Push the control lever downward in the“SET/COAST” direction and release it.Then release the accelerator pedal.

At this time, the cruise control set indicatorlight is illuminated on the combinationmeter.The vehicle will maintain the desiredspeed.

Vehicle speed can be temporarily in-creased while driving with the cruisecontrol activated. Simply depress theaccelerator pedal to accelerate the vehi-cle. When the accelerator pedal is re-leased, the vehicle will return to andmaintain the previous cruising speed.

& To temporarily cancel thecruise control

There are three ways to cancel the cruisecontrol temporarily:

. Pull the control lever toward you.


Black plate (281,1)


. Depress the brake pedal.

. Shift the select lever into the “N”position.

The cruise control set indicator light on thecombination meter turns off when thecruise control is canceled.

To resume the cruise control after it hasbeen temporarily canceled and with vehi-cle speed of approximately 20 mph (32km/h) or more, push the control leverupward in the “RES/ACC” direction toreturn to the original cruising speed auto-matically.The cruise control set indicator light on thecombination meter will automatically illu-minate at this time.

& To turn off the cruise controlThere are two ways to turn off the cruisecontrol:. Push the main switch again.. Turn the ignition switch to the “Acc” or“LOCK” position (but only when thevehicle is completely stopped).

& To change the cruising speed

! To increase the speed (by controllever)

Push the control lever upward in the “RES/ACC” direction and hold it until the vehiclereaches the desired speed. Then, releasethe control lever. The vehicle speed at thatmoment will be memorized and treated asthe new set speed.

When the difference between the actualvehicle speed and the set speed is lessthan 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed canbe increased 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each timeby pressing the control lever upward in the“RES/ACC” direction quickly.

! To increase the speed (by accel-erator pedal)

1. Depress the accelerator pedal toaccelerate the vehicle to the desiredspeed.2. Push the control lever downward in the“SET/COAST” direction once. Now thedesired speed is set and the vehicle willkeep running at that speed without de-pressing the accelerator pedal.

NOTEIf the difference between the actualvehicle speed when the control leveris pushed downward and the speed lasttime you set is less than 4 mph (6.8km/h), the vehicle speed will be low-ered by 1 mph (1.6 km/h). This occursbecause the cruise control system unitregards this lever operation as thatintended to decrease the vehiclespeed.


– CONTINUED –

7


Black plate (282,1)



! To decrease the speed (by controllever)

Push the control lever downward in the“SET/COAST” direction and hold it untilthe vehicle reaches the desired speed.Then, release the control lever. Thevehicle speed at that moment will bememorized and treated as the new setspeed.

When the difference between the actualvehicle speed and the set speed is lessthan 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed canbe lowered 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time bypressing the control lever downward in the“SET/COAST” direction quickly.

! To decrease the speed (by brakepedal)

1. Depress the brake pedal to releasecruise control temporarily.2. When the speed decreases to thedesired speed, press the control leverdownward in the “SET/COAST” directiononce. Now the desired speed is set andthe vehicle will keep running at that speedwithout depressing the accelerator pedal.

& Cruise control indicator lightRefer to “Cruise control indicator light”F3-22.

& Cruise control set indicatorlight

Refer to “Cruise control set indicator light”F3-22.


Black plate (15,1)


New vehicle break-in driving – the first1,000 miles (1,600 km) ..................................... 8-2

Fuel economy hints ............................................ 8-2Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............ 8-2Catalytic converter .............................................. 8-3Periodic inspections ........................................... 8-4Driving in foreign countries ............................... 8-4Driving tips for AWD models.............................. 8-4On-road and off-road driving.............................. 8-6Winter driving ...................................................... 8-8

Operation during cold weather............................. 8-8Driving on snowy and icy roads .......................... 8-9Corrosion protection .......................................... 8-10Snow tires ......................................................... 8-10Tire chains......................................................... 8-11Rocking the vehicle............................................ 8-11

Loading your vehicle......................................... 8-12Vehicle capacity weight...................................... 8-12GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Ratingand Gross Axle Weight Rating) ........................ 8-13

Roof rails and crossbar (if equipped).................. 8-14Roof molding and crossbar (if equipped)............ 8-17

Trailer hitch (if equipped) .................................. 8-18Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-19When you do not tow a trailer ............................ 8-20

Trailer towing ..................................................... 8-21Warranties and maintenance .............................. 8-21Maximum load limits .......................................... 8-21Trailer hitches.................................................... 8-24Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-25Trailer towing tips .............................................. 8-26

Driving tips

8


Black plate (286,1)


8-2 Driving tips

New vehicle break-in driving– the first 1,000 miles (1,600km)

The performance and long life of yourvehicle are dependent on how you handleand care for your vehicle while it is new.Follow these instructions during the first1,000 miles (1,600 km):. Do not race the engine. And do notallow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpmexcept in an emergency.. Do not drive at one constant engine orvehicle speed for a long time, either fast orslow.. Avoid starting suddenly and rapidacceleration, except in an emergency.. Avoid hard braking, except in anemergency.

The same break-in procedures should beapplied to a newly installed or overhauledengine or when brake pads or brakelinings are replaced with new ones.

Fuel economy hints

The following suggestions will help to saveyour fuel.. Select the proper gear position for thespeed and road conditions.. Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera-tion. Always accelerate gently until youreach the desired speed. Then try tomaintain that speed for as long aspossible.. Do not pump the accelerator and avoidracing the engine.. Avoid unnecessary engine idling.. Keep the engine properly tuned.. Keep the tires inflated to the correctpressure shown on the tire placard, whichis located under the door latch on thedriver’s side. Low pressure will increasetire wear and fuel consumption.. Use the air conditioner only whennecessary.. Keep the front and rear wheels inproper alignment.. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage orcargo.

Engine exhaust gas (carbonmonoxide)

WARNING

. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.Engine exhaust gas containscarbon monoxide, a colorlessand odorless gas which is dan-gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

. Always properly maintain the en-gine exhaust system to preventengine exhaust gas from enter-ing the vehicle.

. Never run the engine in a closedspace, such as a garage, exceptfor the brief time needed to drivethe vehicle in or out of it.

. Avoid remaining in a parkedvehicle for a lengthy time whilethe engine is running. If that isunavoidable, then use the venti-lation fan to force fresh air intothe vehicle.

. Always keep the front ventilatorinlet grille free from snow, leavesor other obstructions to ensurethat the ventilation system al-ways works properly.

. If at any time you suspect that


Black plate (287,1)


exhaust fumes are entering thevehicle, have the problemchecked and corrected as soonas possible. If you must driveunder these conditions, driveonly with all windows fully open.

. Keep the rear gate closed whiledriving to prevent exhaust gasfrom entering the vehicle.

NOTEDue to the expansion and contractionof the metals used in the manufactureof the exhaust system, you may hear acrackling sound coming from the ex-haust system for a short time after theengine has been shut off. This sound isnormal.

Catalytic converter

WARNING

. Avoid fire hazards. Do not driveor park the vehicle anywherenear flammable materials (e.g.grass, paper, rags or leaves),because the catalytic converteroperates at very high tempera-tures.

. Keep everyone and flammablematerials away from the exhaustpipe while the engine is running.The exhaust gas is very hot.

The catalytic converter is installed in theexhaust system. It serves as catalyst to

reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaustgases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.

To avoid damage to the catalytic conver-ter:. Use only unleaded gasoline. Even asmall amount of leaded gasoline willdamage the catalytic converter.. Never start the engine by pushing orpulling the vehicle.. Avoid racing the engine.. Never turn off the ignition switch whilethe vehicle is moving.. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feelthe engine running rough (misfiring, back-firing or incomplete combustion), haveyour vehicle checked and repaired by anauthorized SUBARU dealer.. Do not apply undercoating or rustprevention treatment to the heat shield ofcatalytic converter and the exhaust sys-tem.. Do not drive with an extremely low fuellevel.

Driving tips 8-3

8


Black plate (288,1)


8-4 Driving tips

Periodic inspections

To keep your vehicle in the best conditionat all times, always have the recom-mended maintenance services listed inthe maintenance schedule in the “War-ranty and Maintenance Booklet” per-formed at the specified time or mileageintervals.

Driving in foreign countries

When planning to use your vehicle inanother country:. Confirm the availability of the correctfuel. Refer to “Fuel requirements” F7-2.. Comply with all regulations and re-quirements of each country.

Driving tips for AWD models

WARNING

. Always maintain a safe drivingspeed according to the road andweather conditions in order toavoid having an accident on asharp turn, during sudden brak-ing or under other similar condi-tions.

. Always use the utmost care indriving – overconfidence be-cause you are driving an All-Wheel Drive model could easilylead to a serious accident.

. When replacing a tire, you mustuse a tire that is of the same size,circumference, construction,brand (tread pattern), speed sym-bol and load index as the originaltires listed on the tire placard.Using tires of other sizes, cir-cumferences or constructionsmay result in severe mechanicaldamage to the drive train of yourvehicle and may affect ride,handling, braking, speedometer/odometer calibration, and clear-ance between the body and tires.It also may be dangerous and


Black plate (289,1)


lead to loss of vehicle control.

. You must install four tires that areof the same size, circumferences,construction, manufacturer,brand (tread pattern), degree ofwear, speed symbol and loadindex. Mixing tires of other sizes,circumferences or constructionsmay result in severe mechanicaldamage to the drive train of yourvehicle and may affect ride,handling, braking and speed-ometer/odometer calibration. Italso may be dangerous and leadto loss of vehicle control.

CAUTION

If you use a temporary spare tire toreplace a flat tire, be sure to use theoriginal temporary spare tire storedin the vehicle. Using other sizes mayresult in severe mechanical damageto the drive train of your vehicle.

All-Wheel Drive distributes the enginepower to all four wheels. AWD modelsprovide better traction when driving onslippery, wet or snow-covered roads andwhen moving out of mud, dirt or sand. Byshifting power between the front and rearwheels, SUBARU AWD can also provideadded traction during acceleration, andadded engine braking force during decel-eration.Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehiclemay handle differently than an ordinarytwo wheel drive vehicle and it containssome features unique to AWD. For safetypurposes as well as to avoid damagingthe AWD system, you should keep thefollowing tips in mind.. An AWD model is better able to climbsteeper roads under snowy or slippery

conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle.There is little difference in handling,however, during extremely sharp turns orsudden braking. Therefore, when drivingdown a slope or turning corners, be sureto reduce your speed and maintain anample distance from other vehicles.. Always check the cold tire pressurebefore starting to drive. The recom-mended tire pressure is provided on thetire placard, which is located under thedoor latch on the driver’s side.. There are some precautions that youmust observe when towing your vehicle.For detailed information, refer to “Towing”F9-14.

Driving tips 8-5

8


Black plate (290,1)


8-6 Driving tips

On-road and off-road driving

WARNING

. In a rollover crash, an unbeltedperson is significantly morelikely to die than a person wear-ing a seatbelt. You the driver andall your passengers should fas-ten the seatbelts before startingto drive in order to minimize thechance of serious injury or death.

. Do not make sharp turns andquick maneuvers unless abso-lutely unavoidable. Such actionsare dangerous as you may losecontrol, possibly resulting in arollover which could cause deathor serious injury.

. Always maintain a safe drivingspeed according to the road andweather conditions in order toavoid having an accident on asharp turn, during sudden brak-ing or under other similar condi-tions.

. Whenever strong crosswinds arepresent, slow down sufficientlyto maintain control of your vehi-cle. Remember that your vehicle,with its higher profile and center

of gravity, is more likely to beaffected by crosswinds than or-dinary passenger cars.

. Always use the utmost care indriving – overconfidence be-cause you are driving an All-Wheel Drive model could easilylead to a serious accident.

Your vehicle is classified as a utilityvehicle. Utility vehicles feature a higherground clearance which enables them tobe used for wide applications including off-road driving. But please keep in mind thatyour vehicle is neither a conventional off-road vehicle nor an all-terrain vehicle. Ahigher center of gravity in relation to thetread width as compared with ordinarypassenger cars makes vehicles of thistype more likely to roll over. In reality, utilityvehicles have a significantly higher roll-over rate than other types of vehicles. Thehigh ground clearance of this vehicle is areal advantage, giving you a better view ofthe road and allowing you to anticipateproblems earlier. However, remember thatyour utility vehicle is not designed for high-speed cornering comparable to ordinarypassenger cars and that your vehiclecould roll over if you make a sharp turnat high speed. If you do take yourSUBARU off-road, certain common sense

precautions such as those in the followinglist should be taken.. Make certain that you and all of yourpassengers are wearing seatbelts.. Carry some emergency equipment,such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel,wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone orcitizens band radio.. Drive carefully. Do not take unneces-sary risks by driving in dangerous areas orover rough terrain.. Slow down and employ extra caution atall times. When driving off-road, you willnot have the benefit of marked trafficlanes, banked curves, traffic signs andthe like.. Do not drive across steep slopes.Instead, drive either straight up or straightdown the slopes. A vehicle can muchmore easily tip over sideways than it canend over end. Avoid driving straight up ordown slopes that are too steep.. Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe-cially at higher speeds.. Do not grip the inside or spokes of thesteering wheel. A bad bump could jerk thewheel and injure your hands. Instead drivewith your fingers and thumbs on theoutside of the rim.. If driving through water, such as whencrossing shallow streams, first check the


Black plate (291,1)


depth of the water and the bottom of thestream bed for firmness and ensure thatthe bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowlyand completely through the stream. Thewater should be shallow enough that itdoes not reach the vehicle’s undercar-riage. Water entering the engine air intakeor the exhaust pipe or water splashingonto electrical parts may damage yourvehicle and may cause it to stall. Neverattempt to drive through rushing water;regardless of its depth, it can wash awaythe ground from under your tires, resultingin possible loss of traction and evenvehicle rollover.. Always check your brakes for effec-tiveness immediately after driving in sand,mud or water. Do this by driving slowlyand stepping on the brake pedal. Repeatthat process several times to dry out thebrake discs and brake pads.. Do not drive or park over or nearflammable materials such as dry grass orfallen leaves, as they may burn easily. Theexhaust system is very hot while theengine is running and right after enginestops. This could create a fire hazard.. After driving through tall grass, mud,rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that thereis no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones,sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on theunderbody. Clear off any such matter from

the underbody. If the vehicle is used withthese materials trapped or adhering to theunderbody, a mechanical breakdown orfire could occur.. Secure all cargo carried inside thevehicle and make certain that it is notpiled higher than the seatbacks. Duringsudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargocould be thrown around in the vehicle andcause injury. Do not pile heavy loads onthe roof. Those loads raise the vehicle’scenter of gravity and make it more proneto tip over.. If you must rock the vehicle to free itfrom sand or mud, depress the acceleratorpedal slightly and move the select leverback and forth between “D” and “R”repeatedly. Do not race the engine. Forthe best possible traction, avoid spinningthe wheels when trying to free the vehicle.. When the road surface is extremelyslippery, you can obtain better traction bystarting the vehicle with the transmissionin 2nd than 1st.. Never equip your vehicle with tireslarger than those specified in this manual.. Wash the vehicle’s underbody after off-road driving. Suspension components areparticularly prone to dirt buildup, so theyneed to be washed thoroughly.. Frequent driving of an AWD modelunder hard-driving conditions such as

rough roads or off roads will necessitatemore frequent replacement of engine oil,brake fluid and transmission oil than thatspecified in the maintenance scheduledescribed in the “Warranty and Mainte-nance Booklet”.

Remember that damage done to yourSUBARU while operating it off-road andnot using common sense precautionssuch as those listed above is not eligiblefor warranty coverage.

Driving tips 8-7

8


Black plate (292,1)


8-8 Driving tips

Winter driving

& Operation during coldweather

Carry some emergency equipment, suchas a window scraper, a bag of sand,flares, a small shovel and jumper cables.

Check the battery and cables. Coldtemperatures reduce battery capacity.The battery must be in good condition toprovide enough power for cold winterstarts.

Use an engine oil of proper grade andviscosity for cold weather. Heavy summeroil will cause harder starting.

Keep the door locks from freezing bysquirting them with deicer or glycerin.

Forcing a frozen door open may damageor separate the rubber weather stripsaround the door. If the door is frozen,use hot water to melt the ice, and after-wards thoroughly wipe the water away.

Use a windshield washer fluid that con-tains an antifreeze solution. Do not useengine antifreeze or other substitutesbecause they may damage the paint ofthe vehicle.SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid con-tains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-perature varies according to how much itis diluted, as indicated in the followingtable.

Washer Fluid Con-centration Freezing Temperature

30% 10.48F (−128C)

50% −48F (−208C)

100% −498F (−458C)

In order to prevent freezing of washerfluid, check the freezing temperatures inthe table above when adjusting the fluidconcentration to the outside temperature.If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid witha different concentration from the oneused previously, purge the old fluid fromthe piping between the reservoir tank and

washer nozzles by operating the washerfor a certain period of time. Otherwise, ifthe concentration of the fluid remaining inthe piping is too low for the outsidetemperature, it may freeze and block thenozzles.

CAUTION

. Adjust the washer fluid concen-tration appropriately for the out-side temperature. If the concen-tration is inappropriate, sprayedwasher fluid may freeze on thewindshield and obstruct yourview, and the fluid may freeze inthe reservoir tank.

. State or local regulations onvolatile organic compounds mayrestrict the use of methanol, acommon windshield washer anti-freeze additive. Washer fluidscontaining non-methanol anti-freeze agents should be usedonly if they provide cold weatherprotection without damagingyour vehicle’s paint, wiper bladesor washer system.

! Before driving your vehicle

Before entering the vehicle, remove anysnow or ice from your shoes because that


Black plate (293,1)


could make the pedals slippery anddriving dangerous.

While warming up the vehicle beforedriving, check that the accelerator pedal,brake pedal, and all other controls operatesmoothly.

Clear away ice and snow that hasaccumulated under the fenders to avoidmaking steering difficult. During severewinter driving, stop when and where it issafe to do so and check under the fendersperiodically.

! Parking in cold weather

WARNING

Snow can trap dangerous exhaustgases under your vehicle. Keepsnow clear of the exhaust pipe andfrom around your vehicle if you parkthe vehicle in snow with the enginerunning.

Do not use the parking brake whenparking for long periods in cold weathersince it could freeze in that position.Instead, you should observe the followingtips.1. Place the select lever in “P” position.2. Use tire stops under the tires toprevent the vehicle from moving.

When the vehicle is parked in snow orwhen it snows, raise the wiper blades offthe glass to prevent damage to them.

When the vehicle has been left parkedafter use on roads heavily covered withsnow, or has been left parked during asnowstorm, icing may develop on thebrake system, which could cause poorbraking action. Check for snow or icebuildup on the suspension, disc brakesand brake hoses underneath the vehicle.

If there is caked snow or ice, remove it,being careful not to damage the discbrakes and brake hoses and ABS har-ness.

! Refueling in cold weather

To help prevent moisture from forming inthe fuel system and the risk of its freezing,use of an antifreeze additive in the fueltank is recommended during cold weather.Use only additives that are specificallydesigned for this purpose. When anantifreeze additive is used, its effect lastslonger if the tank is refilled whenever thefuel level reaches half empty.

If your SUBARU is not going to be usedfor an extended period, it is best to havethe fuel tank filled to capacity.

& Driving on snowy and icyroads

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control onslippery roads such as snowy or icyroads. This may cause loss ofvehicle control.

CAUTION

Avoid prolonged continuous drivingin snowstorms. Snow will enter theengine’s intake system and mayhinder the airflow, which could re-sult in engine shutdown or evenbreakdown.

To prevent skidding and slipping, avoidsudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high-speed driving, and sharp turning whendriving on snowy or icy roads.Always maintain ample distance betweenyour vehicle and the vehicle ahead of youto avoid the need for sudden braking.To supplement the foot brake, use theengine brake effectively to control thevehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gearwhen necessary.)Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha-

Driving tips 8-9

– CONTINUED –

8


Black plate (294,1)


8-10 Driving tips

vior can cause the wheels to lock, possiblyleading to loss of vehicle control.An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en-hances your vehicle’s braking perfor-mance on snowy and icy roads. Forinformation about braking on slipperysurfaces, refer to “ABS (Anti-lock BrakeSystem)” F7-20 and “Vehicle DynamicsControl system” F7-23.

! Wiper operation when snowing

Before driving in cold weather, make surethe wiper blades are not frozen to thewindshield or rear window. If the wiperblades are frozen to the windshield or rearwindow, use the defroster with the airflowcontrol button in the “ ” position and thetemperature control dial set for maximumwarmth until the wiper blades are com-pletely thawed out. The wiper deicer ishelpful to thaw the windshield wiperblades. To thaw out the rear wiper blade,use the rear window defogger.

When driving in snow, if frozen snow startsto stick on the surface of the windshielddespite wiper operation, use the defrosterwith the airflow control button in “ ” andthe temperature control dial set for max-imum warmth. After the windshield getswarmed enough to melt the frozen snowon it, wash it away using the windshieldwasher.

Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents thewiper from working effectively. If snow isstuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road toa safe place, then remove it. If you stopthe vehicle at road side, use the hazardwarning flasher to alert other drivers.

We recommend use of non-freezing typewiper blades (winter blades) during theseasons in which you could have snowand freezing temperatures. Blades of thistype give superior wiping performance insnowy conditions. Be sure to use bladesthat are suitable for your vehicle.

CAUTION

During high-speed driving, non-freezing type wiper blades may notperform as well as standard wiperblades. If this happens, reduce thevehicle speed.

NOTEWhen the season requiring non-freez-ing type wiper blades is over, replacethem with standard wiper blades.

& Corrosion protectionRefer to “Corrosion protection” F10-4.

& Snow tires

WARNING

. When replacing original tires withwinter (snow) tires, make sureyou use only tires of the samesize, circumference, construc-tion, brand (tread pattern), speedsymbol and load index as theoriginal tires listed on the tireplacard. Using tires of other sizesor constructions may affectspeedometer/odometer calibra-tion and clearance between thebody and tires. It also may bedangerous and lead to loss ofvehicle control.

. You must install four winter tiresthat are of the same size, circum-ferences, construction, manufac-turer, brand (tread pattern), de-gree of wear, speed symbol andload index. Mixing tires of othersizes, circumferences or con-structions may result in severemechanical damage to the drivetrain of your vehicle and mayaffect ride, handling, braking andspeedometer/odometer calibra-tion. It also may be dangerousand lead to loss of vehicle con-


Black plate (295,1)


trol.

. Do not use a combination ofradial, belted bias or bias tiressince it may cause dangeroushandling characteristics and leadto an accident.

Your vehicle is equipped with “all seasontires” which are designed to provide anadequate measure of traction, handlingand braking performance in year-rounddriving. In winter, it may be possible toenhance performance through use of tiresdesigned specifically for winter drivingconditions.If you choose to install winter tires on yourvehicle, be sure to use the correct tire sizeand type. You must install four winter tiresthat are of the same size, construction,brand and load range and you shouldnever mix radial, belted bias or bias tiressince this may result in dangerous hand-ling characteristics. When you choose atire, make sure that there is enoughclearance between the tire and vehiclebody.

Remember to drive with care at all timesregardless of the type of tires on yourvehicle.

Your vehicle comes with P255/55R18“all season tires” as original equip-

ment. You should be aware that somewinter tires with that same size desig-nation may actually be too large for thevehicle and may cause rubbing onsharp turns. Listed in the following isthe winter tire size that we recommend.

Recommended winter (snow) tire size

P255/55R18 stud less

& Tire chains

CAUTION

Tire chains cannot be used on yourvehicle because of the lack ofclearance between the tires andvehicle body.

& Rocking the vehicleIf you must rock the vehicle to free it fromsnow, sand, or mud, depress the accel-erator pedal slightly and move the selectlever back and forth between “D” and “R”repeatedly. Do not race the engine. Forthe best possible traction, avoid spinningthe wheels when trying to free the vehicle.

When the road surface is extremelyslippery, you can obtain better traction by

starting the vehicle with the transmissionin 2nd than 1st.

For information about holding the trans-mission in the 2nd position, refer to“Selection of manual mode” F7-16 and“Driving tips” F7-17.

Driving tips 8-11

8


Black plate (296,1)


8-12 Driving tips

Loading your vehicle

WARNING

Never allow passengers to ride on afolded rear seatback or in the cargoarea. Doing so may result in seriousinjury.

WARNING

. Never stack luggage or othercargo higher than the top of theseatback because it could tumbleforward and injure passengers inthe event of a sudden stop oraccident. Keep luggage or cargolow, as close to the floor as

possible.

. When you carry something insidethe vehicle, secure it wheneveryou can to prevent it from beingthrown around inside the vehicleduring sudden stops, sharp turnsor in an accident.

. Do not pile heavy loads on theroof. These loads raise the vehi-cle’s center of gravity and make itmore prone to tip over.

. Secure lengthy items properly toprevent them from shooting for-ward and causing serious injuryduring a sudden stop.

. Never exceed the maximum loadlimit. If you do, some parts onyour vehicle can break, or it canchange the way your vehiclehandles. This could result in lossof control and cause personalinjury. Also, overloading canshorten the life of your vehicle.

. Do not place anything on theextended luggage cover. Suchitems could tumble forward inthe event of a sudden stop or acollision. This could cause ser-ious injury.

CAUTION

Do not carry spray cans, containerswith flammable or corrosive liquidsor any other dangerous items insidethe vehicle.

NOTEFor better fuel economy, do not carryunneeded cargo.

& Vehicle capacity weight


Black plate (297,1)


The load capacity of your vehicle isdetermined by weight, not by availablecargo space. The maximum load you cancarry in your vehicle is shown on thevehicle placard attached to the driver’sside door pillar. It includes the total weightof the driver and all passengers and theirbelongings, any optional equipment suchas a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier,etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.

& GVWR and GAWR (GrossVehicle Weight Rating andGross Axle Weight Rating)

Certification label

The certification label attached to thedriver’s side door shows GVWR (GrossVehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR (GrossAxle Weight Rating).The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) mustnever exceed the GVWR. GVW is thecombined total of weight of the vehicle,fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, anyoptional equipment and trailer tongueload. Therefore, the GVW changes de-pending on the situation.

In addition, the total weight applied toeach axle (GAW) must never exceed theGAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be

adjusted by relocating luggage inside thevehicle.Even if the total weight of your luggage islower than the vehicle capacity weight,either front or rear GAW may exceed theGAWR, depending on the distribution ofthe luggage.When possible, the load should be evenlydistributed throughout the vehicle.If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, youshould confirm that GVW and front andrear GAWs are within the GVWR andGAWR by putting your vehicle on avehicle scale, found at a commercialweighing station.

Do not use replacement tires with a lowerload range than the originals because theymay lower the GVWR and GAWR limita-tions. Replacement tires with a higher loadrange than the originals do not increasethe GVWR and GAWR limitations.

Driving tips 8-13

– CONTINUED –

8


Black plate (298,1)


8-14 Driving tips

& Roof rails and crossbar (ifequipped)

1) Roof rails2) Crossbar kit

CAUTION

. For cargo carrying purposes, theroof rail must be used togetherwith a roof crossbar kit and theappropriate carrying attachment.The roof rail must never be usedalone to carry cargo. Otherwise,damage to the roof or paint or adangerous road hazard due toloss of cargo could result.

. When using the roof crossbar kit,make sure that the total weight ofthe crossbars, carrying attach-

ment and cargo does not exceedthe maximum load limit. Over-loading may cause damage tothe vehicle and create a safetyhazard.

The roof rails are not designed to carrycargo by themselves. Cargo can becarried after securing the roof crossbarkit to the roof rail and installing theappropriate carrying attachment. Wheninstalling the roof crossbar kit, follow themanufacturer’s instructions.

When you carry cargo on the roof usingthe roof crossbar kit and a carryingattachment, never exceed the maximumload limit as explained below. You shouldalso be careful that your vehicle does notexceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) and front and rear Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR). For informationon loading cargo into or onto your vehicle,refer to “Loading your vehicle”F8-12. Themaximum load limit of the cargo, cross-bars and carrying attachment must notexceed 150 lbs (68 kg). Place theheaviest load at the bottom, nearest theroof, and evenly distribute the cargo.Always properly secure all cargo.

! Installing carrying attachments onthe crossbars

When installing any carrying attachmentsuch as a bike carrier, ski carrier, kayakcarrier, cargo basket, etc. on the cross-bars, follow the manufacturer’s instruc-tions and make sure that the attachment issecurely fixed to the crossbars. Use onlyattachments designed specifically for thecrossbars. A set of the crossbars isdesigned to carry loads (cargo and attach-ment) of not more than 150 lbs (68 kg).Before operating the vehicle, make surethat the cargo is properly secured on theattachment.

NOTERemember that the vehicle’s center ofgravity is altered with the weight of theload on the roof, thus affecting thedriving characteristics.Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hardcornering and abrupt stops. Crosswindeffects will be increased.

! Removal and installation of thecrossbars

The crossbars can be removed when youdo not use the roof to carry cargo.


Black plate (299,1)


! To remove the crossbar

1. Loosen and remove the T-30 torx®

head screw from the top of each crossbarend support.Loosen the lower clamps.

2. Carefully raise the crossbar from roofrails.

! To install the crossbar

Front crossbar:Front crossbar has a 150 lbs (68 kg) loadlabel on left-hand side.

1) T-25 torx® head screw

1. Make sure that the T-25 torx® headscrew on the back of each crossbar endsupport is tightened correctly.2. Before placing the crossbar on the roofrails, make sure that the T-30 torx® headscrew is removed from the top of eachcrossbar end support.

3. The crossbar with a 150 lbs (68 kg)load label attached onto it is the frontcrossbar. An arrow is marked on the backof the front crossbar for correct installa-tion. Install the front crossbar so that thearrow faces the front of the vehicle.

Driving tips 8-15

– CONTINUED –

8


Black plate (300,1)


8-16 Driving tips

1) 12 in (300 mm)

4. Install the front crossbar so that thecrossbar end supports are located ap-proximately 12 in (300 mm) rearward fromthe joints between the roof rails and thefront roof rail supports.

1) Lower clamp2) T-30 torx® head screw

5. Tighten the lower clamps onto thecrossbar. Using a torque wrench, looselytighten the T-30 torx® head screws.

NOTEIt may be necessary to squeeze thelower clamp and the end supporttogether to compress the pads andgain a better alignment of the pieceswhile trying to start the screw. Use carenot to cross-thread the screw in theinsert.

6. Adjust the alignment of the crossbaron the roof rails, and if available, use a T-30 torx® bit and torque wrench and tightenthe T-30 torx® head screws to 30 to 35lbf·in (3.4 to 4.0 N·m, 0.35 to 0.41 kgf·m) oftorque (or tighten securely with the torx®

wrench provided).


Black plate (301,1)


Rear crossbar:

1) 2 in (50 mm)

Install the rear crossbar so that the cross-bar end supports are located approxi-mately 2 in (50 mm) forward from thejoints between the roof rails and the rearroof rail supports.

Install the rear crossbar in the samemanner as the front crossbar.

CAUTION

Do not carry cargo on the roof whenthe crossbars are removed. Lug-gage on the roof will be thrownforward or backward in suddenstops or rapid accelerations, result-ing in a dangerous road hazard.

NOTEBefore each use of the roof crossbar,make sure the four T-30 crossbarclamp screws have been checked,and retightened if necessary to 35 lbf·in(4.0 N·m, 0.41 kgf·m), as outlined inStep #5 above.

& Roof molding and crossbar(if equipped)

CAUTION

. For cargo carrying purposes, theroof molding must be used to-gether with a roof crossbar kitand the appropriate carrying at-tachment. Otherwise, damage tothe roof or paint or a dangerous

road hazard due to loss of cargocould result.

. When using the roof crossbar kit,make sure that the total weight ofthe crossbars, carrying attach-ment and cargo does not exceedthe maximum load limit. Over-loading may cause damage tothe vehicle and create a safetyhazard.

Cargo can be carried after securing theroof crossbar kit to the roof molding andinstalling the appropriate carrying attach-ment. When installing the roof crossbarkit, follow the manufacturer’s instructions.

When you carry cargo on the roof usingthe roof crossbar kit and a carryingattachment, never exceed the maximumload limit as explained below. You shouldalso be careful that your vehicle does notexceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) and front and rear Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR). Refer to the“Loading your vehicle” section in thischapter for information on loading cargointo or onto your vehicle. The maximumload limit of the cargo, crossbars andcarrying attachment must not exceed 150lbs (68 kg). Place the heaviest load at thebottom, nearest the roof, and evenlydistribute the cargo. Always properly

Driving tips 8-17

– CONTINUED –

8


Black plate (302,1)


8-18 Driving tips

secure all cargo.

! Installing carrying attachments onthe crossbars

When installing any carrying attachmentsuch as a bike carrier, ski carrier, kayakcarrier, cargo basket, etc. on the cross-bars, follow the manufacturer’s instruc-tions and make sure that the attachment issecurely fixed to the crossbars. Use onlyattachments designed specifically for thecrossbars. A set of the crossbars isdesigned to carry loads (cargo and attach-ment) of not more than 150 lbs (68 kg).Before operating the vehicle, make surethat the cargo is properly secured on theattachment.

NOTERemember that the vehicle’s center ofgravity is altered with the weight of theload on the roof, thus affecting thedriving characteristics.Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hardcornering and abrupt stops. Crosswindeffects will be increased.

! Removal and installation of thecrossbars

Each of the two roof moldings has twomounting points for crossbars. Eachmounting point is fitted with a cover. Usea screwdriver to remove the covers. Wheninstalling the crossbars on the roof mold-ing, follow the manufacturer’s instructions.

Trailer hitch (if equipped)

1) Trailer hitch

WARNING

. Never exceed the maximumweight specified for the trailerhitch. Exceeding the maximumweight could cause an accidentresulting in serious personal in-juries. Permissible trailer weightchanges depending on the situa-tion. For possible recommenda-tions and limitations, refer to“Trailer towing” F8-21.

. Trailer brakes are required whenthe towing load exceeds 1,000lbs (453 kg). Be sure your trailer


Black plate (303,1)


has safety chains and that eachchain will hold the trailer’s max-imum gross weight. Towing trai-lers without safety chains couldcreate a traffic safety hazard ifthe trailer separates from thehitch due to coupling damage orhitch ball damage.

. Be sure to check the hitch pinand safety pin for positive lock-ing placement before towing atrailer. If the ball mount comes offthe hitch receiver, the trailercould get loose and create atraffic safety hazard.

. Use only the ball mount suppliedwith this hitch. Use the hitch onlyas a weight carrying hitch. Do notuse with any type of weightdistributing hitch.

The maximum gross trailer weight andmaximum gross tongue weight are indi-cated in the following table.

Maximumgross trailerweight

Maximumgross tongueweight

Vehicle with-out cooling kit

2,000 lbs(906 kg)

200 lbs(90 kg)

Vehicle withcooling kit

3,500 lbs(1,587 kg)

350 lbs(158 kg)

When you tow a trailer, follow the instruc-tions in “Trailer towing” F8-21.

& Connecting a trailer1. Remove the receiver cover from thehitch receiver tube. Then insert the ballmount into the hitch receiver tube.

2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole on thehitch receiver tube so that the pin passesthrough the ball mount.

3. Insert the safety pin into the hitch pinsecurely.4. Pull the ball mount to make sure itdoes not come off the hitch receiver.

1) Hitch ball installation point2) Hooks for safety chains

Driving tips 8-19

– CONTINUED –

8


Black plate (304,1)


8-20 Driving tips

5. Use only a hitch ball that is appropriatefor the ball mount and your trailer. Thehitch ball must be securely installed on theball mount.6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.7. Connect the trailer and the hitch withsafety chains that will hold the trailer’smaximum gross weight. The chainsshould cross under the trailer tongue toprevent the tongue from dropping onto theground in case it should disconnect fromthe hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in thechains taking tight turn situations intoaccount; however, be careful not to letthem drag on the ground.

WARNING

Do not connect safety chains to partof the vehicle other than the safetychain hooks.

Hitch harness connector

8. Connect the hitch wire harness’ blackfour-pin wire connector to the towingtrailer’s wire harness.9. Confirm proper function of the hitchwire harness by individually activating thebrake, right turn signal, left turn signal,stop, and parking lights on the trailer.

NOTEAlways disconnect the trailer wire har-ness before launching or retrieving a

watercraft.

& When you do not tow a trailer. Remove the ball mount from the hitchreceiver tube and insert the receiver coveronto the hitch receiver tube.. Place the dust cap over the four-pinconnector of the hitch wire harness toprotect against possible damage.. Occasionally lubricate terminals of thefour-pin connector using the terminalgrease.


Black plate (305,1)


Trailer towing

Your vehicle is designed and intended tobe used primarily as a passenger-carryingvehicle. Towing a trailer puts additionalloads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain,brakes, tires and suspension and has anadverse effect on fuel economy.If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safetyand satisfaction depend upon proper useof correct equipment and cautious opera-tion of your vehicle. Seek the advice ofyour SUBARU dealer to assist you inpurchasing a hitch and other necessarytowing equipment appropriate for yourvehicle. In addition, be sure to follow theinstructions on correct installation and useprovided by the trailer and other towingequipment manufacturers.SUBARU assumes no responsibility forinjuries or vehicle damage that result fromtrailer towing equipment, or from anyerrors or omissions in the instructionsaccompanying such equipment or for yourfailure to follow the proper instructions.

& Warranties and maintenanceSUBARU warranties do not apply tovehicle damage or malfunction causedby trailer towing. If you use your vehicle totow a trailer, more frequent maintenancewill be required due to the additional load.

(Refer to “Maintenance schedule undersevere driving conditions” in the “Warrantyand Maintenance Booklet”.)Under no circumstances should a trailerbe towed with a new vehicle or a vehiclewith any new powertrain component (en-gine, transmission, differential, wheelbearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles(1,600 km) of driving.

& Maximum load limits

WARNING

Never exceed the maximum loadlimits explained in the following.Exceeding the maximum load limitscould cause personal injury and/orvehicle damage.

CAUTION

. Adequate size trailer brakes arerequired when the trailer and itscargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)total weight.

. Before towing a trailer, check thetrailer total weight, GVW, GAWsand tongue load. Make sure theload and its distribution in yourvehicle and trailer are accepta-

ble.

! Total trailer weight

Total trailer weight

The total trailer weight (trailer weight plusits cargo load) must never exceed themaximum weight shown in the followingtable.

Driving tips 8-21

– CONTINUED –

8


Black plate (306,1)


8-22 Driving tips

Vehicle without cooling kitConditions Maximum total trailer weight

When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

When towing a trailer with brakes. 2,000 lbs (906 kg)

When towing a trailer on a long uphill gradecontinuously for over 5 miles (8 km) with anoutside temperature of 1048F (408C) or above.

1,000 lbs (453 kg)

Vehicle with cooling kitConditions Maximum total trailer weight

When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

When towing a trailer with brakes. 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)

When towing a trailer on a long uphill gradecontinuously for over 5 miles (8 km) with anoutside temperature of 1048F (408C) or above.

1,750 lbs (794 kg)

! Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) andGross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR)

Gross Vehicle Weight

The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) mustnever exceed the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR).Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is thecombined total of the weight of the vehicle,driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch,trailer tongue load and any other optionalequipment installed on your vehicle.Therefore, the GVW changes dependingon the situation. Determine the GVW eachtime before going on a trip by putting yourvehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.GVWR is shown on the certification labellocated on the driver’s door of yourvehicle.


Black plate (307,1)


Certification label

! Gross Axle Weight (GAW) andGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

Gross Axle Weight

The total weight applied to each axle

(GAW) must never exceed the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR). The front and rearGAWs can be adjusted by relocatingpassengers and luggage inside the vehi-cle. The front and rear GAWR are alsoshown on the certification label.

Certification label

To check both GVWR and GAWR and toconfirm that the total weight and weightdistribution are within safe driving limits,you should have your vehicle and trailerweighed at a commercial weighing station.Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured toprevent a change in weight distributionwhile driving.

! Tongue load

Tongue load

WARNING

If the trailer is loaded with moreweight in the back of trailer’s axlethan in the front, the load is taken offthe rear axle of the towing vehicle.This may cause the rear wheels toskid, especially during braking orwhen vehicle speed is reduced dur-ing cornering, resulting in over-steer, spin out and/or jackknifing.

Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from8 to 11 percent of the total trailer weightand does not exceed the appropriate oneof the following maximum values.

Driving tips 8-23

– CONTINUED –

8


Black plate (308,1)


8-24 Driving tips

Vehicle without cooling kit: 200 lbs (90 kg)Vehicle with cooling kit: 350 lbs (158 kg)

1) Jack2) Bathroom scale

The tongue load can be weighed with abathroom scale as shown in the illustrationabove. When weighing the tongue load,be sure to position the towing coupler atthe height at which it would be duringactual towing, using a jack as shown.

F: Front

The tongue load can be adjusted byproper distribution of the load in the trailer.Never load the trailer with more weight inthe back than in the front; approximately60 percent of the trailer load should be inthe front and approximately 40 percent inthe rear. Also, distribute the load as evenlyas possible on both the left and rightsides.Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured toprevent a change in weight distributionwhile driving.

& Trailer hitches

WARNING

Never drill the frame or under-body

of your vehicle to install a commer-cial trailer hitch. If you do, danger-ous exhaust gas, water or mud mayenter the passenger compartmentthrough the drilled hole. Exhaustgas contains carbon monoxide, acolorless and odorless gas which isdangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.Also, drilling the frame or under-body of your vehicle could causedeterioration of strength of yourvehicle and cause corrosion aroundthe drilled hole.

CAUTION

. Do not modify the vehicle ex-haust system, brake system, orother systems when installing ahitch or other trailer towingequipment.

. Do not use axle-mounted hitchesas they can cause damage to theaxle housing, wheel bearings,wheels or tires.

Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle andtrailer.The use of a genuine SUBARU trailerhitch is recommended. A genuineSUBARU hitch is available from your


Black plate (309,1)


SUBARU dealer.If use of a non-genuine hitch is unavoid-able, be sure the hitch is suited to yourvehicle and trailer. Consult with a profes-sional hitch supplier to assist you inchoosing an appropriate hitch for yourvehicle. Be sure to follow all of the hitchmanufacturer’s instructions for installationand use.Never use a hitch that mounts only to therear bumper. The bumper is not designedto handle that type of load.For all types of hitches, regularly checkthat the hitch mounting bolts and nuts aretight.

& Connecting a trailer

! Trailer brakes

WARNING

. Adequate size trailer brakes arerequired when the trailer and itscargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)total weight.

. Do not directly connect yourtrailer’s hydraulic brake systemto the hydraulic brake system inyour vehicle. Direct connectionwould cause the vehicle’s brakeperformance to deteriorate and

could lead to an accident.

If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weightplus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs(453 kg), the trailer is required to beequipped with its own brake system.Electric brakes or surge brakes arerecommended, and must be installedproperly. Check that your trailer’s brakesconform with Federal, state/province and/or other applicable regulations. YourSUBARU’s brake system is not designedto be tapped into the trailer’s hydraulicbrake system. Please ask your SUBARUdealer and professional trailer supplier formore information about the trailer’s brakesystem.

! Trailer safety chains

WARNING

Always use safety chains betweenyour vehicle and the trailer. Towingtrailer without safety chains couldcreate a traffic safety hazard if thetrailer separates from the hitch dueto coupling damage or hitch balldamage.

In case the trailer hitch connector or hitchball should break or become discon-nected, the trailer could get loose and

create a traffic safety hazard.For safety, always connect the towingvehicle and trailer with trailer safetychains. Pass the chains crossing eachother under the trailer tongue to preventthe trailer from dropping onto the groundin case the trailer tongue should discon-nect from the hitch ball. Allow sufficientslack in the chains taking tight turnsituations into account; however, be care-ful not to let them drag on the ground.For more information about the safetychain connection, refer to the instructionsfor your hitch and trailer.

! Side mirrors

After hitching a trailer to your vehicle,check that the standard side mirrorsprovide a good rearward field of viewwithout significant blind spots. If significant

Driving tips 8-25

– CONTINUED –

8


Black plate (310,1)


8-26 Driving tips

blind spots occur with the vehicle’s stan-dard side mirrors, use towing mirrors thatconform with Federal, state/province and/or other applicable regulations.

! Trailer lights

CAUTION

Direct splicing or other improperconnection of trailer lights maydamage your vehicle’s electricalsystem and cause a malfunction ofyour vehicle’s lighting system.

Connection of trailer lights to your vehi-cle’s electrical system requires modifica-tions to the vehicle’s lighting circuit toincrease its capacity and accommodatewiring changes. To ensure the trailer lightsare connected properly, please consultyour SUBARU dealer. Check for properoperation of the turn signals, the brakelights and parking lights each time youhitch up.

! Tires

WARNING

Never tow a trailer when the tem-porary spare tire is used. The tem-porary spare tire is not designed tosustain the towing load. Use of the

temporary spare tire when towingcan result in failure of the spare tireand/or less stability of the vehicle.

Make sure that all the tires on your vehicleare properly inflated.

The recommended cold tire pressureunder trailer towing conditions is shownin “Tires” F12-8 and in “GAS STATIONREFERENCE” at the end of this manual.Adjust the rear tire pressure to therecommended pressure when the tiresare cold. Normal pressure should bemaintained in the front tires.

Trailer tire condition, size, load rating andproper inflation pressure should be inaccordance with the trailer manufacturer’sspecifications.

In the event your vehicle gets a flat tirewhen towing a trailer, ask a commercialroad service to repair the flat tire.

If you carry a regular size spare tire in yourvehicle or trailer as a precaution againstgetting a flat tire, be sure that the sparetire is firmly secured.

& Trailer towing tips

CAUTION

. Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h)when towing a trailer in hillycountry on hot days.

. When towing a trailer, steering,stability, stopping distance andbraking performance will be dif-ferent from normal operation. Forsafety’s sake, you should employextra caution when towing atrailer and you should neverspeed. You should also keep thefollowing tips in mind:

! Before starting out on a trip

. Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to-hitch mounting are in good condition. Ifany problems are apparent, do not tow thetrailer.. Check that the vehicle sits horizontallywith the trailer attached. If the vehicle istipped sharply up at the front and down atthe rear, check the total trailer weight,GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, thenconfirm that the load and its distributionare acceptable.. Check that the tire pressures arecorrect.


Black plate (311,1)


. Check that the vehicle and trailer areconnected properly. Confirm that

– the trailer tongue is connectedproperly to the hitch ball.– the trailer lights connector is con-nected properly and trailer’s brakelights illuminate when the vehicle’sbrake pedal is pressed, and that thetrailer’s turn signal lights flash whenthe vehicle’s turn signal lever is oper-ated.– the safety chains are connectedproperly.– all cargo in the trailer is securedsafely in position.– the side mirrors provide a goodrearward field of view without a sig-nificant blind spot.

. Sufficient time should be taken to learnthe “feel” of the vehicle/trailer combinationbefore starting out on a trip. In an area freeof traffic, practice turning, stopping andbacking up.

! Driving with a trailer

. You should allow for considerably morestopping distance when towing a trailer.Avoid sudden braking because it mayresult in skidding or jackknifing and loss ofcontrol.. Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns andrapid lane changes.

. Slow down before turning. Make alonger than normal turning radius becausethe trailer wheels will be closer than thevehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. Ina tight turn, the trailer could hit yourvehicle.. Crosswinds will adversely affect thehandling of your vehicle and trailer, caus-ing sway. Crosswinds can be due toweather conditions or the passing of largetrucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmlygrip the steering wheel and slow downimmediately but gradually.. When passing other vehicles, consid-erable distance is required because of theadded weight and length caused byattaching the trailer to your vehicle.

1) Left turn2) Right turn

. Backing up with a trailer is difficult andtakes practice. When backing up with atrailer, never accelerate or steer rapidly.When turning back, grip the bottom of thesteering wheel with one hand and turn it tothe left for a left turn, and turn it to the rightfor a right turn.. If the ABS warning light illuminateswhile the vehicle is in motion, stop towingthe trailer and have repairs performedimmediately by the nearest SUBARUdealer.

! Driving on grades

. Before going down a steep hill, slowdown and shift into lower gear (if neces-sary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize theengine braking effect and prevent over-heating of your vehicle’s brakes. Do notmake sudden downshifts.. When driving uphill in hot weather, theair conditioner may turn off automaticallyto protect the engine from overheating.. When driving uphill in hot weather, payattention to the water temperature gaugepointer and AT OIL TEMP warning lightbecause the engine and transmission arerelatively prone to overheating underthese conditions. If the water temperaturegauge pointer approaches the OVER-HEAT zone or the AT OIL TEMP warninglight illuminates, immediately turn off the

Driving tips 8-27

– CONTINUED –

8


Black plate (312,1)


8-28 Driving tips

air conditioner and stop the vehicle in thenearest safe location. For further instruc-tions and additional information, refer tothe following sections.

– “If you park your vehicle in anemergency” F9-2– “Engine overheating” F9-14– “Temperature gauge” F3-8– “AT OIL TEMP warning light” F3-13

NOTEThe temperature of engine coolant isless likely to rise to the OVERHEATzone in the “D” position than in themanual mode position.

. Avoid using the accelerator pedal tostay stationary on an uphill slope insteadof using the parking brake or foot brake.That may cause the transmission fluid tooverheat.

! Parking on a grade

Always block the wheels under bothvehicle and trailer when parking. Applythe parking brake firmly. You should notpark on a hill or slope. But if parking on ahill or slope cannot be avoided, youshould take the following steps.1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedaldown.2. Have someone place wheel blocksunder both the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel blocks are in place,release the regular brakes slowly until theblocks absorb the load.4. Apply the regular brakes and thenapply the parking brake; slowly releasethe regular brakes.5. Shift into “P” and shut off the engine.


Black plate (17,1)


If you park your vehicle in an emergency......... 9-2Spare tire ............................................................. 9-2

Removing the spare tire ...................................... 9-3Re-storage of spare tire ....................................... 9-4

Temporary spare tire........................................... 9-5Flat tires............................................................... 9-6

Changing a flat tire.............................................. 9-6Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ............ 9-10

Jump starting ..................................................... 9-11How to jump start............................................... 9-12

Engine overheating ........................................... 9-14If steam is coming from the enginecompartment ................................................... 9-14

If no steam is coming from the enginecompartment ................................................... 9-14

Towing ................................................................ 9-14Towing and tie-down hooks................................ 9-15Using a flat-bed truck......................................... 9-17Towing with all wheels on the ground................. 9-17

Rear gate – if the rear gate cannot beunlocked.......................................................... 9-18

Maintenance tools ............................................. 9-19Jack and jack handle ......................................... 9-19

In case of emergency

9


Black plate (316,1)


9-2 In case of emergency

If you park your vehicle in anemergency

The hazard warning flasher should beused in day or night to warn other driverswhen you have to park your vehicle underemergency conditions.Avoid stopping on the road. It is best tosafely pull off the road if a problem occurs.

The hazard warning flasher can be acti-vated regardless of the ignition switchposition.Turn on the hazard warning by pushingthe hazard warning flasher switch. Turn itoff by pushing the switch again.

NOTEWhen the hazard warning flasher is on,the turn signals do not work.

Spare tire

The spare tire is stored in the spare tireholder located under the cargo area.The spare tire holder has a hoist mechan-ism that can lower and raise the spare tireeasily.The spare tire holder is designed to carryonly the following kinds of tires.. the temporary spare tire that came withyour vehicle. a full-size flat tireA full size flat tire should be stowed in thespare tire holder in an emergency only.After having the full-size flat tire repaired,immediately swap it with the temporaryspare tire.

Before using the temporary spare tire,


Black plate (317,1)


carefully read “Temporary spare tire” F9-5for instructions and precautions.

& Removing the spare tire1. Take the wheel nut wrench and exten-sion out of the tool bag. Refer to “Main-tenance tools” F9-19.

2. Remove the subfloor storage lid in thecargo area.3. Take out the jack.4. Locate the hex-head hoist shaft endinside the hole.

5. Fit the extension onto the hex-headhoist shaft end.

6. Fit the wheel nut wrench onto theextension.7. Turn the hoist shaft end counterclock-wise with the wheel nut wrench until the

temporary spare tire is on the ground withenough cable slack to allow you to pull itout from under the vehicle.

CAUTION

. Be sure to remove (not simplykeep it open) the subfloor sto-rage lid before turning the wheelnut wrench, otherwise the lidmay be damaged.

. Do not put your fingers into thecenter hole of the temporaryspare tire while you pulling itout, because they might bepinched in between the wheeland the retainer.

8. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable

In case of emergency 9-3

– CONTINUED –

9


Black plate (318,1)



and pull it through the center of thetemporary spare tire.9. After the temporary spare tire isremoved from the cable, the cable mustbe wound up completely by turning thehoist nut shaft clockwise until you hear aclicking sound. Also visually inspect thecable to make certain that there is nolonger any slack present.

WARNING

. Do not use the extension whenturning the wheel nuts. If you did,you would not be able to achievesufficient tightening torque. Thewheel nuts could then comeloose, resulting in a seriousaccident.

. When using the spare tire hoist:

After the temporary spare tire isremoved from the cable, wind thecable up completely until theretainer at end of the cable sitsagainst the underside of thevehicle. Driving with the cablenot retracted fully could result indamage to the adjacent underfloor parts and lead to a seriousaccident.

. The spare tire holder is designedto carry only the following kindsof tires.

– the temporary spare tire thatcame with your vehicle

– a full-size flat tire

A full size flat tire should bestowed in the spare tire holderin an emergency only. After hav-ing the full-size flat tire repaired,immediately swap it with thetemporary spare tire.

Never stow a full-size tire that isnot flat in the spare tire holder.Doing so can result in damage toadjacent under floor parts andcan lead to a serious accident.

CAUTION

When using the spare tire hoist:

Do not use air tools or power toolsto turn the spare tire hoist shaft end.If you do, it could result in severemechanical damage to the spare tirehoist.

& Re-storage of spare tire1. Turn the spare tire hoist shaft endcounterclockwise with the wheel nutwrench to loosen the cable sufficientlyenough to allow the cable end retainer gothrough center hole of the temporaryspare tire.

2. Insert the retainer through the centerhole of the temporary tire (with the outside


Black plate (319,1)


of the tire facing up).

3. Turn the hoist shaft end clockwise withthe wheel nut wrench to wind the cable upcompletely until you hear a few clickingsounds. Confirm that the temporary sparetire holding cable has been wound upcompletely by shaking the temporary tire.

CAUTION

If the temporary spare tire is notstored securely, it could damageadjacent areas of the vehicle andmake an abnormal noise.

4. Place the wheel nut wrench andextension back into the tool bag and storethe jack and tool bag in their storagelocations.

5. Fit the lid of the cargo area.

CAUTION

. When stowing a flat tire in thespare tire holder, turn the hoistshaft end only slowly. If it isturned quickly, the wheel disc ofthe flat tire could be damaged.

. A full-size flat tire should bestowed in the spare tire holderin an emergency only. After hav-ing the flat tire repaired, immedi-ately swap it with the temporaryspare tire.

. Remember that the tread width ofa flat tire is wider than that of thetemporary spare tire. When car-rying a flat tire stowed in thespare tire holder, make sure thetire does not touch any obsta-cles.

Temporary spare tire

WARNING

. Never tow a trailer when thetemporary spare tire is used.The temporary spare tire is notdesigned to sustain the towingload. Use of the temporary sparetire when towing can result infailure of the spare tire and/orless stability of the vehicle andmay lead to an accident.

. When a spare tire is mounted or awheel rim is replaced without theoriginal pressure sensor/trans-mitter being transferred, the lowtire pressure warning light willilluminate steadily after blinkingfor approximately one minute.This indicates the tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS) is un-able to monitor all four roadwheels. Contact your SUBARUdealer as soon as possible fortire and sensor replacement and/or system resetting.


– CONTINUED –

9


Black plate (320,1)



CAUTION

Never use any temporary spare tireother than the original. Using othersizes may result in severe mechan-ical damage to the drive train of yourvehicle.

The temporary spare tire is smaller andlighter than a conventional tire and isdesigned for emergency use only. Re-move the temporary spare tire and re-install the conventional tire as soon aspossible because the spare tire is de-signed only for temporary use.

Check the inflation pressure of the tem-porary spare tire periodically to keep thetire ready for use. The correct pressure is60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2).

When using the temporary spare tire, notethe following.. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).. Do not put a tire chain on the temporaryspare tire. Because of the smaller tire size,a tire chain will not fit properly.. Do not use two or more temporaryspare tires at the same time.. Do not drive over obstacles. This tirehas a smaller diameter, so road clearanceis reduced.

1) Tread wear indicator bar2) Indicator location mark

. When the wear indicator appears onthe tread, replace the tire.. The temporary spare tire must be usedonly on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tiregets punctured, replace the wheel with arear wheel and install the temporary sparetire in place of the removed rear wheel.

Flat tires

If you have a flat tire while driving, neverbrake suddenly; keep driving straightahead while gradually reducing speed.Then slowly pull off the road to a safeplace.

& Changing a flat tire

WARNING

. Do not jack up the vehicle on anincline or a loose road surface.The jack can come out of thejacking point or sink into theground and this can result in asevere accident.

. Use only the jack provided withyour vehicle. The jack suppliedwith the vehicle is designed onlyfor changing a tire. Never getunder the vehicle while support-ing the vehicle with this jack.


Black plate (321,1)


. Always turn off the engine beforeraising the flat tire off the groundusing the jack. Never swing orpush the vehicle supported withthe jack. The jack can come outof the jacking point due to a joltand this can result in a severeaccident.

1. Park on a hard, level surface, when-ever possible, then stop the engine.2. Set the parking brake securely andshift in the “P” (Park) position.3. Turn on the hazard warning flasherand have everyone get out of the vehicle.

4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rearof the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire.

1) Jack handle2) Jack3) Spare tire

5. Take out the jack and jack handle.The jack and jack handle are stored underthe floor of the cargo area.6. Remove the spare tire.Refer to “Spare tire” F9-2 for its location,instructions and precautions.

Carefully read “Temporary spare tire” F9-5 and strictly follow the instructions.

NOTEMake sure the jack is well lubricatedbefore using it.

Chrome plated wheels

7. Insert the tip (wrapped in vinyl tape ora cloth) of a flat-head screwdriver into theslot between the wheel and cap. Use it toremove the cap. (Only vehicle equippedwith chrome plated wheels)


– CONTINUED –

9


Black plate (322,1)



8. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheelnut wrench but do not remove the nuts.

9. Place the jack under the side sill at thefront or rear jack-up point closest to the flattire.

Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack

head engages firmly into the jack-up point.

10. Insert the jack handle into the jack-screw, and turn the handle until the tireclears the ground. Do not raise the vehiclehigher than necessary.11. Remove the wheel nuts and the flattire.12. Remove the tire cover if the temporaryspare tire has a cover.

13. Before putting the spare tire on, cleanthe mounting surface of the wheel and hubwith a cloth.14. Put on the spare tire. Replace thewheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.


Black plate (323,1)


WARNING

Do not use oil or grease on thewheel studs or nuts when the sparetire is installed. This could cause thenuts to become loose and lead to anaccident.

15. Turn the jack handle counterclockwiseto lower the vehicle.

CAUTION

There are 2 types of wheel nutwrenches that apply to differentlengths.

For models with silver-colored alu-minum wheels, the 10.8-inch (275mm) wheel nut wrench is equippedas a maintenance tool. And formodels with optional chrome-fin-ished wheels, the 13.2-inch (335mm) wheel nut wrench is equippedas well. Confirm the equipped wheelnut wrench type when you replace atire. If the wheel nut wrench is thedifferent type, it cannot be tightenedto the specified torque.

1) The length of the wheel nut wrench

16. Confirm the length of the equippedwheel nut wrench and wheel nut tighten-ing torque. Refer to “Tires” F12-8.

17. Use the wheel nut wrench to securelytighten the wheel nuts to the specified

torque, following the tightening order in theillustration.Never use your foot on the wheel nutwrench or a pipe extension on the wrenchbecause you may exceed the specifiedtorque. Have the wheel nut torquechecked at the nearest automotive servicefacility.

WARNING

Do not use the extension whenturning the wheel nuts. If you did,you would not be able to achievesufficient tightening torque. Thewheel nuts could then come loose,resulting in a serious accident.

18. Store the flat tire in the spare tire


– CONTINUED –

9


Black plate (324,1)



holder.Refer to “Spare tire” F9-2 for its location,instructions and precautions.

CAUTION

. When stowing a flat tire in thespare tire holder, turn the hoistshaft end only slowly. If it isturned quickly, the wheel disc ofthe flat tire could be damaged.

. A full-size flat tire should bestowed in the spare tire holderin an emergency only. After hav-ing the flat tire repaired, immedi-ately swap it with the temporaryspare tire.

. Remember that the tread width ofa flat tire is wider than that of thetemporary spare tire. When car-rying a flat tire stowed in thespare tire holder, make sure thetire does not touch any obsta-cles.

WARNING

Never place a tire or tire changingtools in the passenger compartmentafter changing wheels. In a suddenstop or collisions, loose equipment

could strike occupants and causeinjury. Store the tire and all tools inthe proper place.

& Tire pressure monitoringsystem (TPMS)

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-vides the driver with the warning messageindicated by sending a signal from asensor that is installed in each wheelwhen tire pressure is severely low.The tire pressure monitoring system willactivate only when the vehicle is driven.Also, this system may not react immedi-ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (forexample, a blow-out caused running overa sharp object).

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates while driving, neverbrake suddenly and keep drivingstraight ahead while gradually redu-cing speed. Then slowly pull off theroad to a safe place. Otherwise anaccident involving serious vehicledamage and serious personal injurycould occur.

Check the pressure for all four tiresand adjust the pressure to the COLDtire pressure shown on the vehicleplacard on the door pillar on thedriver’s side. If this light still illumi-nates while driving after adjustingthe tire pressure, a tire may havesignificant damage and a fast leakthat causes the tire to lose airrapidly. If you have a flat tire, replaceit with a spare tire as soon aspossible.

When a spare tire is mounted or awheel rim is replaced without theoriginal pressure sensor/transmitterbeing transferred, the low tire pres-sure warning light will illuminatesteadily after blinking for approxi-mately one minute. This indicatesthe TPMS is unable to monitor allfour road wheels. Contact your


Black plate (325,1)


SUBARU dealer as soon as possiblefor tire and sensor replacement and/or system resetting.

Do not inject any tire liquid oraerosol tire sealant into the tires,as this may cause a malfunction ofthe tire pressure sensors.

If the light illuminates steadily afterblinking for approximately one min-ute, promptly contact a SUBARUdealer to have the system inspected.

Jump starting

WARNING

. Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID.Do not let it come in contact withthe eyes, skin, clothing or thevehicle.

If battery fluid gets on you,thoroughly flush the exposedarea with water immediately. Getmedical help if the fluid hasentered your eyes.

If battery fluid is accidentallyswallowed, immediately drink alarge amount of milk or water,and obtain immediate medicalhelp.

Keep everyone including chil-dren away from the battery.

. The gas generated by a batteryexplodes if a flame or spark isbrought near it. Do not smoke orlight a match while jump starting.

. Never attempt jump starting if thedischarged battery is frozen. Itcould cause the battery to burstor explode.

. Whenever working on or arounda battery, always wear suitable

eye protectors, and remove metalobjects such as rings, bands orother metal jewelry.

. Be sure the jumper cables andclamps on them do not haveloose or missing insulation.Do not jump start unless cablesin suitable condition are avail-able.

. A running engine can be danger-ous. Keep your fingers, hands,clothing, hair and tools awayfrom the cooling fan, belts andany other moving engine parts.Removing rings, watches andties is advisable.

. Jump starting is dangerous if it isdone incorrectly. If you are un-sure about the proper procedurefor jump starting, consult a com-petent mechanic.

When your vehicle does not start due to arun down (discharged) battery, the vehiclemay be jump started by connecting yourbattery to another battery (called thebooster battery) with jumper cables.


– CONTINUED –

9


Black plate (326,1)



& How to jump start1. Make sure the booster battery is 12volts and the negative terminal isgrounded.2. If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.3. Turn off all unnecessary lights andaccessories.4. Connect the jumper cables exactly inthe sequence illustrated.


Black plate (327,1)


(1) Connect one jumper cable to thepositive (+) terminal on the dischargedbattery.(2) Connect the other end of thejumper cable to the positive (+) term-inal of the booster battery.(3) Connect one end of the othercable to the negative (−) terminal ofthe booster battery.(4) Connect the other end of the cableto the strut mounting nut.

Make sure that the cables are not nearany moving parts and that the cableclamps are not in contact with any othermetal.5. Start the engine of the vehicle with thebooster battery and run it at moderatespeed. Then start the engine of the vehiclethat has the discharged battery.6. When finished, carefully disconnectthe cables in exactly the reverse order.


9


Black plate (328,1)



Engine overheating

WARNING

Never attempt to remove the radia-tor cap until the engine has beenshut off and has fully cooled down.When the engine is hot, the coolantis under pressure. Removing thecap while the engine is still hotcould release a spray of boiling hotcoolant, which could burn you veryseriously.

If the engine overheats, safely pull off theroad and stop the vehicle in a safe place.

& If steam is coming from theengine compartment

Turn off the engine and get everyoneaway from the vehicle until it cools down.

& If no steam is coming fromthe engine compartment

NOTEFor details about how to check thecoolant level or how to add coolant,refer to “Engine coolant” F11-11.

1. Keep the engine running at idlingspeed.

2. Open the hood to ventilate the enginecompartment. Refer to “Engine hood”F11-4.Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. Ifthe fan is not turning, immediately turn offthe engine and contact your authorizeddealer for repair.3. After the engine coolant temperaturehas dropped, turn off the engine.If the temperature gauge stays at theoverheated zone, turn off the engine.4. After the engine has fully cooled down,check the coolant level in the reservetank.If the coolant level is below the “LOW”mark, add coolant up to the “FULL” mark.5. If there is no coolant in the reservetank, add coolant to the reserve tank.Then remove the radiator cap and fill theradiator with coolant.

If you remove the radiator cap from a hotradiator, first wrap a thick cloth around theradiator cap, then turn the cap counter-clockwise slowly without pressing downuntil it stops. Release the pressure fromthe radiator. After the pressure has beenfully released, remove the cap by pressingdown and turning it.

Towing

WARNING

Never tow AWD models with thefront wheels raised off the groundwhile the rear wheels are on theground, or with the rear wheelsraised off the ground while the frontwheels are on the ground. This willcause the vehicle to spin away dueto the operation or deterioration ofthe center differential.

If towing is necessary, it is best done byyour SUBARU dealer or a commercialtowing service. Observe the followingprocedures for safety.


Black plate (329,1)


& Towing and tie-down hooksThe towing hooks should be used only inan emergency (e.g., to free a stuck vehiclefrom mud, sand or snow).

CAUTION

. Use only the specified towinghooks and tie-down hooks. Neveruse suspension parts or otherparts of the body for towing ortie-down purposes.

. Never use the tie-down hookclosest to the muffler under thevehicle for towing purposes.

. To prevent deformation to thebumper and the towing hook, donot apply excessive lateral loadto the towing hooks.

Front towing hook:1. Take out the towing hook, screwdriverand wheel nut wrench from the tool bag.

2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver in vinyltape or cloth, insert it into the gap betweenthe cover and the front bumper, and use itto pry the cover open.

NOTE. The cover is attached to the frontbumper with five lugs.. Do not remove the cover whileholding the slit.

3. Screw the towing hook into the threadhole until the threads can no longer beseen.

4. Tighten the towing hook securelyusing a jack handle.


– CONTINUED –

9


Black plate (330,1)



After towing, remove the towing hook fromthe vehicle and stow it in the tool bag.Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.

WARNING

. Do not use the towing hookexcept when towing your vehicle.

. Be sure to remove the towinghook after towing. Leaving thetowing hook mounted on thevehicle could interfere with prop-er operation of the SRS airbagsystem in a frontal collision.

Rear towing hook:1. Take out the towing hook, screwdriverand wheel nut wrench from the on boardtool bag.

2. Pry off the cover on the rear bumperusing a screwdriver, and you will find athreaded hole for attaching the towinghook.

3. Screw the towing hook into the threadhole until its thread can no longer be seen.

4. Tighten the towing hook securelyusing a wheel nut wrench.

After towing, remove the towing hook fromthe vehicle and stow it in the tool bag.Put the thread hole cover on the rearbumper.

WARNING

. Do not use the towing hookexcept when towing your vehicle.

. Be sure to remove the towinghook after towing. Leaving thetowing hook mounted on thevehicle could interfere with prop-er operation of the SRS airbagsystem in a frontal collision.

Front tie-down hooks:


Black plate (331,1)


The front tie-down hooks are locatedbetween each of the front tires and thefront bumper.

Rear tie-down hooks:

The rear tie-down hooks are located neareach of the jack-up reinforcements.

WARNING

Use the rear tie-down hooks only fordownward anchoring. If they areused to anchor the vehicle in anyother direction, cables may slip offthe hooks, possibly causing a dan-gerous situation.

& Using a flat-bed truck

This is the best way to transport yourvehicle. Use the following procedures toensure safe transportation.1. Shift the select lever into the “P”position.2. Press the parking brake pedal firmly.3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrierproperly with safety chains. Each safetychain should be equally tightened andcare must be taken not to pull the chainsso tightly that the suspension bottoms out.

& Towing with all wheels on theground

WARNING

. Never turn the ignition switch tothe “LOCK” position while thevehicle is being towed becausethe steering wheel and the direc-tion of the wheels will be locked.

. Remember that the brake boosterand power steering do not func-tion when the engine is notrunning. Because the engine isturned off, it will take greatereffort to operate the brake pedaland steering wheel.


– CONTINUED –

9


Black plate (332,1)



CAUTION

. If transmission failure occurs,transport your vehicle on a flat-bed truck.

. Do not run the engine while beingtowed using this method. Trans-mission damage could result ifthe vehicle is towed with theengine running.

. The traveling speed must belimited to less than 20 mph (30km/h) and the traveling distanceto less than 31 miles (50 km). Forgreater speeds and distances,transport your vehicle on a flat-bed truck.

1. Release the parking brake and put thetransmission in neutral.2. The ignition switch should be in the“Acc” position while the vehicle is beingtowed.3. Take up slack in the towline slowly toprevent damage to the vehicle.

Rear gate – if the rear gatecannot be unlocked

In the event that you cannot unlock therear gate by operating the power doorlocking switches or the remote keylessentry system, you can unlock it from insidethe cargo area.

1. Remove the access cover at thebottom-center of the rear gate trim usingflat-head screwdriver.2. Locate the rear gate lock release leverbehind the rear gate trim panel.

3. Unlock the rear gate by moving thelever to the right.4. Open the rear gate from outside byraising the rear gate handle.


Black plate (333,1)


Maintenance tools

Your vehicle is equipped with the followingmaintenance tools.

ScrewdriverTowing hook (eye bolt) (if equipped)Wheel nut wrenchExtension

& Jack and jack handle

The jack and jack handle is stored underthe cargo area.For how to use the jack, refer to “Flat tires”F9-6.


9


Black plate (2,1)


— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —


Black plate (19,1)


Exterior care ....................................................... 10-2Washing............................................................. 10-2Waxing and polishing ......................................... 10-3Cleaning aluminum wheels ................................. 10-3

Corrosion protection.......................................... 10-4Most common causes of corrosion ..................... 10-4To help prevent corrosion................................... 10-4

Cleaning the interior.......................................... 10-5Seat fabric......................................................... 10-5Leather seat materials........................................ 10-5Synthetic leather upholstery............................... 10-5Climate control panel, audio panel, instrumentpanel, console panel, switches, combinationmeter, and other plastic surface ....................... 10-5

Navigation monitor (if equipped) ........................ 10-6

Appearance care

10


Black plate (336,1)


10-2 Appearance care

Exterior care

& Washing

CAUTION

. When washing the vehicle, thebrakes may get wet. As a result,the brake stopping distance willbe longer. To dry the brakes,drive the vehicle at a safe speedwhile lightly pressing the brakepedal to heat up the brakes.

. Do not wash the engine compart-ment and areas adjacent to it. Ifwater enters the engine air in-take, electrical parts or the powersteering fluid reservoir, it willcause engine trouble or a mal-function of the power steering.

. Do not use any organic solventswhen washing the surface of thebulb assembly cover. However, ifa detergent with organic solventsis used to wash the cover sur-face, completely rinse off thedetergent with water. Otherwise,the cover surface may be da-maged.

. Since your vehicle is equippedwith a rear wiper, automatic car-wash brushes could become

tangled around it, damaging thewiper arm and other compo-nents. Ask the automatic car-wash operator not to let thebrushes touch the wiper arm orto fix the wiper arm on the rearwindow glass with adhesive tapebefore operating the machine.

NOTEWhen having your vehicle washed inan automatic car wash, make surebeforehand that the car wash is ofsuitable type.

The best way to preserve your vehicle’sbeauty is frequent washing. Wash thevehicle at least once a month to avoidcontamination by road grime.

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plentyof lukewarm or cold water. Do not washthe vehicle with hot water and in directsunlight.

Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, treesap, and bird droppings should be washedoff by using a light detergent, as required.If you use a light detergent, make certainthat it is a neutral detergent. Do not usestrong soap or chemical detergents. Allcleaning agents should be promptlyflushed from the surface and not allowed

to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughlywith plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe theremaining water off with a chamois or softcloth.

! Washing the underbody

Chemicals, salts and gravel used fordeicing road surfaces are extremely cor-rosive, accelerating the corrosion of un-derbody components, such as the exhaustsystem, fuel and brake lines, brakecables, floor pan and fenders, and sus-pension.Thoroughly flush the underbody and in-side of the fenders with lukewarm or coldwater at frequent intervals to reduce theharmful effects of such agents.

Mud and sand adhering to the underbodycomponents may accelerate their corro-sion.After driving off-road or muddy or sandyroads, wash the mud and sand off theunderbody.Carefully flush the suspension and axleparts, as they are particularly prone tomud and sand buildup. Do not use asharp-edged tool to remove caked mud.

NOTEBe careful not to damage brake hoses,sensor harnesses, and other partswhen washing suspension compo-


Black plate (337,1)


nents.

! Using a warm water washer

. Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm)or more between the washer nozzle andthe vehicle.. Do not wash the same area continu-ously.. If a stain will not come out easily, washby hand. Some warm water washers areof the high temperature, high pressuretype, and they can damage or deform theresin parts such as mouldings, or causewater to leak into the vehicle.

& Waxing and polishingAlways wash and dry the vehicle beforewaxing and polishing.Use a good quality polish and wax andapply them according to the manufac-turer’s instructions. Wax or polish whenthe painted surface is cool.

Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim,as well as the painted surfaces. Loss ofwax on a painted surface leads to loss ofthe original luster and also quickens thedeterioration of the surface. It is recom-mended that a coat of wax be applied atleast once a month, or whenever thesurface no longer repels water.

If the appearance of the paint has dimin-

ished to the point where the luster or tonecannot be restored, lightly polish thesurface with a fine-grained compound.Never polish just the affected area, butinclude the surrounding area as well.Always polish in only one direction. ANo. 2000 grain compound is recom-mended. Never use a coarse-grainedcompound. Coarser grained compoundshave a smaller grain-size number andcould damage the paint. After polishingwith a compound, coat with wax to restorethe original luster. Frequent polishing witha compound or an incorrect polishingtechnique will result in removing the paintlayer and exposing the undercoat. Whenin doubt, it is always best to contact yourSUBARU dealer or an auto paint specia-list.

CAUTION

Do not use any agents with organicsolvents on the surface of the bulbassembly cover. However, if a polishor wax with organic solvents isapplied to the cover surface, com-pletely wipe off the polish or wax.Otherwise, the cover surface may bedamaged.

NOTEBe careful not to block the windshieldwasher nozzles with wax when waxingthe vehicle.

& Cleaning aluminum wheels. Promptly wipe the aluminum wheelsclean of any kind of grime or agent. If dirtis left on too long, it may be difficult toclean off.. Do not use soap containing grit toclean the wheels. Be sure to use a neutralcleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughlywith water. Do not clean the wheels with astiff brush or expose them to a high-speedwashing device.. Clean the vehicle (including the alumi-num wheels) with water as soon aspossible when it has been splashed withsea water, exposed to sea breezes, ordriven on roads treated with salt or otheragents.

Appearance care 10-3

10


Black plate (338,1)



Corrosion protection

Your SUBARU has been designed andbuilt to resist corrosion. Special materialsand protective finishes have been used onmost parts of the vehicle to help maintainfine appearance, strength, and reliableoperation.

& Most common causes ofcorrosion

The most common causes of corrosionare:1. The accumulation of moisture retain-ing dirt and debris in body panel sections,cavities, and other areas.2. Damage to paint and other protectivecoatings caused by gravel and stonechips or minor accidents.

Corrosion is accelerated on the vehiclewhen:1. It is exposed to road salt or dustcontrol chemicals, or used in coastalareas where there is more salt in the air,or in areas where there is considerableindustrial pollution.2. It is driven in areas of high humidity,especially when temperatures range justabove freezing.3. Dampness in certain parts of thevehicle remains for a long time, even

though other parts of the vehicle may bedry.4. High temperatures will cause corro-sion to parts of the vehicle which cannotdry quickly due to lack of proper ventila-tion.

& To help prevent corrosionWash the vehicle regularly to preventcorrosion of the body and suspensioncomponents. Also, wash the vehiclepromptly after driving on any of thefollowing surfaces.. roads that have been salted to preventthem from freezing in winter. mud, sand, or gravel. coastal roads

After the winter has ended, it is recom-mended that the underbody be given avery thorough washing.

Before the beginning of winter, check thecondition of underbody components, suchas the exhaust system, fuel and brakelines, brake cables, suspension, steeringsystem, floor pan, and fenders. If any ofthem are found to be rusted, they shouldbe given an appropriate rust preventiontreatment or should be replaced. Contactyour SUBARU dealer to perform this kindof maintenance and treatment if you need

assistance.

Repair chips and scratches in the paint assoon as you find them.

Check the interior of the vehicle for waterand dirt accumulation under the floor matsbecause that could cause corrosion.Occasionally check under the mats tomake sure the area is dry.

Keep your garage dry. Do not park yourvehicle in a damp, poorly ventilatedgarage. In such a garage, corrosion canbe caused by dampness. If you wash thevehicle in the garage or put the vehicleinto the garage when wet or covered withsnow, that can cause dampness.

If your vehicle is operated in cold weatherand/or in areas where road salts and othercorrosive materials are used, the doorhinges and locks, and hood latch shouldbe inspected and lubricated periodically.


Black plate (339,1)


Cleaning the interior

Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climatecontrol panel, audio equipment, instru-ment panel, center console, combinationmeter panel, and switches. (Do not useorganic solvents.)

& Seat fabricRemove loose dirt, dust or debris with avacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on thefabric or hard to remove with a vacuumcleaner, use a soft blush then vacuum it.Wipe the fabric surface with a tightlywrung cloth and dry the seat fabricthoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipeusing a solution of mild soap and luke-warm water then dry thoroughly.

If the stain does not come out, try acommercially available fabric cleaner. Usethe cleaner on a hidden place and makesure it does not affect the fabric adversely.Use the cleaner according to its instruc-tions.

NOTEWhen cleaning the seat, do not usebenzine, paint thinner, or any similarmaterials.

& Leather seat materialsThe leather used by SUBARU is a highquality natural product which will retain itsdistinctive appearance and feel for manyyears with proper care.Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on thesurface can cause the material to becomebrittle and to wear prematurely. Regularcleaning with a soft, moist, natural fibercloth should be performed monthly, takingcare not to soak the leather or allow waterto penetrate the stitched seams.A mild detergent suitable for cleaningwoolen fabrics may be used to removedifficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, drycloth afterwards to restore the luster. Ifyour SUBARU is to be parked for a longtime in bright sunlight, it is recommendedthat the seats and headrests be covered,or the windows shaded, to prevent fadingor shrinkage.Minor surface blemishes or bald patchesmay be treated with a commercial leatherspray lacquer. You will discover that eachleather seat section will develop soft foldsor wrinkles, which is characteristic ofgenuine leather.

& Synthetic leather upholsteryThe synthetic leather material used on theSUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap

or detergent and water, after first vacuum-ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow thesoap to soak in for a few minutes and wipeoff with a clean, damp cloth. Commercialfoam-type cleaners suitable for syntheticleather materials may be used whennecessary.

NOTEStrong cleaning agents such as sol-vents, paint thinners, window cleaneror gasoline must never be used onleather or synthetic interior materials.

& Climate control panel, audiopanel, instrument panel,console panel, switches,combination meter, and otherplastic surface

Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climatecontrol panel, audio equipment, instru-ment panel, center console, combinationmeter panel, and switches.

NOTEDo not use organic solvents such aspaint thinners or gasoline, or strongcleaning agents that contain thosesolvents.

Appearance care 10-5

– CONTINUED –

10


Black plate (340,1)



& Navigation monitor (ifequipped)

To clean the navigation monitor, wipe itwith a silicone cloth or with a soft cloth. Ifthe navigation monitor is extremely dirty,clean it with a soft cloth moistened withneutral detergent then carefully wipe offany remaining detergent.

NOTE. Do not spray neutral detergent di-rectly onto the monitor. Doing so coulddamage the monitor’s components.. Do not wipe the monitor with a hardcloth. Doing so could scratch themonitor.. Do not use cleaning fluid that con-tains thinner, gasoline, or any othervolatile substance. Such cleaning fluidcould erase the lettering on theswitches at the bottom of the monitor.


Black plate (21,1)


Maintenance schedule ....................................... 11-3Maintenance precautions................................... 11-3

Before checking or servicing in the enginecompartment.................................................... 11-4

When you do checking or servicing in the enginecompartment while the engine is running.......... 11-4

Engine hood ....................................................... 11-4Engine compartment overview.......................... 11-6Engine oil............................................................ 11-7

Checking the oil level ......................................... 11-7Changing the oil and oil filter.............................. 11-8Recommended grade and viscosity .................... 11-9Synthetic oil....................................................... 11-9

Cooling system ................................................ 11-10Hose and connections...................................... 11-10Engine coolant ................................................. 11-11

Air cleaner element .......................................... 11-12Replacing the air cleaner element ..................... 11-12

Spark plugs ...................................................... 11-13Recommended spark plugs .............................. 11-13

Drive belts ........................................................ 11-13Automatic transmission fluid .......................... 11-14

Checking the fluid level .................................... 11-14Recommended fluid ......................................... 11-15

Front differential gear oil ................................. 11-15Checking the oil level ....................................... 11-15Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-16

Rear differential gear oil .................................. 11-16Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-16

Power steering fluid ........................................ 11-16Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-16Recommended fluid ......................................... 11-17

Brake fluid........................................................ 11-17Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-17Recommended brake fluid ............................... 11-18

Brake booster .................................................. 11-18Brake pedal ...................................................... 11-19

Checking the brake pedal free play .................. 11-19Checking the brake pedal reserve distance....... 11-19

Replacement of brake pad and lining ............ 11-19Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings ....... 11-20

Parking brake stroke ....................................... 11-20Tires and wheels.............................................. 11-21

Types of tires................................................... 11-21Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) .......... 11-21Tire inspection................................................. 11-22Tire pressures and wear .................................. 11-23Wheel balance ................................................. 11-25Wear indicators ............................................... 11-25Tire rotation direction mark.............................. 11-25Tire rotation..................................................... 11-26Tire replacement.............................................. 11-26Wheel replacement .......................................... 11-27

Aluminum wheels ............................................ 11-27Windshield washer fluid.................................. 11-28Replacement of wiper blades ......................... 11-29

Windshield wiper blade assembly..................... 11-30Windshield wiper blade rubber ......................... 11-30Rear window wiper blade assembly.................. 11-31

Maintenance and service

11


Black plate (22,1)


Maintenance and service

Rear window wiper blade rubber....................... 11-31Battery............................................................... 11-33Fuses ................................................................ 11-34Main fuse .......................................................... 11-35Installation of accessories............................... 11-36Replacing bulbs ............................................... 11-36

Headlights (models with HID headlights) ........... 11-36Headlights (models without HID headlights) ...... 11-36Parking light (right-hand side)........................... 11-38Front turn signal light (right-hand side) ............. 11-39

Front fog light.................................................. 11-39Rear combination lights ................................... 11-39Back-up light/Tail light ..................................... 11-40Rear gate light ................................................. 11-41License plate light ........................................... 11-41Dome light....................................................... 11-42Map light ......................................................... 11-43Vanity mirror light ............................................ 11-43Door step light................................................. 11-43Cargo area light ............................................... 11-44


Black plate (343,1)


Maintenance schedule

The scheduled maintenance items re-quired to be serviced at regular intervalsare shown in the “Warranty and Main-tenance Booklet”.

For details of your maintenance schedule,read the separate “Warranty and Main-tenance Booklet”.

Maintenance precautions

When maintenance and service are re-quired, it is recommended that all work bedone by an authorized SUBARU dealer.

If you perform maintenance and serviceby yourself, you should familiarize yourselfwith the information provided in thissection on general maintenance andservice for your SUBARU.

Incorrect or incomplete service couldcause improper or unsafe vehicle opera-tion. Any problems caused by impropermaintenance and service performed byyou are not eligible for warranty coverage.

WARNING

. Testing of an All-Wheel Drivemodel must NEVER be per-formed on a single two-wheeldynamometer or similar appara-tus. Attempting to do so willresult in transmission damageand in uncontrolled vehiclemovement and may cause anaccident or injuries to personsnearby.

. Always select a safe area whenperforming maintenance on yourvehicle.

. Always be very careful to avoidinjury when working on the vehi-cle. Remember that some of thematerials in the vehicle may behazardous if improperly used orhandled, for example, batteryacid.

. Your vehicle should only be ser-viced by persons fully competentto do so. Serious personal injurymay result to persons not experi-enced in servicing vehicles.

. Always use the proper tools andmake certain that they are wellmaintained.

. Never get under the vehicle sup-ported only by a jack. Always usea safety stands to support thevehicle.

. Never keep the engine running ina poorly ventilated area, such asa garage or other closed areas.

. Do not smoke or allow openflames around the fuel or battery.This will cause a fire.

. Because the fuel system is underpressure, replacement of the fuelfilter should be performed onlyby your SUBARU dealer.

. Wear adequate eye protection to

Maintenance and service 11-3

– CONTINUED –

11


Black plate (344,1)


11-4 Maintenance and service

guard against getting oil or fluidsin your eyes. If something doesget in your eyes, thoroughlywash them out with clean water.

. Do not tamper with the wiring ofthe SRS airbag system or seat-belt pretensioner system, or at-tempt to take its connectorsapart, as that may activate thesystem or it can render it inop-erative. NEVER use a circuittester for these wiring. If yourSRS airbag or seatbelt preten-sioner needs service, consultyour nearest SUBARU dealer.

& Before checking or servicingin the engine compartment

WARNING

. Always stop the engine and setthe parking brake firmly to pre-vent the vehicle from moving.

. Always let the engine cool down.Engine parts become very hotwhen the engine is running andremain hot for some time afterthe engine is stopped.

. Do not spill engine oil, enginecoolant, brake fluid or any other

fluid on hot engine components.This may cause a fire.

. Always remove the key from theignition switch. When the ignitionswitch is in the “ON” position,the cooling fan may operatesuddenly even when the engineis stopped.

& When you do checking orservicing in the engine com-partment while the engine isrunning

WARNING

A running engine can be dangerous.Keep your fingers, hands, clothing,hair and tools away from the coolingfan, belts and any other movingengine parts. Removing rings,watches and ties is advisable.

Engine hood

To open the hood:1. If the wiper blades are lifted off thewindshield, return them to their originalpositions.2. Pull the hood release knob under theinstrument panel.


Black plate (345,1)


3. Release the secondary hood releaselocated under the front grille by moving thelever toward the left.4. Lift up the hood.

To close the hood:1. Lower the hood to a point approxi-mately 20 in (50 cm) from the closedposition and then give the hood a strongpush down to make it drop.2. After closing the hood, be sure thehood is securely locked.

If this does not close the hood, release itfrom a slightly higher position. Do not pushthe hood forcibly to close it. It coulddeform the metal.

WARNING

Always check that the hood isproperly locked before you startdriving. If it is not, it might fly openwhile the vehicle is moving andblock your view, which may causean accident and serious bodily in-jury.

CAUTION

When closing the hood, be carefulnot to pinch your or other person’shands or anything else in the hood.


11


Black plate (346,1)



Engine compartment overview 1) Air cleaner element (page 11-12)2) Power steering fluid reservoir

(page 11-16)3) Differential gear oil level gauge

(page 11-15)4) Automatic transmission fluid level gauge

(page 11-14)5) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-17)6) Fuse box (page 11-34)7) Battery (page 11-33)8) Windshield washer tank (page 11-28)9) Radiator cap (page 11-11)10) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-7)11) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-11)12) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-7)


Black plate (347,1)


Engine oil

NOTE. The engine oil consumption rate isnot stabilized, and therefore cannot bedetermined until the vehicle has tra-veled at least several thousand miles(kilometers). Even after break-in, whenthe vehicle is used under severe driv-ing conditions such as those men-tioned in the “Warranty and Mainte-nance Booklet”, engine oil is con-sumed or deteriorated more quicklythan under normal driving conditions.If you drive your vehicle under thesesevere conditions, you should checkthe oil level at least at every secondfuel fill-up time, and change the oilmore frequently. Please refer to the“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”for more details.. If the oil consumption rate seemsabnormally high after the break-inperiod, for example more than 1 quartper 1,200 miles or 1 liter per 2,000kilometers, we recommend that youcontact your SUBARU dealer.

& Checking the oil levelCheck the engine oil level at each fuelstop.1. Park the vehicle on a level surface andstop the engine.

2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,and insert it again.3. Be sure the level gauge is correctlyinserted until it stops with the graphicsymbol “ ” on its top appearing asshown in the illustration.

1) Full level2) Low level3) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9

Imp qt) from the low level to the full level

4. Pull out the level gauge again andcheck the oil level on it. If it is below thelow level (L), add oil to bring the level up tothe full level (F).

CAUTION

. Use only engine oil with therecommended grade and vis-cosity.


– CONTINUED –

11


Black plate (348,1)



. Be careful not to spill engine oilwhen adding it. If oil touches theexhaust pipe, it may cause a badsmell, smoke, and/or a fire. Ifengine oil gets on the exhaustpipe, be sure to wipe it off.

If you check the oil level just after stoppingthe engine, wait a few minutes for the oil todrain back into the oil pan before checkingthe level.To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do notadd any additional oil above the full levelwhen the engine is cold.

& Changing the oil and oil filter

CAUTION

. If you change your own oil, besure to drain all the oil from thefilter before disposal.

. Do not dispose of used engine oilby placing it in the trash, or bypouring it onto the ground, intosewers, or into any body of water.Check with your local govern-ment office for the proper dis-posal options available to you.

Change the oil and oil filter according tothe maintenance schedule in the “War-

ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.The engine oil and oil filter must bechanged more frequently than listed inthe maintenance schedule when drivingon dusty roads, when short trips arefrequently made, or when driving inextremely cold weather.

1. Warm up the engine by letting theengine idle for approximately 10 minutesto ease draining the engine oil.2. Park the vehicle on a level surface andstop the engine.3. Remove the oil filler cap.

4. Drain out the engine oil by removingthe drain plug while the engine is stillwarm. The used oil should be drained intoan appropriate container and disposed ofproperly.

WARNING

Be careful not to burn yourself withhot engine oil.

5. Wipe the seating surface of the drainplug with a clean cloth and tighten itsecurely with a new sealing washer afterthe oil has completely drained out.

6. Open the access cover by removingthe five clips and turning the access covercounterclockwise. The oil filter will beexposed.


Black plate (349,1)


7. Remove the oil filter with an oil filterwrench.8. Clean the rubber seal seating area ofthe bottom of engine and install the oilfilter by hand turning. Be careful not totwist or damage the seal.9. Tighten the oil filter by the amountindicated in the following table after theseal makes contact with the bottom ofengine.

Oil filter color Part number Amount of ro-tation

Black 15208AA031 3/4 rotation

CAUTION

. Never over tighten the oil filterbecause that can result in an oil

leak.

. Thoroughly wipe off any engineoil that has spilled over theexhaust pipe and/or under-cover.If left unremoved, the oil couldcatch fire.

10. Reinstall the cover under the oil filter.11. Pour engine oil through the filler neck.For the oil capacity guideline, refer to“Engine oil” F12-4. The necessary quan-tity of oil depends on the quantity of oil thathas been drained. The quantity of drainedoil differs slightly depending on the tem-perature of the oil and the time the oil isleft flowing out. After refilling the enginewith oil, therefore, you must use the levelgauge to confirm that the level is correct.12. Start the engine and make sure that nooil leaks appear around the filter’s rubberseal and drain plug.13. Run the engine until it reaches thenormal operating temperature. Then stopthe engine and wait a few minutes to allowthe oil drain back. Check the oil levelagain and if necessary, add more engineoil.

& Recommended grade andviscosity

CAUTION

Use only engine oil with the recom-mended grade and viscosity.

Refer to “Engine oil” F12-4.

NOTEEngine oil viscosity (thickness) affectsfuel economy. Oils of lower viscosityprovide better fuel economy. However,in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity isrequired to properly lubricate the en-gine.

& Synthetic oilYou should use synthetic engine oil thatmeets the same requirements given forconventional engine oil. When usingsynthetic oil, you must use oil of the sameclassification, viscosity and grade shownin this Owner’s Manual. Refer to “Engineoil” F12-4. Also, you must follow the oiland filter changing intervals shown in theWarranty and Maintenance booklet.

NOTESynthetic oil of the grade and viscositynoted in chapter 12 is the recom-


– CONTINUED –

11


Black plate (350,1)



mended engine oil for optimum engineperformance. Conventional oil may beused if synthetic oil is unavailable.

Cooling system

WARNING

Never attempt to remove the radia-tor cap until the engine has beenshut off and has cooled downcompletely. Since the coolant isunder pressure, you may sufferserious burns from a spray of boil-ing hot coolant when the cap isremoved.

CAUTION

. Vehicles are filled at the factorywith SUBARU Super Coolant thatdoes not require the first changefor 11 years/137,500 miles (11years/220,000 km). This coolantshould not be mixed with anyother brand or type of coolantduring this period. Mixing with adifferent coolant will reduce thelife of the coolant. Should it benecessary to top off the coolantfor any reason, use onlySUBARU Super Coolant.

If the SUBARU Super Coolant isdiluted with another brand ortype, the maintenance interval is

shortened to that of the mixingcoolant.

. Do not splash the engine coolantover painted parts. The alcoholcontained in the engine coolantmay damage the paint surface.

& Hose and connectionsYour vehicle employs an electric coolingfan which is thermostatically controlled tooperate when the engine coolant reachesa specific temperature.If the radiator cooling fan does not operateeven when the engine coolant tempera-ture gauge exceeds the normal operatingrange, the cooling fan circuit may bedefective. Check the fuse and replace itif necessary. If the fuse is not blown, havethe cooling system checked by yourSUBARU dealer.

If frequent addition of coolant is neces-sary, there may be a leak in the enginecooling system. It is recommended thatthe cooling system and connections bechecked for leaks, damage, or looseness.


Black plate (351,1)


& Engine coolant

! Checking the coolant level

Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.1. Check the coolant level on the outsideof the reservoir while the engine is cool.2. If the level is close to or lower than the“LOW” level mark, add coolant up to the“FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank isempty, remove the radiator cap and refillas required.

3. After refilling the reserve tank and theradiator, reinstall the caps and check thatthe rubber gaskets inside the radiator capare in the proper position.

CAUTION

. Be careful not to spill enginecoolant when adding it. If coolanttouches the exhaust pipe, it maycause a bad smell, smoke, and/ora fire. If engine coolant gets onthe exhaust pipe, be sure to wipeit off.

. Do not splash the engine coolantover painted parts. The alcoholcontained in the engine coolantmay damage the paint surface.

! Changing the coolant

It may be difficult to change the coolant.Have the coolant changed by yourSUBARU dealer if necessary.

The coolant should be changed accordingto the maintenance schedule in the“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.


11


Black plate (352,1)



Air cleaner element

WARNING

Do not operate the engine with theair cleaner element removed. The aircleaner element not only filtersintake air but also stops flames ifthe engine backfires. If the aircleaner element is not installedwhen the engine backfires, youcould be burned.

CAUTION

When replacing the air cleaner ele-ment, use a genuine SUBARU aircleaner element. If it is not used,there is the possibility of causing anegative effect to the engine.

The air cleaner element functions as afilter screen. When the element is perfo-rated or removed, engine wear will beexcessive and engine life shortened.

It is unnecessary to clean or wash theelement.

& Replacing the air cleanerelement

Replace the air cleaner element accordingto the maintenance schedule in the“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Un-der extremely dusty conditions, replace itmore frequently. It is recommended thatyou always use genuine SUBARU parts.

1) Connector2) Clamp3) Air intake boot4) Clip

1. Unplug the connector that is attachedto the top of the air cleaner case.2. Loosen the screw on the clamp andpull the air intake boot out of the aircleaner case.3. Unsnap the two clips holding the air

cleaner case cover.

4. Open the air cleaner case cover andremove the air cleaner element.5. Clean the inside of the air cleaner caseand case cover with a damp cloth andinstall a new air cleaner element.


Black plate (353,1)


6. To install the air cleaner case cover,insert the three projections on the aircleaner case cover into the slits on theair cleaner case.7. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Spark plugs

It may be difficult to replace the sparkplugs. It is recommended that you havethe spark plugs replaced by yourSUBARU dealer.

The spark plugs should be replacedaccording to the maintenance schedulein the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-let”.

& Recommended spark plugsRefer to “Electrical system” F12-7.

Drive belts

The alternator, power steering pump, andair conditioner compressor depend ondrive belts. Satisfactory performance re-quires that belt tension be correct.It is unnecessary to check belt tensionperiodically because your engine isequipped with an automatic belt tensionadjuster. However, replacement of the beltshould be done according to the main-tenance schedule in the “Warranty andMaintenance Booklet”. Consult yourSUBARU dealer for replacement.If a belt is loose, cracked, or worn, contactyour SUBARU dealer.


11


Black plate (354,1)



Automatic transmission fluid

& Checking the fluid levelThe automatic transmission fluid expandslargely as its temperature rises; the fluidlevel differs according to fluid temperature.Therefore, there are two different scalesfor checking the level of hot fluid and coldfluid on the level gauge.

Though the fluid level can be checkedwithout warming up the fluid on the“COLD” range, we recommend checkingthe fluid level when the fluid is at operatingtemperature.

! Checking the fluid level when thefluid is hot

Check the fluid level monthly.1. Drive the vehicle several miles to raisethe temperature of the transmission fluidup to normal operating temperature; 158to 1768F (70 to 808C) is normal.2. Park the vehicle on a level surface andset the parking brake.3. First shift the select lever in eachposition. Then shift it in the “P” position,and run the engine at idling speed.

1) Yellow handle

1) HOT range2) COLD range3) Upper level4) Lower level

4. Pull out the level gauge and check the

fluid level on the gauge. If it is below thelower level on the “HOT” range, add therecommended automatic transmissionfluid up to the upper level.

! Checking the fluid level when thefluid is cold

When the fluid level has to be checkedwithout time to warm up the automatictransmission, check to see that the fluidlevel is between the lower level and upperlevel on the “COLD” range. If it is belowthat range, add fluid up to the upper level.Be careful not to overfill.

CAUTION

Be careful not to spill automatictransmission fluid when adding it.If automatic transmission fluidtouches the exhaust pipe, it maycause a bad smell, smoke, and/or afire. If automatic transmission fluidgets on the exhaust pipe, be sure towipe it off.


Black plate (355,1)


& Recommended fluidRefer to “Fluids” F12-7.

NOTEUsing any non-specified type of auto-matic transmission fluid could result indamage inside the transmission. Whenreplacing the automatic transmissionfluid, be sure to use the specified type.

Front differential gear oil

& Checking the oil level

1) Yellow handle

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface andstop the engine.2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,and insert it again.

1) Upper level2) Lower level

3. Pull out the level gauge again andcheck the oil level on it. If it is below thelower level, add oil to bring the level up tothe upper level.

CAUTION

Be careful not to spill front differ-ential gear oil when adding it. If oiltouches the exhaust pipe, it maycause a bad smell, smoke, and/or afire. If oil gets on the exhaust pipe,be sure to wipe it off.


– CONTINUED –

11


Black plate (356,1)




Each oil manufacturer has its own baseoils and additives. Never use differentbrands together. For details, refer to “Frontdifferential and rear differential gear oil”F12-6.

Rear differential gear oil

There is no oil level gauge. To check therear differential gear oil level, consult yourSUBARU dealer for inspection.


Each oil manufacturer has its own baseoils and additives. Never use differentbrands together. For details, refer to “Frontdifferential and rear differential gear oil”F12-6.

Power steering fluid

& Checking the fluid level

WARNING

Be careful not to burn yourselfbecause the fluid may be hot.

CAUTION

. When power steering fluid isbeing added, use only clean fluid,and be careful not to allow anydirt into the tank. And never usedifferent brands together.

. Be careful not to spill powersteering fluid when adding it. If


Black plate (357,1)


power steering fluid touches theexhaust pipe, it may cause a badsmell, smoke, and/or a fire. Ifpower steering fluid gets on theexhaust pipe, be sure to wipe itoff.

The power steering fluid expands greatlyas its temperature rises; the fluid leveldiffers according to fluid temperature.Therefore, the reservoir tank has twodifferent checking ranges for hot and coldfluids.

Check the power steering fluid levelmonthly.1. Park the vehicle on a level surface,and stop the engine.2. Check the fluid level of the reservoirtank.When the fluid is hot after the vehicle hasbeen run: Check that the oil level isbetween “HOT MIN” and “HOT MAX” onthe surface of the reservoir tank.When the fluid is cool before the vehicle isrun: Check that the oil level is between“COLD MIN” and “COLD MAX” on thesurface of the reservoir tank.3. If the fluid level is lower than theapplicable “MIN” line, add the recom-mended fluid as necessary to bring thelevel between the “MIN” and “MAX” line.

If the fluid level is extreme low, it mayindicate possible leakage. Consult yourSUBARU dealer for inspection.

& Recommended fluidRefer to “Fluids” F12-7.

Brake fluid

& Checking the fluid level

WARNING

. Never let brake fluid contact youreyes because brake fluid can beharmful to your eyes. If brakefluid gets in your eyes, immedi-ately flush them thoroughly withclean water. For safety, whenperforming this work, wearingeye protection is advisable.

. Brake fluid absorbs moisturefrom the air. Any absorbed moist-ure can cause a dangerous lossof braking performance.

. If the vehicle requires frequentrefilling, there may be a leak. Ifyou suspect a problem, have thevehicle checked at your SUBARUdealer.

CAUTION

. When adding brake fluid, be care-ful not to allow any dirt into thereservoir.

. Never splash the brake fluid overpainted surfaces or rubber parts.


– CONTINUED –

11


Black plate (358,1)



Alcohol contained in the brakefluid may damage them.

. Be careful not to spill brake fluidwhen adding it. If brake fluidtouches the exhaust pipe, it maycause a bad smell, smoke, and/ora fire. If brake fluid gets on theexhaust pipe, be sure to wipe itoff.

Check the fluid level monthly.

Check the fluid level on the outside of thereservoir. If the level is below “MIN”, addthe recommended brake fluid to “MAX”.Use only brake fluid from a sealedcontainer.

& Recommended brake fluidRefer to “Fluids” F12-7.

CAUTION

Never use different brands of brakefluid together. Also, avoid mixingDOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even ifthey are the same brand.

Brake booster

If the brake booster does not operate asdescribed in the following, have it checkedby your SUBARU dealer.1. With the engine off, depress the brakepedal several times, applying the samepedal force each time. The distance thepedal travels should not vary.2. With the brake pedal depressed, startthe engine. The pedal should moveslightly down to the floor.3. With the brake pedal depressed, stopthe engine and keep the pedal depressedfor 30 seconds. The pedal height shouldnot change.4. Start the engine again and run forapproximately 1 minute then turn it off.Depress the brake pedal several times tocheck the brake booster. The brakebooster operates properly if the pedalstroke decreases with each depression.


Black plate (359,1)


Brake pedal

Check the brake pedal free play andreserve distance according to the main-tenance schedule in the “Warranty andMaintenance Booklet”.

& Checking the brake pedalfree play

1) 0.02 – 0.08 in (0.5 – 2.0 mm)

Stop the engine and firmly depress thebrake pedal several times. Lightly pull thebrake pedal up with one finger to checkthe free play with a force of less than 2 lbf(10 N, 1 kgf).If the free play is not within properspecification, contact your SUBARU deal-er.

& Checking the brake pedalreserve distance

1) More than 2.16 in (55 mm)

Depress the pedal with a force of approxi-mately 66 lbf (294 N, 30 kgf) and measurethe distance between the upper surface ofthe pedal pad and the floor.When the measurement is smaller thanthe specification, or when the pedal doesnot operate smoothly, contact with yourSUBARU dealer.

Replacement of brake padand lining

CAUTION

If you continue to drive despite thescraping noise from the audiblebrake pad wear indicator, it willresult in the need for costly brakerotor repair or replacement.

The disc brakes have audible wearindicators on the brake pads. If the brakepads wear close to their service limit, thewear indicator makes a very audiblescraping noise when the brake pedal isapplied.

If you hear this scraping noise each time


– CONTINUED –

11


Black plate (360,1)



you apply the brake pedal, have the brakepads serviced by your SUBARU dealer assoon as possible.

& Breaking-in of new brakepads and linings

When replacing the brake pad or lining,use only genuine SUBARU parts. Afterreplacement, the new parts must bebroken in as follows.

! Brake pad and lining

While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40mph (50 to 65 km/h), step on the brakepedal lightly. Repeat this five or moretimes.

! Parking brake lining

WARNING

A safe location and situation shouldbe selected for break-in driving.

CAUTION

Pressing the parking brake pedaltoo forcefully may cause the rearwheels to lock. To avoid this, becertain to press the pedal slowlyand gently.

1. Drive the vehicle at a speed ofapproximately 22 mph (35 km/h).2. Depress the parking brake pedalSLOWLY and GENTLY. (Pressing with aforce of approximately 34 lbf [150 N, 15kgf].)3. Drive the vehicle for approximately220 yards (200 meters) in this condition.4. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parkingbrake to cool down. Repeat this proce-dure.5. Check the parking brake stroke. If theparking brake stroke is out of the specifiedrange, adjust it by turning the adjusting nutlocated on the parking brake pedal.

Parking brake stroke:

5 – 6 notches / 67 lbf (300 N, 30 kgf)

Parking brake stroke

Check the parking brake stroke accordingto the maintenance schedule in the“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.When the parking brake is properlyadjusted, braking power is fully appliedby depressing the pedal five to six notchesgently but firmly (approximately 67 lbf [300N, 30 kgf]). If the parking brake pedalstroke is not within the specified range,have the brake system checked andadjusted at your SUBARU dealer.


Black plate (361,1)


Tires and wheels

& Types of tiresYou should be familiar with type of tirespresent on your vehicle.

! All season tires

The factory-installed tires on your newvehicle are all season tires.All season tires are designed to providean adequate measure of traction, handlingand braking performance in year-rounddriving including snowy and icy roadconditions. However all season tires donot offer as much traction performance aswinter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snowor on icy roads.All season tires are identified by “ALLSEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) onthe tire sidewall.

! Summer tires

Summer tires are high-speed capabilitytires best suited for highway driving underdry conditions.Summer tires are inadequate for drivingon slippery roads such as on snow-covered or icy roads.If you drive your vehicle on snow-coveredor icy roads, we strongly recommend theuse of winter (snow) tires.When installing winter tires, be sure to

replace all four tires.

! Winter (snow) tires

Winter tires are best suited for driving onsnow-covered and icy roads. Howeverwinter tires do not perform as well assummer tires and all season tires on roadsother than snow-covered and icy roads.

& Tire pressure monitoringsystem (TPMS)

The tire pressure monitoring system pro-vides the driver with a warning messageby sending a signal from a sensor that isinstalled in each wheel when tire pressureis severely low. The tire pressure monitor-ing system will activate only when thevehicle is driven. Also, this system maynot react immediately to a sudden drop intire pressure (for example, a blow-outcaused by running over a sharp object).

If you adjust the tire pressures in a warmgarage and will then drive the vehicle incold outside air, the resulting drop in tirepressures may cause the low tire pressurewarning light to illuminate. To avoid thisproblem when adjusting the tire pressuresin a warm garage, inflate the tires topressures higher than those shown on thetire placard. Specifically, inflate them by anextra 1 psi (6.9 kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm2) forevery difference of 108F (5.68C) between

the temperature in the garage and thetemperature outside. By way of example,the following table shows the required tirepressures that correspond to various out-side temperatures when the temperaturein the garage is 608F (15.68C).

Standard tire pressures:Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)

Outsidetemperature

Adjusted pressure[psi (kPa, kgf/cm2)]

Front Rear

308F (−18C) 36 (250, 2.5) 35 (240, 2.4)

108F (−128C)38

(265, 2.65)37

(255, 2.55)

−108F(−238C) 40 (280, 2.8) 39 (270, 2.7)

If the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates when you drive the vehicle incold outside air after adjusting the tirepressures in a warm garage, re-adjust thetire pressures using the method describedabove. Then, increase the vehicle speedto at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check tosee that the low tire pressure warning lightturns off a few minutes later. If the low tirepressure warning light does not turn off,the tire pressure monitoring system may


– CONTINUED –

11


Black plate (362,1)



not be functioning normally. In this event,go to a SUBARU dealer to have thesystem inspected as soon as possible.

While the vehicle is driven, friction be-tween tires and the road surface causesthe tires to warm up. After illumination ofthe low tire pressure warning light, anyincrease in the tire pressures caused byan increase in the outside air temperatureor by an increase in the temperature in thetires can cause the low tire pressurewarning light to turn off.

System resetting is necessary when thewheels are changed (for example, aswitch to snow tires) and new TPMSvalves are installed on the newly fittedwheels. Have this work performed by aSUBARU dealer following wheel replace-ment.

It may not be possible to install TPMSvalves on certain wheels that are on themarket. Therefore, if you change thewheels (for example, a switch to snowtires), use wheels that have the same partnumber as the standard-equipmentwheels. Without four operational TPMSvalve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMSwill not fully function and the warning lightin the instrument panel will illuminatesteadily after blinking for approximatelyone minute.

When a tire is replaced, adjustments arenecessary to ensure continued normaloperation of the tire pressure monitoringsystem. As with wheel replacement, there-fore, you should have the work performedby a SUBARU dealer.

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning lightdoes not illuminate briefly after theignition switch is turned ON or thelight illuminates steadily after blink-ing for approximately one minute,you should have your Tire PressureMonitoring System checked at aSUBARU dealer as soon as possi-ble.

If this light illuminates while driving,never brake suddenly and keepdriving straight ahead while gradu-ally reducing speed. Then slowlypull off the road to a safe place.Otherwise an accident involvingserious vehicle damage and seriouspersonal injury could occur.

If this light still illuminates whiledriving after adjusting the tire pres-sure, a tire may have significantdamage and a fast leak that causesthe tire to lose air rapidly. If you havea flat tire, replace it with a spare tire

as soon as possible.

When a spare tire is mounted or awheel rim is replaced without theoriginal pressure sensor/transmitterbeing transferred, the low tire pres-sure warning light will illuminatesteadily after blinking for approxi-mately one minute. This indicatesthe TPMS is unable to monitor allfour road wheels. Contact yourSUBARU dealer as soon as possiblefor tire and sensor replacement and/or system resetting. If the lightilluminates steadily after blinkingfor approximately one minute,promptly contact a SUBARU dealerto have the system inspected.

& Tire inspectionCheck on a daily basis that the tires arefree from serious damage, nails, andstones. At the same time, check the tiresfor abnormal wear.Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi-ately if you find any problem.

NOTE. When the wheels and tires strikecurbs or are subjected to harsh treat-ment as when the vehicle is driven on arough surface, they can suffer damage


Black plate (363,1)


that cannot be seen with the naked eye.This type of damage does not becomeevident until time has passed. Try notto drive over curbs, potholes or onother rough surfaces. If doing so isunavoidable, keep the vehicle’s speeddown to a walking pace or less, andapproach the curbs as squarely aspossible. Also, make sure the tires arenot pressed against the curb when youpark the vehicle.. If you feel unusual vibration whiledriving or find it difficult to steer thevehicle in a straight line, one of thetires and/or wheels may be damaged.Drive slowly to the nearest authorizedSUBARU dealer and have the vehicleinspected.

& Tire pressures and wearMaintaining the correct tire pressureshelps to maximize the tires’ service livesand is essential for good running perfor-mance. Check and, if necessary, adjustthe pressure of each tire (including thespare) at least once a month (for example,during a fuel stop) and before any longjourney.

Check the tire pressures when the tiresare cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjustthe tire pressures to the values shown onthe tire placard. The tire placard is locatedon the door pillar on the driver’s side.

Driving even a short distance warms upthe tires and increases the tire pressures.Also, the tire pressures are affected by theoutside temperature. It is best to check tirepressure outdoors before driving thevehicle.

When a tire becomes warm, the air insideit expands, causing the tire pressure toincrease. Be careful not to mistakenlyrelease air from a warm tire to reduce itspressure.

NOTE. The air pressure in a tire increasesby approximately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3kgf/cm2) when the tire becomes warm.. The tires are considered cold whenthe vehicle has been parked for at least3 hours or has been driven less than 1mile (1.6 km).

WARNING

Do not let air out of warm tires toadjust pressure. Doing so will resultin low tire pressure.

Incorrect tire pressures detract from con-trollability and ride comfort, and theycause the tires to wear abnormally.


– CONTINUED –

11


Black plate (364,1)



. Correct tire pressure (tread wornevenly)

Roadholding is good, and steering isresponsive. Rolling resistance is low, sofuel consumption is also lower.

. Abnormally low tire pressure (treadworn at shoulders)

Rolling resistance is high, so fuel con-sumption is also higher.

. Abnormally high tire pressure (treadworn in center)

Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tiremagnifies the effects of road surfacebumps and dips, possibly resulting invehicle damage.

WARNING

Driving at high speeds with exces-sively low tire pressures can causethe tires to deform severely and torapidly become hot. A sharp in-crease in temperature could causetread separation, and destruction ofthe tires. The resulting loss ofvehicle control could lead to anaccident.


Black plate (365,1)


& Wheel balanceEach wheel was correctly balanced whenyour vehicle was new, but the wheels willbecome unbalanced as the tires becomeworn during use. Wheel imbalance causesthe steering wheel to vibrate slightly atcertain vehicle speeds and detracts fromthe vehicle’s straight-line stability. It canalso cause steering and suspension sys-tem problems and abnormal tire wear. Ifyou suspect that the wheels are notcorrectly balanced, have them checkedand adjusted by your SUBARU dealer.Also have them adjusted after tire repairsand after tire rotation.

CAUTION

Loss of correct wheel alignmentcauses the tires to wear on one sideand reduces the vehicle’s runningstability. Contact your SUBARUdealer if you notice abnormal tirewear.

NOTEThe suspension system is designed tohold each wheel at a certain alignment(relative to the other wheels and to theroad) for optimum straight-line stabilityand cornering performance.

& Wear indicators

1) New tread2) Worn tread3) Tread wear indicator

Each tire incorporates a tread wearindicator, which becomes visible whenthe depth of the tread grooves decreasesto 0.071 in (1.8 mm). A tire must bereplaced when the tread wear indicatorappears as a solid band across the tread.

WARNING

When a tire’s tread wear indicatorbecomes visible, the tire is wornbeyond the acceptable limit andmust be replaced immediately. Witha tire in this condition, driving athigh speeds in wet weather can

cause the vehicle to hydroplane.The resulting loss of vehicle controlcan lead to an accident.

NOTEFor safety, inspect the tire tread reg-ularly and replace the tires before theirtread wear indicators become visible.

& Tire rotation direction mark

Example of tire rotation direction mark1) Front

If the tire has the rotation directionspecification, the tire rotation directionmark is placed on its sidewall.When you install a tire that has the tirerotation direction mark, install the tire with


– CONTINUED –

11


Black plate (366,1)



the direction mark facing forward.

& Tire rotation

Vehicles equipped with 4 non-unidirec-tional tires1) Front

Vehicles equipped with unidirectional tires1) Front

Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel. Tomaximize the life of each tire and ensurethat the tires wear uniformly, it is best torotate the tires every 7,500 miles (12,000km). Move the tires to the positions shownin the illustration each time they arerotated.Replace any damaged or unevenly worntire at the time of rotation. After tirerotation, adjust the tire pressures andmake sure the wheel nuts are correctlytightened.

After driving approximately 600 miles(1,000 km), check the wheel nuts againand retighten any nut that has becomeloose.

& Tire replacementThe wheels and tires are important andintegral parts of your vehicle’s design;they cannot be changed arbitrarily. Thetires fitted as standard equipment areoptimally matched to the characteristicsof the vehicle and were selected to givethe best possible combination of runningperformance, ride comfort, and servicelife. It is essential for every tire to have asize and construction matching thoseshown on the tire placard and to have aspeed symbol and load index matchingthose shown on the tire placard.

Using tires of a non-specified size detractsfrom controllability, ride comfort, brakingperformance, speedometer accuracy andodometer accuracy. It also creates incor-rect body-to-tire clearances and inappro-priately changes the vehicle’s groundclearance.

All four tires must be the same in terms ofmanufacturer, brand (tread pattern), con-struction, and size. You are advised toreplace the tires with new ones that areidentical to those fitted as standard equip-ment.

For safe vehicle operation, SUBARUrecommends replacing all four tires atthe same time.


Black plate (367,1)


WARNING

. When replacing a tire, you mustuse a tire that is of the same size,circumference, construction,brand (tread pattern), speed sym-bol and load index as the originaltires listed on the tire placard.Using tires of other sizes, cir-cumferences or constructionsmay result in severe mechanicaldamage to the drive train of yourvehicle and may affect ride,handling, braking, speedometer/odometer calibration, and clear-ance between the body and tires.It also may be dangerous andlead to loss of vehicle control.

. You must install four tires that areof the same size, circumference,construction, manufacturer,brand (tread pattern), degree ofwear, speed symbol and loadindex. Mixing tires of differenttypes, sizes or degrees of wearcan result in damage to thevehicle’s power train. Use ofdifferent types or sizes of tirescan also dangerously reducecontrollability and braking per-formance and can lead to anaccident.

. Use only radial tires. Do not useradial tires together with beltedbias tires and/or bias-ply tires.Doing so can dangerously re-duce controllability, resulting inan accident.

& Wheel replacementWhen replacing wheels due, for example,to damage, make sure the replacementwheels match the specifications of thewheels that are fitted as standard equip-ment. Replacement wheels are availablefrom SUBARU dealers.

WARNING

Use only those wheels that arespecified for your vehicle. Wheelsnot meeting specifications couldinterfere with brake caliper opera-tion and may cause the tires to rubagainst the wheel well housing dur-ing turns. The resulting loss ofvehicle control could lead to anaccident.

Aluminum wheels

. Aluminum wheels can be scratchedand damaged easily. Handle them care-fully to maintain their appearance, perfor-mance, and safety.. When any of the wheels are removedand replaced for tire rotation or to changea flat tire, always check the tightness ofthe wheel nuts after driving approximately600 miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose,tighten it to the specified torque.

– For the wheel nut tightening torque,refer to “Tires” F12-8.– For the wheel nut tightening proce-dure, refer to “Changing a flat tire” F9-6.

. Never apply oil to the threaded parts,wheel nuts, or tapered surface of thewheel.. Never let the wheel rub against sharpprotrusions or curbs.. When wheel nuts, balance weights, orthe center cap is replaced, be sure toreplace them with genuine SUBARU partsdesigned for the specific wheel.


11


Black plate (368,1)



Windshield washer fluid

CAUTION

Never use engine coolant as washerfluid because it could cause paintdamage.

If you spray washer fluid on the windshieldbut the windshield washer fluid warninglight illuminates or the supply of washerfluid appears to diminish, add washer fluidin the tank.

Remove the washer tank filler cap, thenadd washer fluid until it reaches the“FULL” mark on the tank.After adding washer fluid, make sure thewindshield washer fluid warning light hasturned off.Use windshield washer fluid. If windshieldwasher fluid is unavailable use cleanwater.In areas where water freezes in winter,use an anti-freeze type windshield washerfluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluidcontains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-perature varies according to how much itis diluted, as indicated in the followingtable.

Washer FluidConcentration

FreezingTemperature

30% 10.48F (−128C)

50% −48F (−208C)

100% −498F (−458C)

CAUTION

Never use engine coolant as washerfluid because it could cause paintdamage.

In order to prevent freezing of washerfluid, check the freezing temperatures inthe table above when adjusting the fluidconcentration to the outside temperature.If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid witha different concentration from the oneused previously, purge the old fluid fromthe piping between the reservoir tank andwasher nozzles by operating the washerfor a certain period of time. Otherwise, ifthe concentration of the fluid remaining inthe piping is too low for the outsidetemperature, it may freeze and block thenozzles.

CAUTION

. Adjust the washer fluid concen-tration appropriately for the out-


Black plate (369,1)


side temperature. If the concen-tration is inappropriate, sprayedwasher fluid may freeze on thewindshield and obstruct yourview, and the fluid may freeze inthe reservoir tank.

. State or local regulations onvolatile organic compounds mayrestrict the use of methanol, acommon windshield washer anti-freeze additive. Washer fluidscontaining non-methanol anti-freeze agents should be usedonly if they provide cold weatherprotection without damagingyour vehicle’s paint, wiper bladesor washer system.

Replacement of wiper blades

Grease, wax, insects, or other materialson the windshield or the wiper bladeresults in jerky wiper operation and streak-ing on the glass. If you cannot remove thestreaks after operating the windshieldwasher or if the wiper operation is jerky,clean the outer surface of the windshield(or rear window) and the wiper bladesusing a sponge or soft cloth with a neutraldetergent or mild abrasive cleaner. Aftercleaning, rinse the windshield and wiperblades with clean water. The windshield isclean if beads do not form when you rinsethe windshield with water.

CAUTION

. Do not clean the wiper bladeswith gasoline or a solvent, suchas paint thinner or benzine. Thiswill cause deterioration of thewiper blades.

. When you wish to raise thepassenger-side wiper arm, firstraise the driver-side wiper arm.Otherwise, the passenger-sidewiper assembly and driver-sidewiper assembly will touch eachother, possibly resulting inscratches.

. While removing the wiper bladesfrom the wiper arms, do notreturn the wiper arms to theoriginal positions. Otherwise,the windshield surface may bescratched.

. When returning the raised wiperarms to the original positions,carefully return the wiper armson the windshield while support-ing them with your hands. Youshould not return the wiper armsto the windshield only by thereturn spring. Otherwise, the wi-per arms may be deformed and/or the windshield surface may bescratched.

. Return the passenger-side wiperarm to its original position beforereturning the driver-side wiperarm to its original position.Otherwise, the passenger-sidewiper assembly and driver-sidewiper assembly will touch eachother, possibly resulting inscratches.

If you cannot eliminate the streaking evenafter following this method, replace thewiper blades using the following proce-dures. Be sure to use genuine SUBARUwiper blade rubbers as replacements.


– CONTINUED –

11


Black plate (370,1)



& Windshield wiper blade as-sembly

1. Raise the windshield wiper arm on thedriver’s side.2. Next, raise the windshield wiper armon the passenger’s side.

1) Stopper

3. Remove the wiper blade assembly byholding its pivot area and pushing it in thedirection shown by the arrow while de-pressing the wiper blade stopper.4. Install the wiper blade assembly to thewiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.5. Lower the windshield wiper arm on thepassenger’s side slowly while supportingit with your hands.6. Next, lower the windshield wiper armon the driver’s side slowly while support-

ing it with your hands.

& Windshield wiper blade rub-ber

1) Metal support

1. Grasp the locked end of the bladerubber assembly and pull it firmly until thestoppers on the rubber are free of themetal support.

1) Metal spines

2. If the new blade rubber is not providedwith two metal spines, remove the metalspines from the old blade rubber andinstall them in the new blade rubber.

CAUTION

Be sure to install each metal spineso as to fit its groove completely onthe center ridge of the blade rubber.Doing otherwise may result in dis-location and breakage of the spineduring wiper operation.


Black plate (371,1)


3. Align the claws of the metal supportwith the grooves in the rubber and slidethe blade rubber assembly into the metalsupport until it locks.

1) Stopper

4. Be sure to position the claws at the

end of the metal support between thestoppers on the rubber as shown. If therubber is not retained properly, the wiperblade may scratch the windshield.

& Rear window wiper bladeassembly

1. Raise the wiper arm off the rearwindow.

2. Turn the wiper blade assembly coun-terclockwise.

3. Pull the wiper blade assembly towardyou to remove it from the wiper arm.

& Rear window wiper bladerubber


– CONTINUED –

11


Black plate (372,1)



1. Pull out the end of the blade rubberassembly to unlock it from the plasticsupport.

2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out ofthe plastic support.

1) Metal spines

3. If the new blade rubber is not providedwith two metal spines, remove the metalspines from the old blade rubber andinstall them in the new blade rubber.

4. Align the claws of the plastic supportwith the grooves in the blade rubberassembly, then slide the blade rubberassembly into place.

Securely retain both ends of the rubberwith the stoppers on the plastic supportends. If the rubber is not retained properly,the wiper may scratch the rear windowglass.5. Install the wiper blade assembly to thewiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.6. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowlylower it in position.


Black plate (373,1)


Battery

WARNING

. Before beginning work on or nearany battery, be sure to extinguishall cigarettes, matches, and light-ers. Never expose a battery to anopen flame or electric sparks.Batteries give off a gas which ishighly flammable and explosive.

. For safety, in case an explosiondoes occur, wear eye protectionor shield your eyes when work-ing near any battery. Never leanover a battery.

. Do not let battery fluid contacteyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be-cause battery fluid is a corrosiveacid. If battery fluid gets on yourskin or in your eyes, immediatelyflush the area with water thor-oughly. Seek medical help imme-diately if acid has entered theeyes.

If battery fluid is accidentallyswallowed, immediately drink alarge amount of milk or water,and seek medical attention im-mediately.

. To lessen the risk of sparks,

remove rings, metal watchbands,and other metal jewelry. Neverallow metal tools to contact thepositive battery terminal and any-thing connected to it WHILE youare at the same time in contactwith any other metallic portion ofthe vehicle because a short cir-cuit will result.

. Keep everyone including childrenaway from the battery.

. Charge the battery in a well-ventilated area.

. Battery posts, terminals, and re-lated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductiveharm. Batteries also containother chemicals known to theState of California to cause can-cer. Wash hands after handling.

CAUTION

Never use more than 10 ampereswhen charging the battery becauseit will shorten battery life.

It is unnecessary to periodically check thebattery fluid level or periodically refill with

distilled water.


11


Black plate (374,1)



Fuses

CAUTION

Never replace a fuse with one hav-ing a higher rating or with materialother than a fuse because seriousdamage or a fire could result.

The fuses are designed to melt during anoverload to prevent damage to the wiringharness and electrical equipment. Thefuses are located in two fuse boxes. Oneis located under the instrument panelbehind the fuse box cover on the driver’sseat side.

Open the lid that is located above thehood release knob and pull it toward youto remove it.

The other one is housed in the enginecompartment.

The spare fuses are stored in the mainfuse box cover in the engine compart-ment.

The fuse puller is stored in the main fusebox in the engine compartment.


Black plate (375,1)


1) Good2) Blown

If any lights, accessories or other electricalcontrols do not operate, inspect thecorresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown,replace it.1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”position and turn off all electrical acces-sories.2. Remove the cover.3. Determine which fuse may be blown.Look at the back side of each fuse boxcover and refer to “Fuses and circuits”F12-9.

4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown,replace it with a spare fuse of the samerating.6. If the same fuse blows again, thisindicates that its system has a problem.Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.

Main fuse

Main fuse box

The main fuses are designed to meltduring an overload to prevent damage tothe wiring harness and electrical equip-ment. Check the main fuses if anyelectrical component fails to operate (ex-cept the starter motor) and other fuses aregood. A melted main fuse must bereplaced. Use only replacements with thesame specified rating as the melted mainfuse. If a main fuse blows after it isreplaced, have the electrical systemchecked by your nearest SUBARU dealer.


11


Black plate (376,1)



Installation of accessories

Always consult your SUBARU dealerbefore installing fog lights or any otherelectrical equipment in your vehicle. Suchaccessories may cause the electronicsystem to malfunction if they are incor-rectly installed or if they are not suited forthe vehicle.

Replacing bulbs

WARNING

Bulbs may become very hot whileilluminated. Before replacing bulbs,turn off the bulbs and wait until thebulbs cool down. Otherwise, there isa risk of sustaining a burn injury.

CAUTION

Replace any bulb only with a newbulb of the specified wattage. Usinga bulb of different wattage couldresult in a fire. For the specifiedwattage of each bulb, refer to “Bulbchart” F12-12.

& Headlights (models with HIDheadlights)

WARNING

High-intensity-discharge (HID) bulbsare used for the low beams of theheadlights. These HID bulbs use anextremely high voltage. To avoid therisk of an electric shock that couldresult in serious injury, observe the

following precautions.

. Do not replace any headlightbulbs (both low beam and highbeam) by yourself.

. Do not remove/restore the head-light assemblies by yourself.

. Do not remove any headlight-assembly components by your-self.

For replacement, contact yourSUBARU dealer.

& Headlights (models withoutHID headlights)

CAUTION

Halogen headlight bulbs becomevery hot while in use. If you touchthe bulb surface with bare hands orgreasy gloves, fingerprints orgrease on the bulb surface willdevelop into hot spots, causing thebulb to break. If there are fingerprints or grease on the bulb surface,wipe them away with a soft clothmoistened with alcohol.


Black plate (377,1)


NOTE. If headlight aiming is required, con-sult your SUBARU dealer for properadjustment of the headlight aim.. It may be difficult to replace thebulbs. Have the bulbs replaced by yourSUBARU dealer if necessary.

! Low beam light bulbs (right-handside)

1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips onthe air intake duct, then remove the airintake duct.

2. Use a screwdriver to remove the bulbcover.

3. Disconnect the electrical connector.4. Remove the retainer spring.5. Replace the bulb, then set the retainerspring securely.

6. Reconnect the electrical connector.7. Install the bulb cover with the fixingscrews.8. Install the air intake duct with the clips.

NOTEContact your SUBARU dealer for thebulb replacement of the left-hand side.

! High beam light bulbs

Right-hand side

1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips onthe air intake duct, then remove the airintake duct (right-hand side).


– CONTINUED –

11


Black plate (378,1)



Left-hand side

2. Use a screwdriver to remove thesecured clip of the washer tank. To makeit easy to access the bulb, move thewasher tank to the horizontal direction(left-hand side).

3. Disconnect the electrical connectorfrom the bulb.4. Remove the bulb from the headlightassembly by turning it counterclockwise.5. Replace the bulb with new one. At thistime, use care not to touch the bulbsurface.6. Reconnect the electrical connector.7. To install the bulb to the headlightassembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks.8. Install the air intake duct with clips(right-hand side).9. Set the washer tank to the originalplace and secure it by clip (left-hand side).

& Parking light (right-handside)

1. Remove the bulb socket from the

headlight assembly by turning it counter-clockwise.

2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.3. Install a new bulb.4. Set the bulb socket into the headlightassembly and turn it clockwise until itlocks.



Black plate (379,1)


& Front turn signal light (right-hand side)

1. Remove the bulb socket from theheadlight assembly by turning it counter-clockwise.

2. Remove the bulb from the socket bypushing it and turning counterclockwise.3. Install a new bulb.4. Set the bulb socket into the headlightassembly and turn it clockwise until itlocks.


& Front fog lightIt may be difficult to replace the bulbs.Have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARUdealer if necessary.

& Rear combination lights

1. Remove the two covers by insertingthe tip of a flat-head screwdriver.

2. Using a Phillips screwdriver, removethe upper and lower screws. Then, slide


– CONTINUED –

11


Black plate (380,1)



the rear combination light assembly rear-ward and remove it from the vehicle.

1) Brake/tail light2) Rear turn signal light

3. Remove the bulb holder from the rearcombination light assembly by turning itcounterclockwise.4. Remove the bulb from the socket bypushing it and turning counterclockwise.5. Install a new bulb.6. Set the bulb holder into the rearcombination light assembly and turn itclockwise until it locks.

7. Reinstall the rear combination lightassembly by sliding the two-pronged partof the combination light assembly securelyto each holder of the vehicle side.8. Tighten the two mounting screws, andthen close the covers.

& Back-up light/Tail light

1. Use a flat-head screwdriver to removethe light cover from the rear gate trim.

1) Tail light2) Back-up light


Black plate (381,1)


2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwiseand remove it.3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket andreplace it with a new one.4. Install the bulb socket by turning itclockwise.5. Install the light cover on the rear gate.

& Rear gate light

1. Use a flat-head screwdriver to removethe rear gate light assembly from the reargate trim.

2. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket andreplace it with a new one.3. Install the rear gate light assembly onthe rear gate.

& License plate light

1. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver in vinyltape or cloth, insert it into the gap betweenthe license plate light assembly and therear gate.2. Carefully pry the light assembly toremove it.

3. Remove the bulb socket from thelicense plate light assembly by turning itcounterclockwise.


– CONTINUED –

11


Black plate (382,1)



4. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install anew bulb.5. Set the bulb socket into the licenseplate light assembly and turn it clockwiseuntil it locks.6. Reinstall the license plate light assem-bly to the rear gate.

& Dome light

Models with Rear Seat Entertainment

Models without Rear Seat Entertainment

1. Remove the lens by prying the edge ofthe lens with a flat-head screwdriver.

2. Turn the bulb until the flat surfaces atits ends are aligned vertically. Pull the bulbstraight downward to remove it.3. Install a new bulb.4. Reinstall the lens.


Black plate (383,1)


& Map light


2. Turn the bulb until the flat surfaces atits ends are aligned vertically. Pull the bulb

straight downward to remove it.3. Install a new bulb.4. Reinstall the lens.

& Vanity mirror light


2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.3. Install a new bulb.4. Reinstall the lens.

& Door step lightIt may be difficult to replace the bulbs.Have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARUdealer if necessary.


– CONTINUED –

11


Black plate (384,1)



& Cargo area light

1. Remove the cargo area light assemblyby prying the edge of the light with a flat-head screwdriver.2. Remove the lens from the cargo arealight assembly.

3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.4. Install a new bulb.5. Reinstall the lens to the cargo arealight assembly.6. Reinstall the cargo area light assemblyto the roof trim.


Black plate (23,1)


Specifications........................................................ 12-2Dimensions...........................................................12-2Engine ..................................................................12-2Fuel ......................................................................12-3Engine oil .............................................................12-4Front differential and rear differential gear oil.........12-6Fluids ...................................................................12-7Engine coolant ......................................................12-7Electrical system...................................................12-7

Tires..................................................................... 12-8Fuses and circuits .................................................12-9

Fuse panel located in the passengercompartment ...................................................... 12-9

Fuse panel located in the enginecompartment .....................................................12-11

Bulb chart.............................................................12-12Vehicle identification ...........................................12-15

Specifications

12


Black plate (388,1)


12-2 Specifications

Specifications

These specifications are subject to change without notice.

& Dimensionsin (mm)

Overall length 191.5 (4,865)

Overall width 73.9 (1,878)

Overall height Without roof rail 66.7 (1,695)

With roof rail 68.1 (1,730)

Wheel base 108.1 (2,745)

Tread Front 62.0 (1,575)

Rear 62.0 (1,575)

Ground clearance 8.3 (211)

& Engine

Engine model EZ36D(3.6 L, DOHC, non-turbo)

Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 6 cylinder, 4 stroke gasoline engine

Displacement cc (cu-in) 3,630 (221.5)

Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.62 6 3.58 (92.0 6 91.0)

Compression ratio 10.5 : 1

Firing order 1 – 6 – 3 – 2 – 5 – 4


Black plate (389,1)


& Fuel

Fuel requirement Fuel tank capacity

Unleaded gasoline with 87 AKI or higher 16.9 US gal (64 liters, 14.1 Imp gal)

For more details, refer to “Fuel” F7-2.

Specifications 12-3

– CONTINUED –

12


Black plate (390,1)


12-4 Specifications

& Engine oilFor the checking, adding and replacing procedure or other details, refer to “Engine oil” F11-7.

NOTEThe procedure for changing the engine oil and oil filter should be performed by a properly-trained expert. It is recommendedthat you have this service performed by your SUBARU dealer.

! Approved engine oil

Always use the SUBARU approved engine oil. For further details, please contact your SUBARU dealer.If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative engine oil described on the next page.

! Alternative engine oil

If the SUBARU approved oil is unavailable, the following alternative oil can be used.

NOTE. Each quantity indicated is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on thetemperature and other factors.. In choosing an oil, you want the proper quality and viscosity, as well as one that will enhance fuel economy. Oils of lowerviscosity provide better fuel economy. However, in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is required to properly lubricate theengine. The following table lists the recommended viscosities and applicable temperatures.. When adding oil, different brands may be used together as long as they are the same API classification and SAE viscosityas those recommended by SUBARU.


Black plate (391,1)


Oil grade SAE viscosity No. andapplicable temperature Engine oil capacity

API classification SM or SN withthe words“ENERGY CONSERVING” or“RESOURCE CONSERVING”

or

ILSAC GF-4 or GF-5, which canbe identified with the ILSACcertification mark (Starburstmark)

Your vehicle is designed to use 5W-30conventional motor oil, however 5W-30synthetic may be used for optimumengine performance.

If you do choose to use synthetic oil,we recommend that you continue usingsynthetic for the life of your vehicle.

– Adding the oil from L to F level:1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)

– Changing the oil and oil filter:6.9 US qt (6.5 liters, 5.7 Imp qt)

Specifications 12-5

– CONTINUED –

12


Black plate (392,1)


12-6 Specifications

& Front differential and rear differential gear oil

Oil grade API classification GL-5

SAE viscosity No. and applicabletemperature

Oil capacity*1– Remarks*2

Front differential gear oil 1.5 US qt (1.4 liters, 1.2 Imp qt) “Front differential gear oil” F11-15

Rear differential gear oil 0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt) “Rear differential gear oil” F11-16

*1: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and otherfactors. After refilling the gearbox with oil, the oil level should be checked.*2: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.


Black plate (393,1)


& Fluids

Fluid Fluid type*1 Fluid capacity*2 Remarks*3

Automatic transmission fluid · SUBARU ATF· IDEMITSU ATF HP 10.4 US qt (9.8 liters, 8.6 Imp qt) “Automatic transmission fluid” F11-

14

Power steering fluid

· SUBARU ATF· IDEMITSU ATF HP· “Dexron III” Type AutomaticTransmission Fluid

0.95 US qt (0.9 liters, 0.79 Imp qt) · “Power steering” F7-18· “Power steering fluid” F11-16

Brake fluid FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4brake fluid – “Brake fluid” F11-17

*1: Use one of the indicated types of fluid.*2: The indicated fluid quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and otherfactors.*3: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.

& Engine coolant

Coolant type Coolant capacity

SUBARU Super Coolant 8.0 US qt (7.6 liters, 6.7 Imp qt)

The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and otherfactors. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to “Cooling system” F11-10.

& Electrical system

Battery type and capacity (5HR) 75D23L (12V-52AH)

Alternator 12V-130A

Spark plugs SILFR6C11 (NGK)

Specifications 12-7

– CONTINUED –

12


Black plate (394,1)


12-8 Specifications

& Tires

Tire size P255/55R18 104H 255/55R18 105H

Wheel size 18 6 8JJ

Pressure Front 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)

Rear 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)

Temporary spare tire Size T165/80R17

Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)

Wheel nut tightening torque Aluminum wheels (silver-colored) 89 lbf·ft (120 N·m, 12 kgf·m)*1*3

Chrome-finished wheels 111 lbf·ft (150 N·m, 15 kgf·m)*2*3

Temporary spare tire wheel 89 lbf·ft (120 N·m, 12 kgf·m)*1*3

*1: This torque is equivalent to applying the following load at the end of the wheel nut wrench.When you use a wheel nut wrench of the 10.8-inch (275 mm) length: Approximately 96 to 115 lbf (43 to 52 kgf)When you use a wheel nut wrench of the 13.2-inch (335 mm) length: Approximately 73 to 87 lbf (33 to 40 kgf)If you have tightened the wheel nuts by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible.

*2: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 87 to 109 lbf (40 to 49 kgf) at the end of the wheel nut wrench with a length of 13.2 inches (335mm). If you have tightened the wheel nuts by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible.

*3: For information about the length of the wheel nut wrench and the wheel nut tightening procedure, refer to “Changing a flat tire” F9-6.


Black plate (395,1)


Fuses and circuits

& Fuse panel located in the passenger compartment

Fusepanel

Fuserating Circuit

1 20A . Trailer hitch connector

2 Empty

3 15A . Door locking

4 7.5A . Front wiper deicer relay. Moonroof

5 7.5A . Combination meter

6 7.5A . Remote control rearview mirrors

. Seat heater relay

7 15A . Combination meter. Integrated unit

8 15A . Stop light

9 20A . Mirror heater. Front wiper deicer

10 7.5A . Power supply (battery)

11 7.5A . Turn signal unit

12 15A . Automatic transmissionunit

. SRS airbag system(sub)

. Engine control unit

. Integrated unit

Specifications 12-9

– CONTINUED –

12


Black plate (396,1)


12-10 Specifications

Fusepanel

Fuserating Circuit

13 20A . Cargo socket

14 15A . Position light. Tail light. Rear combination light

15 Empty

16 10A . Illumination

17 15A . Seat heaters

18 10A . Back-up light

19 7.5A . Headlight right side re-lay

20 Empty

21 7.5A . Starter relay

22 15A . Air conditioner. Rear window defogger

relay coil

23 15A . Rear wiper. Rear window washer

24 15A . Audio unit

25 15A . SRS airbag system(main)

26 7.5A . Power window relay

27 15A . Rear blower fan

Fusepanel

Fuserating Circuit

28 15A . Rear blower fan

29 15A . Fog light

30 30A . Front wiper

31 7.5A . Auto air conditioner unit. Integrated unit

32 7.5A . Headlight left side relay

33 7.5A . Vehicle Dynamics Con-trol unit


Black plate (397,1)


& Fuse panel located in the engine compartmentFusepanel

Fuserating Circuit

1 30A . Vehicle Dynamics Con-trol unit

2 25A . Main fan (cooling fan)

3 25A . Main fan (cooling fan)

4 20A . Console socket

5 15A . Headlight (right side)

6 15A . Headlight (left side)

7 20A . Backup

8 15A . Horn

9 25A . Rear window defogger

10 15A . Fuel pump

11 15A . Automatic transmissioncontrol unit

12 7.5A . Engine control unit

13 15A . Turn and hazard warningflasher

14 20A . Parking switch

15 7.5A . Alternator

Specifications 12-11

12


Black plate (398,1)



Bulb chart

NOTELights A and B are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.


Black plate (399,1)


Wattage Bulb No.

1) High beam headlight 12V-65W HB3

2) Low beam headlight

Models with HID light 12V-35W D1S

Models without HID light 12V-55W H7

3) Front turn signal/Parking light 12V-28/8W 2357NA

4) Parking/Front side marker light 12V-5W 168(W5W)

5) Map light 12V-8W –

6) Dome light

Models with Rear Seat Entertainment 12V-5W –

Models without Rear Seat Entertainment 12V-8W –

7) Door step light 12V-3W –

8) Vanity mirror light 12V-3W

9) Fog light 12V-55W H3

10) Cargo area light 12V-13W 912

11) Tail light 12V-5W 168(W5W)

12) Brake/tail light 12V-27/8W 1157(W27/8W)

13) Rear turn signal light 12V-27W 1156(W27W)

14) Back-up light 12V-16W 921(W16W)

15) Rear gate light 12V-5W (W5W)

16) License plate light 12V-5W 168(W5W)

A) Side turn signal light – –

B) High mount stop light – –

WARNING

. Bulbs may become very hot whileilluminated. Before replacingbulbs, turn off the bulbs and waituntil the bulbs cool down. Other-wise, there is a risk of sustaininga burn injury.

. For models with HID low beamheadlights, observe the followingprecautions. Not doing so carriesthe risk of an electric shock thatcould result in serious injurybecause the HID bulbs use anextremely high voltage.

– Do not replace any headlightbulbs (both low beam andhigh beam) by yourself.

– Do not remove/restore theheadlight assemblies by your-self.

– Do not remove any headlight-assembly components byyourself.

For replacement, contact yourSUBARU dealer.


– CONTINUED –

12


Black plate (400,1)



CAUTION

Replace any bulb only with a newbulb of the specified wattage. Usinga bulb of different wattage couldresult in a fire.


Black plate (401,1)


Vehicle identification 1) Vehicle identification number2) Certification and bar code label3) Tire inflation pressure label4) Vehicle identification number plate5) Model number label6) Emission control label7) Fuel label8) Air conditioner label


12


Black plate (2,1)


— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —


Black plate (25,1)


For U.S.A. ........................................................... 13-2Tire information.................................................. 13-2

Tire labeling ....................................................... 13-2Recommended tire inflation pressure.................. 13-4Glossary of tire terminology ............................... 13-5Tire care – maintenance and safety practices...... 13-9Vehicle load limit – how to determine................ 13-10Determining compatibility of tire and vehicleload capacities ............................................... 13-13

Adverse safety consequences of overloadingon handling and stopping and on tires ........... 13-13

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit......... 13-13Uniform tire quality grading standards .......... 13-14

Treadwear ....................................................... 13-14Traction AA, A, B, C......................................... 13-14Temperature A, B, C......................................... 13-15

Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.) ................... 13-15

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

13


Black plate (404,1)


13-2 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

For U.S.A.

The following information has beencompiled according to Code ofFederal Regulations “Title 49, Part575”.

Tire information

& Tire labelingMany markings (e.g. Tire size, TireIdentification Number or TIN) areplaced on the sidewall of a tire bytire manufacturers. These markingscan provide you with useful infor-mation on the tire.

! Tire size

Your vehicle comes equipped withP-Metric tire size. It is important tounderstand the sizing system inselecting the proper tire for yourvehicle. Here is a brief review of thetire sizing system with a breakdownof its individual elements.

! P Metric

With the P-Metric system, SectionWidth is measured in millimeters.To convert millimeters into inches,divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio(Section Height divided by SectionWidth) helps provide more dimen-sional information about the tiresize.

Example:

(1) P = Certain tire type used onlight duty vehicles such as passen-ger cars(2) Section Width in millimeters(3) Aspect Ratio (= section height7 section width).(4) R = Radial Construction(5) Rim diameter in inches

! Load and Speed Rating Descrip-tions

The load and speed rating descrip-tions will appear following the sizedesignation.They provide two important factsabout the tire. First, the numberdesignation is its load index. Sec-ond, the letter designation indicatesthe tire’s speed rating.


Black plate (405,1)


Example:

(6) Load Index: A numerical codewhich specifies the maximum loada tire can carry at the speedindicated by its speed symbol, atmaximum inflation pressure.For example, “104” means 1,984lbs (900 kg), “100” means 1,764 lbs(800 kg), “90”means 1,323 lbs (600kg).

WARNING

Load indices apply only to thetire, not to the vehicle. Puttinga load rated tire on any vehicledoes not mean the vehicle canbe loaded up to the tire’s ratedload.

(7) Speed Rating: An alphabeticalsystem describing a tire’s capabilityto travel at established and prede-termined speeds.For example, “H” means 130 mph

(210 km/h).

WARNING

. Speed ratings apply only tothe tire, not to the vehicle.Putting a speed rated tire onany vehicle does not meanthe vehicle can be operatedat the tire’s rated speed.

. The speed rating is void ifthe tires are worn out, da-maged, repaired, retreaded,or otherwise altered fromtheir original condition. Ift ires are repaired, re-treaded, or otherwise al-tered, they may not be sui-table for original equipmenttire designed loads andspeeds.

! Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Tire Identification Number (TIN) ismarked on the intended outboardsidewall. The TIN is composed offour groups. Here is a brief reviewof the TIN with a breakdown of its

individual elements.

(1) Manufacturer’s IdentificationMark(2) Tire Size(3) Tire Type Code(4) Date of ManufactureThe first two figures identify theweek, starting with “01” to representthe first full week of the calendaryear; the second two figures repre-sent the year. For example, 0101means the 1st week of 2001.! Other markings

The following makings are alsoplaced on the sidewall.

! Maximum permissible inflationpressure

The maximum cold inflation pres-sure to which this tire may beinflated. For example, “300 kPa(44 PSI) MAX. PRESS”.

Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-3

– CONTINUED –

13


Black plate (406,1)



! Maximum load rating

The load rating at the maximumpermissible weight load for this tire.For example, “MAX. LOAD 730 kg(1609 LBS) @ 300 kPa (44 PSI)MAX. PRESS.”

WARNING

Maximum load rating appliesonly to the tire, not to thevehicle. Putting a load ratedtire on any vehicle does notmean the vehicle can beloaded up to the tire’s ratedload.

! Construction type

Applicable construction of this tire.For example, “TUBELESS STEELBELTED RADIAL”

! Construction

The generic name of each cordmaterial used in the plies (bothsidewall and tread area) of this tire.For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2

STEEL + 2 POLYESTER + 1NYLON SIDEWALL 2 POLYE-STER”

! Uniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG)

For details, refer to “Uniform tirequality grading standards” F13-14.

& Recommended tire inflationpressure

! Recommended cold tire infla-tion pressure

For the recommended cold tireinflation pressure for your vehicle’stires, refer to “Tires” F12-8.! Vehicle placard

The vehicle placard is affixed to thedriver’s side B-pillar.


Black plate (407,1)


Example:

The vehicle placard shows originaltire size, recommended cold tireinflation pressure on each tire atmaximum loaded vehicle weight,seating capacity and loading infor-mation.! Adverse safety consequences

of under-inflation

Driving at high speeds with exces-sively low tire pressures can causethe tires to flex severely and torapidly become hot. A sharp in-crease in temperature could causetread separation, and failure of thetire(s). Possible resulting loss of

vehicle control could lead to anaccident.! Measuring and adjusting air

pressure to achieve proper in-flation

Check and, if necessary, adjust thepressure of each tire (including thespare) at least once a month andbefore any long journey. Check thetire pressures when the tires arecold. Use a pressure gauge toadjust the tire pressures to thespecific values. Driving even ashort distance warms up the tiresand increases the tire pressures.Also, the tire pressures are affectedby the outside temperature. It isbest to check tire pressure out-doors before driving the vehicle.When a tire becomes warm, the airinside it expands, causing the tirepressure to increase. Be careful notto mistakenly release air from awarm tire to reduce its pressure.

& Glossary of tire terminology. Accessory weightThe combined weight (in excess ofthose standard items which may bereplaced) of automatic transmis-sion, power steering, power brakes,power windows, power seats, radio,and heater, to the extent that theseitems are available as factory-in-stalled equipment (whether in-stalled or not).. BeadThe part of the tire that is made ofsteel wires, wrapped or reinforcedby ply cords and that is shaped to fitthe rim.. Bead separationA breakdown of the bond betweencomponents in the bead.. Bias ply tireA pneumatic tire in which the plycords that extend to the beads arelaid at alternate angles substantiallyless than 90 degrees to the center-line of the tread.. CarcassThe tire structure, except tread and


– CONTINUED –

13


Black plate (408,1)



sidewall rubber which, when in-flated, bears the load.. ChunkingThe breaking away of pieces of thetread or sidewall.. Cold tire pressureThe pressure in a tire that has beendriven less than 1 mile or has beenstanding for three hours or more.. CordThe strands forming the plies in thetire.. Cord separationThe parting of cords from adjacentrubber compounds.. CrackingAny parting within the tread, side-wall, or inner liner of the tireextending to cord material.. Curb weightThe weight of a motor vehicle withstandard equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil andcoolant, and if so equipped, airconditioning and additional weightoptional engine.

. Extra load tireA tire designed to operate at higherloads and higher inflation pressurethan the corresponding standardtire.. GrooveThe space between two adjacenttread ribs.. InnerlinerThe layer(s) forming the inside sur-face of a tubeless tire that containsthe inflating medium within the tire.. Innerliner separationThe parting of the innerliner fromcord material in the carcass.. Intended outboard sidewall

(1) The sidewall that contains awhitewall, bears white letteringor bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding thatis higher or deeper than thesame molding on the other side-wall of the tire, or(2) The outward facing sidewallof an asymmetrical tire that hasa particular side that must al-ways face outward when mount-

ing on a vehicle.. Light truck (LT) tireA tire designated by its manufac-turer as primarily intended for useon lightweight trucks or multipur-pose passenger vehicles.. Load ratingThe maximum load that a tire israted to carry for a given inflationpressure.. Maximum inflation pressureThe maximum cold inflation pres-sure to which a tire may be inflated.. Maximum load ratingThe load rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.. Maximum loaded vehicle weightThe sum of:

(a) Curb weight(b) Accessory weight(c) Vehicle capacity weight(d) Production options weight

. Maximum permissible inflationpressureThe maximum cold inflation pres-sure to which a tire may be inflated.


Black plate (409,1)


. Measuring rimThe rim on which a tire is fitted forphysical dimension requirements.. Normal occupant weight150 lbs (68 kg) times the number ofoccupants specified in the secondcolumn of Table 1 that is appendedto the end of this section.. Occupant distributionDistribution of occupants in a vehi-cle as specified in the third columnof Table 1 that is appended to theend of this section.. Open spliceAny parting at any junction of tread,sidewall, or innerliner that extendsto cord material.. Outer diameterThe overall diameter of an inflatednew tire.. Overall widthThe linear distance between theexteriors of the sidewalls of aninflated tire, including elevationsdue to labeling, decorations, orprotective bands or ribs.

. Passenger car tireA tire intended for use on passen-ger cars, multipurpose passengervehicles, and trucks, that have agross vehicle weight rating (GVWR)of 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) or less.. PlyA layer of rubber-coated parallelcords.. Ply separationA parting of rubber compoundbetween adjacent plies.. Pneumatic tireA mechanical device made of rub-ber, chemicals, fabric and steel orother mater ia ls , that , whenmounted on an automotive wheel,provides the traction and containsthe gas or fluid that sustains theload.. Production options weightThe combined weight of thoseinstalled regular production optionsweighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) inexcess of those standard itemswhich they replace, not previouslyconsidered in curb weight or acces-

sory weight, including heavy dutybrakes, ride levelers, roof rack,heavy duty battery, and specialtrim.. Radial ply tireA pneumatic tire in which the plycords that extend to the beads arelaid at substantially 90 degrees tothe centerline of the tread.. Recommended inflation pres-sureThe cold inflation pressure recom-mended by a vehicle manufacturer.. Reinforced tireA tire designed to operate at higherloads and at higher inflation pres-sures than the corresponding stan-dard tire.. RimA metal support for a tire or a tireand tube assembly upon which thetire beads are seated.. Rim diameterNominal diameter of the bead seat.. Rim size designationRim diameter and width.


– CONTINUED –

13


Black plate (410,1)



. Rim type designationThe industry of manufacturer’s des-ignation for a rim by style or code.. Rim widthNominal distance between rimflanges.. Section widthThe linear distance between theexteriors of the sidewalls of aninflated tire, excluding elevationsdue to labeling, decoration, orprotective bands.. SidewallThat portion of a tire between thetread and bead.. Sidewall separationThe parting of the rubber com-pound from the cord material inthe sidewall.. Test rimThe rim on which a tire is fitted fortesting, and it may be any rim listedas appropriate for use with that tire.. TreadThat portion of a tire that comesinto contact with the road.

. Tread ribA tread section running circumfer-entially around a tire.. Tread separationPulling away of the tread from thetire carcass.. Treadwear indicators (TWI)The projections within the principalgrooves designed to give a visualindication of the degrees of wear ofthe tread.. Vehicle capacity weightThe rated cargo and luggage loadplus 150 lbs (68 kg) times thevehicle’s designated seating capa-city.. Vehicle maximum load on thetireLoad on an individual tire that isdetermined by distributing to eachaxle its share of the maximumloaded vehicle weight and dividingby 2.. Vehicle normal load on the tireLoad on an individual tire that isdetermined by distributing to eachaxle its share of the curb weight,

accessory weight, and normal oc-cupant weight (distributed in accor-dance with Table 1 that is ap-pended to the end of this section)and dividing by 2.. Wheel-holding fixtureThe fixture used to hold the wheeland tire assembly securely duringtesting.


Black plate (411,1)


Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load forvarious designated seating capacities

Designated seatingcapacity, number of

occupants

Vehicle normal load,number of occupants

Occupant distribution in anormally loaded vehicle

2 through 4 2 2 in front.

5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in secondseat.

11 through 15 52 in front, 1 in secondseat, 1 in third seat, 1 infourth seat.

16 through 22 72 in front, 2 in secondseat, 2 in third seat, 1 infourth seat.

& Tire care – maintenance andsafety practices

. Check on a daily basis that thetires are free from serious damage,nails, and stones. At the same time,check the tires for abnormal wear.. Inspect the tire tread regularlyand replace the tires before theirtread wear indicators become visi-ble. When a tire’s tread wearindicator becomes visible, the tireis worn beyond the acceptable limitand must be replaced immediately.With a tire in this condition, drivingat even low speeds in wet weathercan cause the vehicle to hydro-plane. Possible resulting loss ofvehicle control can lead to anaccident.


– CONTINUED –

13


Black plate (412,1)



. To maximize the life of each tireand ensure that the tires wearuniformly, it is best to rotate thetires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).For information about the tire rota-tion order, refer to “Tire rotation”F11-26. Replace any damaged orunevenly worn tires at the time ofrotation. After tire rotation, adjustthe tire pressures and make surethe wheel nuts are correctly tigh-tened. For information about thetightening torque and tighteningsequence for the wheel nuts, referto “Flat tires” F9-6.

& Vehicle load limit – how todetermine

The load capacity of your vehicle isdetermined by weight, not by avail-able cargo space. The load limit ofyour vehicle is shown on thevehicle placard attached to thedriver’s side B-pillar. Locate thestatement “The combined weightof occupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”

on your vehicle’s placard.The vehicle placard also showsseating capacity of your vehicle.The total load capacity includes thetotal weight of driver and all pas-sengers and their belongings, anycargo, any optional equipment suchas a trailer hitch, roof rack or bikecarrier, etc., and the tongue load ofa trailer. Therefore cargo capacitycan be calculated by the followingmethod.Cargo capacity = Load limit − (totalweight of occupants + total weightof optional equipment + tongueload of a trailer (if applicable))

For information about vehicle load-ing, refer to “Loading your vehicle”F8-12.

For information about towing capa-city and weight limits, refer to“Trailer towing” F8-21.

! Calculating total and load ca-pacities varying seating con-figurations

Calculate the available load capa-city as shown in the followingexamples.

Example 1A

Vehicle capacity weight of thevehicle is 1,157 lbs (525 kg), whichis indicated on the vehicle placardwith the statement “The combinedweight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed 525 kg or1,157 lbs”.


Black plate (413,1)


For example, if the vehicle has oneoccupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg)plus cargo weighing 882 lbs (400kg).1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-pacity by subtracting the totalweight from the vehicle capacityweight of 1,157 lbs (525 kg).

3. The result of step 2 shows that afurther 121 lbs (55 kg) of cargo canbe carried.

Example 1B

For example, if a person weighing176 lbs (80 kg) now enters thesame vehicle (bringing the numberof occupants to two), the calcula-tions are as follows.1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-pacity.

3. The total weight now exceedsthe capacity weight by 55 lbs (25kg), so the cargo weight must bereduced by 55 lbs (25 kg) or more.

Example 2A

Vehicle capacity weight of the


– CONTINUED –

13


Black plate (414,1)



vehicle is 1,157 lbs (525 kg), whichis indicated on the vehicle placardwith the statement “The combinedweight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed 525 kg or1,157 lbs”.

For example, the vehicle has oneoccupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg)plus cargo weighing 705 lbs (320kg). In addition, the vehicle is fittedwith a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs(10 kg), to which is attached atrailer weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg).10% of the trailer weight is appliedto the trailer tongue (i.e. Tongueload = 176 lbs (80 kg)).1. Calculate the total weight.


3. The result of step 2 shows that afurther 88 lbs (40 kg) of cargo canbe carried.

Example 2B

For example, if a person weighing143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing

40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the samevehicle (bringing the number ofoccupants to three), and a childrestraint system weighing 11 lbs (5kg) is installed in the vehicle for thechild to use, the calculations are asfollows.1. Calculate the total weight.



Black plate (415,1)


3. The total weight now exceedsthe capacity weight by 105 lbs (48kg), so the cargo weight must bereduced by 105 lbs (48 kg) or more.

& Determining compatibility oftire and vehicle load capaci-ties

The sum of four tires’ maximumload ratings must exceed the max-imum loaded vehicle weight(“GVWR”). In addition, sum of themaximum load ratings of two fronttires and of two rear tires mustexceed each axle’s maximumloaded capacity (“GAWR”). Originalequipment tires are designed tofulfill those conditions.The maximum loaded vehicleweight is referred to Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR). And eachaxle’s maximum loaded capacity isreferred to Gross Axle Weight Rat-ing (GAWR). The GVWR and eachaxle’s GAWR are shown on thevehicle certification label affixed tothe driver’s door.The GVWR and front and rearGAWRs are determined by not onlythe maximum load rating of tires butalso loaded capacities of the vehi-cle’s suspension, axles and otherparts of the body.Therefore, this means that thevehicle cannot necessarily beloaded up to the tire’s maximumload rating on the tire sidewall.

& Adverse safety conse-quences of overloading onhandling and stopping andon tires

Overloading could affect vehiclehandling, stopping distance, vehicleand tire as shown in the following.This could lead to an accident andpossibly result in severe personal

injury.. Vehicle stability will deteriorate.. Heavy and/or high-mountedloads could increase the risk ofrollover.. Stopping distance will increase.. Brakes could overheat and fail.. Suspension, bearings, axles andother parts of the body could breakor experience accelerated wearthat will shorten vehicle life.. Tires could fail.. Tread separation could occur.. Tire could separate from its rim.

& Steps for Determining Cor-rect Load Limit

1. Locate the statement “The com-bined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’splacard.2. Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.3. Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from


– CONTINUED –

13


Black plate (416,1)



XXX kg or XXX lbs.4. The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. For exam-ple, if the “XXX” amount equals1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will befive- 150 lbs (68 kg) passengers inyour vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage load capa-city is 650 lbs. (1,400 − 750 (5 6150) = 650 lbs).5. Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargoand luggage load capacity calcu-lated in Step 4.6. If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer will betransferred to your vehicle. Consultthis manual to determine how thisreduces the available cargo andluggage load capacity of your ve-hicle.

Uniform tire quality gradingstandards

This information indicates the rela-tive performance of passenger cartires in the area of treadwear,traction, and temperature resis-tance. This is to aid the consumerin making an informed choice in thepurchase of tires.Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewall be-tween tread shoulder and maxi-mum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tem-perature A

The quality grades apply to newpneumatic tires for use on passen-ger cars. However, they do notapply to deep tread, winter typesnow tires, space-saver or tempor-ary use spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of 12 inchesor less, or to some limited produc-tion tires.

All passenger car tires must con-

form to Federal Safety Require-ments in addition to these grades.

& TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under con-trolled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course.For example, a tire graded 150would wear one and one-half (1-1/2) times as well on the govern-ment course as a tire graded 100.The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditionsof their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

& Traction AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions on spe-


Black plate (417,1)


cified government test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tire markedC may have poor traction perfor-mance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned tothis tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include accel-eration, cornering, hydroplan-ing, or peak traction charac-teristics.

& Temperature A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlled con-ditions on a specified indoor labora-tory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. The

grade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passengercar tires must meet under theFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-dards No. 109. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels of perfor-mance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for thistire is established for a tirethat is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessivespeed, underinflation, or ex-cessive loading, either sepa-rately or in combination, cancause heat buildup and possi-ble tire failure.

Reporting safety defects(U.S.A.)

If you believe that your vehicle hasa defect which could cause acrash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately in-form the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA) inaddition to notifying Subaru ofAmerica, Inc.If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investiga-tion, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehi-cles, it may order a recall andremedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involvedin individual problems betweenyou, your dealer, or Subaru ofAmerica, Inc. To contact NHTSA,you may call the Vehicle SafetyHotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or writeto: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200New Jersey Avenue, SE, West


– CONTINUED –

13


Black plate (418,1)



Building, Washington, DC 20590.You can also obtain other informa-tion about motor vehicle safetyfrom http://www.safercar.gov.


Black plate (27,1)


Index

14


Black plate (2,1)


14-2 Index

AAbbreviation ................................................................... 3ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ..................................... 7-20

Warning light ................................................. 3-15, 7-21Accessories....................................................... 5-2, 11-36Accessory power outlet............................................... 6-10Active head restraint..................................................... 1-6Air cleaner element ................................................... 11-12Air conditioner

Automatic climate control system ............................... 4-5Air filtration system..................................................... 4-11Airflow ........................................................................ 4-2Airflow mode selection.................................................. 4-3Airflow selection

Automatic climate control system ......................... 4-5, 4-8Alarm system ............................................................ 2-16All-Wheel Drive warning light ....................................... 3-18Aluminum wheel ....................................................... 11-27

Cleaning ............................................................... 10-3Antenna system........................................................... 5-2Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ..................................... 7-20Arming the system ..................................................... 2-17Armrest..................................................................... 1-13AT OIL TEMP warning light ......................................... 3-13Audio

Antenna system....................................................... 5-2Auxiliary input jack ................................................. 5-28Control button........................................................ 5-26Set......................................................................... 5-3

Auto-dimming mirror/compass.............................. 3-38, 3-41Automatic climate control system ................................... 4-5

Automatic transmission ............................................... 7-12Fluid ........................................................... 11-14, 12-7MANUAL mode ...................................................... 7-16Oil temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) ............. 3-13Select lever ........................................................... 7-13Shift lock function ................................................... 7-14Shift lock release.................................................... 7-14SPORT mode ........................................................ 7-18

Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ELR) ........... 1-18Auxiliary input jack...................................................... 5-28

BBattery .................................................................... 11-33

Drainage prevention function..................................... 2-6Jump starting ......................................................... 9-11Replacement (remote keyless entry system) .............. 2-11

Booster seat .............................................................. 1-36Bottle holder ............................................................... 6-9Brake

Assist.................................................................... 7-19Booster ....................................................... 7-19, 11-18Fluid ........................................................... 11-17, 12-7Pad and lining...................................................... 11-20Parking ....................................................... 7-28, 11-20Pedal .................................................................. 11-19System.................................................................. 7-19

Brake pedalFree play............................................................. 11-19Reserve distance.................................................. 11-19

Brake system............................................................. 7-19Warning light.......................................................... 3-16


Black plate (3,1)


Braking..................................................................... 7-19Tips...................................................................... 7-19

Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings ................... 11-20Bulb

Chart .................................................................. 12-12Replacing............................................................. 11-36

CCargo area

Cover ................................................................... 6-14Light....................................................................... 6-3Tie-down hooks ..................................................... 6-16

Catalytic converter ....................................................... 8-3Center

Console .................................................................. 6-6Ventilators ............................................................... 4-4

ChangingCoolant................................................................ 11-11Flat tire ................................................................... 9-6Oil and oil filter ...................................................... 11-8

Charge warning light .................................................. 3-13CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicatorlight....................................................................... 3-12

CheckingBrake pedal free play ............................................ 11-19Brake pedal reserve distance ................................. 11-19Coolant level ........................................................ 11-11Fluid level (automatic transmission fluid) .................. 11-14Fluid level (brake fluid) .......................................... 11-17Fluid level (power steering fluid).............................. 11-16Fluid level (washer fluid) ........................................ 11-28

Oil level (engine oil) ................................................ 11-7Oil level (front differential gear oil) .......................... 11-15

Child restraint systems ................................................ 1-29Installation of a booster seat .................................... 1-36Installation with A/ELR seatbelt ................................ 1-32Lower and tether anchorages................................... 1-37Top tether anchorages ............................................ 1-40

Child safety ................................................................... 5Locks.................................................................... 2-21

ChimeKey........................................................................ 3-4Light ..................................................................... 3-27Seatbelt................................................................. 3-10

CleaningAluminum wheels ................................................... 10-3Interior .................................................................. 10-5Ventilation grille ...................................................... 4-10

Climate control systemAutomatic ............................................................... 4-5

Clock ................................................................ 3-22, 3-24Coat hook.................................................................. 6-12Compass........................................................... 3-38, 3-41Console ..................................................................... 6-6Coolant ........................................................... 11-11, 12-7Cooling system ........................................................ 11-10Corrosion protection.................................................... 10-4Cruise control ............................................................ 7-29

Indicator light ......................................................... 3-22Set indicator light.................................................... 3-22

Cup holder ................................................................. 6-8Front passenger’s.................................................... 6-8

Index 14-3


Black plate (4,1)


14-4 Index

Second-row seat...................................................... 6-9Third-row seat ......................................................... 6-9

DDaytime running light system....................................... 3-29Differential gear oil

Front ........................................................... 11-15, 12-6Rear............................................................ 11-16, 12-6

Dimensions ............................................................... 12-2Disarming the alarm system ........................................ 2-18Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ........................ 7-20Dome light ........................................................ 6-2, 11-42Door

Locks ..................................................................... 2-5Open warning light ................................................. 3-17Step light ............................................................. 11-43

Drive belts................................................................ 11-13Driving

All-Wheel Drive warning light ................................... 3-18AWD vehicles.......................................................... 8-4Car phone/cell phone .................................................. 8Drinking ..................................................................... 7Drugs ........................................................................ 7Foreign countries ..................................................... 8-4Pets .......................................................................... 8Snowy and icy roads ................................................ 8-9Tips.................................................................. 8-2, 8-4Tired or sleepy............................................................ 7Winter .................................................................... 8-8

EElectrical system ........................................................ 12-7Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system... 3-16, 7-22Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ............................. 1-18Engine

Compartment overview............................................ 11-6Coolant ....................................................... 11-11, 12-7Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ............................. 6, 8-2Hood .................................................................... 11-4Oil ................................................................ 11-7, 12-4Overheating ........................................................... 9-14Starting .................................................................. 7-7Stopping................................................................. 7-8

Exterior care .............................................................. 10-2

FFlat tires ..................................................................... 9-6Floor mat................................................................... 6-13Fluid level

Automatic transmission ......................................... 11-14Brake.................................................................. 11-17Power steering ..................................................... 11-16

Fog lightBulb.......................................................... 11-39, 12-12Indicator light ......................................................... 3-22Switch................................................................... 3-32

Folding mirror switch................................................... 3-43Front

Differential gear oil........................................ 11-15, 12-6Fog light ...................................................... 3-32, 11-39Fog light indicator light ............................................ 3-22


Black plate (5,1)


Seatbelt pretensioners ............................................ 1-27Turn signal light .................................................... 11-39

Front seats.................................................................. 1-2Active head restraint................................................. 1-6Forward and backward adjustment ............................. 1-3Head restraint adjustment ......................................... 1-5Lumbar support ....................................................... 1-7Memory function ...................................................... 1-4Power seat.............................................................. 1-3Reclining................................................................. 1-3Seat height adjustment ............................................. 1-4

Fuel ........................................................................... 7-2Economy hints......................................................... 8-2Filler lid and cap ...................................................... 7-3Gauge .................................................................... 3-8Requirements .................................................. 7-2, 12-3

Fuses ...................................................................... 11-34Main fuse............................................................. 11-35

Fuses and circuits ...................................................... 12-9

GGAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) .............................. 8-13Glove box ................................................................... 6-6GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) .......................... 8-13

HHazard warning flasher ........................................... 3-5, 9-2Head restraint adjustment

Front seat ............................................................... 1-5Second-row seat.................................................... 1-12Third-row seat ....................................................... 1-16

HeadlightBeam leveler.......................................................... 3-30Bulb replacement ................................................. 11-36Bulb wattage........................................................ 12-12Control switch ........................................................ 3-27Flasher.................................................................. 3-28Indicator light ......................................................... 3-22

HID headlights ......................................................... 11-36High beam indicator light ............................................. 3-22High/low beam change (dimmer) .................................. 3-28HomeLink® Wireless Control System ............................. 6-17Hook

Coat ..................................................................... 6-12Convenient tie-down ............................................... 6-16Shopping bag ........................................................ 6-13Towing and tie-down ............................................... 9-15

Horn ......................................................................... 3-44Hose and connections............................................... 11-10

IIgnition switch ............................................................. 3-3

Light ...................................................................... 3-4Illuminated entry ......................................................... 2-10Illumination brightness control ...................................... 3-29Immobilizer ................................................................. 2-3

Indicator light (security indicator light)................. 2-4, 3-21Indicator light

Cruise control ........................................................ 3-22Cruise control set ................................................... 3-22Front fog light......................................................... 3-22Headlight............................................................... 3-22

Index 14-5


Black plate (6,1)


14-6 Index

High beam ............................................................ 3-22Immobilizer............................................................ 3-21Security .......................................................... 2-4, 3-21Select lever/Gear position ....................................... 3-21SPORT mode........................................................ 3-21Traction control system OFF.................................... 3-19Turn signal ............................................................ 3-21Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF ................................ 3-19Vehicle Dynamics Control operation ................. 3-18, 3-19

Inside mirror .............................................................. 3-38Interior lights ............................................................... 6-2

JJack and jack handle.................................................. 9-19Jack-up point............................................................... 9-6Jump starting............................................................. 9-11

KKey ............................................................................ 2-2

Number .................................................................. 2-2Reminder chime....................................................... 3-4Replacement ........................................................... 2-4

Keyless entry system ................................................... 2-8

LLeather seat materials ................................................ 10-5License plate light ..................................................... 11-41Light

Back-up ............................................................... 11-39Back-up (Station wagon)........................................ 11-40Cargo area.................................................... 6-3, 11-44

Control switch ........................................................ 3-27Dome............................................................ 6-2, 11-42Door step ............................................................ 11-43Front fog ..................................................... 3-32, 11-39Front side marker ................................................... 3-28Ignition switch ......................................................... 3-4License plate ....................................................... 11-41Map .............................................................. 6-3, 11-43Rear combination ................................................. 11-39Rear gate ............................................................... 6-3Turn signal .................................................. 3-29, 11-39Vanity mirror .................................................. 6-5, 11-43

Loading your vehicle ................................................... 8-12Low fuel warning light ................................................. 3-17Low tire pressure warning light ..................................... 3-14Lower and tether anchorage ........................................ 1-37Lumbar support ........................................................... 1-7

MMain fuse ................................................................ 11-35Maintenance

Precautions ........................................................... 11-3Schedule ............................................................... 11-3Seatbelt................................................................. 1-26Tools..................................................................... 9-19

Malfunction indicator light (check engine warning light).... 3-12Manual

Transmission oil ..................................................... 12-6Map light ........................................................... 6-3, 11-43Maximum load limits ................................................... 8-21Meters and gauges...................................................... 3-5


Black plate (7,1)


Mirrors...................................................................... 3-38Moonroof .................................................................. 2-25Multi function display .................................................. 3-24

NNew vehicle break-in driving.......................................... 8-2

OOdometer.................................................................... 3-6Oil filter..................................................................... 11-8Oil level

Engine.................................................................. 11-7Front differential gear ............................................ 11-15Rear differential gear ............................................. 11-16

Oil pressure warning light............................................ 3-13On-road and off-road driving...................................... 9, 8-6Outside

Mirror defogger ...................................................... 3-43Mirrors.................................................................. 3-42Temperature indicator ............................................. 3-23

Overhead console........................................................ 6-8Overheating engine .................................................... 9-14

PParking

Brake ................................................................... 7-28Brake stroke......................................................... 11-20Light.................................................................... 11-38Light switch ........................................................... 3-32Tips...................................................................... 7-29

Periodic inspections ..................................................... 8-4

Petrol fuel................................................................... 7-2Power

Door locking switch.................................................. 2-7Outlets .................................................................. 6-10Outside mirrors ...................................................... 3-42Seat....................................................................... 1-3Steering ................................................................ 7-18Steering fluid................................................ 11-16, 12-7Windows ............................................................... 2-21

Precautions against vehicle modification................ 1-28, 1-72Preparing to drive ........................................................ 7-7Printed antenna........................................................... 5-2

RRear

Air conditioner......................................................... 4-9Combination lights ................................................ 11-39Differential gear oil........................................ 11-16, 12-6Gate ............................................................. 2-24, 9-18Gate light ...................................................... 6-3, 11-41Turn signal light.................................................... 11-39

Rear differentialOil temperature warning light ................................... 3-13

Rear Seat Entertainment ............................................. 5-29Rear view camera ...................................................... 6-21Rear window

Defogger button ..................................................... 3-37Wiper and washer switch......................................... 3-35Wiper blades........................................................ 11-31

RecommendedAutomatic transmission fluid..................................... 12-7

Index 14-7


Black plate (8,1)


14-8 Index

Brake fluid............................................................. 12-7Engine oil.............................................................. 12-4Front differential gear oil ......................................... 12-6Manual transmission oil .......................................... 12-6Power steering fluid................................................ 12-7Rear differential gear oil .......................................... 12-6Spark plugs........................................................... 12-7

Refueling .................................................................... 7-3Remote engine start system .......................................... 7-8Remote keyless entry system ........................................ 2-8Replacement

Brake pad and lining ............................................. 11-19Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-29

ReplacingAir cleaner element ............................................... 11-12Battery (remote keyless entry system) ...................... 2-11Lost transmitters (remote keyless entry system)......... 2-12

Replacing bulbs .............................................. 11-36, 12-12Back-up light (Station wagon) ................................. 11-40Cargo area light .................................................... 11-44Dome light ........................................................... 11-42Door step light ...................................................... 11-43Front fog light ....................................................... 11-39Front turn signal light............................................. 11-39Headlight ............................................................. 11-36License plate light ................................................. 11-41Map light.............................................................. 11-43Parking light ......................................................... 11-38Rear combination light ........................................... 11-39Rear gate light...................................................... 11-41Rear turn signal light ............................................. 11-39

Vanity mirror light.................................................. 11-43Rocking the vehicle .................................................... 8-11Roof molding and crossbar .......................................... 8-17Roof rail and crossbar................................................. 8-14

SSafety

Precautions when driving............................................. 5Symbol...................................................................... 2Warnings ................................................................... 2

SeatFabric ................................................................... 10-5Front...................................................................... 1-2Heater.................................................................... 1-7Memory function...................................................... 1-4Power .................................................................... 1-3Second-row ............................................................ 1-8Third-row............................................................... 1-13

Seatbelt................................................................. 5, 1-17Fastening .............................................................. 1-18Maintenance .......................................................... 1-26Pretensioners......................................................... 1-27Safety tips ............................................................. 1-17Warning light and chime .......................................... 3-10

Second-row seats........................................................ 1-8Armrest ................................................................. 1-13Folding down ......................................................... 1-10Forward and backward adjustment ............................ 1-8Head restraint adjustment........................................ 1-12Reclining ................................................................ 1-9


Black plate (9,1)


SecurityAlarm system ........................................................ 2-16ID plate................................................................... 2-3Immobilizer.............................................................. 2-3Indicator light................................................... 2-4, 3-21Shock sensors....................................................... 2-20

Select lever ............................................................... 7-13Position indicator ................................................... 3-21Shift lock function................................................... 7-14Shift lock release ................................................... 7-14

Shock sensors........................................................... 2-20Shopping bag hook .................................................... 6-13Snow tires........................................................ 8-10, 11-21Snowy and icy roads .................................................... 8-9Sounding a panic alarm .............................................. 2-11Spare tire.................................................................... 9-2Spark plugs...................................................... 11-13, 12-7Specifications ............................................................ 12-2Speedometer............................................................... 3-6SPORT mode............................................................ 7-18

Indicator light......................................................... 3-21SRS

Curtain airbag........................................................ 1-60Frontal airbag ........................................................ 1-49Side airbag ........................................................... 1-60

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) ... 5, 1-45SRS airbag system

Monitors................................................................ 1-71Servicing............................................................... 1-72Warning light ......................................................... 3-11

Starting the engine....................................................... 7-7

State emission testing (U.S. only) .................................. 7-5Steering wheel

Power ................................................................... 7-18Tilt ........................................................................ 3-44

Stopping the engine..................................................... 7-8Storage compartment................................................... 6-6Sun shade................................................................. 2-27Sun visors .................................................................. 6-4Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) ................ 1-45Synthetic leather upholstery ......................................... 10-5

TTachometer................................................................. 3-7Temperature gauge...................................................... 3-8Temperature warning light

AT OIL TEMP......................................................... 3-13Rear differential oil.................................................. 3-13

Temporary spare tire .................................................... 9-5Tether (child restraint system) .............................. 1-37, 1-40Third-row seats .......................................................... 1-13

Access to the third-row seat..................................... 1-14Folding down ......................................................... 1-15Head restraint adjustment........................................ 1-16

Tie-down hooks.......................................................... 9-15Tilt steering wheel....................................................... 3-44Tire................................................................. 11-21, 12-8

Chains .................................................................. 8-11Inspection............................................................ 11-22Pressures and wear.............................................. 11-23Replacement........................................................ 11-26Rotation .............................................................. 11-26

Index 14-9


Black plate (10,1)


14-10 Index

Size and pressure.................................................. 12-8Types .................................................................. 11-21

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)..... 7-27, 9-10, 11-21Warning light ......................................................... 3-14

Tires and wheels....................................................... 11-21Tools ........................................................................ 9-19Top tether anchorages ........................................ 1-37, 1-40Towing...................................................................... 9-14

All wheels on the ground ........................................ 9-17Flat-bed truck ........................................................ 9-17Hooks................................................................... 9-15Weight.................................................................. 8-21

Traction Control systemOFF indicator light.................................................. 3-19OFF switch ........................................................... 7-25

TrailerConnecting............................................................ 8-19Hitch ............................................................ 8-18, 8-24Towing.................................................................. 8-21Towing tips............................................................ 8-26

Trip meter ................................................................... 3-7Turn signal

Indicator lights ....................................................... 3-21Lever.................................................................... 3-29

UUnder-floor storage compartment ................................. 6-16

VValet mode................................................................ 2-18Vanity mirror ...................................................... 6-5, 11-43

VehicleCapacity weight...................................................... 8-12Identification ........................................................ 12-15Symbols .................................................................... 3

Vehicle Dynamics ControlOperation indicator light................................... 3-18, 3-19System.................................................................. 7-23Warning light.................................................. 3-18, 3-19

Ventilator .................................................................... 4-2

WWarning and indicator lights .......................................... 3-9Warning chimes

Seatbelt................................................................. 3-10Warning light

ABS.............................................................. 3-15, 7-21All-Wheel Drive ...................................................... 3-18AT OIL TEMP......................................................... 3-13Brake system......................................................... 3-16Charge.................................................................. 3-13CHECK ENGINE.................................................... 3-12Door open ............................................................. 3-17Low fuel ................................................................ 3-17Low tire pressure.................................................... 3-14Oil pressure ........................................................... 3-13Rear differential oil temperature................................ 3-13Seatbelt......................................................... 1-18, 3-10SRS airbag system................................................. 3-11Vehicle Dynamics Control ................................ 3-18, 3-19Windshield washer fluid........................................... 3-17

Warranties ..................................................................... 1


Black plate (11,1)


Warranties and maintenance ....................................... 8-21Washing ................................................................... 10-2Waxing and polishing ................................................. 10-3Wear indicators......................................................... 11-25Wheel

Aluminum............................................................. 11-27Balance ............................................................... 11-25Nut tightening torque .............................................. 12-8Replacement ........................................................ 11-27

Windows................................................................... 2-21Windshield

Washer fluid ......................................................... 11-28Wiper and washer switches..................................... 3-34Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-30Wiper deicer.......................................................... 3-36

WinterDriving.................................................................... 8-8Tires............................................................ 8-10, 11-21

Wiper and washer ...................................................... 3-33Wiper deicer.............................................................. 3-36

Index 14-11


Black plate (2,1)


Compass calibration zones


Black plate (3,1)


GAS STATION REFERENCE& FuelUse unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI (90RON) or higher.

& Fuel octane ratingThis octane rating is the average of the Research Octane andMotor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the AntiKnock Index (AKI). Refer to “Fuel octane rating” F7-2.

& Fuel capacity16.9 US gal (64 liters, 14.1 Imp gal)

& Engine oilUse only the following oils.. API classification SM or SN with the words “ENERGYCONSERVING” or “RESOURCE CONSERVING”. or ILSAC GF-4 or GF-5, which can be identified with theILSAC certification mark (Starburst mark)

For the complete viscosity requirements, refer to “Engine oil”F12-4.

& Engine oil capacity6.9 US qt (6.5 liters, 5.7 Imp qt)

The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline and is estimatedbased on a case when the engine oil is changed with an oilfilter. After refilling the engine with oil, the oil level should bechecked using an oil level gauge. For more details aboutmaintenance and service, refer to “Engine oil” F11-7.

& Cold tire pressureRefer to “Tires” F12-8.


2012 tribeca - dealer eprocesscdn.dealereprocess.com/.../subaru/2012-tribeca.pdf · 2015. 8....

Documents